Sd5076 breeam uk new construction 2014 technical manual issue 1 0 england by Syntegra

blank page

Terms and conditions Disclaimer This Scheme Document is the property of BRE Global Limited and is made publicly available for information purposes only. Any testing, assessment, certification or approval activity related to this Scheme Document must be conducted in accordance with BRE Global Limited’s approved processes, and such activity may only be undertaken by authorised employees, agents, and associates of the Building Research Establishment Limited and BRE Global Limited, or approved parties (“Approved Party (ies)”). Any party wishing to use or reproduce this Scheme Document to offer testing, assessment, certification or approval must apply to BRE Global Limited for training, assessment and an associated licence, in order to qualify as an Approved Party; a fee will normally be charged. BRE Global Limited will not unreasonably refuse such applications. BRE Global Limited accepts no responsibility for any unauthorised use or distribution by others of this Scheme Document and may take legal action to prevent such unauthorised use or distribution.

Copyright The information and images contained in this document are the property of BRE Global Limited unless explicitly stated to the contrary, and are protected by copyright laws. The information and images contained in this document may be downloaded and printed without requiring specific permission but remains the intellectual property, technical know-how and copyrighted material of BRE Global Limited. Such material is not to be used in a derogatory manner, in a misleading context or for commercial purposes. Where such material is being issued to others, the source including the web address and copyright status must be acknowledged. We may require you to register your details before downloading certain information or documents.

Trade Marks BRE, BRE Global, BREEAM, Smartwaste and the Green Guide are all trademarks owned by either BRE or BRE Global Limited and may not be used without written permission from BRE or BRE Global Limited.

Acknowledgements BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 has been made possible through the continued efforts of many dedicated BRE Group staff members, the BRE Global Limited Governing Body, the BRE Global Limited Standing Panel of Experts, BREEAM Assessors and those who have responded to our consultation calls and meetings or provided feedback in other ways. BRE Global Limited also extends its gratitude to those who support BREEAM by continuing to specify and apply the method and contribute towardss a sustainable built environment. Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2014

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Table of contents Table of contents

List of tables

List of figures

viii

AboutBRE Global Limited

About this Scheme Document

Introduction to BREEAM

Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version

Scoring and rating BREEAM assessed buildings

The BREEAM evidential requirements

Management

Man 01 Project brief and design

Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life planning

Man 03 Responsible construction practices

Man 04 Commissioning and handover

Man 05 Aftercare

Health and Wellbeing

Hea 01 Visual comfort

Hea 02 Indoor air quality

Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories

Hea 04 Thermal comfort

Hea 05 Acoustic performance

102

Hea 06 Safety and security

116

Energy

122

Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions

124

Ene 02 Energy monitoring

136

Ene 03 External lighting

143

Ene 04 Low carbon design

146

Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage

155

Ene 06 Energy efficient transportation systems

159

Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems

163

Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment

169

Ene 09 Drying space

175

Transport

178

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Tra 01 Public transport accessibility

179

Tra 02 Proximity to amenities

186

Tra 03 Cyclist facilities

190

Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity

199

Tra 05 Travel plan

206

Water

210

Wat 01 Water consumption

211

Wat 02 Water monitoring

222

Wat 03 Water leak detection

226

Wat 04 Water efficient equipment

230

Materials

233

Mat 01 Life cycle impacts

234

Mat 02 Hard landscaping and boundary protection

250

Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials

253

Mat 04 Insulation

266

Mat 05 Designing for durability and resilience

271

Mat 06 Material efficiency

276

Waste

280

Wst 01 Construction waste management

282

Wst 02 Recycled aggregates

291

Wst 03 Operational waste

296

Wst 04 Speculative floor and ceiling finishes

302

Wst 05 Adaptation to climate change

304

Wst 06 Functional adaptability

308

Land Use and Ecology

311

LE 01 Site selection

312

LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features

316

LE 03 Minimising impact on existing site ecology

322

LE 04 Enhancing site ecology

330

LE 05 Long term impact on biodiversity

335

Pollution

340

Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants

341

Pol 02 NOx emissions

349

Pol 03 Surface water run-off

356

Pol 04 Reduction of night time light pollution

373

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

iii

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Pol 05 Reduction of noise pollution Innovation

379

Inn 01 Innovation

380

Appendices

376

383

Appendix A – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Healthcare building types

384

Appendix B – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Education buildings

386

Appendix C – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Multi-residential buildings

388

Appendix D – BREEAM UK New Construction and Shell and Core Project Assessments

389

Appendix E – Applicability of BREEAM UK New Construction Simple Building Assessments

395

Appendix F – Examples of BREEAM UK New Construction certificates

400

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

List of tables Table - 1: BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 environmental sections and assessment issues

Table - 2: List of non-domestic building types covered under BREEAM UK New Construction 2014

Table - 3: BREEAM rating benchmarks

Table - 4: Minimum BREEAM standards by rating level

Table - 5: BREEAM Environmental section weightings

Table - 6: Example BREEAM score and rating calculation

Table - 7: Minimum standards for a BREEAM 'Very Good' rating

Table - 8: BREEAM Evidence principles

Table - 9: Evidence types

Table - 10: Minimum values of average daylight factor required

Table - 11: Daylighting uniformity criteria

Table - 12: Space type and illuminance requirements - both criteria (average illuminance and minimum point illuminance) should be met.

Table - 13: View out building specific requirements.

Table - 14: Internal and external lighting building specific requirements.

Table - 15: Exemplary level values of average daylight factor required.

Table - 16: Exemplary level illuminance value requirements. Both criteria (average illuminance and minimum point illuminance) should be met.

Table - 17: Reflectance for maximum room depths and window head heights

Table - 18: VOC criteria by product type

Table - 19: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Education buildings

103

Table - 20: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Healthcare buildings

104

Table - 21: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Office buildings

105

Table - 22: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Law courts buildings

105

Table - 23: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Industrial, Retail, Prisons and Other building types

106

Table - 24: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Multi-residential buildings and 'Other residential' institutions

108

Table - 25: Ene 01 EPRNC benchmark scale

124

Table - 26: Innovation credits

125

Table - 27: Best practice energy efficient measures in laboratories

164

Table - 28: Examples of solutions deemed to comply with the criteria for the reduction of unregulated energy load from significantly contributing systems 169

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Table - 29: .Credits available for each building type relating to the public transport Accessibility Index (AI) score.180 Table - 30: Default hours of operation by building type for a typical day

184

Table - 31: Credits available for Tra02 for different building types

186

Table - 32: Cycle storage criteria for each building type

191

Table - 33: Credits available in Tra04 Maximum car parking capacity for different building types

199

Table - 34: Default occupancy rates by building type

202

Table - 35: BREEAM Credits available for percentage improvement over baseline building water consumption 212 Table - 36: Water efficient consumption levels by component type

215

Table - 37: defines for each component type the appropriate data that will need to be collected from manufacturers’ product information to complete the assessment

216

Table - 38: Elements assessed by building type

234

Table - 39: Allocation of credits by building type and Mat 01 points

235

Table - 40: The Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) type and tier ranking

242

Table - 41: Green Guide points uplift by EPD type

243

Table - 42: Building type and the use of appropriate Green Guide ratings

246

Table - 43: The number of BREEAM credits achieved is determined as follows

253

Table - 44: Location/use and material categories.

256

Table - 45: Location/use and material categories.

256

Table - 46: Green Guide rating points/element

268

Table - 47: Applicable building elements, environmental factors and material degradations effects to consider.

272

Table - 48: Construction waste resource efficiency benchmarks

282

Table - 49: Diversion from landfill benchmarks

283

Table - 50: Construction waste groups

288

Table - 51: Minimum levels (by weight and volume) of high grade aggregate specified per application (where present) that is recycledor secondary aggregate 292

Table - 52: BREEAM checklist for defining land of low ecological value

317

Table - 53: Broad habitat types (Source: Countryside Survey 2007)

323

Table - 54: Inclusive analysis of average total taxon richness by broad habitat in ‘Fields and Other Main Land Cover Parcels plots’ in Great Britain.

325

Table - 55: Additional measures for the improvement of long term biodiversity

336

Table - 56: Default system operational design life values

344

Table - 57: Average annual leakage rates for the UK

344

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Table - 58: List of some common refrigerant types with low GWP

347

Table - 59: Excess oxygen conversion factors

352

Table - 60: Definition of flood zones by country

369

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

vii

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

List of figures Figure 1: The BREEAM Certification mark

Figure 2: BREEAM assessment and certification stages and the Royal Institute of British Architects (RIBA) Outline Plan of Work 2013

Figure 3: UK New Construction and the UK Refurbishment and Fit-out schemes and the assessment options 391

viii

Figure 4: Example of Interim Certificate at Design Stage

400

Figure 5: Example of Final Certificate at Post Construction Stage

401

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

AboutBRE Global Limited BRE Global Limited (part of the BRE (Building Research Establishment) Group) is an independent third party approvals body offering certification of fire, security and sustainability products and services to an international market. BRE Global Limited’s mission is to 'Protect People, Property and the Planet'. We aim to achieve this by: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Researching and writing standards Testing and certification in the areas of fire, electronics, security and sustainability Developing world-leading sustainability assessment methods Undertaking research and consultancy for clients and regulators Promulgating standards and knowledge throughout the industry through publications and events Developing and delivering training

BRE Global Limited’s product testing and approvals are carried out by recognised experts in our world renowned testing laboratories. BRE Global Limited is custodian of a number of world-leading brands including: 1. Building Research Establishment's Environmental Assessment Method (BREEAM) - the world’s leading environmental assessment method for buildings 2. Loss Prevention Certification Board (LPCB) for approval of fire and security products and services. BRE Global Limited is a trading subsidiary of the BRE Trust, the registered research and education charity which owns the BRE Group. BRE Global Limited Bucknalls Lane Watford Hertfordshire WD25 9XX T +44 (0)333 321 8811 F +44 (0)1923 664 910 E enquiries@breglobal.com www.breglobal.com www.greenbooklive.com

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

About this Scheme Document This document is the England technical manual for the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 Scheme. It describes an environmental performance standard against which new, non-domestic buildings in this territory can be assessed and achieve a BREEAM New Construction rating. The Scheme Document and the information detailed within is intended for use by trained, qualified and licensed BREEAM UK Assessors in accordance with the procedural and operational requirements of BREEAM (as described in the BREEAM Operations Manual, SD5070) under the terms and conditions of a BREEAM UK licence. This document should be used by nonBREEAM UK Assessors for reference purposes only. The full online version of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 technical manual contains the criteria and benchmarks for all territories of the UK. Both the UK online and downloadable country-specific manuals for Scotland, Wales, Northern Ireland and England are available from www.breeam.com

Changes to this BREEAM Scheme Document This Scheme Document is subject to revision and can be re-issued from time-to-time by BRE Global Limited. A schedule of the publication date for each issue of this document is provided below. Any additions to this document that necessitates its re-issue will be highlighted throughout the text (note: deletions are not identified in the updated issue). A detailed list of all additions and deletions made to each issue is available separately. BREEAM Assessors can download this list of changes from the BREEAM Assessor's Extranet. The list of changes is also available to other parties on request; please email breeam@bre.co.uk. Scheme document

Issue number

Date of Issue

SD5076

1.0

21/05/2014

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Introduction

Introduction to BREEAM BREEAM (Building Research Establishment's Environmental Assessment Method) is the world’s first sustainability rating scheme for the built environment and has contributed much to the strong focus in the UK on sustainability in building design, construction and use. BREEAM is now an international standard that is locally adapted, operated and applied through a network of international operators, assessors and industry professionals. Through its application and use BREEAM helps clients measure and reduce the environmental impacts of their buildings and in doing so create higher value, lower risk assets. To date, BREEAM has been used to certify over 260,000 building assessments across the building life cycle and it is being applied in over 50 countries.

Aims of BREEAM To mitigate the life cycle impacts of buildings on the environment To enable buildings to be recognised according to their environmental benefits To provide a credible, environmental label for buildings To stimulate demand and create value for sustainable buildings, building products and supply chains.

Objectives of BREEAM To provide market recognition of buildings with a low environmental impact To ensure best environmental practice is incorporated in the planning, design, construction and operation of buildings and the wider built environment. To define a robust, cost effective performance standard surpassing that required by regulations. To challenge the market to provide innovative, cost effective solutions that minimise the environmental impact of buildings. To raise awareness amongst owners, occupants, designers and operators of the benefits and value of buildings with a reduced life cycle impact on the environment. To allow organisations to demonstrate progress towardss corporate environmental objectives. BREEAM is developed and operated to meet the following underlying principles: Ensure environmental quality through an accessible, holistic and balanced measure of environmental impacts. Use quantified measures for determining environmental quality. Adopt a flexible approach that encourages and rewards positive outcomes, avoiding prescribed solutions. Use robust science and best practice as the basis for quantifying and calibrating a cost effective and rigorous performance standard for defining environmental quality. Reflect the social and economic benefits of meeting the environmental objectives covered. Provide a common international framework of assessment that is tailored to meet the ‘local’ context including regulation, climate and sector. Integrate building professionals in the development and operational processes to ensure wide understanding and accessibility. Adopt third party certification to ensure independence, credibility and consistency of the label. Adopt existing industry tools, practices and other standards wherever possible to support developments in policy and technology, build on existing skills and understanding and minimise costs. Align technically and operationally with relevant international standards, including the suite of standards on the ‘Sustainability of Construction Works’ prepared by the European Committee for Standardisation Technical Committee CEN/TC 350. Engage with a representative range of stakeholders to inform ongoing development in accordance with the underlying principles and the pace of change in performance standards (accounting for policy, regulation and market capability).

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Introduction

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

The aims, objectives and principles of BREEAM are embodied within a Core Technical Standard owned and managed by BRE Global Limited. This is applied through a suite of BREEAM Schemes covering aspects of the built environment life cycle. These schemes are locally developed and operated by a number of different organisations, called National Scheme Operators (NSOs), across a range of countries. For a full list of BREEAM National Scheme Operators and Schemes visit www.breeam.com.

The UK BREEAM Schemes BRE Global Limited is the National Scheme Operator of BREEAM in the UK. We develop and operate a number of BREEAM schemes, each designed to assess the environmental performance of buildings at various stages in the life cycle, and these include: BREEAM Communities for the master-planning of a larger community of buildings BREEAM New Construction for new build, domestic and non-domestic buildings BREEAM In-Use for existing non-domestic buildings in-use BREEAM Refurbishmentfor domestic and, from summer 2014, non-domestic building fit-outs and refurbishments Independent BREEAM Assessors, trained, qualified and licensed by BRE Global Limited can undertake a BREEAM assessment using this Scheme Document and associated reporting and calculation tools. Once an assessment is complete and quality assured BRE Global Limited will issue a BREEAM certificate. The BREEAM certificate provides formal verification that the Assessor has completed an assessment of a building in accordance with the requirements of the scheme and its quality standards and procedures. A BREEAM certificate provides assurance to any interested party that a building’s BREEAM rating, at the time of certification, accurately reflects its performance against the BREEAM standard. Anyone wishing to verify the BREEAM rating of a building can do so by either checking its BREEAM certificate, which will contain the certification mark, (see below) or by searching the BREEAM buildings listings on www.greenbooklive.com. Examples of a BREEAM UK New Construction certificate can be found in Appendix F – Examples of BREEAM UK New Construction certificates.

Figure 1: The BREEAM Certification mark

Ensuring quality and consistency All BREEAM Schemes are developed and operated by National Scheme Operators in accordance with the Code for a Sustainable Built Environment. The Code for a Sustainable Built Environment is a set of strategic principles and requirements which define an integrated approach to the design, management, evaluation and certification of the environmental, social and economic impacts of the built environment.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Introduction

The Code is interpreted through the BREEAM Core Process and Technical Standards. These linked documents set out the requirements that a compliant scheme must meet in order to be affiliated with the Code. The Standards ensure that a common scientific and performance basis is used by all compliant schemes operated by National Scheme Operators, while ensuring that these are relevant to local demands, standards and practices. The Code and associated standards are developed and maintained by BRE Global Limited with direction from the BREEAM Strategy Board, under the auspices of the BRE Global Governing Board. To ensure independence, competence and impartiality, all National Scheme Operators are required to maintain scheme operations accredited to International Standards. In the UK, BRE Global Limited is accredited by the United Kingdom Accreditation Service (UKAS) to: BS EN ISO 17024 (Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons) for BREEAM Assessors. BS EN 45011 (General requirements for bodies operating product certification systems) for the complete BREEAM assessment process. BRE Global Limited is also certified to ISO 9001 for all its BREEAM related activities. As a certification body accredited by UKAS, BRE Global Limited maintains an open and accountable governance structure. The operation of BREEAM is overseen by an independent Governing Body and a Standing Panel for Peer & Market Review. The Governing Body represents stakeholder interests to ensure, amongst other things, that we at BRE Global Limited are acting independently and impartially, operating our processes correctly, and treating our customers fairly. The Standing Panel provides BRE Global Limited with access to a range of experts that can review BRE Global Limited’s standards and schemes to ensure their robustness from a scientific, technical and market perspective as well as ensuring the development of the standards and schemes is open to greater external and independent scrutiny.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Introduction

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

BREEAM UK New Construction The BREEAM UK New Construction scheme is a performance based assessment method and certification scheme for new buildings. The primary aim of BREEAM UK New Construction is to mitigate the life cycle impacts of new buildings on the environment in a robust and cost effective manner. This is achieved through integration and use of the scheme by clients and their project teams at key stages in the design and construction process. This enables the client, through the BREEAM Assessor and the BRE Global certification process, to measure, evaluate and reflect the performance of their new building against best practice in an independent and robust manner. This performance is quantified by a number of individual measures and associated criteria stretching across a range of environmental issues see Table - 1, which is ultimately expressed as a single certified BREEAM rating, i.e. the label (section 3 describes how a BREEAM rating is calculated). Table - 1: BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 environmental sections and assessment issues Management

Health and Wellbeing Project brief and design Life cycle cost and service life planning Responsible construction practices Commissioning and handover Aftercare

Energy

Visual comfort Indoor air quality Safe containment in laboratories Thermal comfort Acoustic performance Safety and security

Transport Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions Energy monitoring External lighting Low carbon design Energy efficient cold storage Energy efficient transportation systems Energy efficient laboratory systems Energy efficient equipment Drying space

Water

Materials Water consumption Water monitoring Water leak detection Water efficient equipment

Public transport accessibility Proximity to amenities Cyclist facilities Maximum car parking capacity Travel plan

Life cycle impacts Hard landscaping and boundary protection Responsible sourcing of materials Insulation Designing for durability and resilience Material efficiency

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Introduction

Waste

Land Use and Ecology Construction waste management Recycled aggregates Operational waste Speculative floor and ceiling finishes Adaptation to climate change Functional adaptability

Pollution

Site selection Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features Minimising impact on existing site ecology Enhancing site ecology Long term impact on biodiversity

Innovation Impact of refrigerants NOx emissions Surface water run-off Reduction of night time light pollution Reduction of noise pollution

Innovation

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Introduction

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

When and how to engage with the BREEAM UK New Construction scheme Timing the engagement with and use of the BREEAM UK New Construction scheme via the BREEAM Assessor is essential for ensuring seamless integration of the methodology in the new build procurement process. Without this, the ability to cost effectively optimise the building’s environmental performance and achieve the desired BREEAM rating will be compromised. Appointing a BREEAM Assessor or Accredited Professional early in the project will help in achieving the target rating without undue impacts on the flexibility of design decisions, budgets and potential solutions. Figure 2 serves to highlight the link between the BREEAM UK New Construction assessment and certification stages and the RIBA Outline Plan of Work 2013. This figure can assist clients in timing their engagement with BREEAM and the appointment of a BREEAM Assessor. Clients can view up-to date listings of licensed BREEAM UK New Construction Assessors and BREEAM Accredited Professionals at Green Book Live www.greenbooklive.com. It is important to recognise that BREEAM primarily reflects the overall performance of the building rather than just the opportunities or limitations placed on specific stakeholders involved in the procurement process. This means that the client, design team, principal contractor and BREEAM Assessor, as well as other specialist disciplines, have an important role to play throughout the procurement process, if the desired performance level is to be achieved and reflected through the certified BREEAM rating. The onus of orientating the brief towardss sustainability needs to come first and foremost from the client. To facilitate this, BRE Global recommends that clients and their project teams engage with a BREEAM Assessor and/or BREEAM Accredited Professional no later than the Preparation and Brief stage (RIBA Stage 1 or equivalent) and ideally sooner where practical. This will ensure that realistic targets are set and can be met, appropriate responsibilities can be defined and understood and low or no cost solutions to environmental impacts can be sought and applied wherever possible.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Introduction

Figure 2: BREEAM assessment and certification stages and the Royal Institute of British Architects (RIBA) Outline Plan of Work 2013

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Introduction

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

How to use the BREEAM UK New Construction Scheme This BREEAM Scheme Document is a technical document which has been created to: 1. Enable qualified and licensed BREEAM Assessors to complete BREEAM assessments and determine a rating 2. Enable BRE global Ltd to complete quality assurance reviews of a BREEAM Assessors assessment report, in accordance with the standards to which BRE Global Ltd is accredited 3. As an aid for BREEAM Accredited Professionals (AP) to undertake project team facilitation, in terms of defining, monitoring and successfully achieving the desired BREEAM rating 4. As a reference for clients and members of the project team whose proposed building is being BREEAM assessed. The scheme document is split into six parts: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Introduction Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version Scoring and rating BREEAM assessed buildings, including minimum standards The BREEAM evidential requirements Assessment criteria Appendices (A - F).

The Scope section describes the types of buildings and stages of assessment that this version of the BREEAM UK New Construction Scheme can be applied to. Appendices A to F provide additional scoping guidance for specific building and project types. The Scope section can be used by clients and BREEAM Assessors to check whether this is the correct BREEAM Scheme to use for their project. The Scoring and rating section illustrates how a building’s assessed performance is measured and rated. It outlines the BREEAM rating level benchmarks, the minimum BREEAM standards for each rating level and the BREEAM environmental section weightings. It also includes a description of the BREEAM assessment issues and ‘credits’, including BREEAM ‘Innovation credits’, and how performance against these is calculated and expressed as a BREEAM rating. Please note that, for the purpose of formal assessment and certification,the buildings actual BREEAM performance must be determined by the BREEAM Assessor using the relevant BREEAM reporting and calculation tools. The BREEAM evidential requirements section provides guidance to assessors and project teams on the various types and forms of evidence required by the BREEAM Assessor to demonstrate compliance with BREEAM criteria. This includes a description of why BREEAM requires an auditable trail of evidence, a table of general types of building information produced during a building project, and therefore typically required and used as evidence of compliance, and guidance on the differing forms of evidence that can be used and at what stages of the assessment, such as letters of commitment. The Assessment criteria section includes the 51 BREEAM assessment issues, categorised in 10 environmental sections. Each issue defines a level of performance (the assessment criteria) against which the assessed building demonstrates compliance (using appropriate project information, i.e. evidence) in order to achieve a corresponding number of available BREEAM credits. The majority of BREEAM issues and credits are tradable, meaning that a client and their project team can pick and choose which to target in order to build their BREEAM performance score and achieve the desired BREEAM rating. Several BREEAM issues have minimum standards, meaning that to achieve a particular BREEAM rating specific credits or criteria must be achieved (BREEAM’s minimum standards are outlined in the Scoring and rating BREEAM assessed buildings section). Each BREEAM issue is structured as follows: 1. Issue information: This contains the assessment issue reference, title, number of credits available1 and whether the issue forms part of BREEAM’s minimum standards. 2. Aim: This outlines the broad objective of the issue and the impact it measures/mitigates. 3. Assessment criteria: This outlines the good/best practice performance level benchmark(s) and criteria. Where the building complies with the assessment criteria, as determined by the BREEAM Assessor, the relevant number of BREEAM credits can be awarded. Some issues have Exemplary Level Criteria; where a building demonstrates that it meets Exemplary Level Criteria, a BREEAM Innovation credit can be awarded (refer to the Innovation section for more details). Up to a maximum of 10 Innovation credits are available.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Introduction 4. Checklists and tables: This section contains any checklists and tables referenced in the assessment criteria section. This can include tables of benchmarks or building type specific performance criteria. 5. Compliance notes: These notes provide additional guidance that supports the application and interpretation of the main assessment criteria, including how to assess compliance in a particular location or for a particular building or project type, e.g. shell only. 6. Methodology: This section includes a description of any methodology used to determine the number of BREEAM credits achieved for a given level of building performance. It includes, for example, calculation procedures or guidance on how non-BREEAM schemes, standards or qualifications referenced in the assessment criteria relate to those criteria. 7. Evidence: This section describes the type(s) of project information that must be provided by the design team/client and given to the BREEAM Assessor to enable verification of the building’s performance against the assessment criteria and so justify the award of the relevant number of BREEAM credits. The BREEAM evidential requirements section provides further guidance on evidential requirements. 8. Additional information: This section contains any further information relevant to the application of the assessment criteria, including any definition of terms used in the assessment issue or sources of additional information that may be of use in addressing the issue. The Appendices provide supporting information relevant to either the scope of the BREEAM UK NC 2014 scheme or its assessment criteria. 1For some assessment issues the number of credits available will vary by building type. Furthermore, some issues may not be

applicable to certain building types or buildings which do not contain a particular function or area, e.g. a laboratory.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Scope

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version The BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme can be used to assess the environmental life cycle impacts of new nondomestic buildings at the design and construction stages. ‘New Construction’ is defined as development that results in a new standalone structure, or new extension to an existing structure, which will come into operation or use for the first time upon completion of the works. This BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version is applicable to new non-domestic buildings in the United Kingdom only.

Type of buildings that can be assessed using the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version The non-domestic building types which can be assessed and rated using this scheme version are outlined in Table - 2. Additional guidance for some of the building types listed is also provided in the appendices (refer to the footnotes). Table - 2: List of non-domestic building types covered under BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 Sector

Building type

Commercial

Offices

General office buildings Offices with research and development areas (i.e. category 1 labs only)

Industrial

Industrial unit – warehouse storage/distribution Industrial unit – process/manufacturing/vehicle servicing

Retail

Shop/shopping centre Retail park/warehouse ‘Over the counter’ service provider e.g. financial, estate and employment agencies and betting offices Showroom Restaurant, café and drinking establishment Hot food takeaway

Description

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Scope

Sector

Building type

Public (non-housing)

Education1

Pre-school Schools and sixth form colleges Further education/vocational colleges Higher education institutions

Healthcare2

Teaching/specialist hospitals General acute hospitals Community and mental health hospitals GP surgeries Health centres and clinics

Prisons3

High security prison Standard secured prison Young offender institution and juvenile prisons Local prison Holding centre

Law Courts

Law courts Crown and criminal courts County courts Magistrates’ courts Civil justice centres Family courts Youth courts Combined courts

Residential institutions (long term stay)

Residential care home Sheltered accommodation Residential college/school (halls of residence) Local authority secure residential accommodation Military barracks

Multi-residential accommodation/ Supported living facility4

Description

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Scope

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Sector

Building type

Description

Other

Residential institutions (short term stay)

Hotel, hostel, boarding and guest house Secure training centre Residential training centre

Non residential institutions

Art gallery, museum Library Day centre, hall/civic/community centre Place of worship

Assembly and leisure

Cinema Theatre/music/concert hall Exhibition/conference hall Indoor or outdoor sports, fitness and recreation centre (with/without pool)

Other

Transport hub (coach/bus station and above ground rail station) Research and development (category 2 or 3 laboratories non-higher education) Crèche Fire Stations

Mixed use developments and building types Developments which consist of a number of separate buildings of differing functional types, or a single building containing a number of different functions e.g. office and retail or retail and GP surgery, will typically require an assessment and therefore BREEAM rating and certificate for each individual building or functional use within a single building. This is necessary as BREEAM defines differing criteria and benchmarks for some assessment issues according to building type, function and use. Therefore to maintain comparability and consistency of the assessment and BREEAM rating, a separate assessment score and rating are required for each building type function or use in the development, Further guidance on how to define mixed use developments for the purpose of a BREEAM assessment can be found in Guidance Note GN10 – Mixed use developments and similar buildings (or units),

BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 assessment types Within the UK New Construction scheme a number of assessment types are defined and can be used to assess and rate a new buildings performance. There are Fully fitted (all buildings except those defined as a 'simple' building) Fully fitted – 'simple' building (see Appendix E) Shell and Core (see Appendix D) Shell only (see Appendix D) The assessment criteria for these options are clearly identified in this technical manual. The assessor in collaboration with the client and design team as necessary should determine which BREEAM assessment type is relevant for their project.

Similar building types (or units) on the same site It is possible to assess and rate a number of separate but similar buildings, or individual units within a larger building development, within one BREEAM assessment report. Further guidance on this type of assessment can be found in Guidance Note GN10 – Mixed use developments and similar buildings (or units),

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Scope

Shell and core/speculative buildings Non fitted out ‘speculative’ new buildings, often referred to as shell and core buildings, can be assessed using the BREEAM UK New Construction scheme. Further details on the application of the scheme to these types of new building can be found in Appendix D – BREEAM UK New Construction and Shell and Core Project Assessments.

Simple building developments Less complex building types can be assessed using a set of ‘simple buildings’ criteria, defined within this BREEAM UK New Construction Scheme. Further details on the application of this scheme to ’simple buildings’ can be found in Appendix E – Applicability of BREEAM UK New Construction Simple Building Assessments For each individual assessment issue, guidance on ‘simple buildings’ compliance is provided in the Compliance Notes section.

Buildings types not covered under the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version Building types not listed in Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version – Table - 2: will fall into one of two categories, those where a current but separate BREEAM UK New Construction scheme technical manual exists and those which currently do not have an existing and current technical manual.

Other current BREEAM New Construction schemes Data centres: 2010 version There is a separate and current BREEAM UK New Construction scheme 2010 version and technical manual for Data Centres (SD5068); the 2010 version should be used for the assessment and certification of data centres in the UK.

Other building types not defined If a particular building type requiring assessment is not listed above or in Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version – Table - 2: , it can still be assessed using BREEAM UK New Construction. Such building types will require the development of a set of tailored assessment criteria, i.e. a BREEAM Bespoke assessment. In such instances BREEAM Assessors and clients should contact BRE Global for advice and information on how to proceed.

Building life cycle stages covered by the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version This BREEAM UK New Construction Scheme can be used to assess and rate the environmental impacts arising from a newly constructed building development (including external site areas), at the following life cycle stages: 1. New Build Design Stage (DS) - leading to an Interim BREEAM rating and certificate of assessment 2. New Build Post Construction Stage (PCS) – leading to a Final BREEAM rating and certificate of assessment

Design Stage The DS assessment and interim BREEAM rating confirms the proposed new building’s performance at the design stage of the life cycle. Assessment and ideally certification will occur prior to the beginning of operations on-site. The BREEAM rating at this stage is labeled as ‘interim’ because it does not represent the building’s final, new construction BREEAM performance. To complete an assessment at this stage the design must be advanced to a point where the relevant design information is available to enable the BREEAM Assessor to evaluate and verify the building’s performance against the criteria defined in this Scheme Document. The interim DS assessment will therefore be completed and certified at the scheme design or detailed design stages.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Scope

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Post Construction Stage (PCS) The PCS assessment and BREEAM rating confirms the final ‘as built’ performance of the building at the new construction stage of the life cycle. A final PCS assessment is completed and certified after practical completion of the building works. There are two approaches to assessment at the post construction stage: 1. A post construction review (PCR) based on a completed interim design stage assessment 2. A post construction assessment (PCA) A PCR serves to confirm that the building’s ‘as built’ performance and rating is in accordance with the assessment certified at the interim design stage. Where an interim DS assessment has not been carried out i.e. certified, and a BREEAM assessment and rating is required, a full post construction stage assessment can be conducted.

Building life cycle stages not covered by the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version The BREEAM UK New Construction scheme is not designed for, and therefore not appropriate to assess the environmental impacts of buildings at the following life cycle stages: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Existing building refurbishment and fit-out (Companion BREEAM scheme under development at the time of writing. Existing building in operation or existing unoccupied building (refer to the BREEAM In-Use scheme) Existing building de-construction (no BREEAM scheme for this life cycle stage at present) Infrastructure projects (At the time of writing, development work is underway to develop BREEAM to assess infrastructure works.)

1For schools, further and higher educational building types, see also Appendix B – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and

Education buildings. 2For healthcare building types, see also Appendix A – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Healthcare building types. 3The Prisons category includes any building type that is part of a prison establishment, including residential blocks or a hybrid of building types. 4For multi-residential building types, see also Appendix C – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Multi-residential buildings for further detail of scope

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Scope

Scoring and rating BREEAM assessed buildings BREEAM rating benchmarks There are a number of elements that determine the overall performance of a new construction project assessed using BREEAM, these are as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.

The BREEAM rating level benchmarks The minimum BREEAM standards The environmental section weightings The BREEAM assessment issues and credits

How these elements combine to produce a BREEAM rating for a new building is summarised on the following pages. This is followed by a description and example describing the methodology for calculating a rating. The BREEAM rating benchmarks for projects assessed using the 2014 version of BREEAM UK New Construction are as follows: Table - 3: BREEAM rating benchmarks BREEAM Rating

% score

Outstanding

≥ 85

Excellent

≥ 70

Very good

≥ 55

Good

≥ 45

Pass

≥ 30

Unclassified

< 30

The BREEAM rating benchmarks enable a client and all other stakeholders to compare the performance of a newly constructed building with other BREEAM rated buildings, and the typical sustainability performance of a stock of new nondomestic buildings in the UK. In this respect each BREEAM rating broadly represents performance equivalent to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Outstanding: Less than top 1% of UK new non-domestic buildings (innovator) Excellent: Top 10% of UK new non-domestic buildings (best practice) Very Good: Top 25% of UK new non-domestic buildings (advanced good practice) Good: Top 50% of UK new non-domestic buildings (intermediate good practice) Pass: Top 75% of UK new non-domestic buildings (standard good practice)

An unclassified BREEAM rating represents performance that is non-compliant with BREEAM, in terms of failing to meet either the BREEAM minimum standards of performance for key environmental issues or the overall threshold score required to achieve at least a Pass rating. .

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Scope

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Minimum standards To maintain a flexible system BREEAM adopts a ‘balanced score-card’ approach to the assessment and rating of building performance. This means that, to achieve a particular level of performance the majority of BREEAM credits can be traded, i.e. non-compliance in one area can be off-set through compliance in another to achieve the target BREEAM rating. However, to ensure that performance against fundamental environmental issues is not overlooked in pursuit of a particular rating, BREEAM sets minimum standards of performance in key areas e.g. energy, water, waste etc. It is important to bear in mind that these are minimum acceptable levels of performance and, in that respect they should not necessarily be viewed as levels that are representative of best practice for a BREEAM rating level. To achieve a particular BREEAM rating, the minimum overall percentage score must be achieved and the minimum standards, detailed in Table - 4 below, applicable to that rating level complied with. Table - 4: Minimum BREEAM standards by rating level Minimum standards by BREEAM rating level BREEAM issue

Pass

Good

Very Good

Excellent

Outstanding

Man 03: Responsible construction practices

None

One credit (Considerate construction)

Two credits (Considerate construction)

Man 04: Commissioning and handover

None

Criterion 9 (Building User Guide)

Man 5: Aftercare

None

One credit (Seasonal commissioning

One credit (Seasonal commissioning)

Ene 01: Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions

None

Five credits

Eight credits

Ene 02: Energy monitoring

None

One credit (First submetering credit)

Wat 01: Water consumption

None

One credit

Two credits

Wat 02: Water monitoring

None

Criterion 1 only

Mat 03: Responsible sourcing of materials

Criterion 1 only

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Scope

Minimum standards by BREEAM rating level BREEAM issue

Pass

Good

Very Good

Excellent

Outstanding

Wst 01: Construction waste management

None

One credit

Wst 03: Operational waste

None

One credit

LE 03: Minimising impact on existing site ecology

None

One credit

Environmental section weightings Environmental weightings are fundamental to any building environmental assessment method as they provide a means of defining, and therefore ranking, the relative impact of environmental issues. BREEAM uses an explicit weighting system derived from a combination of consensus based weightings and ranking by a panel of experts. The outputs from this exercise are then used to determine the relative value of the environmental sections used in BREEAM and their contribution to the overall BREEAM score. This weighting system is defined in greater detail within the BRE Global Core Process Standard (BES 5301) and it’s supporting procedural documents. These form part of the over-arching BREEAM Standard and the Code for a Sustainable Built Environment. The same ranking of impacts used in BREEAM underpins the scoring mechanisms in the BRE Green Guide to Specification and the BRE Environmental Profiling Method for construction materials. Table - 5 outlines the weightings for each of the nine environmental sections included in the BREEAM UK New Construction Scheme. Table - 5: BREEAM Environmental section weightings Environmental section

Weighting Fully fitted out

Shell only

Shell and core only

Management

12%

12.5%

11%

Health and Wellbeing

15%

10%

10.5%

Energy

15%

14.5%

15%

Transport

11.5%

10%

Water

7.5%

Materials

13.5%

17.5%

14.5%

Waste

8.5%

11%

9.5%

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Scope

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Environmental section

Weighting Fully fitted out

Shell only

Shell and core only

Land Use and Ecology

10%

13%

11%

Pollution

10%

11%

Total

100%

Innovation (additional)

10%

Each of the above environmental sections consists of a differing number of assessment issues and BREEAM credits (as described below and defined in detail in the technical sections of this Scheme Document).

BREEAM assessment issues and credits BREEAM UK New Construction consists of fifty one individual assessment issues spanning the nine environmental categories, plus a tenth category called ‘innovation’ (described below). Each issue addresses a specific building related environmental impact or issue and has a number of ‘credits’ assigned to it. ‘BREEAM credits’ are awarded where a building demonstrates that it meets the best practice performance levels defined for that issue, i.e. it has mitigated an impact or, in the case of the health and wellbeing section, addressed a specific building occupant-related issue, e.g. good thermal comfort, daylight or acoustics. The number of ‘credits’ available for an individual assessment issue will vary and generally the higher the number there are for a given issue, the more important that issue is in terms of mitigating its impact. In most cases, where there are multiple ‘credits’ available, the number awarded is based on a sliding scale or benchmark, where progressively higher standards of building performance are rewarded with a higher number of ‘credits’. It is worth noting that, in addition to the environmental section and overall score and BREEAM rating, verified performance against individual assessment issues also provides users with a credible set of key building performance indicators for a range of embodied, operational and construction phase building impacts. In this respect, in addition to using BREEAM to define overall targets, it is possible to use the method to define performance levels in support of specific organisational policy objectives for individual environmental issues. Care should be taken when setting design targets using individual issues and credit levels in this way as it can limit design flexibility and have an impact on project costs.

Awarding ‘credits’ for innovation It is one of the aims of BREEAM to support innovation within the construction industry and its supply chain. BREEAM does this by making additional ‘credits’ available for the recognition of sustainability related benefits or performance levels which are currently not recognised by standard BREEAM assessment issues and criteria. By doing this BREEAM is rewarding buildings that go beyond best practice in terms of a particular aspect of sustainability i.e. where the building or its procurement has demonstrated innovation. Awarding ‘credits’ for innovation enables clients and design teams to boost their building’s BREEAM performance and, in addition, helps to support the market for new innovative technologies, and design or construction practices. There are two ways in which BREEAM awards ‘innovation credits’ to recognise innovation in building design and procurement. The first is by meeting exemplary performance criteria defined within an existing BREEAM issue i.e. going beyond the standard

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Scope

BREEAM assessment criteria and therefore best practice. Note, not all assessment issues have exemplary performance criteria. The second route is where an application is made to BRE Global by the registered project’s BREEAM Assessor to have a particular building technology or feature, design or construction method or process recognised as ‘innovative’. If the application is successful and subsequently compliance is verified, an ‘innovation credit’ can be awarded. An additional 1% can be added to a building’s overall score for each ‘innovation credit’ achieved. The maximum number of ’innovation credits’ that can be awarded for any one building is 10; therefore the maximum available additional score for ‘innovation’ is 10%. Innovation credits can be awarded regardless of the building’s final BREEAM rating, i.e. they can be awarded at any BREEAM rating level. Refer to the Inn 01 Innovation section for more detail.

Calculating a building's BREEAM rating A BREEAM Assessor must determine the BREEAM rating using the appropriate assessment tools and calculators. An indication of performance against the BREEAM scheme can also be determined using a BREEAM Pre-Assessment Estimator. The Pre-Assessment Estimator is available from the BREEAM website www.breeam.com. The process of determining a BREEAM rating is outlined below and an example calculation included in Table - 6 1. For each of BREEAM’s nine environmental sections the number of ‘credits’ awarded must be determined by the BREEAM Assessor in accordance with the criteria of each assessment issue (as detailed in the technical sections of this document). 2. The percentage of ‘credits’ achieved is then calculated for each section. 3. The percentage of ‘credits’ achieved in each section is then multiplied by the corresponding section weighting. This gives the overall environmental section score. 4. The section scores are then added together to give the overall BREEAM score. 5. The overall score is then compared to the BREEAM rating benchmark levels and, provided all minimum standards have been met, the relevant BREEAM rating is achieved. 6. An additional 1% can be added to the final BREEAM score for each ‘innovation credit’ achieved (up to a maximum of 10%). Table - 6: Example BREEAM score and rating calculation BREEAM Section

Credits Achieved

Credits Available

% of Credits Achieved

Section Weighting (fully fitted)

Section Score

Management

47.62%

0.12

5.71%

Health and Wellbeing

80.95%

0.15

12.14%

Energy

51.61%

0.15

7.74%

Transport

41.67%

0.09

3.75%

Water

55.56%

0.07

3.89%

Materials

71.43%

0.135

9.64%

Waste

33.33%

0.085

2.83%

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Scope

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

BREEAM Section

Credits Achieved

Credits Available

% of Credits Achieved

Section Weighting (fully fitted)

Section Score

Land Use and Ecology

50.00%

0.10

5.00%

Pollution

38.46%

0.10

3.85%

Innovation

20.00%

0.10

2.00%

Final BREEAM score

56.56%

BREEAM Rating

VERY GOOD

Table - 7: Minimum standards for a BREEAM 'Very Good' rating Minimum standards for BREEAM ‘Very Good’ rating

Achieved?

Man 03: Responsible construction practices

Ene 02: Energy monitoring

Wat 01: Water consumption

Wat 02: Water monitoring

Mat 03: Responsible sourcing of materials

LE 03: Minimising impact on existing site ecology

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

The BREEAM evidential requirements This section provides guidance to assessors and project teams on the types of evidence required to demonstrate compliance with BREEAM issues.

Why does BREEAM require evidence? BREEAM is a third party assessment and certification scheme operated in accordance with international standards. Operating to international standards ensures that certification schemes such as BREEAM are run in a consistent and reliable manner. The BREEAM Assessor's assessment report and the BRE Global Quality Assurance process are the fundamental tenets of BREEAM, ensuring consistency of, and confidence in, the BREEAM rating awarded by the assessor. To maintain this consistency and credibility all certification decisions must be based on verified and credible project information that is traceable, i.e. evidence based. This is not only important for ensuring compliance with the international standards to which BREEAM operates, but also in terms of managing risk to clients and BREEAM Assessors in the event that a certification outcome is challenged.

The assessment report and the BREEAM Assessor role It is the BREEAM Assessor who determines the BREEAM rating and the assessment report is the formal record of an assessor’s audit against the criteria defined in the Technical Manual for a BREEAM scheme. The BREEAM certificate issued by BRE Global provides assurance that the service provided by the assessor (that is, the process of producing the assessment report) has been conducted in accordance with the requirements of the scheme. The purpose of the certificate is therefore to give confidence to the client in the assessor’s performance and processes in determining a BREEAM rating. It is the role of the assessor to gather project information and use it to assess performance against the BREEAM scheme in a competent and impartial manner. To award a BREEAM credit, the assessor must be satisfied beyond reasonable doubt that the evidence gathered demonstrates unambiguous compliance with all relevant criteria defined in the BREEAM scheme. All evidence must be appropriately referenced in the formal report produce by the assessor and made available on request from BRE Global Ltd for quality assurance checks. Clear, ordered and well referenced evidence for each BREEAM issue and criterion facilitates efficient quality assurance and certification. BREEAM Assessors can access further guidance on assessment report referencing in Assessor Guidance Note 01, and the 'Reporting process' webinar, both available from the BREEAM Assessor Guidance section of the BREEAM Assessor Extranet.

Evidence types Evidence should not necessarily need to be prepared specifically for the purpose of the BREEAM assessment. In many instances, the assessor should be able to source readily available and prepared project information for the purpose of demonstrating compliance. For this reason, BREEAM aims to avoid being prescriptive on the type of evidence required, although some issues do require specific documents to be provided. The assessor and project team will find that many assessment issues require more than one piece or type of information to demonstrate compliance with one criterion, or alternatively, one piece of information may be sufficient to demonstrate compliance with multiple criteria. To assist project teams and the BREEAM assessor in their collation of building information at each stage of assessment, the different types of documentation that can be used as evidence of compliance are listed below. These evidence types fall broadly into three categories:

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

1. General evidence type 2. Specific evidence type 3. Other evidence type. For some assessment issues, the assessor is likely to require a mixture of general and specific evidence types. General evidence includes a broad list of defined building information commonly produced for a building project. One or a mix of these types of building information can be used to demonstrate compliance for one or more of the BREEAM issues and criteria, as deemed appropriate by the BREEAM Assessor for the stage of assessment. General BREEAM evidence types are listed in Table - 9, and are not specifically listed in the ’ Evidence‘ section found within each BREEAM issue. Note, not all general evidence types will be appropriate for all issues and it is the responsibility of the assessor to ensure that the evidence provided specifically demonstrates compliance and is fully referenced in the Assessment reporting tool. Specific evidence is defined building information that must be provided to verify compliance with the relevant criteria for the BREEAM credit sought. In all cases it will be the only type of evidence that will be accepted by the BRE Global Ltd for that particular issue/criteria. Where specific evidence is not provided and appropriately referenced in the assessment report, the Quality Assurance checks will identify non-conformity and certification will be delayed. An example of specific evidence would be a copy of the building regulations output document from the approved software for BREEAM issue Ene 01, and this is listed in the evidence table for this issue. When required, specific evidence is defined and listed for each BREEAM issue in the ‘Evidence’ section for both final and interim stages of assessment. Although the ‘Evidence’ section lists the specific evidence required to demonstrate compliance with particular criteria, simply submitting this evidence may not be sufficient to demonstrate full compliance. Additional ‘general evidence types’ may also be required. For example Mat 01; to demonstrate compliance with criteria 1-5 at the design stage, a copy of the Mat 01 calculator tool is listed in the ‘Evidence’ table. However, in addition to the Mat 01 tool, further evidence is required to demonstrate how the inputs for this tool have been determined, i.e. general evidence types such as building specifications or drawings etc., confirming the material specifications to be used. Note, not all BREEAM issues will have specific evidence requirements. Other types of evidence can still be used to demonstrate compliance where an information type provided by a client/design team is not listed in Table - 9 or the ‘Evidence’ section for each issue. To avoid non-conformities and delays in certification, undefined alternative types of evidence must demonstrate credible, robust and traceable assurance to the same level as, or better than, specified or general evidence types. If in doubt, please contact BREEAM prior to accepting such evidence.

Written commitments at the interim stage of assessment – Design stage At the interim design stage of assessment it is permissible to use letters or emails to demonstrate intent to comply with BREEAM criteria (provided they meet the requirements for the communication records above). Such evidence must also make clear the actions and evidence (or an understanding thereof) that will be undertaken and provided to ensure the projects ongoing compliance, particularly at the final stage of assessment, i.e. post construction. This is to ensure that the party who makes the commitment is clearly aware of the actions and evidence that needs to be supplied to demonstrate compliance with BREEAM at the final stage of assessment. For example, in many circumstances it would not be acceptable for the design team to copy and paste the BREEAM criteria into a formal commitment. The commitment should specifically detail how criteria are to be achieved in the context of the assessment, and often copying and pasting the BREEAM criteria will not provide this detail. While letters of commitment can play a role in demonstrating compliance, they are not a replacement for more formal and established types of project information. The assessor must not award credits where they have a reason to doubt the validity or intent of written commitments or where it is not unreasonable to expect formal design or specification information to be available to confirm compliance.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Written commitments at the final stage of assessment – Post construction As stated in the Scope section, there are two types of assessment that can be carried out at the post construction stage, a post construction review of a design stage assessment, or a post construction assessment (where no design stage assessment has been carried out). The 'Final post construction stage' column of the evidence table in each issue assumes that a design stage assessment has been completed. Where a design stage assessment has not been completed, the assessor will need to review both the 'Interim design stage' and 'Final post construction stage' evidence listed in the evidence table and ensure sufficient evidence is submitted with the assessment to demonstrate compliance with the criteria. Evidence supplied at the post construction stage must be reflective of the completed building and must therefore demonstrate what has actually been implemented. For example if sub-meters have been specified at design stage, evidence at the post construction stage would need to demonstrate that these have actually been installed. Appropriate evidence may be a site inspection report with supporting photographs or as built drawings showing the location of the sub-meters. Letters of commitment cannot be used to demonstrate compliance at the final, post construction stage of assessment. The only exception to this is where the criteria require an action to take place post construction, i.e. after handover and possibly during the building operation. An example could be a written commitment from the building owner/occupier making a commitment to conduct post-occupancy evaluation. As with written commitments at the design stage, the BREEAM Assessor must not award BREEAM credits where they have a reason to doubt the validity or intent of written commitments or where it is not unreasonable to expect formal documentation, e.g. a schedule of services and/or professional services contract.

Evidence principles that BREEAM Assessors and the BRE Global Ltd Quality Assurance work to As described above, where specific evidence is stated in the ‘evidence’ table within each assessment issue, this must be sourced and verified by the BREEAM Assessor. Where no specific evidence has been listed for an issue or specific criterion, this means that there are potentially a number of different types of ‘general’ project information, as per Table - 9 that can be sourced by the BREEAM Assessor and used to demonstrate compliance. It is the BREEAM Assessor’s responsibility to source and verify the ‘general evidence types’ for each relevant criterion, where compliance and credits are being claimed by the project team. In determining the appropriateness of ‘general evidence types’ for each issue, the principles outlined in must be considered by BREEAM Assessors. Where the ‘general evidence types’ meet the principles outlined in Table - 8 and, where appropriate, the guidance provided in the ‘robustness of evidence’ section, such evidence is admissible for the purpose of the assessment and the BRE Global Quality Assurance checks. These principles are not listed in a hierarchical order and are all equally important when considering which evidence type to submit to demonstrate compliance for each issue/criterion.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Table - 8: BREEAM Evidence principles Summary

Principle

Objective

A question to ask to check

Evidence provided for all criteria for all credits sought

Evidence must demonstrate that ALL relevant* criteria and subcriteria for each credit sought are achieved and where relevant, is provided to support compliance notes, definitions etc.

Completeness

Are all criteria and subcriteria covered? Have all relevant compliance notes and definitions been addressed?

Unambiguous assessment

The assessment must demonstrate unambiguous compliance and the evidence must support this assessment. Evidence (and supporting notes) must clearly demonstrate to a 3rd party reviewer that the criteria have been met.

Independent review compatibility

If a 3rd party (e.g. BRE Global Ltd) reviewed my report with the submitted evidence, would they be able to confirm compliance and award the same credits I have?

Robust

a. When selecting the Evidence type, always ensure it is robust and is relevant to the stage of assessment. b. The selected Evidence contains all the relevant basic information, with the necessary constituent parts to be deemed robust. (see Robustness of Evidence section for further details on both of the above)

Proof that evidence is robust and from a reliable source

Is this the most robust form of evidence available to demonstrate compliance with this criterion? Does the evidence contain all the relevant basic information? Is it fully auditable?

Use existing evidence

Use existing project information to demonstrate compliance. In most cases evidence shouldn’t need to be ‘created’ for BREEAM compliance purposes.

Minimises evidence and reduces time and cost of compliance

Does robust evidence meeting the above principles already exist that I can use? If I need to ask for more evidence, is the project seeking credits where compliance is not adequately demonstrated?

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Summary

Principle

Objective

A question to ask to check

* Where the assessor/design team deem specific criteria 'not relevant' to the assessment, a full justification should be collated and then submitted as a technical query, for review by BRE Global Ltd.

Robustness of Evidence Robust evidence provides confirmation that the assessment has been carried out correctly and the building complies with the criteria for the BREEAM credits sought. The assessor should consider the following when gathering project information and evaluating whether the evidence provided is as ‘robust’ as possible: Is there more than one piece of evidence that could be used to demonstrate compliance? Is the chosen evidence the most robust and appropriate piece of evidence to demonstrate that a particular criterion has been achieved? Any evidence submitted for a BREAM assessment must be robust in terms of its source and its traceability. Below is a list of the minimum information the assessor must expect to see, when certain types of evidence are submitted: Communication records: Any communication records used as evidence must provide clear confirmation of the site name, author’s identity and role, the date and recipient(s) identity. Formal letters of correspondence: Must be on company/organisation headed note-paper with a signature (electronic signatures are acceptable). Ideally letters should be a secured document. (Please see sections relating to written commitment for further information.) Meeting minutes: Must include date, location and attendee information (names, organisations and roles), along with a record of the meeting and agreed actions. Drawings: All drawings must have the building/site name, phase (if applicable), title of drawing, date, revision number and a scale. Specification: A specification must be clear that it relates to the project under assessment, and it must have a date and revision number. Where sections of a specification are provided the assessor should reference the extract and as a minimum submit the front page of the specification detailing the project name, revision number and date. Site inspection report: A site inspection report must include the building/site name, date, author and summary text to detail what was witnessed, confirming compliance. Photographic evidence can be used to support the text in the report. For other types of evidence not listed, the assessor should use the above as a guide for the. As a minimum in most cases the evidence used to assess compliance should always contain key information such as the project name, the author, date, revision numbers etc. Table - 9: Evidence types Ref

Document/evidence type

Description/notes

As constructed information

Information produced at the end of a project to represent what has been constructed. This will comprise a mixture of ‘as built’ information/drawings and surveys from specialist subcontractors and the ‘final construction issue’ from design team members.

Building information model (BIM)

The BIM (or BIM files) used for the project containing relevant information/evidence of compliance.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Document/evidence type

Description/notes

BRE Global correspondence reference number

For example the reference number for a BRE Global response to an assessors technical query.

BREEAM Assessor’s site inspection report

A formal report based on the BREEAM Assessor's own survey of the site/building to confirm compliance with BREEAM criteria. An assessor’s site inspection report will be distinct from their formal BREEAM assessment report, serving as a form of evidence of compliance in its own right, and it may include photographs taken by the assessor as part of the survey.

Building contract(s)

The building contract (or excerpts/clauses from it) between the client and the contractor for the construction of the project. In some instances, the building contract may contain design duties for specialist subcontractors and/or design team members.

Certificates of compliance (third party)

Examples include ISO 14001, BES 6001, FSC (Forest Stewardship Council), EPC (environmental profile certificate), EPD (environmental product declaration), Considerate Constructors etc.

Communication records

Formal communication records between/from relevant project stakeholders and/or other third parties confirming an appointment, action or outcome. This may be in the form of a letter, meeting minutes, email correspondence, publication or another form of media (see also additional guidance on following pages).

Communication strategy

The strategy that sets out when the project team will meet, how they will communicate effectively and the protocols for issuing information between the various parties, both informally and at information exchanges

Computer aided modelling results/outputs

Examples include thermal modelling, flooding, life cycle assessment, life cycle costing, ventilation modelling etc.

E10

Construction specification

The specification for the project/building. 1

E11

Construction stage data/information

For example, purchase orders, metering data, log books, commissioning records/reports etc.

E12

Contractual tree

A diagram that clarifies the contractual relationship between the client and the parties undertaking the roles required on a project.

E13

Cost information

Project costs, including the cost estimate and life cycle costs.

E14

Design drawings2

Developed Design and Technical Design, including the coordinated architectural, structural and building services design. Site plans, drainage designs.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Ref

Document/evidence type

Description/notes

E15

Design programme

A programme setting out the strategic dates in relation to the design process. It is aligned with the Project Programme but is strategic in its nature, due to the iterative nature of the design process, particularly in the early stages.

E16

Design responsibility matrix

A matrix that sets out who is responsible for designing each aspect of the project and when. This document sets out the extent of any performance specified design.

E17

Feasibility study

Studies undertaken to test the feasibility of the Initial Project Brief for the site or in a specific context and to consider how site-wide issues will be addressed.

E18

Final project brief

The Initial Project Brief amended so that it is aligned with the Concept Design and any briefing decisions made during this stage.

E19

Other third party information

For example, maps, public transport timetables, product data/details, manufacturersâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; literature, government/EU standards or codes, EU labelling.

E20

Professional services contract

An agreement to provide professional or consulting services such as, designing, feasibility studies, or legal or technical advice.

E21

Professional specialist reports

Professional reports resulting from specialist surveys/studies/test results, e.g. contaminated land, ecology, flood risk assessment, surface water run-off report, site investigation, acoustics, indoor air quality plan, low and zero carbon technologies study, transportation analysis, commissioning reports, passive design analysis report, free cooling analysis report, life cycle assessment, landscape and habitat management plan etc.

E22

Project Execution or Quality Plan

The Project Execution Plan is produced in collaboration between the project lead and lead designer, with contributions from other designers and members of the project team. The Project Execution Plan sets out the processes and protocols to be used to develop the design.

E23

Project programme

The overall period for the briefing, design, construction and post completion activities of a project.

E24

Project roles table

A table that sets out the roles required on a project as well as defining the stages during which those roles are required and the parties responsible for carrying out the roles.

E25

Project strategy

The strategies developed in parallel with the Concept Design to support the design and, in certain instances, to respond to the Final Project Brief as it is concluded. Examples include strategies for sustainability, acoustics, handover, maintenance and operational, fire engineering, building control, technology, health and safety, construction, travel plan, sustainable procurement plan.

E26

Risk assessment

The risk assessment considers the various design risks and other risks on a project and how each risk will be managed and the party responsible for managing each risk.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Document/evidence type

Description/notes

E27

Schedule of services

A list of specific services and tasks to be undertaken by a party involved in the project which is incorporated into their professional services contract.

E28

Strategic or initial project brief

The brief prepared following discussions with the client to ascertain the project objectives, the client’s business case and, in certain instances, in response to site feasibility studies.

1For the purpose of BREEAM the specific clause of the specification must be referenced within the report. 2Evidence in the form of design drawings must be presented in a clear, professional working format with clearly identified

legends indicating revision number, date, title, owner etc. (where appropriate).

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Management

Management Category overview Weightings

Minimum standards

Fully fitted 12%

Shell only 12.5%

Shell and core 11%

Man 03, Man 04, Man 05

Summary This category encourages the adoption of sustainable management practices in connection with design, construction, commissioning, handover and aftercare activities to ensure that robust sustainability objectives are set and followed through into the operation of the building. Issues in this section focus on embedding sustainability actions through the key stages of design, procurement and initial occupation from the initial project brief stage to the appropriate provision of aftercare.

Category summary table Issue ID

Issue name

Credits

Credit summary

Man 01

Project brief and design

Stakeholder consultation covering project delivery and relevant third parties. Sustainability champion appointed to facilitate the setting, monitoring and achievement of BREEAM performance target(s) for the project.

Man 02

Life cycle cost and service life planning

Recognising and encouraging the use of life cycle costing and service life planning and the sharing of data to raise awareness and understanding.

Man 03

Responsible construction practices

The principal contractor demonstrates sound environmental management practices and consideration for neighbours across their activities on-site. Site related energy, water and transport impacts are monitored and reported to ensure ongoing compliance during the Construction, Handover and Close Out stages and to improve awareness and understanding for future projects.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Management

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Issue ID

Issue name

Credits

Man 04

Commissioning and handover

Schedule of commissioning including optimal timescales and appropriate testing and commissioning of all building services systems and building fabric in line with best practice. Inspecting, testing, identifying and rectifying defects via an appropriate method. Provision of a non-technical Building User Guide and user/operator training timed appropriately around handover and proposed occupation.

Man 05

Aftercare

Provision of the necessary infrastructure and resources to provide aftercare support to the building occupier(s). Seasonal commissioning activities will be completed over a minimum 12 month period, once the building becomes substantially occupied. The client or building occupier commit to carrying out a post occupancy evaluation (POE) exercise one year after initial building occupation and to disseminate the findings in terms of the building’s post occupancy performance.

Credit summary

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Man 01 Project brief and design

Management

Man 01 Project brief and design Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Aim To recognise and encourage an integrated design process that optimises building performance.

Assessment criteria This issue is split into two parts: Stakeholder consultation (2 credits) Sustainability Champion (2 credits). The following is required to demonstrate compliance.

One credit â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Stakeholder consultation (project delivery)

1. Prior to completion of the Concept Design (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent), the project delivery stakeholders (see Relevant definitions) have met to identify and define their roles, responsibilities and contributions for each of the key phases of project delivery. 2. In defining the roles and responsibilities for each key phase of the project, the following must be considered: a. End user requirements b. Aims of the design and design strategy c. Particular installation and construction requirements/limitations d. Occupiers budget and technical expertise in maintaining any proposed systems e. Maintainability and adaptability of the proposals f. Requirements for the production of project and end user documentation g. Requirements for commissioning, training and aftercare support. 3. The project team demonstrate how the project delivery stakeholder contributions and the outcomes of the consultation process have influenced or changed the Initial Project Brief, including if appropriate, the Project Execution Plan, Communication Strategy, and the Concept Design.

One credit - Stakeholder consultation (third party)

4. Prior to completion of the Concept Design stage, all relevant third party stakeholders have been consulted by the design team and this covers the minimum consultation content (see compliance note CN3). 5. The project must demonstrate how the stakeholder contributions and outcomes of the consultation exercise have influenced or changed the Initial Project Brief and Concept Design. 6. Prior to completion of the detailed design (RIBA Stage 4, Technical Design or equivalent), consultation feedback has been given to, and received by, all relevant parties.

Additionally for Education, Healthcare, Law courts and Major transport node building types only: 7. The consultation exercise used a method carried out by an independent party. See Relevant definitions.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Management

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

One credit - Sustainability Champion (design)

8. A Sustainability Champion has been appointed to facilitate the setting and achievement of BREEAM performance target (s) for the project. The design stage Sustainability Champion is appointed to perform this role during the feasibility stage (Stage 1, Preparation and Brief stage, as defined by the RIBA Plan of Work 2013 or equivalent). 9. The defined BREEAM performance target(s) has been formally agreed (see Relevant definitions) between the client and design/project team no later than the Concept Design stage (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent). 10. To achieve this credit at the interim design stage assessment, the agreed BREEAM performance target(s) must be demonstrably achieved by the project design. This must be demonstrated via the BREEAM Assessorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s design stage assessment report.

One credit - Sustainability Champion (monitoring progress)

11. The Sustainability Champion criteria 8, 9 and 10 have been achieved. 12. A Sustainability Champion is appointed to monitor progress against the agreed BREEAM performance target(s) throughout the design process and formally report progress to the client and design team.

To do this the Sustainability Champion must attend key project/design team meetings during the Concept Design, Developed Design and Technical Design stages, as defined by the RIBA Plan of Work 2013, reporting during, and prior to, completion of each stage, as a minimum.

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Man 01 Project brief and design

Ref

Terms

Management

Description

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

Stakeholder consultation (project delivery) (1 credit) 1. Criteria 1 to 3 Stakeholder consultation (third party) (1 credit) 2. Criteria 4 to 6; criterion 7 is not applicable Exemplary level criteria The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM issue. Sustainability Champion (design) (1 credit) 3. Criteria 8 to 10 Sustainability Champion (monitoring progress) (1 credit) 4. Criteria 11 to 12

General CN3

Minimum consultation content See criterion 4.

The minimum consultation content of the consultation plan will be dependent on the building but would typically include the following: 1. Functionality, build quality and impact (including aesthetics) 2. Provision of appropriate internal and external facilities (for future building occupants and visitors/users) 3. Management and operational implications 4. Maintenance resources implications 5. Impacts on the local community, e.g. local traffic/transport impact 6. Opportunities for shared use of facilities and infrastructure with the community/appropriate stakeholders, if relevant/appropriate to building type. 7. Compliance with statutory (national/local) consultation requirements. 8. Inclusive and accessible design. In the case of educational building types, minimum content also includes: 9. How the building/grounds could best be designed to facilitate learning and provide a range of social spaces appropriate to the needs of pupils, students and other users. In the case of building types containing technical areas or functions, e.g. laboratories, workshops etc., minimum content also includes: 10. The end users broad requirements for such facilities, including appropriate sizing, optimisation and integration of equipment and systems.

CN4

Assessing and awarding the available credits for a Sustainability Champion

There is an additional credit for appointing a Sustainability Champion during the construction and handover phase (see BREEAM issue Man 03 Responsible construction practices). The aim of the credit in Man 03 is to encourage and reward contractors and project teams that appoint a Sustainability Champion and therefore ensure continuation of the sustainability objectives during the construction phase and that the constructed building meets the client's target BREEAM rating.

CN5

BREEAM-related performance targets See criteria 9 to 13.

If, at the post construction stage assessment, the BREEAM performance targets set at the end of the Concept Stage have not been achieved, the credits awarded at the interim design stage assessment for appointing the BREEAM Sustainability Champion must be withheld in the final assessment. See Relevant definitions.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Management

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Methodology None.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

1-3

Consultation plan setting out the process and scope of the consultation.

As per interim design stage

Additional information Relevant definitions BREEAM-related performance targets BREEAM performance targets refer specifically to the BREEAM rating and minimum standards required. This does not necessarily include individual targeted BREEAM issues/credits, which may be traded over the course of the project as it evolves. In agreeing a BREEAM target it is recommended that individual BREEAM issues, credits and criteria are targeted or prioritised to ensure that the agreed target is achievable, and achieved without potentially costly alterations to the design at a later stage. Communication strategy The RIBA Plan of Works 2013 defines the Communication Strategy as a strategy that sets out when the project team will meet, how they will communicate effectively and the protocols for issuing information between the various parties, both informally and at Information Exchanges. Consultation feedback This is feedback which focuses on the stakeholder suggestions, comments, recommendations and the consultation outcomes. This includes how the suggestions and outcomes influenced, or resulted in modifications to, the proposed design and building operation/use. Formally agreed The term 'formally agreed' relates to BREEAM performance targets. Examples of formal agreements include a contract or letters of appointment with the architect and with other relevant project team members. Independent party With respect to compliance with the criterion relating to using an independent party, the client/design team needs to demonstrates that either of the following options. 1. They have used a party independent of the design process to conduct the necessary consultation exercise, using a compliant method. Examples of independent compliant methods include but are not limited to the Design Quality Indicator 1 (DQI),and the Achieving Excellence Design Evaluation Toolkit (AEDET) in Healthcare buildings; OR

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Man 01 Project brief and design

Management

2. If the consultation is to be carried out by an organisation involved with the design of the building e.g. the project architect, then they must present the assessor with evidence that robustly demonstrates the independence of the consultation process. BREEAM has not attempted to define what form this evidence must take; the onus is on the design team or relevant individual to clearly demonstrate to the BREEAM Assessor a credible level of independence. Key design team meetings Key design team meetings can be defined as those where fundamental decisions that influence or affect the building’s proposed design and its construction in accordance with the design (and therefore the building’s sustainability impacts and BREEAM performance), are discussed and made. These meetings would typically include representatives from at least three of the parties listed below. 1. Representatives of the client/developer 2. The principal contractor 3. The architect 4. Structural engineers 5. Building services engineers 6. Cost consultants 7. Environmental consultants 8. Project management consultants. Key phases The definition of key phases of project delivery includes the following: Concept Design Developed Design Construction Commissioning and Handover In-Use occupation. Project delivery stakeholders The purpose of criterion 1 is to reflect the need to consider the input of all the major project stakeholders from the earliest practical stage, to ensure smooth and successful delivery of the project's sustainability objectives. Project delivery stakeholders therefore include the client, the building occupier (where known), the design team and the principal contractor. With regards to contractors’ involvement, it ensures their input in terms of formulating sustainable design solutions, commenting/inputting on the practicality and build ability of (one or more) design solutions and their impact on programming, cost etc. BREEAM recognises that traditionally for some projects the contractor for the works might not be appointed at the early stages of the project and therefore compliance with criterion 1 would not be possible. In these instances, to ensure the aim of the criteria is upheld, , criterion 1 will be met provided that a suitably experienced person with substantial construction/contracting experience in projects similar to the proposed works is involved prior to appointment of the contractor. A suitably experienced person could be a contractor appointed as a consultant for this stage or a construction project manager. Project Execution Plan The RIBA Plan of Works 2013 defines a Project Execution Plan as a plan produced in collaboration between the project lead and lead designer, with contributions from other designers and members of the project team. The Project Execution Plan sets out the processes and protocols to be used to develop the design. It is sometimes referred to as a 'project quality plan'.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Management

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Relevant third parties (see criterion 4) This includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Actual/intended building users (if known) including facilities management (FM) staff or those responsible for the day-to-day operation of the building and grounds. 2. Representative consultation group from the existing community (if the building is a new development in an existing community) or for a community still under construction. 3. Existing partnerships and networks that have knowledge of and experience working on existing buildings of the same type. 4. Potential users of any shared facilities, e.g. operators of clubs and community groups. AND the following where relevant: 5. In educational buildings, representatives of Local Education Authority, Board of Governors etc. 6. Local or national historic/heritage groups (over and above any requirements relating to statutory consultees). 7. Specialist service and maintenance contractors/representatives where the building function has particular technical requirements in complex environments, e.g. buildings containing laboratories. Sustainability Champion (design) Members of formal schemes approved by BRE Global in connection with the provision of design advice. At present the following schemes are deemed to satisfy this requirement: BREEAM Accredited Professional (AP) Membership Scheme Sustainability Champions are trained and qualified to provide BREEAM-related advice to the design team to facilitate timely and successful target setting, scheduling, prioritisation and monitoring of BREEAM compliance relating to the design of the building. They will be subject to ongoing training and competency requirements to ensure that their knowledge is maintained. Providers of schemes/qualifications not listed, who feel their members meet this definition and who would like to be listed as approved membership schemes, should contact BRE Global. Note: The aim of the Sustainability Champion credits is to encourage an integrated design and construction process that uses BREEAM as a framework for establishing, agreeing and achieving the desired level of sustainability performance for the project. The Sustainability Champion credits in this BREEAM issue focus on achieving this objective through the provision of appropriate expertise during the preparation and brief, and design stages of the project. BREEAM Accredited Professional (AP) An individual trained and qualified by BRE as a specialist in built environment sustainability, environmental design and assessment. The role of the BREEAM AP is to facilitate the project team's efforts to successfully schedule activities, set priorities and negotiate the trade-offs required to achieve a target BREEAM rating when the design is formally assessed. Only qualified individuals who are members of BRE's associated membership scheme comply with the BREEAM Requirements. This membership ensures an adequate level of competence is maintained through regular CPD in key relevant areas. For a list and contact details of BREEAM Accredited Professionals, visit http://www.greenbooklive.com/.

Other information None. 1The Design Quality Indicator is a method to assess the design quality of buildings. www.dqi.org.uk

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life planning

Management

Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life planning Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Aim To deliver whole life value from investment and promote economic sustainability by recognising and encouraging the use and sharing of life cycle costing and service life planning to improve design, specification and through-life maintenance and operation.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

Two credits - Elemental life cycle cost (LCC)

1. An elemental life cycle cost (LCC) analysis has been carried out, at Process Stage 2 (equivalent to Concept Design - RIBA Stage 2) together with any design option appraisals in line with 'Standardised method of life cycle costing for construction procurement' PD 156865:2008 1. 2. The LCC analysis shows: a. An outline LCC plan for the project based on the building's basic structure and envelope, appraising a range of options and based on multiple cash flow scenarios e.g. 20, 30, 50+ years; b. The fabric and servicing strategy for the project outlining services component and fit-out options (if applicable) over a 15-year period, in the form of an 'elemental LCC Plan'.

One credit - Component level LCC Plan

3. A component level LCC plan has been developed by the end of Process Stage 4 (equivalent to Technical Design – RIBA Stage 4) in line with PD 156865:2008 and includes the following component types (where present): a. Envelope, e.g. cladding, windows, and/or roofing b. Services, e.g. heat source cooling source, and/or controls c. Finishes, e.g. walls, floors and/or ceilings d. External spaces, e.g. alternative hard landscaping, boundary protection. 4. Demonstrate, using appropriate examples provided by the design team, how the component level LCC plan has been used to influence building and systems design/specification to minimise life cycle costs and maximise critical value.

One credit - Capital cost reporting

5. Report the capital cost for the building in pounds per square metre (£k/m2), via the BREEAM Assessment Scoring and Reporting tool, Assessment Issue Scoring tab, Management section.

Checklists and tables None.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Management

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Elemental life cycle cost, capital cost reporting and maintenance strategy, criteria 1 to 2 and 5 Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Component level LCC plan, criteria 3 to 4 Both options: The plan must include all component types to be installed by the developer. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

Capital cost reporting (1 credit) 1. Criterion 5

CN3

Appropriate examples See criterion 4.

The option(s) selected to demonstrate how life cycle costs have been minimised and critical value maximised must be appropriate in terms of its relative impact on project costs, future building maintenance burden and size (volume or area).

CN4

Pre-defined specifications

Where the building is constructed to a pre-defined standard specification, the LCC plan for this specification may be used to help demonstrate compliance.

CN5

Capital cost reporting

At the design stage of assessment, where the final information is not available, the credit can be awarded where the client provides the predicted capital cost, including contingencies, and commits to providing this information for the final stage of assessment. At the final stage, if the final capital cost is not known, the client's/cost consultant's best estimate should be provided.

General

Building type specific CN6

Law courts buildings â&#x20AC;&#x201C; responsibility for compliance

When considering this issue, the term project team includes the Ministry of Justice. Responsibility for complying with the criteria of this issue may fall with any or all of the project team members and it is likely that this will vary depending on the procurement route used for the project.

Methodology None.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life planning

Management

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

1, 2

Elemental life cycle cost plan

As per interim design stage

3, 4

Component level life cycle cost plan

As per interim design stage

Additional information Relevant definitions Life cycle cost (LCC) The cost of an asset, or its parts throughout its life cycle, while fulfilling the performance requirements; a methodology for systematic economic evaluation of life cycle costs over a period of analysis, as defined in the agreed scope. Elemental LCC plan This is commonly used for developing solutions at project level during option appraisals. Costs are normally at building elemental level on the entire asset. Information may be a mix of typical benchmark costs for key elements, comparative cost modelling or approximate estimates. It is expressed as cost per square metre of gross internal floor area (GIFA) and presented for elemental analysis, aligned to the level of capital cost plans. Predicted capital cost The capital cost for the building includes the expenses related to the initial construction of the building: Construction, including preparatory works, materials, equipment and labour Site management Construction financing Insurance and taxes during construction Inspection and testing Costs relating to land procurement, clearance, design, statutory approvals and post-occupancy aftercare should not be included

Other information Capital cost reporting The lack of data relating to capital and life cycle costs/benefits arising from more sustainable building design presents a major barrier to take-up of more sustainable solutions. This issue seeks to encourage the sharing of data to break down these barriers and ensure that BREEAM continues to encourage cost effective and financially beneficial solutions. This information is collected to assist research into the cost and savings of developing sustainable/BREEAM assessed buildings, to inform the business case for sustainability and the ongoing development of BREEAM. All data submitted will be treated as confidential and will only be used anonymously. Component level LCC plan A component level LCC plan is commonly used for cost planning specification choices of systems, elements or component levels during design development. Component level LCC appraisal for service life planning at the feasibility stage requires the environment of the

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Management

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

building and other local conditions to be identified, and the fundamental requirements to be met in planning the service life of the building. Decisions should be made on: the likely design life of the building (rather than the contractual design life) minimum functional performance criteria for each component over the building’s design life components that must be repairable, maintainable or replaceable within the design life of the building. When to undertake life cycle costing Life cycle costing is relevant throughout the building or constructed asset’s life cycle, in particular during the project planning, design and construction and also during the in-use phases. (For further information please refer to guide PD 156865. A supplement to BS ISO 15686-5.) Standardised method for life cycle costing (SMLCC) for construction The guide PD 156865:2008 describes the Standardised method for life cycle costing (SMLCC) for construction procurement.The objectives of this guide are to provide: 1. A UK standard cost data structure for life cycle costing, which aligns with BS ISO 15686-5 and with the Building Cost Information service (BCIS) Standard Form of Capital Cost Analysis (SFCA) and industry recognised occupancy cost codes. (Refer to Annexes A, B and C) (www.rics.org) 2. Life cycle costing practitioners with a standardised method of applying life cycle costing, applicable to the UK construction industry and to the key stages of the procurement process. 3. Process mapping the life cycle costing stages – to help structure how to plan, generate, and interpret and present the results for a variety of different purposes and levels of life cycle cost planning. 4. Instructions on how to define the client’s specific requirements for life cycle costing and the required outputs and forms of reporting – and to decide on which method of economic evaluation to apply. 5. Simplification and demystification – by providing practical guidance, instructions and definitions, together with informative worked examples on how to undertake life cycle costing (for construction). 6. An industry accepted methodology, to facilitate a more accurate, consistent and robust application of life cycle costing estimation and option appraisals, thereby creating a more effective and robust basis for life cycle cost analysis and benchmarking. The guide, PD 156865, also seeks to help eliminate confusion over scoping and terminology and to address concerns over the uncertainty and risks that are undermining confidence in life cycle costs used for construction procurement. (For further information, please refer to PD 156865 Supplement to BS ISO: 15686-5.) 1PD 156865:2008 Standardized method of life cycle costing for construction procurement: a supplement to BS ISO 15686-

5:2008. Buildings and constructed assets. Service-life planning - Part 5: Life cycle costing

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Man 03 Responsible construction practices

Management

Man 03 Responsible construction practices Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Yes

Aim To recognise and encourage construction-sites which are managed in an environmentally and socially considerate, responsible and accountable manner.

Assessment criteria This issue is split in to four parts: Environmental management (1 credit) Sustainability Champion (1 credit) Considerate construction (up to 2 credits) Monitoring of construction-site impacts (2 credits). The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

Pre-requisite

1. All timber and timber based products used on the project is 'Legally harvested and traded timber' (see Relevant definitions). Note: For other materials there are no pre-requisite requirements at this stage.

One credit – Environmental management

1. The principal contractor operates an environmental management system (EMS) covering their main operations. The EMS must be either: a. third party certified, to ISO 14001/EMAS or equivalent standard; or b. have a structure that is in compliance with BS 8555:2003 and has reached phase four of the implementation stage, ‘implementation and operation of the environmental management system’, and has completed phase audits one to four, as defined in BS 8555. For Healthcare NHS buildings, see the pre-requisite for this issue in compliance note CN7 2. The principal contractor implements best practice pollution prevention policies and procedures on-site in accordance with Pollution Prevention Guidelines, Working at construction and demolition-sites: PPG6 1.

One credit – Sustainability Champion (construction)

3. A Sustainability Champion is appointed to monitor the project to ensure ongoing compliance with the relevant sustainability performance/process criteria, and therefore BREEAM target(s), during the Construction, Handover and Close Out stages (as defined by the RIBA Plan of Works 2013, stages 5 and 6). To do this the Sustainability Champion will ideally be site based or will visit the site regularly to carry out spot checks, with the relevant authority to do so and require action to be taken to address shortcomings in compliance. The Sustainability Champion will monitor site activities with sufficient frequency (see compliance note CN6) to ensure that risks of noncompliance are minimised. They will report on progress at relevant project team meetings including identifying potential areas of non-compliance and any action needed to mitigate. 4. The defined BREEAM performance target forms a requirement of the principal contractor's contract (see compliance

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Management

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

note Man 01 Project brief and design – CN5 and in Man 01 Project brief and design – Relevant definitions). 5. To achieve this credit at the final post construction stage of assessment, the BREEAM-related performance target for the project must be demonstrably achieved by the project. This is demonstrated via the BREEAM Assessor’s final post construction stage assessment report.

Up to two credits - Considerate construction

6. Where the principal contractor has used a ‘compliant’ organisational, local or national considerate construction scheme and their performance against the scheme has been confirmed by independent assessment and verification. The BREEAM credits can be awarded as follows: a. One credit where the contractor achieves ‘compliance’ with the criteria of a compliant scheme. b. Two credits where the contractor significantly exceeds ‘compliance’ with the criteria of the scheme. Refer to the Relevant definitions section for a list of compliant schemes and therefore how performance, as determined by a compliant scheme, translates in to BREEAM credits.

Up to two credits - Monitoring of construction-site impacts

7. Responsibility has been assigned to an individual(s) for monitoring, recording and reporting energy use, water consumption and transport data (where measured) resulting from all on-site construction processes (and dedicated off-site monitoring) throughout the build programme. To ensure the robust collection of information, this individual(s) must have the appropriate authority and responsibility to request and access the data required. Where appointed, the Sustainability Champion could perform this role.

First monitoring credit - Utility consumption Energy consumption 8. Criterion 7 is achieved. 9. Monitor and record data on principal constructor's and subcontractors' energy consumption in kWh (and where relevant, litres of fuel used) as a result of the use of construction plant, equipment (mobile and fixed) and site accommodation. 10. Report the total carbon dioxide emissions (total kgCO2/project value) from the construction process via the BREEAM Assessment Scoring and Reporting tool.

Water consumption 11. Criterion 7 is achieved. 12. Monitor and record data on principal constructor's and subcontractors' potable water consumption (m3) arising from the use of construction plant, equipment (mobile and fixed) and site accommodation. 13. Using the collated data report the total net water consumption (m3), i.e. consumption minus any recycled water use, from the construction process via the BREEAM Assessment Scoring and Reporting tool.

Second monitoring credit - Transport of construction materials and waste 14. Criterion 7 is achieved. 15. Monitor and record data on transport movements and impacts resulting from delivery of the majority of construction materials to site and construction waste from site. As a minimum this must cover: a. Transport of materials from the factory gate to the building site, including any transport, intermediate storage and distribution. See Relevant definitions. b. Scope of this monitoring must cover the following as a minimum: i. Materials used in major building elements (i.e. those defined in BREEAM issue Mat 01 Life cycle impacts), including insulation materials. ii. Ground works and landscaping materials. c. Transport of construction waste from the construction gate to waste disposal processing/recovery centre gate. Scope of this monitoring must cover the construction waste groups outlined in the project's waste management plan. 16. Using the collated data, report separately for materials and waste, the total fuel consumption (litres) and total carbon dioxide emissions (kgCO2 eq), plus total distance travelled (km) via the BREEAM Assessment Scoring and Reporting tool.

Exemplary level criteria The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve one innovation credit for this BREEAM issue:

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Man 03 Responsible construction practices

Management

17. With reference to the considerate construction criterion 7, in addition to meeting the criteria for two credits, the contractor achieves compliance with the criteria of the compliant scheme to an exemplary level of practice.

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

Environmental management (1 credit) 1. Criteria 1 to 3 Considerate construction (up to 2 credits) 2. Criterion 7 Monitoring of construction-site impacts Utility consumption (1 credit) 3. Criteria 8 to 12 Exemplary level performance (1 credit) 4. Criteria 13a, 13b and 14 5. Criterion 13c. As a minimum, this must cover inert materials, metals and mixed waste groups.

General CN3

Site clearance

The scope of this issue applies to the principal contractor and their scope of works. If the scope of their works includes demolition and site clearance then this stage of work falls within the scope of the assessment and therefore the issue criteria.

CN4

Site timber and reusable formwork See criterion 2.

Reusable timber formwork itself does not automatically comply. All timber used in the manufacture of the formwork must be either initially reclaimed, or 'legally harvested and traded' (see Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials, Relevant definitions section).

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Management

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Terms

Description

CN5

Target setting See criteria 4 to 6.

At present data from construction-sites do not generally exist in enough detail to set benchmarks and targets. BREEAM therefore does not set any requirements at present in terms of specific targets for reducing energy, water and transport consumption resulting from the construction process. While BREEAM does not require them, it is strongly recommended that site specific targets are set and reported against. Following adoption of widespread and consistent measurement and reporting protocols for construction-site impacts and collation of construction-site data, BREEAM is likely in future to establish consistent and complimentary targets as part of demonstrating compliance with this BREEAM issue (see also Additional information).

CN6

Frequency of site monitoring See criterion 4.

In this context, visits should occur at key stages of the construction process, at times where: works can be observed before they are covered up or new works or trades start; where significant risks of conflicts or errors could occur; where timing is critical to demonstrating compliance; where key evidence is required to be produced at specific times including, but not limited to photographic, delivery notes and other documentary evidence; and where different trades and systems come together and one could harm the integrity or compliance of another system's performance against BREEAM requirements.

Building type specific CN7

Healthcare (NHS sites) See criterion 1.

As a pre-requisite of awarding any of the available credits for this issue, the principal contractor must achieve the measure requiring operation of ‘An Environmental Management System’ (as defined in criterion 1 One credit – Environmental management).

Methodology None.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Refer to generic evidence requirement above

Final post construction stage

A copy of the principal contractors EMS/EMAS certificate or for BS8555, evidence of their status e.g. a copy of their phase 4 audit

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Man 03 Responsible construction practices

Management

Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

Refer to generic evidence requirement above

Where certified materials were used, copies of all relevant certificates/chain of custody evidence

Refer to generic evidence requirement above

Scheme certificate and/or compliance report

Additional information Relevant definitions Compliant organisational, local or national considerate construction schemes The following are defined as compliant schemes for the purpose of this BREEAM issue: Considerate Constructors Scheme. To achieve BREEAM credits using the Considerate Constructors Scheme (CCS) and its Code of Considerate Practice, the principal contractor must achieve scheme certification and a CCS score as follows: 1. One credit: a CCS score between 25 and 34* 2. Two credits: a CCS score between 35 and 39** 3. Exemplary level performance: a CCS score of 40 or more**. * A score of at least 5 in each of the five sections must be achieved. ** A score of at least 7 in each of the five sections must be achieved. A site can be visited by a CCS Monitor more than once and the CCS Certificate will be awarded based on the results of the CCS Monitor’s final visit. At the final stage of the BREEAM assessment, the number of BREEAM credits awarded should therefore be based on the final visit and the subsequent Monitor’s report and certified CCS score. Considerate Constructors Scheme The Considerate Constructors Scheme (CCS) is a national initiative set up by the UK construction industry to improve its image. The scheme is a self-financing, independent organisation owned by the Construction Umbrella Bodies (Holdings) Ltd (made up of the Construction Products Association and the Construction Industry Council). Sites and companies that register with the scheme sign up and are monitored against a Code of Considerate Practice, designed to encourage best practice beyond statutory requirements. Construction processes The construction process includes the enabling works, assembly, installation and dis-assembly activities necessary for servicing the construction and completion of a new building.

Dedicated off-site manufacturing or fabrication Production of a component or material carried out in an off-site manufacturing or processing facility specifically set up for a development project. Factory gate For the purposes of this issue, the factory gate is defined as being the product manufacturer gate (i.e. where manufacture and pre-assembly finishes and the material is in its final product form). Examples might include: 1. Steel/concrete/glass manufacturers for cladding, windows and beams etc. 2. Quarry gate for aggregate and sand 3. Concrete plant for concrete 4. Saw mill and timber processing plant for timber.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Management

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Sustainability Champion (Construction) Members of formal schemes approved by BRE Global in connection with the provision of design advice. At present the following schemes are deemed to satisfy this requirement: BREEAM Accredited Professional (AP) Membership Scheme BRE Site Sustainability Manager Membership Scheme. Sustainability Champions are trained and qualified to provide BREEAM-related advice to the design team to facilitate timely and successful target setting, scheduling, prioritisation and monitoring of BREEAM compliance relating to the design of the building. They will be subject to ongoing training and competency requirements to ensure that their knowledge is maintained. Providers of schemes/qualifications not listed, who feel their members meet this definition and who would like to be listed as approved membership schemes, should contact BRE Global. Note: The aim of the Sustainability Champion credits is to encourage an integrated design and construction process that uses BREEAM as a framework for establishing, agreeing and achieving the desired level of sustainability performance for the project. The Sustainability Champion credits in this BREEAM issue focus on achieving this objective through the provision of appropriate expertise during the construction, handover and close out stages of the project. BREEAM Accredited Professional (AP) Refer to Man 01 Project brief and design. Site Sustainability Manager An individual qualified by BRE to: help to ensure quality in project delivery and to minimise the environmental impacts of the construction process, as well as achieving the intentions of the building designers. They are based on-site and ensure that the construction-site is managed in an environmentally efficient manner and that the site teams are confident in achieving the exacting regulations and requirements of environmental certification schemes, for example BREEAM. Only qualified individuals who are members of BRE's associated membership scheme and are registered to the scheme throughout the period of construction comply with the BREEAM requirements. This membership ensures an adequate level of competence is maintained through regular continuing professional development (CPD) in key relevant areas.

Other information CO2 reporting protocols At time of publication, the following guidance is available for CO2 measuring protocols. 1. Encord: http://www.encord.org. They have launched a CO2 reporting protocol. 2. GHG Protocol - http://www.ghgprotocol.org 3. DECC guidance for business: https://www.gov.uk/measuring-and-reporting-environmental-impacts-guidance-forbusinesses

Tools for monitoring and targeting construction-site impacts BRE’s online environmental reporting tool, SMARTWaste, enables users to capture, monitor and target a project's on-site energy consumption and produce a CO2 footprint, water consumption and responsible sourcing of timber. Transport and CCS data can also be collected. The system can be used as a tool to help meet the criteria of this issue and as a source of evidence for demonstrating compliance. It is available through the SMARTWaste Membership scheme. by developing tailormade versions of SMARTWaste. More details on the tool and membership are available at www.smartwaste.co.uk

Compliant organisational, local or national considerate construction schemes Where a considerate construction/constructors scheme exists and is not listed as a BREEAM-compliant scheme, the scheme administrator/operator should apply to BRE Global Ltd. for details on how to achieve recognition as a compliant scheme.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Man 03 Responsible construction practices

Management

Constructing Excellence and reporting of construction-site impacts Constructing Excellence publishes the construction industry key performance indicators (KPIs) based on data collected by the Department for Business, Innovation and Skills via a voluntary quarterly survey returned by contractors throughout the UK. The Office of National Statistics also reports the annual results in the Construction Statistics Annual. One of the key performance indicators is the ‘amount of CO2 emissions caused by the energy used during the construction process per £100,000 of project value (kgCO2/£100k). Information collated by contractors as part of their voluntary submissions to Constructing Excellence may also serve to help demonstrate compliance with this BREEAM issue. 1Working at construction and demolition-sites: PPG6, Pollution Prevention Guidelines. Environment Agency, Northern Ireland

Environment Agency (NIEA) and the Scottish Environmental Protection Agency (SEPA); 2012. www.environmentagency.gov.uk/business, www.sepa.org.uk

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Management

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Man 04 Commissioning and handover Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Yes

Aim To encourage a properly planned handover and commissioning process that reflects the needs of the building occupants.

Assessment criteria This issue is split into four parts: Commissioning and testing schedule and responsibilities (1 credit) Commissioning building services (1 credit) Testing and inspecting building fabric (1 credit) Handover (1 credit). The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

One credit - Commissioning and testing schedule and responsibilities

1. A schedule of commissioning and testing that identifies and includes a suitable timescale for commissioning and recommissioning of all complex and non-complex building services and control systems and testing and inspecting building fabric. 2. All commissioning activities are carried out in accordance with current Building Regulations, BSRIA1 and CIBSE2 guidelines and/or other appropriate standards, where applicable. Where a building management system (BMS) is specified, refer to compliance note CN5 on BMS commissioning procedures. 3. An appropriate project team member(s) is appointed to monitor and programme pre-commissioning, commissioning, testing and, where necessary, re-commissioning activities on behalf of the client. 4. The principal contractor accounts for the commissioning and testing programme, responsibilities and criteria within their budget and main programme of works, allowing for the required time to complete all commissioning and testing activities prior to handover.

One credit - Commissioning building services

5. For buildings with complex building services and systems, a specialist commissioning manager is appointed during the design stage (by either the client or the principal contractor) with responsibility for: a. Undertaking design reviews and giving advice on suitability for ease of commissioning. b. Providing commissioning management input to construction programming and during installation stages. c. Management of commissioning, performance testing and handover/post-handover stages. Where there are simple building services, this role can be carried out by an appropriate project team member (see criterion 3), provided they are not involved in the general installation works for the building services system(s).

One credit - Testing and inspecting building fabric

6. The commissioning and testing schedule and responsibilities credit is achieved. 7. The integrity of the building fabric, including continuity of insulation, avoidance of thermal bridging and air leakage paths is quality assured through completion of post construction testing and inspection. Dependent on building type or construction, this can be demonstrated through the completion of a thermographic survey as well as an airtightness test and inspection (see compliance notes CN6 and CN7. The survey and testing is undertaken by a Suitably Qualified

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Man 04 Commissioning and handover

Management

Professional (see Relevant definitions) in accordance with the appropriate standard. 8. Any defects identified in the thermographic survey or the airtightness testing reports are rectified prior to building handover and close out. Any remedial work must meet the required performance characteristics for the building/element.

One credit - Handover

9. A Building User Guide (BUG) is developed prior to handover for distribution to the building occupiers and premises managers (see Relevant definitions). 10. A training schedule is prepared for building occupiers/premises managers, timed appropriately around handover and proposed occupation plans, which includes the following content as a minimum: a. The buildingâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s design intent b. The available aftercare provision and aftercare team main contact(s), including any scheduled seasonal commissioning and post occupancy evaluation c. Introduction to, and demonstration of, installed systems and key features, particularly building management systems, controls and their interfaces d. Introduction to the Building User Guide and other relevant building documentation, e.g. design data, technical guides, maintenance strategy, operations and maintenance (O&M) manual, commissioning records, log book etc. e. Maintenance requirements, including any maintenance contracts and regimes in place.

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Commissioning and testing schedule and responsibilities, commissioning building services, criteria 1 to 5 Option1 - Shell only: These criteria are not applicable. Option 2 - Shell and core: With regard to the scope of services being specified/installed, all criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Testing and inspecting building fabric, criteria 6 to 8 Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Handover, criterion 9 Option1 - Shell only: This criterion is not applicable. Option 2 - Shell and core: The guide includes, as far as possible, all relevant sections regarding the services and fabric installed. On completion of works the building owner/agent/user hands it over to the fit-out contractor, who can then complete the relevant sections based on the fit-out strategy. Handover, criterion 10 Both options: This criterion is not applicable. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Management

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

Commissioning and testing schedule and responsibilities (1 credit) 1. Criteria 2 to 4. Simplification of criteria under consideration Handover (1 credit) 2. Criteria 9 and 10

Other appropriate standards See criterion 2.

Appropriate standards for completion of this criteria are referenced accordingly and include standards covering:

CN4

Process-related equipment See criterion 2.

Any process or manufacture-related equipment specified as part of the project may be excluded from the assessment of the commissioning credits, except where they form an integral part of the building HVAC services, such as some heat recovery systems.

CN5

BMS commissioning procedures See criterion 2.

Where a building management system (BMS) is specified, the following commissioning procedures must be carried out: 1. Commissioning of air and water systems is carried out when all control devices are installed, wired and functional 2. In addition to air and water flow results, commissioning results include physical measurements of room temperatures, off-coil temperatures and other key parameters as appropriate 3. The BMS/controls installation should be running in auto with satisfactory internal conditions prior to handover 4. All BMS schematics and graphics (if BMS is present) are fully installed and functional to user interface before handover 5. The occupier or facilities team is fully trained in the operation of the system.

CN6

Scope of the thermographic survey

The thermographic survey must cover 100% of the treated spaces, unless it is a large complex building (see CN7), and ensure that all elements of the building fabric that enclose an internal heated and/or conditioned (treated) zone of the building will be tested. This includes internal walls separating treated and untreated zones.

CN7

Thermographic survey of large complex buildings

In the case of large and complex buildings, it may be impractical for the thermographic survey and air-tightness testing to cover 100% of the building. Where a complete thermographic survey is deemed impractical by a Level 2 qualified thermographic surveyor, the guidance in air tightness standard TSL2 3 should be followed on the extent of the survey and testing. This could include airports, large hospitals and high-rise buildings.

General CN3

building fabric commercial refrigeration fume cupboards microbiological safety cabinets.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Man 04 Commissioning and handover

Management

Ref

Terms

Description

CN8

Remediation work

Any remediation work undertaken, resulting from a thermographic surveyor airtightness test of the building, should be robust and durable, i.e. the remedial work must have the same performance characteristics and life expectancy of the surrounding element(s).

CN9

Thermographer qualification

The thermographic survey is normally undertaken by a Suitably Qualified Professional holding a valid Level 2 certificate in thermography (see Relevant definitions). Where a Level 2 thermographer is not available at the site, the survey may be undertaken by a Level 1 thermographer and then the images interpreted by a Level 2 thermographer.

Methodology None.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

7, 8

Refer to generic evidence requirement above

Thermographic survey and level 2 thermography certificate

9, 10

Refer to generic evidence requirement above

Building User Guide

Additional information Relevant definitions Building User Guide (BUG) Dedicated building/site specific guidance for the non-technical building user. The purpose of the guide is to help building users access, understand and operate the building efficiently and in a manner in keeping with the original design intent. A Building User Guide will provide easily accessible and understandable information relevant to the following stakeholders: The buildingâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s staff (or where relevant residents) The non-technical facilities management team/building manager Other building users, e.g. visitors/community users The content of the guide will be specific to the building type and end users, but broadly should include information on the following:

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Management

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Overview of the building and its environmental strategy, e.g. energy/water/waste efficiency policy/strategy and how users should engage with/deliver the policy/strategy. Building services overview and access to controls, e.g. where to find them, what they control, how to operate effectively and efficiently etc. Pre-arrival information for visitors, e.g. access and security procedures/provisions Provision of, and access to, shared facilities Safety and emergency information/instructions Building related operational procedures specific to building type/operation, e.g. laboratories. Building related incident reporting/feedback arrangements Building related training information/links Provision of, and access to, transport facilities, e.g. public transport, cyclist facilities, pedestrian routes etc. Provision of, and access to, local amenities Re-fit, refurbishment and maintenance arrangements/considerations Links, references and relevant contact details There is no requirement on the format the Building User Guide should take. Complex systems These include, but are not limited, to air-conditioning, comfort cooling, mechanical ventilation, displacement ventilation, complex passive ventilation, building management systems (BMS), renewable energy sources, microbiological safety cabinets and fume cupboards, cold storage enclosures and refrigeration plant, fume cupboards, microbiological safety cabinets. Suitably Qualified Professionals - thermographic survey and airtightness testing Thermography surveys and airtightness testing are to be undertaken by suitably qualified professionals in accordance with the appropriate standards, as follows: Airtightness testing: by professionals with membership of ATTMA (Air Tightness Testing and Measurement Association) attained at organisational level maintaining UKAS accreditation (as air tightness testing laboratories to ISO 17025). Thermographic survey: by a professional holding a valid Level 2 certificate in thermography,as defined by the UKTA website http://www.ukta.org.

Other information Thermal bridging assessments It is good practice to carry out thermal bridging assessments at the design stage. This is encouraged through building regulations for energy conservation by allowing the use of actual values in the energy calculation, which could make a significant improvement over using the default values in the National Calculation Methodology. This is reflected in the Ene 01 Energy Use and Carbon Emissions Reduction issue, so no additional credit is offered within this issue for thermal bridging assessments. However, good thermal bridging design and assessment will contribute to successful building fabric testing results and the associated credit. 1BSRIA Commissioning Guides:

Commissioning HVAC Systems: Guidance on the division of responsibilities (TM 1/88.1) Commissioning of Air Systems (BG 49/2013) Pre-Commission Cleaning of Pipework Systems (BG 29/2012) Commissioning Water Systems (BG 2/2010) Commissioning Job Book - A framework for managing the commissioning process (BG 11/2010) 2CIBSE Commissioning Codes: Set of Seven Codes (2003) CIBSE Commissioning Code A: Air Distribution Systems (1996 confirmed 2006). ISBN: 9780900953736 CIBSE Commissioning Code B: Boilers ISBN: 9781903287293 CIBSE Commissioning Code C: Automatic Controls ISBN: 9781903287132 CIBSE Commissioning Code L: Lighting (SLL Commissioning Code L). ISBN: 9781903287323 CIBSE Commissioning Code M: Commissioning Management. ISBN: 9781903287330 CIBSE Commissioning Code R: Refrigerating Systems. ISBN: 9781903287286 CIBSE Commissioning Code W: Water Distribution Systems ISBN: 9781906846152. 3Measuring air permeability of building envelopes (non-dwellings), Technical standard Level 2 (TSL2). The Air Tightness Testing & Measurement Association (ATTMA). October 2010

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Man 05 Aftercare

Management

Man 05 Aftercare Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Yes

Aim To provide post-handover aftercare to the building owner/occupants during the first year of occupation to ensure the building operates and adapts, where relevant, in accordance with the design intent and operational demands.

Assessment criteria This issue is split into three parts: Aftercare support (1 credit) Seasonal commissioning (1 credit) Post occupancy evaluation (1 credit). The following is required to demonstrate compliance :

One credit - Aftercare support

1. There is (or will be) operational infrastructure and resources in place to provide aftercare support to the building occupier(s), which includes the following as a minimum: a. A meeting programmed to occur between the aftercare team/individual and the building occupier/management (prior to initial occupation, or as soon as possible thereafter) to: i. Introduce the aftercare team or individual to the aftercare support available, including the Building User Guide (where existing) and training schedule/content. ii. Present key information about the building including the design intent and how to use the building to ensure it operates as efficiently and effectively as possible. b. On-site facilities management training, to include a walkabout of the building and introduction to and familiarisation with the building systems, their controls and how to operate them in accordance with the design intent and operational demands. c. Initial aftercare support provision for at least the first month of building occupation, e.g. on-site attendance on a weekly basis to support building users and management (this could be more or less frequent depending on the complexity of the building and building operations). d. Longer term aftercare support provision for occupants for at least the first 12 months from occupation, e.g. a helpline, nominated individual or other appropriate system to support building users/management. 2. There is (or will be) operational infrastructure and resources in place to co-ordinate the collection and monitoring of energy and water consumption data for a minimum of 12 months, once the building is occupied. This is done to facilitate analysis of discrepancies between actual and predicted performance, with a view to adjusting systems and/or user behaviours accordingly.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Management

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

One credit - Seasonal commissioning

3. The following seasonal commissioning activities will be completed over a minimum 12-month period, once the building becomes substantially occupied: a. Complex systems - Specialist Commissioning Manager: i. Testing of all building services under full load conditions, i.e. heating equipment in mid-winter, cooling/ventilation equipment in mid-summer, and under part load conditions (spring/autumn). ii. Where applicable, testing should also be carried out during periods of extreme (high or low) occupancy. iii. Interviews with building occupants (where they are affected by the complex services) to identify problems or concerns regarding the effectiveness of the systems. iv. Re-commissioning of systems (following any work needed to serve revised loads), and incorporating any revisions in operating procedures into the operations and maintenance (O&M) manuals. b. Simple systems (naturally ventilated) - external consultant/aftercare team/facilities manager: i. Review thermal comfort, ventilation, and lighting, at three, six and nine month intervals after initial occupation, either by measurement or occupant feedback. ii. Take all reasonable steps to re-commission systems following the review to take account of deficiencies identified and incorporate any relevant revisions in operating procedures into the O&M manuals.

One credit - Post occupancy evaluation

4. The client or building occupier makes a commitment to carry out a post-occupancy evaluation (POE) exercise one year after initial building occupation. This is done to gain in-use performance feedback from building users to inform operational processes, including re-commissioning activities, and maintain or improve productivity, health, safety and comfort. The POE is carried out by an independent party (seeMan 01 Project brief and design – Relevant definitions) and needs to cover: a. A review of the design intent and construction process (review of design, procurement, construction and handover processes). i. Internal environmental conditions (light, noise, temperature, air quality) ii. Control, operation and maintenance iii. Facilities and amenities iv. Access and layout v. Other relevant issues vi. Sustainability performance (energy/water consumption, performance of any sustainable features or technologies e.g. materials, renewable energy, rainwater harvesting etc.). b. A review of the design intent and construction process (review of design, procurement, construction and handover processes). c. Feedback from a wide range of building users including facilities management on the design and environmental conditions of the building covering: i. Internalenvironmental conditions (light, noise, temperature, air quality) ii. Control, operation and maintenance iii. Facilities and amenities iv. Access and layout v. Other relevant issues. d. Sustainability performance (energy/water consumption, performance of any sustainable features or technologies e.g. materials, renewable energy, rainwater harvesting etc.). 5. The client or building occupier makes a commitment to carry out the appropriate dissemination of information on the building’s post-occupancy performance. This is done to share good practice and lessons learned and inform changes inuser behaviour, building operational processes and procedures, and system controls. Refer to compliance notes CN4, CN5 and CN5 for a definition of appropriate dissemination. This also provides advice on appropriate dissemination where the building or building information is commercially or security sensitive.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Man 05 Aftercare

Management

Exemplary level criteria The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve one innovation credit for this BREEAM issue: 6. There is (or will be) operational infrastructure and resources in place to co-ordinate the following activities at quarterly intervals for the first three years of building occupation: a. Collection of occupant satisfaction, energy consumption and water consumption data. b. Analysis of the data to check the building is performing as expected and make any necessary adjustments to systems controls or to inform building user behaviours. c. Setting targets for reducing water and energy consumption and monitor progress towardss these. d. Feedback any ‘lessons learned’ to the design team and developer for use in future projects. e. Provision of the actual annual building energy, water consumption and occupant satisfaction data to BRE.

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue is not applicable.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Collection and monitoring of energy and water consumption data See criteria 2 and 4.

This function can be coordinated/carried out by a dedicated aftercare team or, where the building occupier is known and able to confirm compliance based on their existing or proposed operations for the building, the building owner/occupier’s estates/facilities management team.

General CN3

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Management

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Terms

Description

CN4

Appropriate dissemination of post-occupancy evaluation information See criterion 4.

1. Appropriate dissemination includes communication to immediate stakeholders such as building occupants, managers and owners. In addition information should be communicated externally. 2. Appropriate dissemination in most cases will be the production and publication of a building case study through one of the following means: 1. Client’s/building owner’s own website, publicly available literature or press release 2. Industry/sector or government/local authority sponsored website or information portals. Where there is a demonstrably justifiable reason why public dissemination is not possible, for example the information is commercially or security sensitive, compliance can be demonstrated by a commitment to produce and disseminate the relevant information at an organisational level or to appropriate internal/external stakeholders. Alternatively, the sensitive parts of the relevant information for dissemination can be omitted from the publication.

CN5

Relevant information for dissemination See criterion 4.

This includes the following information about the building and its performance: 1. A basic description of the project and building 2. BREEAM rating and score 3. The key innovative and low-impact design features of the building 4. Project cost 5. Project size: floor area, site area 6. Facilities available for community use (where relevant) 7. Any steps taken during the construction process to reduce environmental impacts, i.e. innovative construction management techniques 8. Predicted and actual carbon dioxide emissions and/or Energy Performance Certificate rating. 9. Outcomes of the post-occupancy evaluation study, to share lessons learned from the project including: a. Occupant feedback b. Energy and water consumption including renewable energy generation, level of rainwater/grey water provision.

CN6

Provision of annual energy and water consumption and occupant satisfaction data See criterion 4.

One way of demonstrating compliance with this criterion is for the client/end user to register and therefore commit the building for assessment under the relevant part of the BREEAM In-Use scheme.

Methodology None.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Man 05 Aftercare

Management

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Refer to generic evidence requirement above

Contract to provide compliant aftercare support and training

Refer to generic evidence requirement above

Seasonal commissioning records/reports and letter of appointment

Additional information Relevant definitions Complex systems These include, but are not limited to, air-conditioning, mechanical ventilation, displacement ventilation, complex passive ventilation, building management systems (BMS), renewable energy sources, microbiological safety cabinets and fume cupboards, cold storage enclosures and refrigeration plant, fume cupboards, microbiological safety cabinets. Specialist Commissioning Manager The Specialist Commissioning Manager is a specialist contractor rather than a general sub-contractor.

Other information Soft Landings Framework1 A framework written and produced by Usable Buildings Trust (UBT) and Building Services Research and Information Association (BSRIA) that seeks to promote improved briefing, design, handover and building performance in-use. Embedding the principles of this framework within a project should ensure that the evidence is available to demonstrate compliance with particular aspects of the criteria under this BREEAM issue. Please also note that BSRIA has produced a BREEAM New Construction/Soft landings interpretation note2 for clients and design teams. The Government Soft Landings (GSL) is a version of the Soft Landings concept tailored for use on public sector related projects to link in with the work of the government’s Building Information Modelling Task Group. It is to be mandated in 2016 alongside Building Information Modelling (BIM) Level 2 and is to be implemented by central government departments.It should be noted that the GSL programme will become compulsory for local government developments after 2016. Further information is available from: http://www.bimtaskgroup.org/government-soft-landings 1The Soft Landings Framework, for better briefing, design, handover and building performance in-use, Usable Buildings Trust

(UBT), BSRIA BG 4/2009. 2BREEAM 2011 and Soft Landings, an interpretation note for clients and designers, BSRIA BG 28/2011.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Health and Wellbeing Category overview Weightings

Minimum standards

Fully fitted 15%

Shell only 10%

Shell and core 10.5%

None

Summary This category encourages the increased comfort, health and safety of building occupants, visitors and others within the vicinity. Issues in this section aim to enhance the quality of life in buildings by recognising those that encourage a healthy and safe internal and external environment for occupants.

Category summary table Issue ID

Issue name

Credits

Hea 01

Visual comfort

Up to 6

Potential for disabling glare has been designed out of all relevant building areas. Good practice daylighting levels have been met. Floor space in relevant building areas has an adequate view out to reduce eyestrain and provide a link to the outside. Internal and external lighting systems are designed to avoid flicker and provide appropriate illuminance (lux) levels. Internal lighting is zoned to allow for occupant control.

Hea 02

Indoor air quality

Minimising sources of air pollution through careful design specification and planning. Building ventilation strategy is designed to be flexible and adaptable to potential future building occupant needs and climatic scenarios.

Hea 03

Safe containment in laboratories

Production of an objective risk assessment of the proposed laboratory facilities. Containment devices such as fume cupboards meet best practice safety and performance requirements and objectives. Containment level 2 and 3 laboratory facilities to meet best practice safety and performance criteria where specified.

Credit summary

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Health and Wellbeing

Issue ID

Issue name

Credits

Credit summary

Hea 04

Thermal comfort

Thermal modelling carried out to appropriate standards. Projected climate change scenario(s) considered as part of the thermal model. The thermal modelling analysis has informed the temperature control strategy for the building and its users.

Hea 05

Acoustic performance

The building meets appropriate acoustic performance standards and testing requirements in terms of: Sound insulation Indoor ambient noise level Reverberation times.

Hea 06

Safety and security

Provision of effective measures which support safe access to and from the building. Security needs are understood and taken into account in the design and specification.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Hea 01 Visual comfort Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Building type dependent

Aim To ensure daylighting, artificial lighting and occupant controls are considered at the design stage to ensure best practice in visual performance and comfort for building occupants.

Assessment criteria This issue is split into four parts: Glare control (1 credit) Daylighting (up to 2 credits - building type dependent) View out (1 credit except for a Healthcare building with inpatient areas, which has 2 credits available) Internal and external lighting (1 credit) The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

One credit - Glare control

1. The potential for disabling glare has been designed out of all relevant building areas using a glare control strategy, either through building form and layout and/or building design measures (see compliance note CN3). 2. The glare control strategy avoids increasing lighting energy consumption, by ensuring that: a. The glare control system is designed to maximise daylight levels under all conditions while avoiding disabling glare in the workplace or other sensitive areas. The system should not inhibit daylight from entering the space under cloudy conditions, or when sunlight is not on the facade. AND b. The use or location of shading does not conflict with the operation of lighting control systems.

Up to two credits - Daylighting (building type dependent)

3. Daylighting criteria have been met using either of the following options: a. The relevant building areas meet good practice daylight factor(s) and other criterion as outlined in Table - 10 and Table - 11. OR b. The relevant building areas meet good practice average and minimum point daylight illuminance criteria as outlined in Table - 12.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Hea 01 Visual comfort

Health and Wellbeing

Table - 10: Minimum values of average daylight factor required Building/area type

Credits

Average daylight factor required

Minimum area (m2) to comply

Pre-schools, schools, further educationoccupied spaces

80%

Higher educationoccupied spaces

60%

OR Higher educationoccupied spaces

80%

Living rooms, dining rooms, studies (including home office)

80%

Non-residential or communal occupied spaces

80%

Other requirements

Education buildings EITHER (a) OR {(b) and (c)} in Table - 11

Healthcare buildings Staff and public areas Occupied patient’s areas (dayrooms, wards) and consulting rooms

EITHER (a) OR {(b) and (c)} in Table - 11

Multi-residential buildings Kitchen

EITHER (a) OR (c) in Table - 11

Retail buildings Sales areas

35%

Point daylight factors of 2% or more

Other occupied areas

80%

EITHER (a) OR {(b) and (c)} in Table - 11

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Building/area type

Credits

Average daylight factor required

Minimum area (m2) to comply

Other requirements

Courts, Industrial, Office, Prison buildings and all Other building types Cells and custody cells

1.5%

80%

N/A

Internal association or atrium area (prison buildings only)

80%

EITHER a uniformity ratio of at least 0.7 OR a minimum point daylight factor of 2.1%

Patient care spaces

80%

EITHER (a) OR {(b) and (c)} in Table - 11

Teaching, lecture and seminar spaces

80%

EITHER (a) OR {(b) and (c)} in Table - 11

All occupied spaces, unless indicated in Relevant definitions

80%

EITHER (a) OR {(b) and (c)} in Table - 11

Table - 11: Daylighting uniformity criteria Ref

Criteria

(a)

A uniformity ratio of at least 0.3 or a minimum point daylight factor of at least 0.3 times the relevant average daylight factor value in Table - 10. Spaces with glazed roofs, such as atria, must achieve a uniformity ratio of at least 0.7 or a minimum point daylight factor of at least 0.7 times the relevant average daylight factor value in Table - 10.

(b)

At least 80% of the room has a view of sky from desk or table top height (0.85m in multi-residential buildings, 0.7m in other buildings).

(c)

The room depth criterion d/w +d/HW < 2/(1-RB) is satisfied. Where: d = room depth, w = room width, HW = window head height from floor level, RB = average reflectance of surfaces in the rear half of the room, Note: Table - 17 gives maximum room depths in metres for different room widths and window head heights of side-lit rooms

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Hea 01 Visual comfort

Health and Wellbeing

Table - 12: Space type and illuminance requirements - both criteria (average illuminance and minimum point illuminance) should be met. Area type

Credits

Minimum area to comply

Average daylight illuminance (averaged over entire space)

Minimum daylight illuminance at worst lit point

At least 300 lux for 2000 hours per year or more

At least 90 lux for 2000 hours per year or more

Education buildings Pre-schools, schools, further education occupied spaces

80%

Higher education occupied spaces

60%

OR Higher education occupied spaces

80%

At least 300 lux for 2000 hours per year or more

At least 90 lux for 2000 hours per year or more

80%

At least 300 lux for 2650 hours per year or more

100%

At least 100 lux for 3450 hours per year or more

At least 30 lux for 3450 hours per year or more

At least 100 lux for 3450 hours per year or more

At least 30 lux for 3450 hours per year or more

80%

At least 200 lux for 2650 hours per year or more

At least 60 lux for 2650 hours per year or more

Healthcare buildings Staff and public areas

Occupied patient's areas (dayrooms, wards) and consulting rooms Multi-residential buildings Kitchen

Living rooms, dining rooms, studies (including home office) Nonresidential/communal occupied spaces Retail buildings Sales areas

35%

At least 200 lux point daylight illuminances for 2650 hours per year or more

Other occupied areas

80%

At least 200 lux for 2650 hours per year or more

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

At least 60 lux for 2650 hours per year or more

Health and Wellbeing

Area type

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Credits

Minimum area to comply

Average daylight illuminance (averaged over entire space)

Minimum daylight illuminance at worst lit point

Courts, Industrial, Office, Prison buildings and all Other building types Cells and custody cells

80%

At least 100 lux for 3150 hours per year or more

N/A

Internal association/atrium area

80%

At least 300 lux for 2650 hours per year or more

At least 210 lux for 2650 hours per year or more

Patient care spaces

80%

Teaching, lecture and seminar spaces

80%

At least 300 lux for 2000 hours per year or more

At least 90 lux for 2000 hours per year or more

80%

At least 300 lux for 2000 hours per year or more

At least 90 lux for 2000 hours per year or more

All occupied spaces, unless indicated in Relevant definitions

One credit - View out

4. 95% of the floor area in relevant building areas is within 7m of a wall which has a window or permanent opening that provides an adequate view out. 5. The window/opening must be ≥ 20% of the surrounding wall area (refer to Relevant definitions in the Additional information section). Where the room depth is greater than 7m, compliance is only possible where the percentage of window/opening is the same as, or greater than, the values in table 1.0 of BS 8206 1. 6. In addition, the building type criteria in Table - 13 are applicable to view out criteria.

Table - 13: View out building specific requirements. Building type

View out requirements

Prison buildings

Cells An adequate view out from a normal standing or sitting position and the distance between each window and nearest external solid object (i.e. buildings, screens, walls/fences) is ≥ 10m. Where existing features prevent compliance with this criteria in less than 20% of the cells within the building, the credit can still be awarded. Patient occupied spaces See Healthcare requirements for these spaces.

Multi-residential buildings

Self-contained flats - living rooms Sheltered housing - communal lounges, individual bedrooms and bedsits All positions within relevant areas are to be within 5m of a wall which has a window or permanent opening providing an adequate view out. The window/opening must be ≥ 20% of the surrounding wall area.

Healthcare buildings with inpatient areas (one additional credit)

Patient occupied spaces, e.g. wards and dayrooms As criteria 4 and 5 for the relevant building areas PLUS the distance between the wall with the window/opening and nearest external solid object (e.g. buildings, screens, walls/fences) is ≥ 10m.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Hea 01 Visual comfort

Health and Wellbeing

One credit - Internal and external lighting levels, zoning and control Internal lighting 7. All fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps are fitted with high frequency ballasts. 8. Internal lighting in all relevant areas of the building is designed to provide an illuminance (lux) level appropriate to the tasks undertaken, accounting for building user concentration and comfort levels. This can be demonstrated through a lighting design strategy that provides illuminance levels in accordance with the SLL Code for Lighting 2012 and any other relevant industry standard. 9. For areas where computer screens are regularly used, the lighting design complies with CIBSE Lighting Guide 7 2 sections 3.3, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8 and 4.9. This gives recommendations highlighting: a. Limits to the luminance of the luminaires to avoid screen reflections. (Manufacturers’ data for the luminaires should be sought to confirm this.) b. For uplighting, the recommendations refer to the luminance of the lit ceiling rather than the luminaire; a design team calculation is usually required to demonstrate this. c. Recommendations for direct lighting, ceiling illuminance, and average wall illuminance.

External lighting 10. All external lighting located within the construction zone is designed to provide illuminance levels that enable users to perform outdoor visual tasks efficiently and accurately, especially during the night. To demonstrate this, external lighting provided is specified in accordance with BS 5489-1:2013 Lighting of roads and public amenity areas3 and BS EN 12464-2:2014 Light and lighting - Lighting of work places - Part 2: Outdoor work places.

Zoning and occupant control 11. Internal lighting is zoned to allow for occupant control (see Relevant definitions) in accordance with the criteria below for relevant areas present within the building: a. In office areas, zones of no more than four workplaces b. Workstations adjacent to windows/atria and other building areas separately zoned and controlled c. Seminar and lecture rooms: zoned for presentation and audience areas d. Library spaces: separate zoning of stacks, reading and counter areas e. Teaching space or demonstration area f. Whiteboard or display screen g. Auditoria: zoning of seating areas, circulation space and lectern area h. Dining, restaurant, café areas: separate zoning of servery and seating/dining areas i. Retail: separate zoning of display and counter areas j. Bar areas: separate zoning of bar and seating areas k. Wards or bedded areas: zoned lighting control for individual bed spaces and control for staff over groups of bed spaces l. Treatment areas, dayrooms, waiting areas: zoning of seating and activity areas and circulation space with controls accessible to staff. Note: the criteria for zoning of lighting control are excluded for assessments of prison buildings. 12. Areas used for teaching, seminar or lecture purposes have lighting controls provided in accordance with CIBSE Lighting Guide 5 4 13. In addition the building type criteria in Table - 14 (where relevant);

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Table - 14: Internal and external lighting building specific requirements. Building type

Internal and external lighting requirements

Education buildings

Manual lighting controls are easily accessible for the teacher while teaching and on entering/leaving the teaching space.

Prison buildings

Cells Lit to a maintained illuminance of 200 lux at table top level. In addition there must be the facility (using, for example, dimming, step switching or separate task and general lighting) for the occupant of the cell to select a lower level of general lighting if required. Exercise yards Lit to a maintained illuminance of at least 10 lux. However, if such spaces are, or will be, used as sports facilities they must be lit to a maintained illuminance of 100 lux.

Court buildings

Separate zoning is also provided for the following areas (as a minimum): 1. Judge’s/magistrate’s bench 2. Dock 3. Jury area 4. Public seating area. Lighting control of the zones in the above spaces, and the courtroom as a whole, cater for the following settings: 1. Full lighting (to allow cleaning etc.) 2. Normal lighting (for court sessions) 3. Dimmed (for the purpose of showing audio-visual evidence, but allowing enough light for note taking).

Exemplary level criteria The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for daylighting: 14. Daylighting criteria have been met using either of the following options: a. Relevant building areas meet exemplary daylight factor(s) and the relevant criteria in Table - 15. OR b. Relevant building areas meet exemplary average and minimum point daylight illuminance criteria in Table - 16.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Hea 01 Visual comfort

Health and Wellbeing

Table - 15: Exemplary level values of average daylight factor required. Area type

Credits

Average daylight factor required

Minimum area (m2) to comply

Other requirements

All building types

The criteria outlined in Table - 16 concerning uniformity ratio (a), view of sky (b) or room depth criterion (c) are met where they are used to demonstrate compliance.

All building types (excluding retail – see below) Functions as identified in the standard criteria (multi storey buildings)

80%

Where used, a minimum point daylight factor of 1.2% OR 2.1% for spaces with glazed roofs, such as atria

Functions as identified in the standard criteria (single storey buildings)

80%

Where used, a minimum point daylight factor of 1.6% OR 2.8% for spaces with glazed roofs, such as atria

Prisons and court cells

80%

N/A

Prison internal association/atrium area

80%

A uniformity ratio of at least 0.7 or a minimum point daylight factor of 3.5%

N/A

50%

A point daylight factor of 2%

Common areas and offices (multi storey buildings)

80%

Where used, a minimum point daylight factor of 1.2% OR 2.1% for spaces with glazed roofs, such as atria

Common areas and offices (single storey buildings)

80%

Where used, a minimum point daylight factor of 1.6% OR 2.8% for spaces with glazed roofs, such as atria

Retail Sales areas

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Table - 16: Exemplary level illuminance value requirements. Both criteria (average illuminance and minimum point illuminance) should be met. Area type

Credits

Minimum area to comply

Average daylight illuminance (averaged over entire space)

Minimum daylight illuminance at worst lit point

80%

At least 300 lux for 2650 hours per year or more

At least 90 lux for 2650 hours per year or more

Single storey buildings Occupied spaces (unless indicated below)

80%

At least 300 lux for 3000 hours per year or more

At least 120 lux for 3000 hours per year or more; or in spaces with glazed roofs (such as atria), at least 210 lux for 3000 hours per year or more

Prisons and courts buildings Cells and custody cells

80%

At least 100 lux for 3450 hours per year or more

N/A

Prison buildings Internal association or atrium areas

80%

At least 300 lux for 3250 hours per year or more

At least 210 lux for 3250 hours per year or more

50%

At least 300 lux point daylight illuminances for 2000 hours per year or more

80%

Select relevant criteria above for occupied spaces dependant on whether you are assessing a multi-storey or single storey building.

All building types (excluding retail – see below) Multi-storey buildings Occupied spaces (unless indicated below)

Retail Retail buildings Sales areas Retail buildings Other occupied areas

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Hea 01 Visual comfort

Health and Wellbeing

Checklists and tables Reflectance for maximum room depths and window head heights The table below gives maximum room depths in metres for different room widths and window head heights of side-lit rooms. Table - 17: Reflectance for maximum room depths and window head heights Reflectance (RB) 0.4 Room width (m)

0.5

0.6

3.0

10.0

3.0

10.0

3.0

10.0

2.5

4.5

6.7

5.4

8.0

6.8

10.0

3.0

5.0

7.7

6.0

9.2

7.5

11.5

3.5

5.4

8.6

6.5

10.4

8.1

13.0

Window head height (m)

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Glare control, criteria 1 to 2 Both options : All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Daylighting, criteria 3 and 14 Both options : All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. View out, criteria 4 to 6 Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Internal lighting, zoning and occupant control, criteria 7 to 9, 11 to 13 Both options : These criteria are not applicable. External lighting, criteria 10, 13 Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

CN1.1

Glare control

Both options The design team must demonstrate how the glare control criteria will be met without a reliance on blinds when the building is occupied.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Terms

Description

CN1.2

View out

Both options Where it is not possible to confirm which areas of the building will contain workstations/benches or desks, then all areas of the building designed for and/or likely to be occupied by workstations/benches or desks must comply with the relevant criteria.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

General Glare control CN3

Compliant forms of glare control curtains as glare control

Compliant shading measures for meeting glare control criteria include: building integrated measures (e.g. low eaves) occupant controlled devices such as blinds (where transmittance value is < 0.1 (10%)) bioclimatic design external shading or brise soleil. Glare control must provide shading from both high level summer and low level winter sun. Where using fixed systems, design studies can be used to demonstrate that sunlight is prevented from reaching building occupants during occupied hours. Curtains (where used without other forms of shading) do not meet the criteria for the glare control criteria, as they do not provide sufficient control to optimise daylight in to the space. Furthermore, the use of curtains to control glare is likely to cause occupants to rely more on artificial lighting.

Daylighting CN4

Percentage of assessed area See criterion 3.

Where the criteria specify that a percentage of floor area must be adequately illuminated by daylight, this refers to the percentage of the total floor area of all the rooms that must be assessed, i.e. the compliant area. If for example, a development has six rooms that must be assessed, each 150m2 (total area 900m2) and 80% of this floor area must meet the criterion, then 720m2 must comply with the criterion; this is equal to 4.8 rooms. The number of rooms that must comply must always be rounded up; therefore in this example, five rooms must have an average daylight factor of 2% or more (plus meet the other criteria) to achieve the credit.

CN5

External obstructions

In calculating minimum and average daylight factors and daylight illuminances, external obstructions should be taken into account. For illuminance calculations, the reflectance of external obstructions should be taken as 0.2 unless on-site measurements of external reflectance have been made.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Hea 01 Visual comfort

Health and Wellbeing

Ref

Terms

Description

CN6

Dirt factors when calculating daylight

Daylight calculations should include a maintenance factor for dirt on the windows, as given in British Standard Code of Practice for daylighting, BS8206 Part 2, appendix A1.3.

CN7

Borrowed light

For areas where borrowed light is used to demonstrate compliance with daylighting criteria, calculations or results from appropriate lighting design software must be provided to demonstrate that such areas meet the BREEAM criteria (if the light from these sources is required in order for the room to comply). Examples of borrowed light include: light shelves, clerestory glazing, sun pipes or internal translucent/transparent partitions (such as those using frosted glass).

CN8

Room depth criterion rooms lit from two opposite sides

For rooms lit by windows on two opposite sides, the maximum room depth that can be satisfactorily illuminated by daylight is twice the limiting room depth (d) (measured from window wall to window wall; CIBSE Lighting Guide LG10 5. The reflectance of the imaginary internal wall should be taken as 1.

CN9

Uniformity with rooflights

The room depth criteria cannot be used where the lighting strategy relies on rooflights. In such areas either appropriate software has to be used to calculate the uniformity ratio or, in the case of a regular array of rooflights across the whole of the space, figure 2.36 (page 37) within CIBSE Lighting Guide LG10 can be used to determine the uniformity ratio.

CN10

Daylighting uniformity ratio Calculation

The uniformity ratio calculation, minimum point daylight factor and minimum daylight illuminance can exclude areas within 0.5m of walls. Areas within 0.5m are not regarded as part of the working plane for this purpose, although they are included in the average daylight factor and average daylight illuminance calculations.

CN11

View of sky requirement See criterion 3.

To comply with the view of sky criteria (ref (b)) in Table - 11, at least 80% of the room that complies with the average daylight factor requirement must receive direct light from the sky, i.e. it is permissible for up to 20% of the room not to meet the view of sky requirement and still achieve a compliant room.

Internal and external lighting levels/zoning and control CN12

Relevant industry standard for lighting design

Pre-schools, schools and sixth form colleges: Building Bulletin 90: ‘Lighting Design for Schools’6 Please note that for care homes housing people with dementia the following standard can be used instead of the SLL Code for Lighting: Design Lighting for People with Dementia, University of Stirling, Stirling, 2013 7. Please note that the illuminance levels specified in the SLL Code for Lighting, 2012 align with BS EN 12464-1 8.

CN13

Occupancy/ workstation layout unknown

Where occupancy or workstation layout is not known, lighting control can be zoned on the basis of 40m2 grids, i.e. an assumption of 1 person/workspace per 10m2.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Terms

Description

CN14

Small spaces

Buildings consisting entirely of small rooms/spaces (less than 40m2) which do not require any subdivision of lighting zones/control will meet the zoning criteria by default.

CN15

Zones of four workspaces

The limit of four workspaces is indicative of the required standard but is not a fixed requirement. Where there is justification for this to be increased to fit with the adopted lighting strategy, this may be accepted provided that the assessor is satisfied that the aim of this criterion is upheld, i.e. that there is suitable zoning/control of lighting to enable a reasonable degree of occupant control over lighting in their personable work area. The relevant design team member, e.g. lighting consultant, should set out how this is to be achieved in such an instance.

CN16

Lighting zoning and control auditoria spaces

The controls specified will depend on the size and use of the space but a typical auditorium or lecture theatre with stepped seating and a formal lectern/demonstration/performance area would typically be expected to have lighting controls as follows: 1. Full normal lighting (to allow for entry/exit, cleaning etc.) 2. Demonstration area lighting off and audience area lighting reduced to a low level (for the purpose of line slide projection, but allowing enough light for the audience to take notes) 3. All lighting off (for the projection of tone slides, colour slides, and for the purposes of visual demonstrations/performances) 4. Separate localised lectern lighting.

Building type specific CN17

Education Education Funding Agency (EFA) requirements

For Education buildings, where the EFA daylighting requirements have been achieved, for all relevant rooms within the building (in accordance with Priority School Building Programme (PSBP) Authority Draft, Facilities Output Specification: Generic Design Brief by the Education Funding Agency, June 2013 9), it can be assumed that the BREEAM daylighting requirements have also been met and therefore the two credits available for daylighting can be awarded by default. In this instance, evidence would need to be provided to demonstrate that the EFA requirements have been achieved.

CN18

Education (pre-schools) and acute Special Educational Needs (SEN) controls for children

Where child care and/or acute SEN spaces are included within the scope of the assessment, controls should be provided for the teacher/member of staff, i.e. it is not a necessity for the controls to be accessible to the children. Where nursery spaces are included within the scope of the assessment, controls should be provided for the member of staff, not the nursery school children.

Methodology None.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Hea 01 Visual comfort

Health and Wellbeing

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

3, 4

Daylighting calculations

Refer to generic evidence requirement above

Additional information Relevant definitions Adequate view out BREEAM defines an adequate view out as a view of a landscape or buildings (rather than just the sky) at seated eye level (1.2 – 1.3m) within the relevant building areas and should ideally be through an external window. A view into an internal courtyard or atrium will comply provided the distance from the opening to the back wall of the courtyard/atrium is at least 10m (therefore allowing enough distance for the eyes to refocus). The view cannot be an internal view across the room, as this is likely to become obstructed by partitions, filing cabinets etc. Average daylight factor The average daylight factor is the average indoor illuminance (from daylight) on the working plane within a room, expressed as a percentage of the simultaneous outdoor illuminance on a horizontal plane under an unobstructed CIE Standard Overcast Sky. Clinical areas Areas of the building in which medical functions are carried out that require specific restricted environmental conditions such as humidity, daylighting, temperature, etc. (e.g. X-ray, operating department, delivery room, etc). Computer simulation Software tools that can be used to model more complex room geometries for daylighting. Construction zone For the purpose of this BREEAM issue the construction zone is defined as the site which is being developed for the BREEAM-assessed building, and the external site areas that fall within the scope of the new works. Illuminance The amount of light falling on a surface per unit area, measured in lux. Occupied space A room or space within the assessed building that is likely to be occupied for 30 minutes or more by a building user. Please note there is a specific, unrelated, definition of 'unoccupied' with reference to acoustic testing and measurement and this should not be confused with the definition used here. Patient areas Areas of the building used mainly by inpatients (e.g. wards, dayrooms, etc.). Point daylight factor A point daylight factor is the ratio between the illuminance (from daylight) at a specific point on the working plane within a room, expressed as a percentage of the illuminance received on an outdoor unobstructed horizontal plane. This is based on an assumed overcast sky, approximated by the ‘CIE (Commission Internationale de l’Eclairage)

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

overcast sky’. The minimum point daylight factor is the lowest value of the daylight factor on the working plane at a point that is not within 0.5m of a wall. Similarly the minimum illuminance is calculated at the worst lit point on the working plane that is not within 0.5m of a wall. These points will usually be close to a rear corner of the room. Computer simulations are the most appropriate tools to allow for point daylight factors and illuminances to be calculated. Public areas Within a Healthcare building type, this includes areas of the building designed for public use where no medical functions are carried out (e.g. reception, retail unit, waiting areas). Relevant building areas: Daylighting For the purpose of BREEAM this is defined as areas within the building where good daylighting is considered to be of benefit to the building users (typically those areas occupied continuously for 30 minutes or more). This includes the following (where occupied continuously for 30 minutes or more) specifically stated because they are often omitted; 1. Sports hall exercise spaces 2. Laboratory areas unless the type of research that will be carried out requires strictly controlled environmental conditions, such as the exclusion of natural light at all times. 3. Self-contained flats 4. Kitchen and catering areas 5. General communal areas 6. Small offices (including those within multi-residential buildings) 7. Meeting rooms (including those within multi-residential buildings) 8. Leisure areas 9. Any area that may involve close up work. However, this excludes the following (where present): 1. Media, arts production, SEN sensory spaces, x-ray rooms and other areas requiring strictly controlled acoustic or lighting conditions 2. Clinical areas with controlled environmental conditions, e.g. operating theatres, delivery rooms or pathology. However, BREEAM strongly advises that the benefits from daylighting and view out are seriously considered when designing areas of critical and intensive care in Healthcare buildings. 3. Holding areas and custody cells where security issues conflict with the BREEAM daylighting requirements 4. Custody cells in courts, where privacy is a functional/operational requirement. Glare control For glare control include areas of the building where lighting and resultant glare could be problematic for users, e.g. those areas that have been designed to contain/use workstations, projector screens etc. and sports halls. Spaces in the categories described above, for which daylight and view out are excluded, should not be assessed against the glare control criteria. View out BREEAM defines relevant building areas requiring a view out to include areas of the building where: 1. There are or will be workstations/benches or desks for building users. 2. Close work will be undertaken or visual aids will be used. 3. A view out is deemed to be of benefit to the building occupants, e.g. in spaces where occupants are likely to spend a significant amount of time. Excluded areas for each of these might include: 1. Nurse bases where they are located centrally in a ward/patient area in order to enable patient observation. 2. Courtrooms and interview rooms where compliance is not possible due to security or privacy criteria. 3. Prison staff areas containing workstations that for security or observational purposes must be located centrally within the building. 4. Any clinical areas where the control of environmental/operational conditions prevents such spaces from providing a view out. 5. Conference rooms, lecture theatres, sports halls, acute SEN and also any spaces where the exclusion or limitation of natural light is a functional requirement e.g. laboratories, media spaces, etc.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Hea 01 Visual comfort

Health and Wellbeing

Internal and external lighting Where no external light fittings are specified (either separate from or mounted on the external building façade or roof), the criteria relating to external lighting do not apply and the credit can be awarded on the basis of compliance with the internal lighting criteria. The following internal areas are excluded from the lighting zone requirements: 1. Media and arts production spaces 2. Sports facilities (exercise spaces only, including hydrotherapy and physiotherapy areas). Lighting zoning For rooms or spaces not listed within criterion 12, the assessor can exercise an element of judgement when determining whether the specification is appropriate for the space given its end use, and the aim and criteria of this BREEAM issue. Separate zoning control Light switches or controls for a particular area/zone of the building that can be accessed and operated by the individual(s) occupying that area or zone. Such controls will be located within, or within the vicinity of, the zone or area they control. Staff areas Areas of the building used mainly by staff (e.g. offices, meeting rooms, staff rooms) and medical areas where patients are admitted but that do not require restricted environmental conditions (e.g. consulting rooms, physiotherapy, etc). Surrounding wall area Surrounding wall area refers to the area (in m2) of the internal wall on which the window/opening is located, including the area of the window/opening itself. Uniformity The uniformity is the ratio between the minimum illuminance (from daylight) on the working plane within a room (or minimum daylight factor) and the average illuminance (from daylight) on the same working plane (or average daylight factor). View of sky/no-sky line Areas of the working plane have a view of sky when they receive direct light from the sky, i.e. when the sky can be seen from working plane height. The no-sky line divides those areas of the working plane, which can receive direct skylight, from those that cannot. Working plane CIBSE LG10 defines the working plane as the horizontal, vertical or inclined plane in which a visual task lies. The working plane is normally taken as 0.7m above the floor for offices and 0.85m for industry.

Other information None. 1BS 8206-2:2008 Lighting for buildings Code of practice for daylighting 2CIBSE Lighting Guide 7, 2005 3BS 5489-1:2013 Lighting of roads and public amenity areas, Code of Practice for the design of road lighting, BSI, 2013 4SLL LIGHTING GUIDE 5: Lecture, teaching and conference rooms, 1991 5CIBSE Lighting Guide LG10 Daylighting and window design, 1999. 6Building Bulletin 90: ‘Lighting Design for Schools’ 7Pollock R, McNair D, McGuire B and Cunningham C, Design Lighting for People with Dementia, Dementia Services

Development Centre, University of Stirling, Stirling, 2013 8BS EN 12464-1:2014 Light and lighting. Lighting of work places. Indoor work places, 2003 9Priority School Building Programme PSBP Authority Draft, Facilities Output Specification: Generic Design Brief by the Education Funding Agency, June 2013

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Hea 02 Indoor air quality Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Building type dependent

Aim To recognise and encourage a healthy internal environment through the specification and installation of appropriate ventilation, equipment and finishes.

Assessment criteria This issue is split into two parts: Minimising sources of air pollution (4 credits) Adaptability - potential for natural ventilation (1 credit) Note: The potential for natural ventilation credit does not apply to buildings on a prison development. The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

Minimising sources of air pollution One credit - Indoor air quality (IAQ) plan 1. An indoor air quality plan has been produced, with the objective of facilitating a process that leads to design, specification and installation decisions and actions that minimise indoor air pollution during occupation of the building. The indoor air quality plan must consider the following: a. Removal of contaminant sources b. Dilution and control of contaminant sources c. Procedures for pre-occupancy flush out d. Third party testing and analysis e. Maintaining indoor air quality in-use

One credit- Ventilation The building has been designed to minimise the concentration and recirculation of pollutants in the building as follows: 2. Provide fresh air into the building in accordance with the criteria of the relevant standard for ventilation. 3. Design ventilation pathways to minimise the build-up of air pollutants in the building, as follows: a. In air conditioned and mixed mode buildings/spaces: i. The buildingâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s air intakes and exhausts are over 10m apart and intakes are over 20m from sources of external pollution. OR ii. The location of the building's air intakes and exhausts, in relation to each other and external sources of pollution, is designed in accordance with BS EN 13779:2007 1 Annex A2. b. In naturally ventilated buildings/spaces: openable windows/ventilators are over 10m from sources of external pollution. 4. Where present, HVAC systems must incorporate suitable filtration to minimise external air pollution, as defined in BS EN 13779:2007 Annex A3.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Hea 02 Indoor air quality

Health and Wellbeing

5. Areas of the building subject to large and unpredictable or variable occupancy patterns have carbon dioxide (CO ) or air 2 quality sensors specified and: a. In mechanically ventilated buildings/spaces: sensor(s) are linked to the mechanical ventilation system and provide demand-controlled ventilation to the space. b. In naturally ventilated buildings/spaces: sensors either have the ability to alert the building owner or manager when CO levels exceed the recommended set point, or are linked to controls with the ability to adjust the quantity of 2 fresh air, i.e. automatic opening windows/roof vents.

One credit - Volatile organic compound (VOC) emission levels (products) 6. All decorative paints and varnishes specified meet the criteria in Table - 18 7. At least five of the seven remaining product categories listed in Table - 18 meet the testing requirements and emission levels criteria for volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions (listed in the table).

One credit - Volatile organic compound (VOC) emission levels (post construction) 8. The formaldehyde concentration level is measured post construction (but pre-occupancy) and is found to be less than or equal to 100µg/averaged over 30 minutes (WHO guidelines for indoor air quality: Selected pollutants, 2010 2). 9. The total volatile organic compound (TVOC) concentration level is measured post construction (but pre-occupancy) and found to be less than 300µg/over 8 hours, in line with the building regulation requirements. 10. Where VOC and formaldehyde levels are found to exceed the limits defined in criteria 10 and 11, the project team confirms the measures that have, or will be taken, in accordance with the IAQ plan, to reduce the levels to within these limits. 11. The testing and measurement of the above pollutants are in accordance with the following standards where relevant: a. BS ISO 16000-4: 2011 Diffusive sampling of formaldehyde in air 3 b. BS ISO 16000-6: 2011 VOCs in air by active sampling 4 c. BS EN ISO 16017-2: 2003 VOCs - Indoor, ambient and workplace air by passive sampling 5 d. BS ISO 16000-3: 2011 6 formaldehyde and other carbonyls in air by pumped sampling. 12. The measured concentration levels of formaldehyde (µg/m3) and TVOC (µg/m3) are reported, via the BREEAM Assessment Scoring and Reporting Tool.

Adaptability - Potential for natural ventilation One credit (credit not applicable to prison buildings) 13. The building ventilation strategy is designed to be flexible and adaptable to potential building occupant needs and climatic scenarios. This can be demonstrated as follows: a. Occupied spaces of the building are designed to be capable of providing fresh air entirely via a natural ventilation strategy. The following are methods deemed to satisfy this criterion dependent upon the complexity of the proposed system: i. Room depths are designed in accordance with CIBSE AM10 (section 2.4) to ensure effectiveness of any natural ventilation system. The openable window area in each occupied space is equivalent to 5% of the gross internal floor area of that room/floor plate. OR ii. The design demonstrates that the natural ventilation strategy provides adequate cross flow of air to maintain the required thermal comfort conditions and ventilation rates. This is demonstrated using ventilation design tool types recommended by CIBSE AM10 7 (or for education buildings by using the ClassVent tool). For a strategy which does not rely on openable windows, or which has occupied spaces with a plan depth greater than 15m, the design must demonstrate (in accordance with criterion 13.a.i. above) that the ventilation strategy can provide adequate cross flow of air to maintain the required thermal comfort conditions and ventilation rates. 14. The natural ventilation strategy is capable of providing at least two levels of user-control on the supply of fresh air to the occupied space (see compliance note CN6 for further details). Note: Any opening mechanisms must be easily accessible and provide adequate user-control over air flow rates to avoid draughts. Relevant industry standards for ventilation can be used to define ‘adequate levels of fresh air’ sufficient for occupancy and internal air pollution loads relevant to the building type. Note: Multi-residential buildings with self-contained flats and individual bedrooms must have a degree of openable window function. This does not need to provide two levels of user-control (as required above), but must be occupant controlled.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Exemplary level criteria Minimising sources of air pollution - volatile organic compound (VOC) emission levels (products) The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve innovation credits for this BREEAM issue:

One credit 15. Criterion 6 has been achieved. 16. All seven remaining product categories listed in Table - 18 meet the testing requirements and emission levels criteria for Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) emissions (listed in the table). 17. For products b) – f) listed in Table - 18, the formaldehyde emission levels have been measured and found to be less than or equal to 0.06mg/m3 air in accordance with the approved testing standards in Table - 18.

Two credits 18. Criterion 6 has been achieved. 19. All seven remaining products categories listed in Table - 18 meet the testing requirements and emission levels criteria for Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) emissions (listed in the table). 20. For products B to F listed in Table - 18, the formaldehyde emission levels have been measured and found to be less than or equal to 0.01mg/m3 air, in accordance with the approved testing standards in Table - 18.

Checklists and tables Table - 18: VOC criteria by product type Ref

Product

Paints and varnishes

Requirements

Performance requirements

VOC content limit

Compliant performance standard

EU Directive 2004/42/CE ('Paints Directive')

Compliant testing standard

BS EN ISO 11890-2:2013 – Paints and varnishes – Determination of VOC content, Part 2 – Gas Chromatographic method

Manufacturer also to confirm

Paint to be fungal and algal resistant in wet areas e.g. bathrooms, kitchens, utility rooms

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Hea 02 Indoor air quality

Health and Wellbeing

Ref

Product

Wood panels (including particle board, fibreboard including MDF, OSB, cement bonded particle board, plywood, solid wood panel and acoustic board)

Requirements

Option 1 - Performance requirements

Formaldehyde E1 class

Option 1 - Compliant performance standard

BS EN 13986:2004 Wood-based panels for use in construction - Characteristics evaluation of conformity and marking

Option 1 – Compliant testing standard(s)

BS EN 717-1:2004 Wood-based panels – Determination of formaldehyde release - Part 1: Formaldehyde emission by the chamber method

Option 2 – Performance requirements

Formaldehyde level of 0.1mg/m3

Option 2 – Compliant testing standard(s)

1. BS EN ISO 16000-9:2006 Indoor air - Part 9: Determination of the emission of volatile organic compounds from building products and furnishing Emission test chamber method. OR 2. Standard method for the testing and evaluation of volatile organic chemical emissions from indoor sources using environmental chambers, version 1.1 Emission testing method for California Specification 01350, Californian Department for Public Health, 2010. Note: For either method the resultant emission/surface area obtained from the chamber test method must be extrapolated to predict what the emissions would be in a theoretical model room (as detailed in the standard) and this extrapolated emission rate compared with the required formaldehyde level of 0.1mg/m3.

Manufacturer also to confirm

The absence of prohibited wood preservatives/biocides.

Timber structures (e.g. glue laminated timber) Option 1 - Performance requirements

Formaldehyde E1 Class

Option 1 - Compliant performance standards

BE EN 14080:2005 Timber structures - Glues laminated timber - Requirements

Option 1 - Compliant testing standards

BS EN 717-1:2004 Wood-based panels – Determination of formaldehyde release - Part 1: Formaldehyde emission by the chamber method

Option 2 - Performance requirements

As category B above.

Option 2 - Compliant testing standards

As category B above.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Product

Wood flooring (e.g. parquet)

Requirements

Option 1 - Performance requirements

Formaldehyde E1 Class

Option 1 - Compliant performance standard

BS EN 14342:2005+A1:2008 Wood flooring Characteristics, evaluation of conformity and marking

Option 1 - Compliant testing standards

BS EN 717-1:2004 Wood-based panels – Determination of formaldehyde release - Part 1: Formaldehyde emission by the chamber method

Option 2 - Performance requirements

As category B above.

Option 2 - Compliant testing standards

As category B above

Resilient textile and laminated floor coverings (e.g. vinyl, linoleum, cork, rubber, carpet, laminated wood flooring) Option 1 - Performance requirements

Option 1 - Formaldehyde E1 Class

Option 1 - Compliant performance standard

BS EN 14041:2006 Resilient, textile and laminate floor coverings - Essential characteristics

Option 1 - Compliant testing standards

BS EN 717-1:2004 Wood-based panels – Determination of formaldehyde release - Part 1: Formaldehyde emission by the chamber method

Option 2 - Performance requirements

As category B above.

Option 2 - Compliant testing standards

As category B above.

Suspended ceiling tiles Option 1 - Performance requirements

Formaldehyde E1 Class

Option 1 - Compliant performance standard

BS EN 13964:2004+A1:2006 Suspended ceilings Requirements and test methods

Option 1 - Compliant testing standards

BS EN 717-1:2004 Wood-based panels – Determination of formaldehyde release - Part 1: Formaldehyde emission by the chamber method

Option 2 - Performance requirements

As category B above.

Option 2 - Compliant testing standards

As category B above.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Hea 02 Indoor air quality

Ref

Product

Flooring adhesives

Requirements

Performance requirements

Carcinogenic or sensitising volatile substances are substantially absent

Compliant performance standard

BS EN 13999-1:2013 Adhesives - Short term method for measuring the emission properties of low-solvent or solvent-free adhesives after application - Part 1: General procedure

Compliant testing standard

Health and Wellbeing

1. BS EN 13999-1:2013 Adhesives - Short term method for measuring the emission properties of low-solvent or solvent-free adhesives after application - Part 1: General procedure 2. BS EN 13999-2:2013 Adhesives - Short term method for measuring the emission properties of low-solvent or solvent-free adhesives after application - Part 2: Determination of volatile organic compounds 3. BS EN 13999-3:2007+A1:2009 Adhesives - Short term method for measuring the emission properties of low-solvent or solvent-free adhesives after application - Part 3: Determination of volatile aldehydes 4. BS EN 13999-4:2007+A1:2009 Adhesives - Short term method for measuring the emission properties of low-solvent or solvent-free adhesives after application - Part 4: Determination of volatile diisocyanates

Wall coverings Performance requirements

Compliant performance standard

Compliant testing standard

Vinyl chloride monomer (VCM) content Formaldehyde level Migration of heavy metals 1. BS EN 233:1999 Wallcoverings in roll form Specification for finished wallpapers, wall vinyls and plastic wall coverings 2. BS EN 234:1997 Wallcoverings in roll form Specification for wallcoverings for subsequent decoration 3. BS EN 259-1:2001 Wallcoverings in roll form - Heavy duty wallcoverings - Part 1: Specifications BS EN 12149:1998 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Wall coverings in roll form. Determination of migration of heavy metals and certain other elements, of vinyl chloride monomer and of formaldehyde release

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Health and Wellbeing

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Product

Requirements

Relevant standards - VOCs

All standards outlined inTable - 18 above are standards recognised across Europe and internationally for VOC content and testing. In instances where a product is not assessed against the listed European or International standard, it is acceptable to use an alternative, nationally recognised, standard provided the following is met as a minimum: 1. The performance level requirements required by the alternative standard are equivalent to or better than those specified in the standards in Table - 18. For example, if a material containing formaldehyde has been added to the floor covering product as part of the production process, then the E1 emission measured for formaldehyde must be less than 0.124mg/m3 (as required by BS EN 14041:2004). 2. Where an alternative standard omits evaluation of a particular material, it is only acceptable to use the alternative standard in instances where the product does not contain that particular material. BREEAM Assessors should seek confirmation from BRE Global prior to awarding credits for compliance with standards not listed in Table - 18 or previously approved as alternative nationally recognised standards.

Products with no formaldehyde containing materials

For some floor coverings and wood-based panels, the requirement for formaldehyde testing (referred to in the above criteria) does not apply to “floor coverings to which no formaldehyde-containing materials were added during production or post-production processing”, or in the case of EN 13986:2004, wood-based panels. As such, if a product manufacturer confirms that they have made a declaration of formaldehyde class E1 without testing (in writing or via a company product fact sheet or literature) then the product in question meets the BREEAM requirement relevant to formaldehyde testing. A declaration of E1 without testing is effectively confirmation from the manufacturer that formaldehyde emissions comply with the emission level requirements of the relevant standard(s) and therefore, evidence confirming the actual emission level(s) via testing will not be required by the assessor to demonstrate compliance with that particular requirement.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Indoor air quality, criterion 1 Both options: This criterion is not applicable. Ventilation, criteria 2 to 5 Option 1 - Shell only: These criteria are not applicable. Option 2 - Shell and core: Criteria 2 and 3 are applicable. Criterion 4 and 5 do not apply. VOC's, criteria 6 to 12 and 15 to 20 Both options: These criteria are not applicable. Adaptability - Potential for natural ventilation, criteria 13 to 14 Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Hea 02 Indoor air quality

Health and Wellbeing

Ref

Terms

Description

CN1.1

Ventilation systems See criteria 2 to 5.

Option 2 - Shell and core: Where ventilation systems are not within the remit of the shell and core developer, compliance can be demonstrated through the building servicing strategy where this is predetermined by the built form or core services provision as appropriate to the shell and core option being followed.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

Indoor air quality - N/A Ventilation (1 credit) 1. Criteria 2 and 3; criteria 4 and 5 are not applicable Volatile organic compound (VOC) (1 credit) 2. Criteria 6 and 7; criteria 8 to 12 are not applicable Adaptability - Potential for natural ventilation (1 credit - not applicable to prison buildings) 3. Criteria 13 and 14 Exemplary level criteria (upto 2 credits) 4. Criteria 15 to 20

General CN3

Furnishings

The scope of the VOC credits does not extend to furnishings, e.g. desks or shelving, it focuses on the key internal finishes and fittings integral to the building.

CN4

Mechanically ventilated or cooled buildings See criteria 15 and 16.

Buildings that employ a mechanically ventilated/cooled strategy are still able to achieve this credit provided it can be demonstrated that the features required by the criteria can be made easily available to the building user, e.g. windows fixed shut for an air conditioned strategy can be modified to be opening windows. The aim of the potential for natural ventilation criteria is to ensure that a building is capable of providing fresh air using a natural ventilation strategy. Where the building is predominantly naturally ventilated, but mechanical ventilation is necessary to boost ventilation during peak conditions, (i.e. maximum occupancy and/or peak temperature conditions) due to the function/specific usage patterns of the building, the potential for natural ventilation credit can still be awarded provided calculations/modelling demonstrate that the mechanical ventilation system will be required for â&#x2030;¤ 5% of the annual occupied hours in the occupied space(s) for the adopted building design/layout.

CN5

VOCs - number of products required to comply See criterion 7.

Where five or fewer products are specified within the building, the number of products that needs to be assessed for the VOC criteria reduces proportionally as follows: Where five products are present, four must comply Where four products are present, three must comply Where three products are present, two must comply Where two or fewer products are present, all must comply.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Terms

Description

CN6

Levels of ventilation See criterion 14.

The two levels of ventilation must be able to achieve the following:

CN7

Industrial areas: air pollution/ventilation rate requirements

For industrial buildings, the minimising sources of air pollution and adaptability (potential for natural ventilation) criteria and credits apply only to office areas and not to operational areas. If the building does not contain any office areas, this issue is not applicable.

CN8

Measuring the distance. See criteria 3a and 3b.

The distance requirement for air intakes and extracts does not necessarily mean the plan distance, but the three-dimensional distance around and over objects, e.g. on plan the air intakes may be less than 20m from a source of external pollution, but the intake may be on the roof of a 10-storey building and therefore over 20m from the source of pollution.

Higher level: higher rates of ventilation achievable to remove short term odours and/or prevent summertime overheating Lower level: adequate levels of draught-free fresh air to meet the need for good indoor air quality throughout the year, sufficient for the occupancy load and the internal pollution loads of the space.

Building type specific CN9

Healthcare Window openings See criteria 13 and 14.

In healthcare buildings some openings in public and patient areas need to be provided with restricted opening distances of not more than 100mm (HBN 00-10 Part D: Windows and associated hardware8). This is for health and safety reasons, especially where windows are within reach of the elderly, mentally ill or children. However, it is felt that good design can overcome these restrictions and provide compliant natural ventilation solutions, even in safety-sensitive areas.

Methodology None.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Final post construction stage

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Hea 02 Indoor air quality

Health and Wellbeing

Additional information Relevant definitions Areas with a large and unpredictable occupancy The following are examples of these types of space: auditoria gyms retail stores or malls cinemas waiting rooms. Where the assessed building does not have any areas deemed to be large with an unpredictable pattern of occupancy, the criterion does not apply. ClassVent ClassVent is a customised spreadsheet design tool that provides a means of sizing ventilation openings for a natural ventilation strategy for school classrooms. The tool was developed by the Department for Children, Families and Schools (formerly DfES). The tool can be downloaded from http://www.teachernet.gov.uk/docbank/index.cfm?id=9955 Clinical areas See issue Hea 01 Visual comfort.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Occupied spaces See relevant definition provided in issue Hea 01 Visual comfort. The following building areas, where relevant to the building type, can be excluded from the definition of occupied spaces for the potential for natural ventilation criteria: 1. Ancillary building areas, e.g. WCs, corridors, stairwells, store rooms, plant rooms 2. Swimming/hydrotherapy pools 3. Catering and small staff kitchens 4. Washrooms or changing areas 5. Laboratory or other areas where strictly controlled environmental conditions are a functional requirement of the space 6. Custody cells and holding areas in law courts 7. Operational, shop floors or ancillary areas in industrial buildings 8. Healthcare buildings: rooms or departments where control of ventilation is required for prevention of cross infection and/or controlled environmental conditions including: a. Operating theatres b. Laser surgery unit c. Operative imaging unit d. Intensive treatment unit e. Infectious diseases isolation unit f. Wards housing immuno-compromised patients g. Manufacturing pharmacy h. Specialised imaging, X-ray and scanning unit i. Pathology containment laboratories j. Mortuary and dissection suite k. Research laboratories and associated animal houses l. Sterilising and disinfecting unit (SDU) m. Emerging treatment technologies including gene therapy and stem cell units n. Areas immediately adjacent to the above are excluded if it can be demonstrated that reverse air flow would be likely with natural ventilation o. Any other areas which require mechanical ventilation to satisfy the requirements of Healthcare Technical Memoranda p. Any other areas that require mechanical ventilation due to specific operational-related processes. Occupied spaces requiring local exhaust ventilation, e.g. laboratories, workshops and food technology rooms, must still demonstrate that they meet the criteria for potential for natural ventilation (unless listed as an exempted area in this definition). Openable window area The openable window area is defined as the geometric free ventilation area created when a ventilation opening, e.g. window, is open to its normal operational fully designed extent for ventilation purposes (i.e. this excludes open areas created when reversible windows are opened for cleaning etc). It is not the glazed area of a faĂ§ade or the glazed area of the part of the window that is openable (unless it opens fully). Relevant standards (ventilation) Education buildings: Building Bulletin 101 Ventilation of School Buildings, April 2014. Offices spaces: Top of the range recommended in the British Council for Offices Guide to Best Practice in the Specification of Offices9 i.e. 12 litres per second per person. Clinical areas with controlled environmental conditions: HTM 03-01 Specialised ventilation for healthcare premises10 (England, Wales and Northern Ireland) Relevant standards are not listed for all areas/building types as the provision of fresh air is adequately covered in Approved Document Part F Ventilation (and the standards referenced therein). Sources of external pollution This includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Highways and the main access roads on the assessed site 2. Car parks and delivery/vehicle waiting bays 3. Other building exhausts, including from building services plant industrial/agricultural processes

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Hea 02 Indoor air quality

Health and Wellbeing

Service and access roads with restricted and infrequent access (for example roads used only for waste collection) are unlikely to represent a significant source of external pollution. These roads can therefore be excluded from the criteria of this issue. This does not include vehicle pick-up/drop-off or waiting bays. Volatile organic compound (VOC) Any organic liquid and/or solid that evaporates spontaneously at the prevailing temperature and pressure of the atmosphere with which it is in contact (Source: BS EN ISO 11890).

Other information Idoor air quality and measurement The testing and measurement of pollutants must be in accordance with the relevant standards (as listed in the Hea 02 Indoor air qualitytable ). Sample measurements should normally be taken in representative habitable or occupiable rooms, so not every room in a building would need to be sampled (see below for examples of representative room types). For example, in an office, one sample in a cellular/single occupancy office should suffice to assess the VOC concentration of the air for that type of habitable space in the building (assuming the other cellular offices have the same specification). In larger rooms, such as open plan office areas, further sampling locations should be used to understand the homogeneity of the atmosphere. Depending upon the performance of the measurement method in terms of repeatability and the required level of confidence in the value obtained, replicate samples may be taken at one or more sampling locations. Prior to measurements being taken, the ventilation and heating systems should be operating for a period of time to ensure the relevant spaces in the building reach equilibrium in terms of their internal environmental conditions. Typically this may take between 12 to 24 hours. Examples of representative room types include: naturally ventilated carpeted office, mechanically ventilated vinyl floored meeting room, workshop, living room or bedroom. Rooms that are not habitable or occupiable may, for example, include toilets, store rooms, plant rooms, stairways or corridors. The definition of 'habitable or occupiable rooms' comes from Approved Document F, Means of Ventilation, HM Government, 2010. In accordance with the criteria, where levels are found to exceed the defined limits, the credit can only be claimed where the project team confirms the measures that have, or will be undertaken in accordance with the IAQ plan, to reduce the TVOC and formaldehyde levels to within the required limits. This information is provided to assist project teams and BREEAM assessors on the appropriate scope of IAQ testing; therefore it is guidance only and not a requirement of complying with BREEAM. The testing regime should be determined based on the advice of the appropriate person appointed to conduct the testing, in order to determine and report representative values of indoor air quality for the building. There are a number of publications available on the issue of measuring and improving the indoor air quality in buildings including BR 450, A protocol for the assessment of indoor air quality in homes and office buildings, Crump, Raw, Upton, Scivyer, Hunter, Hartless. BRE (2002).

Volatile organic compounds VOCs are emitted by a wide array of products numbering in the thousands. Examples include: paints and lacquers, paint strippers, cleaning supplies, pesticides, building materials and furnishings, glues and adhesives, urea-formaldehyde foam insulation (UFFI), pressed wood products (hardwood plywood wall panelling, particleboard, fibreboard) and furniture made with these pressed wood products. ‘No’ or ‘low’ VOC paints are available from most standard mainstream paint manufacturers. The emissions of VOCs from paints and varnishes are regulated by the Directive 2004/42/CE, implemented in the UK by the Volatile Organic Compounds in Paints, Varnishes and Vehicle Refinishing Products Regulation 2005. Products containing high organic solvent content should also be avoided (EU VOC Solvent Directive 1999/13/EC). Exposure risk assessment of any possible release of chemicals from manufactured products and their possible impact on health and the environment generally, is an important requirement of European regulations. The possible impact of a building product on indoor air quality is included in the European Construction Products Directive, 89/106/EEC. The amended Directive, 93/68/EEC provided the criteria for CE Marking of products.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Products to be fitted in buildings should not contain any substances regulated by the Dangerous Substances Directive 2004/42/CE, which could cause harm to people by inhalation or contact. Materials containing heavy metals (e.g. antimony, barium, cadmium, lead and mercury) and other toxic elements (e.g. arsenic, chromium and selenium) or regulated biocides (e.g. pentachlorophenol) should be avoided. Various labelling schemes identify products that have been tested and shown to be low emitting and these have been summarised in various publications including: BRE Digest 464 (the standards outlined in Table - 18 however, are the only standards recognised by BREEAM for the purposes of assessing this issue.) ECA (European Collaborative Action, Urban Air, Indoor Environment and Human Exposure) (2005): Harmonisation of indoor material emissions labelling systems in the EU, Inventory of existing schemes11. ECA (European Collaborative Action, Urban Air, Indoor Environment and Human Exposure) (2012): Harmonisation framework for indoor material labelling schemes in the EU12. Dangerous substances are defined in the Dangerous Substances Directive (67/548/EEC) BS EN 14175 and Fume cupboard discharge velocity: BS EN 14175 Part 2 states that the discharge velocity from fume cupboard extracts should be at least 7m/s but that a figure of 10m/s is preferable to ensure that the discharge will not be trapped in the aerodynamic wake of the stack. Higher discharge velocities may be required, especially in windy locations, but higher rates may cause noise problems. 1BS EN 13779:2007 Ventilation for non-residential buildings - Performance requirements for ventilation and room-

conditioning systems 2WHO guidelines for indoor air quality:selected pollutants, World Health Organisation, 2010 3BS ISO 16000-4: 2011 Indoor air - Part 4: Determination of formaldehyde -- Diffusive sampling method 4BS ISO 16000-6: 2011 Indoor air - Part 6: Determination of volatile organic compounds in indoor and test chamber air by active sampling on Tenax TA sorbent, thermal desorption and gas chromatography using MS/FID 5BS EN ISO 16017-2:2003, Indoor, ambient and workplace air. Sampling and analysis of volatile organic compounds by sorbent tube/thermal desorption/capillary gas chromatography. Diffusive sampling 6BS ISO 16000-3: 2011 Indoor air - Part 3: Determination of formaldehyde and other carbonyl compounds - Active sampling method 7CIBSE AM10, 2005, Natural ventilation in non-domestic buildings 8Health Building Note 00-10: Part D: Windows and associated hardware, Department of Health, 2013. 9BCO Guide 2009, Best Practice in the Specification of Offices, BCO, 2009. 10HTM 03-01 Specialised ventilation for healthcare premises, Department of Health, 2007. 11ECA (European Collaborative Action, Urban Air, Indoor Environment and Human Exposure) (2005): Harmonisation of indoor material emissions labelling systems in the EU, Inventory of existing schemes., Luxembourg: Publications Office of the European Union. Report No. 24, EUR 21891 EN. 12ECA (European Collaborative Action, Urban Air, Indoor Environment and Human Exposure) (2012): Harmonisation framework for indoor material labelling schemes in the EU. Luxembourg: Publications Office of the European Union. Report No. 27, EUR 25276 EN

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories

Health and Wellbeing

Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Building type dependent

Aim To recognise and encourage a healthy internal environment through the safe containment and removal of pollutants.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

One credit - Laboratory containment devices and containment areas

1. An objective risk assessment of the proposed laboratory facilities has been carried out prior to completion of the Developed Design (RIBA Stage 3 or equivalent) to ensure potential risks are considered in the design of the laboratory. 2. Where containment devices such as fume cupboards are specified their manufacture and installation meet best practice safety and performance requirements and objectives, demonstrated through compliance with the following standards: a. General purpose fume cupboards: BS EN 14175 Parts 1-7 (as appropriate)1 b. Recirculatory filtration fume cupboards: BS 7989:2001 2 c. Microbiological safety cabinets: BS EN 12469:2000 3 (for manufacture) and BS 5726:2005 4 (for installation). d. Clean air hoods, glove boxes, isolators and mini-environments: BS EN ISO 14644-7:2004 5 e. Articulated extension arms: PD CEN/TR 16589 6 Or, for Schools, Sixth Form Colleges and Further Education with laboratories and fume cupboards for subjects up to and including 'A'-level (or equivalent): f. Building Bulletin 88 7, Fume cupboards in schools. 3. Where laboratory containment devices that are ducted to discharge externally are specified, the guidance in the National Annex of BS EN 14175-2 must be followed to ensure an appropriate discharge velocity is achieved.

One credit - Buildings with containment level 2 and 3 laboratory facilities

4. Where containment level 2 and 3 laboratory facilities are specified they must meet best practice safety and performance criteria and objectives. This is demonstrated as follows: a. Criterion 1 has been achieved. b. Ventilation systems are designed in compliance with the best practice guidance set out in 'DRAFT HSE Biological Agents and Genetically Modified Organisms (Contained Use) Regulations 2010'8. c. Filters for all areas designated as containment level 2 and 3 are located outside the main laboratory space for ease of cleaning/replacement and the filters are easily accessible by maintenance staff or technicians. 5. The design team demonstrate that the individual fume cupboard location and stack heights have been considered in accordance with HMIP Technical Guidance Note (Dispersion) D1 9.

Checklists and tables None.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: This issue is not applicable. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue is not applicable.

Applicable assessment criteria CN3

Part 1: Fabric and structure

Not applicable

CN4

Part 2: Core services

All

CN5

Part 3: Local services

All

CN6

Part 4: Interior design

All

Laboratory containment device requirement for Schools, Sixth form and Further Education See criterion 2f.

For fume cupboards specified/installed for up to and including A-Level subjects, confirmation of the specification and installation in accordance with Building Bulletin 88 will be acceptable for BREEAM compliance. BS 7989 and parts of BS 14175 may be relevant to some installations; in such cases the person or organisation responsible for producing or installing the laboratory equipment should be able to confirm if they are relevant given the type of fume cupboard installation.

General CN7

Methodology None.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories

Health and Wellbeing

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Additional information Relevant definitions Fume cupboard/safety cabinet Scientific equipment designed to limit a person's exposure to hazardous fumes or biological material. Air is drawn through the enclosure of the cupboard conducting the contaminated air away from the experimental area and those using the equipment. Risk assessment For the purpose of the relevant laboratory criteria in this issue, a risk assessment is a systematic consideration of any activity in which there is a hazard, followed by decisions on the substances, equipment and procedures used and on the restrictions and precautions needed to make the risk acceptably low. Below is a list of useful resources: 1. Schools, Sixth Form Colleges and Further Education building assessments can refer to CLEAPSS (www.cleapss.org.uk) for further advice. 2. Higher Education building assessments should discuss the most appropriate risk assessment with the end user of the building.

Other information BS EN 14175 Fume cupboard discharge velocity: Part 2 states that the discharge velocity from fume cupboard extracts should be at least 7m/s but that a figure of 10m/s is preferable to ensure that the discharge will not be trapped in the aerodynamic wake of the stack. Higher discharge velocities may be required, especially in windy locations, but higher rates may cause noise problems. 1BS EN 14175-1:2003 Fume Cupboards, Vocabulary, BSi

BS EN 14175-2:2003 Fume Cupboards, Safety and performance requirements, BSi. BS EN 14175-3:2003 Fume Cupboards, Type test methods, BSi. BS EN 14175-4:2004 Fume Cupboards, on-sitetest methods, BSi. DD CEN/TS 14175-5:2006 Fume Cupboards, Recommendations for installation and maintenance, BSi. BS EN 14175-6:2006 Fume Cupboards, Variable air volume fume cupboards, BSi. BS EN 14175-7:2012 Fume Cupboards, Fume cupboards for high heat and acidic load, BSi. 2BS 7989:2003 Specification for recirculatory filtration fume cupboards, BSi. 2003. 3BS EN 12469:2000 Biotechnology. Performance criteria for microbiological safety cabinets, BSi. 4BS 5726:2005 Microbiological safety cabinets, Information to be supplied by the purchaser to the vendor and to the

installer and siting and use of cabinets. Recommendations and guidance, BSi. 5BS EN ISO 14644-7:2004 Clean rooms and associated controlled environments. Separative devices (clean air hoods, gloveboxes, isolators and mini-environments), BSi. 6PD CEN/TR 16589 Laboratory installations - Capture devices with articulated extract arm, BSi.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

7Building Bulletin 88: Fume Cupboards in Schools, 1988, Department for Education and Employment 8The Biological Agents and Genetically Modified Organisms (Contained Use) Regulations 2010, HSE. 9Guidelines on Discharge Stack Heights for Polluting Emissions, HMIP Technical Guidance Note (Dispersion) D1, 1993.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Hea 04 Thermal comfort

Health and Wellbeing

Hea 04 Thermal comfort Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Aim To ensure that appropriate thermal comfort levels are achieved through design, and controls are selected to maintain a thermally comfortable environment for occupants within the building.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

One credit - Thermal modelling

1. Thermal modelling has been carried out using software in accordance with CIBSE AM11 1 Building Energy and Environmental Modelling. 2. The software used to carry out the simulation at the detailed design stage provides full dynamic thermal analysis. For smaller and more basic building designs with less complex heating or cooling systems, an alternative less complex means of analysis may be appropriate (such methodologies must still be in accordance with CIBSE AM11). 3. The modelling demonstrates that: a. For air conditioned buildings, summer and winter operative temperature ranges in occupied spaces are in accordance with the criteria set out in CIBSE Guide A Environmental design2, Table 1.5; or other appropriate industry standard (where this sets a higher or more appropriate requirement/level for the building type). b. For naturally ventilated/free running buildings: i. Winter operative temperature ranges in occupied spaces are in accordance with the criteria set out in CIBSE Guide A Environmental design, Table 1.5; or other appropriate industry standard (where this sets a higher or more appropriate requirement/level for the building type). ii. The building is designed to limit the risk of overheating, in accordance with the adaptive comfort methodology outlined in CIBSE TM52: The limits of thermal comfort: avoiding overheating in European buildings3. 4. For air conditioned buildings, the PMV (predicted mean vote) and PPD (predicted percentage of dissatisfied) indices based on the above modelling are reported via the BREEAM assessment scoring and reporting tool.

One credit - Adaptability - for a projected climate change scenario

5. Criteria 1 to 4 are achieved. 6. The thermal modelling demonstrates that the relevant requirements set out in criteria 3 are achieved for a projected climate change environment (see Relevant definitions). 7. Where thermal comfort criteria are not met for the projected climate change environment, the project team demonstrates how the building has been adapted, or designed to be easily adapted in future using passive design solutions in order to subsequently meet the requirements under criterion 6. 8. For air conditioned buildings, the PMV and PPD indices based on the above modelling are reported via the BREEAM assessment scoring and reporting tool.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

One credit - Thermal zoning and controls

9. Criteria 1 to 4 are achieved. 10. The thermal modelling analysis (undertaken for compliance with criteria 1 to 4) has informed the temperature control strategy for the building and its users. 11. The strategy for proposed heating/cooling system(s) demonstrates that it has addressed the following: a. Zones within the building and how the building services could efficiently and appropriately heat or cool these areas. For example consider the different requirements for the central core of a building compared with the external perimeter adjacent to the windows. b. The degree of occupant control required for these zones, based on discussions with the end user (or alternatively building type or use specific design guidance, case studies, feedback) considers: i. User knowledge of building services ii. Occupancy type, patterns and room functions (and therefore appropriate level of control required) iii. How the user is likely to operate or interact with the system(s), e.g. are they likely to open windows, access thermostatic radiator valves (TRV) on radiators, change air-conditioning settings etc., iv. The user expectations ( this may differ in the summer and winter) and degree of individual control (i.e. obtaining the balance between occupant preferences, for example some occupants like fresh air and others dislike drafts). c. How the proposed systems will interact with each other (where there is more than one system) and how this may affect the thermal comfort of the building occupants. d. The need or otherwise for an accessible building user actuated manual override for any automatic systems.

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Thermal modelling, criteria 1 to 4 Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Adaptability - for projected climate changes, criteria 5 to 8 Option 1 - Shell only: These criteria are not applicable. Option 2 - Shell and core: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Thermal zoning and controls criteria 9 to 11 Both options: These criteria are not applicable. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Hea 04 Thermal comfort

Health and Wellbeing

Ref

Terms

Description

CN1.1

Thermal model thermal modelling See criteria 1 to 4.

Option 1 - Shell only For the purpose of the thermal model a baseline servicing strategy will need to be assumed, i.e. services complying with the minimum requirements set out in relevant national building regulations should be assumed. This is to reduce the risk of an under-performing fabric being designed for the basic building envelope. Option 2 - Shell and core Where assumptions are required for the purpose of the thermal model, these must be reasonable and represent typical use patterns and loads given the parameters and function of the building. Note that thermal modelling may need to be completed on the basis of a typical notional layout.

CN1.2

Thermal model adaptability See criteria 5 to 8.

Option 2 - Shell and core Where assumptions are required for the purpose of the thermal model, these must be reasonable and represent typical use patterns and loads given the parameters and function of the building. Note that thermal modelling may need to be completed on the basis of a typical notional layout.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN2.1

Dynamic thermal modelling

For simple building assessments, dynamic thermal modelling is not a requirement to achieve the credits but may be preferable as it can provide more accurate analysis results. Note that assessment criterion 2 already clarifies use of an alternative less complex means of modelling, which must be in accordance with CIBSE AM11.

CN3

Typical occupancy/use patterns

If it is not possible to confirm the number of building occupants using the building, e.g. speculative developments (or shell and core), then the default occupancy rates given in CIBSE Guide A can be used to determine a default number of users. Where the typical use patterns are also unknown, the table given in Tra 01 Public transport accessibility can be used to determine the typical opening hours of different building types. The design team need to justify/validate the occupancy number and use patterns applied in the thermal model.

CN4

Appropriate industry standard See criterion 3.

BREEAM has not attempted to list all appropriate industry standards. Any recognised collaborative industry or sector best practice standard or guidance that sets thermal performance levels, in terms of thermal comfort and design temperature can be considered an appropriate industry standard for the purposes of this BREEAM issue. CIBSE Guide A (table 1.5) includes recommended summer and winter comfort criteria (temperature ranges) for a number of specific building applications. See also the relevant compliance notes below for industry standards deemed appropriate by BREEAM for schools and healthcare buildings.

General

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Terms

Description

CN5

Buildings with less complex heating/cooling systems See criterion 11.

For buildings with less complex heating/cooling systems the thermal comfort strategy need only comply with criteria 11a and 11b. Compliance can be demonstrated where zoning allows separate occupant control (within the occupied space) of each perimeter area (i.e. within 7m of each external wall) and the central zone (i.e. over 7m from the external walls). For example, adequate TRVs (thermostatic radiator valves) placed in zones around the building perimeter, and the provision of local occupant controls to internal areas, such as fan coil units. Note: The distance requirement for smaller buildings is approximate; however, the assessor must use sound judgement considering fully the aims of this issue, before accepting solutions that do not strictly meet the above criteria. Examples of potentially compliant heating control measures can be found in Technology Guide CTG065 Heating control4.

Building type specific CN6

Industrial Industrial unit with no office space

Where an industrial unit contains no office space and only an operational or storage area, this BREEAM issue does not apply.

CN7

Education (schools only) Appropriate industry standards and criteria for schools, See criterion 3.

An appropriate industry standard for schools is Building Bulletin 101, Ventilation of school buildings (April 2014). For schools with a straightforward servicing strategy, ClassCool is considered a suitable alternative to an AM11 full dynamic model.

CN8

Healthcare Appropriate industry standards and criteria See criterion 3.

The appropriate industry standard for healthcare is Health Technical Memorandum 03-01 Specialised ventilation for healthcare premises. Thermal comfort levels in patient and clinical areas must be in accordance with the temperature ranges set out in HTM 03-01, Appendix 2. Furthermore, internal summer temperatures must not exceed 28º C dry bulb for more than 50 hours per year (as defined in HTM 0301, paragraph 2.15). Other occupied spaces not covered in HTM03-01 Appendix 2 should be in accordance with CIBSE Guide A Environmental Design.

CN9

Education and prisons Occupant controls See criterion 11.

In this issue, occupant controls are intended to be for staff use only.

Methodology None.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Hea 04 Thermal comfort

Health and Wellbeing

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

10, 11, 12

Thermal comfort study

Refer to generic evidence requirement above

Relevant definitions ClassCool A tool developed by the Department for Children, Schools and Families (DCSF, formerly DfES) which provides a simplified method of assessing the extent of classroom overheating. ClassCool may not be appropriate for other spaces, such as libraries and halls, and other means of assessing overheating will be required www.teachernet.gov.uk. Clinical areas Refer to BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort Occupied space Refer to Hea 01 Visual comfort, however for the purpose of BREEAM issue Hea 04 the definition excludes the following: 1. Atria or concourses 2. Entrance halls or reception areas 3. Ancillary space e.g. circulation areas, storerooms and plant rooms. Passive design Passive design uses layout, fabric and form to reduce or remove mechanical cooling, heating, ventilation and lighting demand. Examples of passive design include optimising spatial planning and orientation to control solar gains and maximise daylighting, manipulating the building form and fabric to facilitate natural ventilation strategies and making effective use of thermal mass to help reduce peak internal temperatures. Patient areas Refer to BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort. Predicted mean vote (PMV) The PMV is an index that predicts the mean votes of a large group of persons on the seven-point thermal sensation scale based on the heat balance of the human body. Thermal balance is obtained when the internal heat production in the body is equal to the loss of heat to the environment. See 'Other Information' for the seven-point thermal sensation scale. Predicted percentage dissatisfied (PPD) The PPD is an index that establishes a quantitative prediction of the percentage of thermally dissatisfied people who feel too cool or too warm. For the purposes of ISO 7730, thermally dissatisfied people are those who will feel hot, warm, cool or cold. See the seven-point thermal sensation scale in Other information. Projected climate change environment Dynamic thermal simulation software packages currently provide the facility for building designs to be assessed under external climatic conditions specific to geographic location. Industry standard weather data for the UK is available in the form of Test Reference Years (TRYs) and Design Summer Years (DSYs) provided by CIBSE. This weather data enables thermal analysis of building designs under current climatic conditions, yet no account is taken of the projected variations in weather data that will occur during the building's life cycle as a result of climate change. The following probabilistic TRY weather data files should be used to establish the projected climate change

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

environment against which the design is evaluated: Free Running Buildings Time period: 2050s Emissions scenario: Medium (A1B) Mechanically Ventilated or Mixed Mode Buildings Time period: 2030s Emissions scenario: Medium (A1B). The above weather files represent the minimum requirements to perform thermal modelling under a climate change scenario and subsequently demonstrate compliance. Where design teams feel that added consideration of building occupant risk/sensitivity to overheating is necessary, weather files can be used that exceed the minimum requirements outlined above. The time periods indicated above have been selected to represent the building services life cycle likely to be present in each building services strategy type. A shorter time period is chosen for mechanically ventilated/mixed mode building types due to consideration of mechanical servicing equipment life span (before major upgrade or replacement is required), and to avoid over-specification of plant which could lead to inefficient operation. Separate occupant control Responsive heating or cooling controls for a particular area/zone of the building that can be accessed and operated by the individual(s) occupying that area or zone. Such controls will be located within, or within the vicinity of, the zone or area they control. Thermal comfort In British Standard BS EN ISO 7730:2005: Ergonomics of the thermal environment. Analytical determination and interpretation of thermal comfort, thermal comfort is defined using the calculation of PMV and PPD indices and local thermal comfort criteria and is ‘that condition of mind which expresses satisfaction with the thermal environment.’ The term ‘thermal comfort’ describes a person’s psychological state of mind and is usually referred to in terms of whether someone is feeling too hot or too cold. Thermal comfort is difficult to define because it needs to account for a range of environmental and personal factors in order to establish what makes people feel comfortable. HSE considers 80% of occupants as a reasonable limit for the minimum number of people who should be thermally comfortable in an environment. The purpose of this issue is to encourage appropriate and robust consideration of thermal comfort issues and specification of appropriate occupant controls to ensure both maximum flexibility of the space and thermal comfort for the majority of building occupants. Thermal dynamic analysis Thermal comfort analysis tools can be subdivided into a number of methods of increasing complexity. The most complex of these and the one that provides greatest confidence in results is the full dynamic model. This type of model enables annual heating or cooling loads, overheating risks and control strategies to be assessed.

Other information CIBSE Guide A and BS EN ISO 7730:2005 The assessment criteria for this issue require compliance with the operative room temperature ranges set out in CIBSE Guide A, Table 1.5. The operative room temperature ranges provided in CIBSE Guide A have been derived in accordance with the heat balance model for thermal comfort (predicted mean vote (PMV) and predicted percentage dissatisfied (PPD)) as detailed in BS EN ISO7730. The CIBSE Guide A operative temperature ranges correspond to a PMV of +/- 0.25 which sits between the Category A and Category B requirements listed in Annex A, Table A.1 of EN ISO 7730. Compliance with the CIBSE Guide A criteria will therefore effectively also demonstrate compliance with the Category B requirements set out in EN ISO 7730.

100

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Hea 04 Thermal comfort

Health and Wellbeing

Projected climate change weather data A range of alternative probabilistic weather files produced in accordance with the UK climate impacts programme (UKCIP) 2009 projections have been produced to be compatible with simulation software packages. These weather files provide the opportunity to evaluate the impact of varying climate change scenarios building design performance throughout its life cycle. Projected climate change weather files are currently available in TRYs and DSYs and according to three projected time periods; 2030s, 2050s and 2080s, and for each period, two 'emissions scenarios' are available; Medium Emissions (A1B) and High Emissions (A1F1). The PROMETHEUS project at Exeter University has produced a number of future weather files specific to different locations across the UK, created using the UKCP09 weather generator. Weather files produced under the PROMETHEUS project are available at the following location: http://emps.exeter.ac.uk/research/energy-environment/cee/projects/prometheus/. 1CIBSE Applications Manual AM11 Building energy and environmental modelling, CIBSE, 1998 2CIBSE Guide A Environmental Design, 7th Edition, Issue 2, CIBSE, 2007 3CIBSE TM52 The limits of thermal comfort: Avoiding overheating in European buildings, 2013 4CTG065 Technology Guide, Heating control: maximising comfort, minimising energy consumption, The Carbon Trust, 2011

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

101

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Hea 05 Acoustic performance Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Building type dependent

Aim To ensure the building's acoustic performance including sound insulation meet the appropriate standards for its purpose.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

Up to three credits for Education, Healthcare, Office and Law courts building types

1. The building meets the appropriate acoustic performance standards and testing requirements defined in the checklists and tables section which defines criteria for the acoustic principles of: a. Sound insulation b. Indoor ambient noise level c. Reverberation times.

Up to three credits are available for Industrial, Retail, Prisons and ‘Other’ building types Up to two credits 2. Where the building meets the acoustic performance standards and testing requirements detailed in Table - 23 (see Checklists and tables) for all relevant functional areas. OR

Up to three credits 3. Where a suitably qualified acoustician (see relevant definitions) is appointed to define a bespoke set of performance requirements for all function areas in the building using the three acoustic principles defined in criterion 1, setting out the performance requirements for each and the testing regime required.

Up to four credits are available for Multi-residential and Other, Residential institutions building types

4. One, three or four credits are available for Multi-residential and Other, Residential institution buildings where the relevant criteria in the checklists and table section have been applied. Please also see CN8.

102

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Hea 05 Acoustic performance

Health and Wellbeing

Checklists and tables Table - 19: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Education buildings Education buildings (three credits) First credit - Sound insulation Criteria

Achieve the performance standards set out in Section 2 of the Acoustic Performance Standard for the Priority Schools Building Programme (APS), June 2013 1 relating to airborne and impact sound insulation of walls and floors. See also CN7

Testing requirement

A programme of pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the APS requirements and the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools2.

Second credit - Internal indoor ambient noise levels Criteria

Achieve the indoor ambient noise level standards set out within Section 2 of APS for all room types. For roofs with a mass per unit area less than 150kg/m2 (lightweight roofs) or any roofs with glazing or rooflights, calculations using laboratory data with ‘heavy’ rain noise excitation as defined in BS EN ISO 140-18 3 are required (in accordance with the guidance in APS) for teaching/learning spaces to demonstrate that the reverberant sound pressure level in these rooms are not more than 20 dB above the appropriate limits presented within Section 2 of APS, table 1.

Testing requirement

Indoor ambient noise levels (excluding rain noise): A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools. Rain noise: installation of a specification compliant with the APS criteria demonstrates compliance, reference is also made to the notes below.

Notes

For heavy weight roofs, or parts of the roof that are heavyweight, with a mass per unit area greater than 150kg/m2 (including those with sedum planting) that do not have any glazing or rooflights, calculations are not required, as such the credit can be awarded on a default basis of compliance.

Third credit - Reverberation Criteria

Acoustic environment (Control of reverberation, sound absorption and speech transmission index (STI)): Teaching and study spaces: achieve the requirements relating to reverberation time for teaching and study spaces set out within table 5 in Section 2 of APS. Open plan teaching spaces: achieve the performance requirements relating to speech transmission index (STI) set out within Section 2.8 of APS. Corridor and stairwells: for those that give direct access to teaching and study spaces, achieve the performance requirements relating to sound absorption.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

103

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Education buildings (three credits) Testing requirement

Teaching and study spaces: A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools. Open Plan teaching spaces: STI Measurements of the STI should be taken in at least one in ten typical student listening positions in the open plan spaces in accordance with the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools. Corridors and stairwells: Installation of a specification compliant with the APS criteria demonstrates compliance. Where this refers to the use of building regulations, the country-specific building regulations or standards can be applied.

Table - 20: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Healthcare buildings Healthcare buildings (three credits) First credit - Sound insulation Criteria

Achieve the airborne sound insulation performance standards set out in Section 2 of HTM 08-01: Acoustics, 2013 4 determined according to the privacy requirements using both Table 3 and Table 4 from HTM 08-01: Acoustics. Impact noise is controlled at source and the weighted standardised impact sound pressure level (L’nT,w) does not exceed 65dB in noise-sensitive rooms, following the guidance in HTM 08-01: Acoustics.

Testing requirement

A programme of pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the requirements of Section 7 of HTM 08-01: Acoustics.

Second credits - Internal indoor ambient noise levels Criteria

The indoor ambient noise requirements for noise intrusion from external sources in Table 1 of HTM 0801: Acoustics, 2013 are not exceeded. The values for internal noise from mechanical and electrical services in Table 2 of HTM 08-01: Acoustics are not exceeded.

Testing requirement

A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the Section 7 of HTM 08-01: Acoustics. Rain noise: Installation of a specification compliant with the HTM 0801: Acoustics criteria demonstrates compliance.

Third credit - Reverberation Criteria

Acoustic environment (Control of reverberation, sound absorption and speech transmission index (STI)): Achieve the requirements relating to sound absorption set out in Section 2 of HTM 08-01: Acoustics.

Testing Requirement

A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the Section 7 of HTM 08-01: Acoustics.

104

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Hea 05 Acoustic performance

Health and Wellbeing

Table - 21: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Office buildings Office buildings (three credits) First credit - Sound insulation Criteria

The sound insulation between acoustically sensitive rooms and other occupied areas complies with the performance criteria given in Section 7 of BS 8233:2014 5.

Testing requirement

A programme of pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the acoustic testing and measurement procedures outlined in the Additional information section of this BREEAM issue.

Notes

If testing is to be carried out where the office is not yet furnished, then section 7.5 of BS 8233:20414 should be referred to when determining the performance criteria. Where the office is to be furnished at the time testing is carried out, then refer to section 7.7.6 of BS 8233:2014 for the relevant performance criteria.

Second credits - Internal indoor ambient noise levels Criteria

Achieve indoor ambient noise levels that comply with the design ranges given in Section 7 of BS 8233:2014.

Testing requirement

A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the acoustic testing and measurement procedures outlines in the Additional information section of this BREEAM issue.

Third credit - Reverberation Criteria

Acoustic environment (control of reverberation, sound absorption and speech transmission index): Achieve the requirements relating to sound absorption and reverberation times, where applicable, set out in Section 7 of BS 8233:2014.

Testing Requirement

A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the acoustic testing and measurement procedures outlined in the Additional information section of this BREEAM issue.

Table - 22: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Law courts buildings Law courts buildings (three credits) First Credit - Sound insulation Criteria

The sound insulation between acoustically sensitive rooms and other occupied areas complies with the performance targets given in Section 28 of Court Service Design Guide (CSDG), HMCS, 2010 6.

Testing requirement

A programme of pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the requirements of Section 28 of the CSDG and ‘Calculation Procedures’ where applicable.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

105

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Law courts buildings (three credits) Second credits - Internal indoor ambient noise levels Criteria

Achieve indoor ambient noise levels that comply with the requirements of Section 28 of the CSDG.

Testing requirement

A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with Section 28 of the CSDG.

Third credit - Reverberation Criteria

Acoustic environment (Control of reverberation, sound absorption and speech transmission index): Achieve the requirements relating to sound absorption and reverberation times, where applicable, set out in Section 28 of the CSDG.

Testing requirement

A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with Section 28 of the CSDG and ‘Calculation Procedures’ where applicable.

Table - 23: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Industrial, Retail, Prisons and Other building types Industrial, Retail, Prisons and Other building types (two credits) First credit – Sound insulation and internal indoor ambient noise levels Room function

All room functions

Criteria

Internal indoor ambient noise levels: Indoor ambient noise levels comply with the design ranges given in BS 8233: 2014 (see Additional information section) unless otherwise stated below. Where the room types below are present, the appropriate criteria for ambient noise levels, sound insulation and acoustic privacy must also be achieved.

Testing requirement

Internal indoor ambient noise levels: A programme of pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the acoustic testing and measurement procedures outlined in the Additional information section of this BREEAM issue.

Room function

Educational space (teaching and lecture spaces)

Criteria

Internal indoor ambient noise levels: Achieve the indoor ambient noise level standards set out within Section 2 of APS for all teaching and lecture theatre room types. See also the criteria below for acoustically sensitive rooms and apply if relevant.

106

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Hea 05 Acoustic performance

Health and Wellbeing

Industrial, Retail, Prisons and Other building types (two credits) Testing requirement

Internal indoor ambient noise levels: A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools. Rain noise: Installation of a specification compliant with the APS criteria demonstrates compliance; reference is also made to the Notes section in Table - 19.

Notes

For heavy weight roofs, or parts of the roof that are heavyweight, with a mass per unit area greater than 150kg/m2 (including those with sedum planting) that do not have any glazing/rooflights, calculations are not required. As such, the credit can be awarded on a default basis of compliance.

Room function

Medical treatment rooms

Criteria

Sound insulation: Achieve the airborne and impact sound insulation criteria in Health Technical Memorandum HTM 0801.

Testing requirement

Sound insulation: A programme of pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the requirements of Section 7 of HTM 08-01: Acoustics.

Room function

Acoustically sensitive rooms

Criteria

Sound insulation: The sound insulation between acoustically sensitive rooms and other occupied areas complies with the example matrix relating to internal sound insulation within Section 7.5 of BS 8233:2014 which takes into consideration the likely level of activity noise, the degree of privacy required and the sensitivity of the adjacent space. It may be considered appropriate to adapt the levels of sound insulation presented within the table according to a specific building’s use and any modification to the criteria should be justified by an SQA. Examples of rooms with a 'confidential' privacy requirement may include human resources meeting rooms, or rooms where private conversations may be taking place, however their 'activity noise' is likely to be only 'typical' and then the level of sound insulation would be determined based on the sensitivity of the receiving space. Factory spaces are likely to be considered less sensitive as a receiving space than an adjacent office area, however the activity noise level may be anticipated to be higher.

Testing requirement

Sound insulation: A programme of pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the acoustic testing and measurement procedures in the Methodology section.

Notes

See Relevant definitions. To increase the ambient noise level, where privacy is required or the ambient targets include a minimum as well as maximum limit, an artificial sound source or sound masking system may be required. Any artificial sound source or sound masking system should be installed and in operation at the time of the acoustic testing to demonstrate compliance.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

107

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Industrial, Retail, Prisons and Other building types (two credits) Second credit – Reverberation Room function

Rooms/areas used for speech or performance, including public speaking

Criteria

Achieve reverberation times compliant with Section 2 of APS. In addition, or alternatively, if relevant to the assessed building; classrooms, seminar rooms and lecture theatres achieve reverberation times compliant with section 2 of APS.

Testing requirement

Reverberation times within teaching and study spaces: A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body to achieve the required performance standards set out in table 5 in section 2 of APS. Measurements should be carried out in accordance with the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools. Open Plan teaching spaces: STI Measurements of the STI should be taken in at least one in ten typical student listening positions in the open plan spaces in accordance with the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools. Corridors and stairwells: installation of a specification compliant with the APS criteria demonstrates compliance. Reference is also made to the Notes below.

Notes

Where the reverberation time required by the relevant standard is not appropriate for the type of space/building assessed, the acoustician must confirm why this is the case. In addition the acoustician must set alternative appropriate reverberation times and provide these to demonstrate compliance.

Table - 24: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Multi-residential buildings and 'Other residential' institutions Multi-residential and 'Other residential' buildings (four credits) Room function

Individual bedrooms and self-contained dwellings

Criteria

One credit Airborne sound insulation values are at least 3dB higher and impact sound insulation values are at least 3dB lower than the performance standards in the relevant Building Regulations or Standards. Three credits Airborne sound insulation values are at least 5dB higher and impact sound insulation values are at least 5dB lower than the performance standards in the relevant Building Regulations or Standards. Four credits Airborne sound insulation values are at least 8dB higher and impact sound insulation values are at least 8dB lower than the performance standards in the relevant Building Regulations or Standards.

108

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Hea 05 Acoustic performance

Health and Wellbeing

Multi-residential and 'Other residential' buildings (four credits) Testing requirement

A programme of pre-completion testing is carried out by a compliant test body based on the normal programme of testing described in the relevant Building Regulations or Standards for every group or sub-group of dwellings (houses, flats or rooms for residential purposes) this must demonstrate that the performance standards detailed within this table are achieved. OR Use of constructions for all relevant building elements have been registered with and assessed and approved by Robust Details Limited (RDL) and found to achieve the performance standards required for the number of credits sought (see additional information section for further information on Robust Details).

Notes

Testing should be between habitable rooms on the ground floor and at higher storey levels if applicable. Where there are insufficient suitable separating walls or floors in a development to carry out the number of tests specified in the appropriate Building Regulations or Standards, all of the available suitable separating walls or floors must be tested. See also CN3 and CN8.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Indoor ambient noise criteria: Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply (an alternative method to demonstrate compliance applies in this instance, refer to CN1.1 for further information). Sound insulation and reverberation criteria: Both options: These criteria are not applicable. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

CN1.1

Alternative means of demonstrating compliance

The basic built form has a large impact on the acoustic performance of the building, and in the case of a shell only or shell and core development, this aspect of the build would be outside the control of the tenant. A suitably qualified acoustician (SQA) must carry out a quantifiable assessment of the specification of the build form, construction and any external factors that are likely to affect the indoor ambient noise levels. From this assessment, the SQA must confirm that given a typical arrangement and fit-out specification for the building type, the development is likely to meet the levels required to demonstrate compliance with the BREEAM criteria. Where the specific room functions and areas within the building are yet to be defined, the acoustician must base their assessment on the most sensitive room type likely to be present in the building, as a worst case. For example in a retail assessment, where there are likely to be offices the acoustician should make an assessment based on this scenario. One credit can be awarded where this has been achieved.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

109

Health and Wellbeing

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue is not applicable.

Country-specific CN3

Country specific guidance

The following Standards or Building Regulations etc. are relevant for the assessment of the issue: England For Multi-residential assessments, where the criteria refer to the performance standards in building regulations, in England, this is referring to Approved Document E 2003 edition, with amendments 2004 and 2010 – Resistance to the passage of sound.

CN4

Building types without areas 'used for speech'

Where a building type does not have areas 'used for speech', it does not need to comply with the relevant 'reverberation times' criteria. In these instances, the credit available for reverberation can be awarded by default where the building complies with the indoor ambient noise level and sound insulation criteria.

CN5

Remedial works

Where a programme of pre-completion testing identifies that spaces do not meet the standards, remedial works must be carried out prior to handover and occupation and the spaces re-tested to ensure compliance. Remedial works must be carried out to all affected and potentially affected areas, including rooms or spaces previously untested of a similar construction and performance requirement. The test report, or covering correspondence, should include a clear statement that the testing is in accordance with the required standard (where specified) or the BREEAM criteria (see Checklists and tables and Methodology section), and include the relevant pass/fail criteria.

CN6

Programme of testing

It is not acceptable to undertake a shorter test programme due to site readiness on the day of testing. If this issue arises additional testing should be scheduled. It may be that testing at less than the typical regime identified would be acceptable in some instances, for example in small healthcare facilities. Where this is the case, clear reasoning must be provided by the compliant test body prior to awarding the credit(s).

Building type specific CN7

110

Education APS, June 2013 See Table - 19

The Acoustic Performance Standard for the Priority Schools Building Programme (APS), June 2013 is due to be replaced by ‘Acoustic design of schools: performance standards’ in 2014, and a draft is currently available for public consultation. If the new document is published and formally adopted, then it will be deemed to supersede the Acoustic Performance Standard for the Priority Schools Building Programme (APS), June 2013 document, for BREEAM credit requirements.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Hea 05 Acoustic performance

Health and Wellbeing

Ref

Terms

Description

CN8

Multi-residential or Other, Residential institutions Rooms not covered by residential criteria

Multi-residential and other residential institutions often contain a mixture of ‘nonresidential’ areas such as offices, small retail outlets, meeting rooms etc. and residential areas, e.g. self-contained dwellings or rooms for residential purposes. Where less than 5% of the floor area of the assessed building includes ‘nonresidential’ areas, these areas do not need to be assessed, hence only the residential spaces need to be assessed against the residential criteria to demonstrate compliance with Table - 24. Where more than 5% of the floor area of the assessed building includes areas other than self-contained dwellings or rooms for residential purposes: If awarding 1 credit, only the self-contained dwellings and/or rooms for residential purposes need to be assessed to demonstrate compliance. If awarding 3 or 4 credits the ‘non-residential’ areas must meet the relevant criteria for their function, as set out in Table - 23 for ‘other buildings’ and the self-contained dwellings or rooms for residential purposes need to be assessed to demonstrate compliance. The calculation for the percentage of floor area that is ‘nonresidential’ should only include occupied spaces (as defined in BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort) covered by the Other buildings criteria.

Methodology Testing, measurement and calculation procedures Where specific guidance on testing, measurement and calculation is not stated in the criteria tables above for the relevant building type, or within the relevant standard/guidance referenced, the following procedures can be followed by the acoustician when measuring or calculating the levels required to demonstrate compliance with this BREEAM issue. Measurements of sound insulation (airborne and impact) should be made in accordance with the relevant part of BS EN ISO 140 series, or the successor to these standards. For measurements of reverberation time, the relevant principles of BS EN ISO 354:2003 should be used and the guidance provided in BS EN ISO 140-7:1998 should be followed in respect of the number of source and microphone positions, and decay measurements. For measurements of ambient noise, when no specific guidance is available, the following procedures should be used: 1. Noise from both internal sources (e.g. mechanical ventilation systems, plant noise, noise-making systems) and external sources (e.g. traffic noise transmitted via the building façade) should be included, and, where windows are openable as part of the ventilation strategy, these should be assumed to be open for the purposes of calculations and open for measurements. If openable windows are not part of the background/permanent ventilation strategy, then these should be assumed to be closed for the purposes of calculation and closed for measurements. 2. Noise from occupants and office equipment (e.g. computers) should not be included in the measurements. 3. Unless otherwise stated in the referenced document, a rate of testing of at least one in ten rooms/spaces of each performance level shall be subject to on-site performance testing. 4. Measurements should be made in at least four rooms in which noise levels can be expected to be greatest either because they are on the noisiest façade or because they are on a naturally ventilated façade. 5. Where different ventilation strategies are used, measurements should be conducted in rooms utilising each strategy. Otherwise, measurements should be made in rooms on the noisiest façade. 6. T in LAeq,T is taken as the duration of the normal working day (typically 8 hours between 09.00 and 17.00). 7. Measurements need not be made over a period of 8 hours if a shorter measurement period can be used. In this case, measurements should be made when external noise levels are representative of normal conditions throughout the day. 8. Measurement periods less than 30 minutes may give representative values for indoor ambient noise levels and may be utilised where this is the case. However measurement periods shorter than 5 minutes should not be used.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

111

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

9. Measurements should be taken in a minimum of three locations in rooms at a height of 1.2m above the floor level and at least 1m away from any surface. 10. Where relevant, measurement of airborne sound insulation between teaching spaces should be conducted between one in four pairs of adjacent rooms (or teaching spaces) of each room type or performance requirement category and construction type. 11. Where relevant, measurement of impact sound pressure level should be conducted in one in four teaching spaces (separated from rooms above) of each room type or performance requirement category and construction type. 12. The measured level of ambient noise should be used to determine compliance with the criteria for acoustically sensitive rooms. If at the time of acoustic commissioning it is not possible to measure ambient noise levels in the absence of construction or other extraneous noise sources that will not be present when the building is complete, then, for mechanical services the lower level of 35 dB, LAeq or the lowest design limit for the acoustically sensitive space should be used. The above is intended as guidance for undertaking acoustic testing or measurement to demonstrate compliance with the performance requirements in BREEAM. If the acoustician has felt it necessary to deviate from the above procedures, they should provide a reason for doing so and confirm that the alternative procedures are adequate for demonstrating that the building meets the acoustic performance requirements.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Multi-residential specific Where Robust Details are to be used, the following must be provided: 1. Design team confirmation that Robust Details chosen will achieve the required performance standards for sound insulation. 2. Purchase Statement from RDL which confirms that the relevant plots are registered with RDL.

Completed Robust Details Ltd Compliance Certificate signed by the developer for all relevant constructions relating to the plots being assessed.

Additional information Relevant definitions Acoustically sensitive rooms Where the term ‘acoustically sensitive rooms’ is referenced in this BREEAM issue, it refers to any room/space the design team or client deems to be acoustically sensitive for the purposes of privacy which may include the following types of space/rooms (where specified); 1. Cellular offices 2. Meeting or interview or consulting or treatment rooms. In addition:

112

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Hea 05 Acoustic performance

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Health and Wellbeing

Court buildings: witness/consultation rooms and judges' or magistrates' chambers and jury retiring rooms Prison buildings: care or listener suites, official visit rooms, ‘closed visits’ rooms Educational buildings/spaces: rooms for teaching and learning i.e. classrooms, lecture theatres Rooms used for public speaking or seminars Any other room or space the design team or client deems to be acoustically sensitive for the purposes of privacy.

Compliant test body A Compliant Test Body is defined as : 1. Organisations having United Kingdom Accreditation Scheme (UKAS) accreditation to the appropriate scope, or who are accredited by a member of the International Accreditation Forum (IAF - www.iaf.nu) to the appropriate scope OR 2. Organisations or individuals registered with the Association of Noise Consultants (ANC) Registration Scheme OR 3. Organisations who can provide evidence that they follow the relevant principles of BS EN ISO/IEC 17024 (Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons)7 in relation to BREEAM requirements. Groups and sub-groups As defined in the Building Regulations for England and Wales Approved Document E: Resistance to the Passage of sound, section 1 (paragraphs 1.11 – 1.17). For example, flats and study bedrooms are usually considered as two separate groups, and if there are significant differences in construction type then the groups will need to be broken down into sub groups. In addition to this, where there are steps or staggers greater than 300mm between dwellings, dwellings without steps/staggers should be treated as a different sub-group to those with step/staggers. This is because the presence of steps/staggers is likely to improve performance. Habitable rooms For the purpose of this issue, habitable rooms include any room where individuals will sit or lie down and require a reasonably quiet environmental to concentrate or rest. Such rooms are bedrooms, living rooms, dining rooms, studies as well as kitchen-dining and kitchen-living rooms. Material change of use This is where there is a change in the purpose for which or the circumstance in which a building is used e.g. where a building has been converted from a non-dwelling (office, school, church etc.) to a dwelling. Multiple occupancy offices Office space that is not cellular in nature, i.e. it is open plan, and designed to accommodate more than two desk spaces/workstations. Non-habitable rooms For the purpose of this issue, non-habitable rooms include any room that is not considered a habitable room (as defined above), it includes rooms such as kitchens, bathrooms, toilets, hallways, garages and laundry rooms. Occupied spaces Refer to BREEAM issue Hea 01 and note that for BREEAM issue Hea 05 there is a specific, unrelated, definition of 'unoccupied' with reference to acoustic testing and measurement, see Compliance notes for details. Robust Details Robust Details (RDs) are construction solutions that provide an alternative to pre-completion sound insulation testing as a method of complying with Requirements E1 of Approved Document E (2003 edition) of the Building Regulations (England and Wales), DOE Technical Booklet G - Sound 2012 (Northern Ireland) and Technical Handbook Section 5 Noise, 2013 (Scotland). The relevant plots on a development must be registered with RDL and built in accordance with the RD specification. To give a reasonable level of assurance that these details will achieve the required minimum standards, RDL carry out random inspections during construction and random sound insulation tests after construction. A Robust Detail is deemed to be approved for BREEAM (Multi-residential building) credits only when it achieves a specified performance level as assessed by RDL. Robust Details can only be used in relation to assessment for new build dwellings and cannot be used to assess the performance of construction details in rooms for residential purposes or material change of use.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

113

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Room for residential purposes This is defined within the Building Regulations for England and Wales Approved Document E as a room, or a suite of rooms which is not a dwelling (house or a flat) and which is used by one or more persons to live and sleep. It includes a room in a hostel, hotel, a boarding house, a hall of residence or a residential home, whether or not the room is separated from or arranged in a cluster group with other rooms, but does not include a room in hospital, or other similar establishment, used for patient accommodation. Specified performance level Robust Details are approved for credits under the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH), where the specified performance levels set out below are met. Construction types that meet these levels are listed on the Robust Details website www.robustdetails.com on the CSH page. Where assessing self-contained dwellings in multi-residential buildings that are not defined as material change of use or rooms for residential purposes, Robust Details that meet the specified performance level as set out below can also comply with the credit criteria for self-contained units in Multi-residential buildings and reference must be made to the CSH page on the Robust Details website: 1. Mature Robust Details (published for over 12 months and at least 100 test results) – regular assessment based on the 90th percentile of results from the last 100 site tests 2. Low use Robust Detail (published for over 12 months but fewer than 100 test results) – initial assessment based on the first 30 tests needed to qualify for the Robust Details scheme and the site tests available, and reviewed regularly as new test results become available, until it becomes a mature Robust Detail or is rejected. 3. New Robust Detail (published for less than 12 months and fewer than 100 test results) – initial assessment based on the first 30 tests needed to qualify for the Robust Details scheme, and reviewed regularly as new test results become available, until it becomes a mature Robust Detail or is rejected. It should be noted that not all RDs will necessarily achieve the performance levels required to achieve multi-residential credits. If in doubt, please check the list of currently approved details with RDL directly at www.robustdetails.com. Suitably qualified acoustician (SQA) An individual achieving all the following items can be considered to be 'suitably qualified' for the purposes of a BREEAM assessment: 1. Holds a degree, PhD or equivalent qualification in acoustics/sound testing. 2. Has a minimum of three years relevant experience (within the last five years). Such experience must clearly demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting acoustics in relation to construction and the built environment; including, acting in an advisory capacity to provide recommendations for suitable acoustic performance levels and mitigation measures. 3. An individual who holds a recognised acoustic qualification and membership of an appropriate professional body.The primary professional body for acoustics in the UK is the Institute of Acoustics. Where a suitably qualified acoustician is verifying the acoustic measurements/calculations carried out by another acoustician who does not meet the SQA requirements, they must, as a minimum, have read and reviewed the report and confirm in writing that they have found it to: 1. Represent sound industry practice 2. Be appropriate given the building being assessed and scope of works proposed 3. Avoid invalid, biased and exaggerated recommendations. Additionally, written confirmation from the third party verifier that they comply with the definition of a Suitably Qualified Acoustician is required. Single occupancy offices Cellular office space designed to accommodate one or two desk spaces/workstations (typically no greater than 10m2). Unoccupied spaces Where the term ‘unoccupied space’ is referenced in this BREEAM issue it refers to the nature of the space for the purpose of carrying acoustic calculations or measurements i.e. such measurements must be carried out when the space is unoccupied and therefore devoid of sources of noise. Weighted standardized level differences (D ) nT,w HTM 08-01 defines this as the ‘unit for rating airborne sound insulation on-site’.

114

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Hea 05 Acoustic performance

Health and Wellbeing

Weighted standardised impact sound pressure level (L' ) nT,w HTM 08-01 defines this as the ‘unit for rating impact airborne sound insulation on-site’.

Other information Noise rating (NR) curves Noise assessments based on NR curves are often used by building services consultants to predict internal noise levels due to mechanical ventilation systems. However, the BREEAM requirement uses the indoor ambient noise level, LAeq,T which includes external noise transmitted via the façade as well as internal noise such as that from mechanical ventilation systems. In the absence of strong low frequency noise, LAeq,T can be estimated from the NR value using the following formula: LAeq,T≈ NR + 6 dB. Therefore, if the NR value is known, but not the sound pressure levels in the individual frequency bands, an estimate for the indoor ambient noise level LAeq,T can still be determined from the NR value for the building services noise. The LAeq,T for the external noise transmitted via the façade must then be combined with the LAeq,T for the building services. 1Acoustic Performance Standards for the Priority Schools Building Programme, Department of Health, June 2013 2ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic Testing of Schools, version 1.2, July 2011 3BS EN ISO 140-18:2006 Acoustics. Measurement of sound insulation in buildings and of building elements 4HTM 08-01: Acoustics, Health Technical Memorandum, Department of Health, 2013 5BS 8233: Sound Insulation and noise reduction for buildings - Code of practice, 2014 6Court Service Design Guide (CSDG), Her Majesty's Court Service (HMCS), 2010 7ISO/IEC 17024:2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

115

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Hea 06 Safety and security Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Aim To recognise and encourage effective measures that promote safe and secure use and access to and from the building.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

One credit - Safe access Where external site areas form part of the assessed development the following apply: 1. Dedicated cycle paths provide direct access from the site entrance(s) to any cycle storage provided, without the need to deviate from the cycle path and, if relevant, connect to off-site cycle paths (or other appropriate safe route) where these run adjacent to the developmentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s site boundary. 2. Footpaths on-site provide direct access from the site entrance(s) to the building entrance(s) and connect to public footpaths off-site (where existing), providing practical and convenient access to local transport nodes and other off-site amenities (where existing). 3. Where provided, drop-off areas are designed off/adjoining to the access road and provide direct access to pedestrian footpaths, therefore avoiding the need for the pedestrian to cross vehicle access routes. 4. Dedicated pedestrian crossings are provided where pedestrian routes cross vehicle access routes, and appropriate traffic calming measures are in place to slow traffic down at these crossing points. 5. For large developments with a high number of public users or visitors, pedestrian footpaths must be signposted to other local amenities and public transport nodes off-site (where existing). 6. The lighting for access roads, pedestrian routes and cycle lanes is compliant with the external lighting criteria defined in Hea 01 Visual comfort, i.e. in accordance with BS 5489-1:2013 1 Lighting of roads and public amenity areas. Where vehicle delivery access and drop-off areas form part of the assessed development, the following apply: 7. Delivery areas are not directly accessed through general parking areas and do not cross or share pedestrian and cyclist routes and other outside amenity areas accessible to building users and general public. 8. There is a dedicated parking/waiting area for goods vehicles with appropriate separation from the manoeuvring area and staff and visitor car parking. 9. Parking and turning areas are designed for simple manoeuvring according to the type of delivery vehicle likely to access the site, thus avoiding the need for repeated shunting. 10. There is a dedicated space for the storage of refuse skips and pallets away from the delivery vehicle manoeuvring area and staff/visitor car parking (if appropriate given the building type/function).

One credit - Security of site and building

11. A suitably qualified security specialist (SQSS) conducts an evidence-based Security Needs Assessment (SNA) during or prior to Concept Design (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent). 12. A suitably qualified security specialist (SQSS) develops a set of recommendations or solutions during or prior to Concept Design (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent). These recommendations or solutions aim to ensure that the design of buildings, public and private car parks and public or amenity space are planned, designed and specified to address the issues

116

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Hea 06 Safety and security

Health and Wellbeing

identified in the preceding SNA. 13. The recommendations or solutions proposed by the suitably qualified security specialist (SQSS) are implemented (see CN9. Any deviation from those recommendations or solutions will need to be justified, documented and agreed in advance with a suitably qualified security specialist.

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN3

Development does not have any external site areas. See criteria 1 to 10.

The safe access criteria apply only to developments that have areas external to the assessed building and within the boundary of the assessed development (regardless or not of whether that external area is or will be the responsibility of the future building occupant). This includes external parking areas. If the assessed building does not have any external areas and access to the building is direct from the public highway/footpath i.e. there is no on-site vehicle access and parking areas, then the criteria concerning safe access are not applicable. In such instances the two available credits must be assessed and awarded based on compliance with the security criteria.

CN4

Covered parking area See criteria 1 to 10.

Where the assessed building has no external areas but does have a covered parking facility, and cyclists/pedestrians/delivery vehicles access the building via this area, then the relevant safe access criteria apply and this area must be assessed against those criteria.

General Safe access

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

117

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Terms

Description

CN5

Delivery access through parking areas (smaller sites/deliveries) See criteria 1 to 10 apart from 7.

Criterion 7 (delivery access through general parking areas) can be relaxed for smaller sites if it can be confirmed that the building is of an operational type and size which is likely to mean all deliveries to the building will be made by small vans and not heavy goods vehicles.

CN6

No vehicle delivery and manoeuvring areas See criteria 1 to 6.

The criteria concerning vehicle delivery access is not applicable where dedicated delivery access and drop-off areas do not form part of the assessed development.

CN7

Dedicated footpaths from car parking spaces

Where it is not practical to provide dedicated footpaths from each parking space within a car park, it is expected that design teams take every practical measure to ensure the safety of pedestrians. In general terms, as a minimum, a safe pedestrian route should be provided from the pedestrian exit of the car park to the building entrance. For larger car parks it would be beneficial to provide footpaths at regular intervals across it, to aid safe access from the car to the building entrance and the design team should demonstrate that they have achieved this as far as is practical.

Security of site and building CN8

Security Needs Assessment

Where a suitably qualified security specialist was consulted at a later stage than RIBA stage 2, this credit may still be achievable. If the suitably qualified security specialist confirms that the implementation of security measures have not been restricted, impaired or are not possible as a result of their later involvement ( i.e. everything that would/could have been recommended can still be implemented), then the credit can still be awarded (provided all other compliance requirements are met).

CN9

Implementing recommendations or solutions See criterion 13.

When confirming whether the recommendations or solutions set out by the suitably qualified security specialist(s) have been implemented at the post construction stage, it may be necessary for the assessor to use one or more of the following evidence types, supplied by the design team: Desk-based evidence e.g manufacturers literature/certificates etc Site-based evidence e.g. site inspection report/photographs etc

Building type specific CN10

Prisons Scope of security criteria for buildings on prison-sites

In the case of an assessment of a prison building/development the security criteria apply only to publicly accessible buildings and car parking areas outside of the secure perimeter zone (but still on the wider prison-site). This could include visitor reception/waiting buildings, facilities/estates offices and storage and visitor/staff parking. Security relating to secure prison buildings and their related site layout falls outside of the scope of BREEAM.

Methodology None.

118

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Hea 06 Safety and security

Health and Wellbeing

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Additional information Relevant definitions Architectural Liaison Officer (ALO) An ALO is the same as the Crime Prevention Design Advisor (see below) and is the title given to the same role in some police forces. http://www.securedbydesign.com/index.aspx Counter Terrorism Security Advisor (CTSA) CTSA's receive specialist training allowing them to identify and assess sites within their police force area that are deemed critical and may be vulnerable to terrorist and/or extremist attack. They then devise appropriate security plans to minimise impact on that site and the surrounding community. They also have responsibility for the protection afforded to Crowded Places (areas which by virtue of their crowd density may be liable to terrorist attack). Crime Prevention Design Advisor (CPDA) A Crime Prevention Design Advisor is a specialist crime prevention officer, trained at the Home Office Crime Reduction College, who deals with crime risk and designing out crime advice for the built environment. In addition to physical security measures the officer will consider defensible space, access, crime and movement generators all of which can contribute to a reduction in crime and disorder. http://www.securedbydesign.com/index.aspx Security Needs Assessment (SNA) The project and site specific assessment of security needs, including: 1. A visual audit of the site and surroundings, identifying environmental cues and features pertinent to the security of the proposed development. 2. Formal consultation with relevant stakeholders, including the local ALO, CPDA & CTSA (as applicable), in order to obtain a summary of crime and disorder issues in the immediate vicinity of the proposed development. 3. Identify risks specific to the proposed, likely or potential use of the building(s). 4. Identify risks specific to the proposed, likely or potential user groups of the building(s). 5. Identify any detrimental effects the development may have on the existing community. The purpose of the assessment is to inform stakeholder decision-making and allow the identification and evaluation of security recommendations and solutions. Dedicated cycle lanes Marked-out and clearly signed routes to accommodate building users arriving on and travelling through the assessed site on a bicycle. Cycle lanes should be fit for purpose and the following publications offer guidance on how to appropriately size, design and construct cycle lanes: 1. Local Transport Note 2/08 Cycle Infrastructure Design, Department of Transport, 2008. 2. The National Cycle Network Guidelines and Practical Details – issue 2, Sustrans and the relevant parts of Appendix VI NCN Design and Construction Checklist. Dedicated pedestrian crossing Dedicated infrastructure/road markings and signage/instructions that enables a pedestrian to safely cross a vehicle carriageway on the assessed site and continue their journey to/from the building. Such a crossing must be fit for purpose, in that it will be appropriate for the width of the road, level of traffic and pedestrian use specific to the site. It

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

119

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

will also act to alert drivers of vehicles using the carriageway to the potential presence of pedestrians in the carriageway, by ensuring they can be clearly seen and requiring the driver of the vehicle to give way to the pedestrian. External site areas Areas external to the assessed building, but within the development’s site boundary, which contain vehicle and/or pedestrian access roads/pathways to the building, parking, unloading and drop-off areas. Peer review A process employed by a professional body to demonstrate that potential or current full members maintain a standard of knowledge and experience required to ensure compliance with a code of conduct and professional ethics. Secured by Design (SBD) A police initiative that seeks to encourage the construction industry to adopt crime prevention measures in the design of developments, to assist in reducing the opportunity for and fear of crime. Secured by Design is owned by the Association of Chief Police Officers (ACPO) and has the support of the Home Office Crime Reduction and Community Safety Group and other Government Departments. The Association of Chief Police Officers for England Wales and Northern Ireland (ACPO) and the Association of Chief Police Officers for Scotland (ACPOS) endorse and support the Secured by Design programme. The Safer Parking Scheme An initiative of the Association of Chief Police Officers aimed at reducing crime and the fear of crime in parking facilities. Safer parking status, Park Mark®, is awarded to parking facilities that have met the criteria of a risk assessment conducted by the Police. The scheme is managed by the British Parking Association (BPA) and supported by the Home Office and Scottish Executive. Suitably Qualified Security Specialist (SQSS) The following are, at present, deemed to meet this definition: 1. Crime Prevention Design Advisors (CPDA) or Architectural Liaison Officers (ALO), Counter Terrorism Security Advisor (CTSA); or 2. A specialist registered with a BREEAM-recognised third party accreditation scheme for security specialists. 3. A practising security consultant that meets the following requirements: a. Minimum of three years relevant experience within the last five years. This experience must clearly demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting security in relation to construction and the built environment, relevant to the type and scale of the project being undertaken. b. Hold a suitable qualification relevant to security. c. Maintains (full) membership to a relevant professional body or accreditation scheme that meets the following: i. Has a professional code of conduct, to which members must adhere; and ii. Ongoing membership is subject to peer review. When appointing the suitably qualified security specialist, consideration should be given to the appropriateness of the individual to carry out the security needs assessment, based on the size, scope and security needs of the development. Organisations, associations or scheme operators who wish to have their membership recognised as a ‘third party accreditation scheme for security specialist’, should review their current status (and therefore their members) against the requirements above and, where they feel they are compliant, contact BRE Global with the relevant information/evidence.

Other information The following is a list of existing schemes that may support the SQSS when developing the recommendations or solutions addressing the issues raised in the Security Needs Assessment (SNA) (criterion 12): Secured by Design Safer Parking Scheme *The Safer Parking Scheme is only applicable to schemes where the primary function of the site is for parking of vehicles, or to parking areas serving the prevailing site use(s).

120

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Hea 06 Safety and security

Health and Wellbeing

Useful references The Metric Handbook2 contains details of typical delivery/freight vehicle sizes and turning circles. In addition to the SbD Schools guidance, Managing School Facilities, Guide 4 Improving Security in Schools, published by the Department for Education and Employment (1996)3, offers guidance on how to improve the security of school premises. 1BS 5489-1:2013 Part 1: lighting of roads and public amenity areas, Code of Practice for the design of road lighting, BSI,

2013 2Metric handbook Planning and design data, Adler, Architectural Press 4th Edition. 2012. 3Managing School Facilities, Guide 4 Improving Security in Schools, published by the Department for Education and Employment (1996)

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

121

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Energy Category overview Weightings

Minimum standards

Fully fitted 15%

Shell only 14.5%

Shell and core 15%

Ene 01, Ene 02

Summary This category encourages the specification and design of energy efficient building solutions, systems and equipment that support the sustainable use of energy in the building and sustainable management in the building’s operation. Issues in this section assess measures to improve the inherent energy efficiency of the building, encourage the reduction of carbon emissions and support efficient management throughout the operational phase of the building’s life.

Category summary table Issue ID

Issue name

Credits

Ene 01

Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions

Recognise improvements in the energy performance of the building above national building regulations in relation to heating and cooling energy demand, primary energy consumption and carbon dioxide emissions. Encouraging steps taken to reduce energy demand through building design and systems specification.

Ene 02

Energy monitoring

Energy metering systems are installed to enable energy consumption to be assigned to end uses. Sub-meters are provided for high energy load and tenancy areas.

Ene 03

External lighting

Specification of energy efficient light fittings for external areas of the development and controls to prevent use during daylight hours or when not needed.

122

Credit summary

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Energy

Issue ID

Issue name

Credits

Credit summary

Ene 04

Low carbon design

Analysis of the proposed building design/development is undertaken to identify opportunities for and encourage the adoption of passive design solutions, including free cooling. A feasibility study has been carried out to establish the most appropriate on-site/near-site low or zero carbon (LZC) energy source(s) for the building/development and is specified.

Ene 05

Energy efficient cold storage

The refrigeration system, its controls and components have been designed, installed and commissioned in accordance with appropriate codes and standards and demonstrates a saving in indirect greenhouse gas emissions (CO2 eq.) over the course of its operational life.

Ene 06

Energy efficient transportation systems

An analysis of the transport demand and usage patterns is undertaken to determine the optimum number and size of lifts, escalators and/or moving walks. Energy efficient installations are specified.

Ene 07

Energy efficient laboratory systems

Client engagement to determine occupant requirements and define laboratory performance criteria to optimise energy demand of the laboratory facilities. Specification of best practice energy efficient equipment and measures as appropriate.

Ene 08

Energy efficient equipment

Identification of the building's unregulated energy consuming loads which have a major impact on the total unregulated energy demand. Demonstrate a meaningful reduction in the total unregulated energy demand of the building.

Ene 09

Drying space

Provision of adequate internal or external space and equipment.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

123

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Yes

Aim To recognise and encourage buildings designed to minimise operational energy demand, primary energy consumption and CO2 emissions.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

Up to twelve credits - Energy performance

1. Calculate an Energy Performance Ratio for New Constructions (EPRNC). Compare the EPRNC achieved with the benchmarks in Table - 25 and award the corresponding number of BREEAM credits.

Table - 25: Ene 01 EPRNC benchmark scale Minimum standards BREEAM credits

124

EPRNC

Rating

Minimum requirements

0.075

0.15

Pass Good Very Good

Requires a performance improvement progressively better than the relevant national building regulations compliant standard (see Other information).

0.225

0.30

0.375

Excellent

Requires 5 credits to be achieved (equivalent to an EPR of at least 0.375).

0.45

0.525

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions

Energy

Minimum standards BREEAM credits

EPRNC

Rating

Minimum requirements

0.60

Outstanding

Requires 8 credits to be achieved (equivalent to an EPR of at least 0.6).

0.675

0.75

0.825

0.90 AND zero net regulated CO2 emissions*.

* Note: Zero net regulated CO2 emissions are only required to achieve the maximum number of credits (12).There is no additional CO2 minimum requirement for any BREEAM rating. A description of how the EPRNC is calculated from a building's modelled operational energy performance, primary energy consumption and CO2 emissions is provided in the Methodology section. Note: The four countries of the UK have their own building regulations for energy and while they use the same methodology and approved calculation software, each have different definitions of the notional building and set different requirements for regulatory compliance i.e. baseline performance. This is accounted for in the BREEAM NC 2014 Ene 01 methodology through the ‘translator curves’ defined for each country. Therefore, the EPRNC and the BREEAM credits are determined by comparing the assessed buildings modelled operational energy performance relative to the regulatory baseline for the country in which the building is located. See compliance note CN3.

Exemplary level criteria The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve up to five innovation credits for this BREEAM issue:

Up to four credits - Zero regulated carbon 2. The building achieves an EPRNC≥ 0.9 and zero net regulated CO2 emissions (see Relevant definitions). 3. An equivalent percentage of the buildings modelled ‘regulated’ operational energy consumption, as stipulated in Table - 26, is generated by carbon neutral on-site or near-site sources and used to meet energy demand from ‘unregulated’ building systems or processes.

Five credits - Carbon negative 4. The building is ‘carbon negative’ in terms of its total modelled operational energy consumption, including regulated and unregulated energy (see Relevant definitions in the Additional information section of this issue). Table - 26: Innovation credits Innovation credits

Equivalent % criteria

10%

20%

50%

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

125

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Innovation credits

Equivalent % criteria

80%

> 100%

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Energy performance, criterion 1 Option 1 - Shell only: Calculate an Energy Performance Ratio just for the building’s heating and cooling energy demand only (EPRED). Compare the EPRED achieved with the EPRNC in Table 1 'Ene 01 EPRNC benchmark scale' with the EPRED substituted for the EPRNC. Award the corresponding number of BREEAM credits. The exemplary credits for this issue are not applicable for shell only. Option 2 - Shell and core only: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

CN1.1

Building services efficiencies not known

Where the building services efficiencies are not known, for example where they are not within the remit of the shell and core developer (i.e. where services will be provided as part of the fit-out works), services complying with the minimum energy efficiency standards or backstop levels required by the relevant national building regulations should be used for the energy modelling.

CN1.2

Green fit-out agreement (See Relevant definitions. )

For the purposes of this BREEAM assessment, it is permissible, when conducting the energy modelling, for the design team to substitute the minimum energy efficiency standards or backstop levels required by the relevant national building regulations for the performance specifications confirmed within a green fit-out agreement. This is permissible provided that the performance specification forms part of, or is referenced within, a fit-out agreement which is, or will be, contractually required of the tenant(s) in their fit-out works. This rule applies only to those areas of the building that the scope of the green fit-out agreement covers. Speculative areas of the assessed building development not fitted out or covered by the scope of such an agreement must assume the minimum energy efficiency standards or backstop levels required by the relevant national building regulations in the energy model, and no better.

126

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions

Ref

Terms

Energy

Description

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

127

Energy

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description

Country specific CN3

Building regulations for energy

The relevant building regulations for England are Approved Document Part L2A 2010 Conservation of fuel and power in new buildings other than dwellings, 2013 edition - for use in England These regulations are used to define the country-specific BREEAM ‘translator curve’ for the purpose of benchmarking building energy performance relative to a regulatory baseline and awarding credits for this issue.

CN4

Extensions to existing buildings See criterion 1.

Where an existing building is being extended (and only the new extension is being assessed) and that extension uses existing building services plant, the energy modelling must be based on the building fabric of the new extension and any existing, common, building services plant and new building services plant installed that will service the new extension. The energy modelling does not have to consider the existing building fabric where this will not form part of the scope of the BREEAM assessment. Nor does it have to consider existing building services where they are not supplying services (heating, cooling and/or ventilation) to the new extension being BREEAM assessed.

CN5

Renewable and low carbon Installations See criterion 2c.

Where included as part of the project and therefore assessed under this BREEAM issue, the installation of low or zero carbon technologies can be used to off-set CO2 emissions arising from regulated and, in the case of exemplary credits, unregulated energy consumption. The LZC technology can be installed on-site or near site where a private wire arrangement is in place (see Relevant definitions).

CN6

Zero carbon sources of energy - double counting See criteria 6 and 7.

The project team must avoid double counting the energy from the zero carbon source. This may be particularly relevant where that source of energy generation is being accounted for in terms of the assessed building’s regulated CO2 emissions and/or it will contribute to offsetting other buildings' CO2 emissions, which are not part of this assessment.

CN7

Mixed use buildings assessed using SAP or SAP and SBEM See criterion 1.

In some instances, BREEAM-assessed buildings with residential areas may have been classified under the domestic building regulations and will therefore have had their energy use modelled using the domestic assessment method, SAP, as well as or instead of SBEM. Further guidance on assessing a building's Ene 01 performance where SAP is used is provided in the Other information section for this assessment issue.

CN8

Building assessed as part of a larger development

Where the building under assessment forms part of a larger development and either a new or existing LZC installation is provided for the whole site, then the amount of LZC energy generation counted for in this issue, and subsequent CO 2 emissions saved, should be proportional to the building’s energy demand compared to the total energy demand for the site.

General

128

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions

Energy

Ref

Terms

Description

CN9

Estimating energy demand from unregulated building systems/processes

At present there is no standard or national calculation methodology for modelling unregulated energy demands in a building. To demonstrate compliance with the ‘exemplary level criteria’ the building’s modelled operational ‘regulated’ energy consumption is therefore used as a proxy for a building’s unregulated energy demand, i.e. unregulated energy equals 100% of regulated energy. While not accurate, this approach enables BREEAM to assess and award credits for buildings that meet a proportion of its unregulated energy demand via on-site or near-site renewable energy sources. Where unregulated energy demand for the building can be accurately predicted, then this data can be used to determine the percentage of unregulated energy demand met via renewable energy sources. Unregulated energy demand could be estimated on the basis of metered data from a similar or the same building type with the same unregulated system/process loads or by using the methodology described in CIBSE TM54: 2013, 'Evaluating operational energy performance of buildings at the design stage'1.

Methodology The methodology for the EPRNC calculation considers three metrics of modelled building performance when determining the number of credits achieved for this issue. The three metrics are: 1. The building’s heating and cooling energy demand 2. The building's primary energy consumption 3. The total resulting CO2 emissions. These three metrics for the actual modelled building performance are compared against the relevant national building regulations compliant standard (i.e. a baseline) and each is expressed as a percentage improvement. The percentage improvements are then compared against modelled building stock and 'translated' into a ratio of performance for each metric. These ratios are then weighted for each metric and added together to determine the overall Energy Performance Ratio (EPRNC). The calculation is determined using the following performance data from annual energy modelling of the building’s specified/designed regulated fixed building services and fabric, as undertaken by an accredited energy assessor using approved building energy calculation software: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Building floor area (m2) Notional building heating and cooling energy demand (mJ/m2) Actual building heating and cooling energy demand (mJ/m2) Notional building primary energy consumption (kWh/m2) Actual building primary energy consumption (kWh/m2) Target Emission Rate (TER) (kgCO2/m2) Building Emission Rate (BER) (kgCO2/m2).

The necessary energy modelling data required to determine building performance is sourced from National Calculation Method compliant energy modelling software, used by the design team to demonstrate building regulation compliance. This data is then entered into the BREEAM Ene 01 calculator to determine the EPRNC and number of credits achieved. The Ene 01 calculator is within the BREEAM assessment scoring and reporting tool, in the Assessment issue scoring tab, Energy section. The methodology summarised above is described in greater detail in Guidance Note 12 to be provided on the BREEAM website.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

129

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

3-5

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

1-2

A copy of the Building Regulations Output Document from the approved software. The output documents must be based on the design stage of analysis. A copy of the Building Regulations Output Document from the design stage SAP calculations (where relevant for multi-residential buildings)

As per interim design stage, but with the output documents from the approved software reflecting performance at the as built stage of analysis. This must account for any changes to the specification during construction and the measured air leakage rate, ductwork leakage and fan performances (as required by building regulations).

3-5

As above, plus evidence confirming: 1. The total carbon neutral energy generation (kWh/yr) 2. The source of the carbon neutral energy 3. Calculated estimate of energy consumption from unregulated systems/process (kWh/yr) (only required if confirming zero regulated carbon or carbon negative exemplary credits). 4. Calculated estimate of exported energy surplus (only required if confirming carbon negative status).

As required above and as per interim design stage.

Additional information Relevant definitions Accredited energy assessor A person registered with an accredited energy assessment scheme provider. The scheme provider will be licensed by the relevant government department to accredit competent persons in the energy assessment of nondomestic/domestic buildings for the purposes of demonstrating compliance with the building regulations in the country of origin. The energy assessor should be appropriately accredited for the building being assessed. For a full list of approved accreditation schemes/organisations for energy assessors and links to registers of accredited energy assessors visit: https://www.ndepcregister.com (non-domestic), www.epcregister.com (domestic) Approved building energy calculation software Software approved for the purpose of demonstrating compliance with the energy efficiency and carbon emission requirements of the building regulations (and in turn compliance with the Energy Performance of Buildings Directive (EPBD) recast 2012. The definition includes the Simplified Building Energy Model (SBEM) and its interface iSBEM, as well as third party software approved by the relevant government department.

130

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions

Energy

A list of approved software for non-domestic buildings for England is provided here: http://www.ncm.bre.co.uk Approved building energy calculation software will provide the data required for calculating the EPRNC and BREEAM Ene 01 credits. Please note that for dwellings (where relevant to the assessment of multi-residential buildings), the government’s Standard Assessment Procedure for the Energy Rating of Dwellings (SAP) may be used. The current version is SAP 2012 version 9.92 (October 2013). See also compliance noteCN7 regarding the use of SAP outputs in multiresidential building assessments. Building Emission Rate (BER) The building CO2 emission rate expressed as carbon dioxide emissions per square metre per year (kgCO2/m2/year). The BER is calculated in accordance with the National Calculation Methodology (NCM) and the Simplified Buildings Energy Model (SBEM). Building regulations Building regulations set standards for the design and construction of buildings to ensure the safety and health of people in or about those buildings. They also include requirements to ensure that fuel and power is conserved and facilities are provided for people, including those with disabilities, to access and move around inside buildings. Carbon negative building A building/site that generates, surplus to its own energy demand, an excess of renewable or carbon neutral energy and exports that surplus via the national grid to meet other, off-site energy demands, i.e. the building is a net exporter of zero carbon energy. Surplus in this respect means the building/site generates more energy via renewable/carbon neutral sources that it needs to meet its own regulated and unregulated energy needs. Any surplus must be exported through the national grid as additional capacity to that required by the Renewables Obligation i.e. Renewable Obligation Certificates are not claimed/sold for the renewable energy generation (see definition of Renewables Obligation Certificate). This definition of carbon negative focuses only on energy and carbon dioxide emissions resulting from the operational stage of the building life cycle (as this is the stated aim of this assessment issue). It does not take into account the embodied carbon, in terms of carbon fixing or emissions resulting from the manufacture or disposal of building materials and components (these impacts/benefits are dealt with in Mat 01 Life cycle impacts). Carbon neutral Carbon neutral means that, through a transparent process of calculating building operational emissions, reducing those emissions and offsetting residual emissions, net carbon emissions equal zero. This includes carbon emissions from both regulated and unregulated energy consuming plan and systems. See the 'Zero net regulatedCO2 emissions' definition also. Controlled service or fitting The building regulations for England 2 define this as a service or fitting in relation to which the building regulations imposes a requirement. Dwelling Emission Rate (DER) The DER is the estimated carbon dioxide emissions per square metre per year (kgCO2/m2yr) for the dwelling as designed. It accounts for energy used in heating, fixed cooling, hot water and lighting. It is the equivalent of the BER for dwellings. Dynamic simulation model (DSM) A software tool that models energy inputs and outputs for different types of buildings over time. In certain situations, SBEM will not be sophisticated enough to provide an accurate assessment of a building’s energy efficiency. In these cases government-approved proprietary dynamic simulation models may be used. Energy demand The building energy provided for end uses in the building such as space heating, hot water, space cooling, lighting, fan power and pump power. Energy demands are the same as room loads. One of the outputs from the Building Regulations Output Document is for heating and cooling energy demand only, not for any other building energy uses. Heating and cooling energy demands are influenced by factors including building fabric heat loss, air permeability, glazing and shading.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

131

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Energy Performance Ratio for New Constructions (EPR ) NC A metric that is unique to BREEAM and calculated by the BREEAM Ene 01 Calculator within the BREEAM Assessment Scoring and Reporting tool, using modelled outputs from the approved building energy calculation software. It is a ratio that defines the performance of a BREEAM assessed building in terms of its regulated operational heating and cooling energy demand, primary energy consumption and CO2 emissions. This measure of performance is used to determine the number of Ene 01 credits a building achieves in the BREEAM assessment. A description of how the EPRNC is defined and calculated is summarised in the Methodology section and outlined in greater detail in Guidance Note 12. Fixed building service The building regulations for energy performance of buildings define this as any part of, or any controls associated with: 1. Fixed internal or external lighting systems but does not include emergency escape lighting or specialist process lighting; or 2. Fixed systems for heating, hot water service, air-conditioning or mechanical ventilation. Green fit-out agreement A formal contractually binding agreement between a building developer/owner and their tenant(s). As such, a green fit-out agreement (or ‘green’ clauses/sections in a lease agreement) can be used as evidence demonstrating compliance with the relevant BREEAM issue criteria at the interim design and final post construction stages of assessment. The agreement should make specific reference to the specification requirements/levels claimed, and as defined by BREEAM in this technical manual, where credits are awarded. BREEAM aims to encourage a mutually beneficial relationship between the shell and core developer/owner of a building and its future tenant(s) so that the fully-fitted operational building achieves performance against the highest possible environmental standards. In order to achieve this, BREEAM encourages and rewards the use of formal legally binding green fit-out agreements between a developer/owner and their tenant. Where a legally binding green fit-out agreement is provided as evidence and it commits the tenant’s fit-out to meet the criteria of this BREEAM issue, credits are available to be awarded. Low or zero carbon (LZC) technologies A low or zero carbon technology provides a source of energy generation from renewable energy sources or from a low carbon source such as combined heat and power (CHP) or ground source heat pumps (GSHP). National Calculation Method (NCM) The National Calculation Method (NCM) enables quantification of building operational energy consumption and CO2 emissions resulting from regulated building services/systems and fabric performance. The NCM is the methodology used for demonstrating compliance with the European Union Energy Performance of Buildings Directive (EPBD) 2012 (recast). Building energy modelling compliant with the NCM can be carried out using approved software (see Relevant definition of Approved building energy calculation software). The full details are described in the NCM Modelling Guide (2013), www.ncm.bre.co.uk. Notional building A hypothetical building of the same size, shape, orientation and shading as the actual building, with the same activities, zoning and system types and exposed to the same weather data, but with pre-defined specified properties for the building fabric, fittings and services. The notional building is concurrent with the national building regulations for Wales 2014, Northern Ireland 2012 and England 2013. Near-site LZC A low or zero carbon source of energy generation located near to the site of the assessed building. The source is most likely to be providing energy for all or part of a local community of buildings, including the assessed building, e.g. decentralised energy generation linked to a community heat network or renewable electricity sources connected via private wire. On-site LZC A low or zero carbon source of energy generation which is located on the same site as the assessed building.

132

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions

Energy

Primary energy consumption This refers to the direct use at the source, or supply to users without transformation, of crude energy, that is, energy that has not been subjected to any conversion or transformation process. Private wire arrangement In the context of BREEAM for low or zero carbon technology installations, a private wire arrangement is where any electricity generated on or in the vicinity of the site is fed directly to the building being assessed, by dedicated power supplies. If electricity is generated which is surplus to the instantaneous demand of the building, this electricity may be fed back to the national grid. The carbon benefit associated with any electricity fed into the grid in this manner can only be allocated against an individual installation or building. In cases where a building is supplied by a communal installation, no carbon benefit can be allocated to buildings which are not connected to the communal installation. Regulated energy Building energy consumption resulting from the specification of a controlled, fixed building services and fittings, including space heating and cooling, hot water, ventilation and lighting. Renewables Obligation Certificate (ROC) This is a green certificate issued to an accredited generator for eligible renewable electricity generated within the UK and supplied to customers by a licensed electricity supplier. One ROC is issued for each megawatt hour (MWh) of eligible renewable output generated 3. Standard Assessment Procedure (SAP) for Energy Rating of Dwellings The government’s approved methodology for assessing the energy performance of new dwellings. The current version is SAP 2012 version 9.92. The procedure accounts for energy used in: Space heating and cooling Hot water Fixed lighting Mechanical ventilation. The Simplified Building Energy Model (SBEM) SBEM is software developed for DCLG by BRE. SBEM is a computer program that provides an analysis of a building’s energy consumption. It calculates monthly energy use and carbon dioxide emissions of a building (excluding dwellings) based on a description of the building geometry, construction, use and HVAC and lighting equipment. SBEM is accompanied by a basic user interface, iSBEM. There also exists alternative approved software ‘front-end’ interfaces for SBEM (see definition of Approved building energy calculation software). Target Emission Rate (TER) The target emission rate is the minimum energy performance requirement (required by building regulations) for a new non-domestic building (kgCO2/m2yr). The TER is calculated in accordance with the National Calculation Methodology (NCM) and the Simplified Buildings Energy Model (SBEM). For dwellings, the TER is calculated using the SAP methodology according to the requirements defined in the building regulations for dwellings. The TER is expressed in terms of the mass of CO2 emitted per year per square metre of total useful floor area of the building (kgCO2/m2yr). Unregulated energy Building energy consumption resulting from a system or process that is not ‘controlled’, i.e. energy consumption from systems in the building on which the Building Regulations do not impose a requirement. For example, this may include energy consumption from systems integral to the building and its operation, e.g. lifts, escalators, refrigeration systems and ducted fume cupboards; or energy consumption from operational-related equipment e.g. computers, servers, printers, photocopiers, laptops, mobile fume cupboards, cooking, audio-visual equipment and other appliances. Zero net regulated carbon (CO ) emissions 2 The annual building net regulated CO2 emissions (kgCO2/m2yr) arising as a result of annual energy consumption from fixed building services, i.e. space heating and cooling, domestic hot water, ventilation and lighting, also referred to as controlled services and fittings, as a result of requirements imposed on such systems by the building regulations. In aiming to achieve a zero regulated carbon status, the building energy modelling can take account of contributions

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

133

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

of energy generated from on-site and near-site renewable and low carbon installations. Energy generated and supplied from off-site renewable and low carbon installations cannot be used to meet this definition.

Other information Allowable solutions The term 'allowable solutions' forms part of the proposed zero carbon definition. A consultation on allowable solutions is ongoing (at the time of writing). Once an official definition of allowable solutions is confirmed by the government for nondomestic buildings, BRE will advise accordingly on the contribution of allowable solutions towards achieving BREEAM credits.

Building regulations classifications for multi-residential buildings Multi-residential buildings that can be assessed under BREEAM New Construction 2014 will be classified under either the nondwelling version of the relevant building regulations or a combination of the non-dwelling and dwelling of the building regulations, as outlined in compliance note CN7. For England, areas classified under the relevant building regulations documents, Approved Documents (AD) Part L2A, are classed as ‘buildings other than dwellings’. However this does also include ‘rooms for residential purposes’ (see below). Areas classified as Part L1A are ‘self-contained dwellings’. The Part L classification impacts this BREEAM issue in that areas classified as Part L2A must be assessed using SBEM and areas classified as Part L1A must be assessed using SAP.

Room for residential purposes The building regulations for Wales, Northern Ireland and England give the following definition: Room for residential purposes means a room, or suite of rooms, which is not a dwelling-house or a flat and which is used by one or more persons to live and sleep and includes a room in a hostel, a hotel, a boarding house, a hall of residence or a residential home but does not include a room in a hospital, or other similar establishment, used for patient accommodation.

Guidance for assessing Ene 01 performance in buildings that contain residential areas Guidance for assessing performance where the building has been modelled using SAP only The relevant data must be sourced from the SAP data sheet from the approved software (provided by the Accredited energy assessor). This data must first be entered in to the 'Ene 01 Supplementary Calculator for Multi-Residential Buildings Using SAP'. The calculator converts the data into the outputs outlined in the Methodology section. Once converted by the Ene 01 Supplementary Calculator, the outputs should be entered into BREEAM’s Ene 01 Calculator in the BREEAM Assessment Scoring and Reporting tool. This calculator will then confirm the Energy Performance Ratio (EPR) and number of BREEAM credits achieved. The Ene 01 Supplementary Calculator for Multi-Residential Buildings Using SAP describes in detail what data to source from the SAP data sheet(s).

Guidance for assessing performance where the building has been modelled using SAP and SBEM Where the building has been classified under both the non-dwelling and the dwelling regulations, because it contains both residential and non-residential areas, two sets of energy performance data will be required: one set from SBEM for the nondomestic areas; and one from SAP for the self-contained dwellings. The relevant SAP data must first be entered into the 'Ene 01 Supplementary Calculator for Multi-Residential Buildings Using SAP'. This calculator converts the data into the outputs outlined in the Methodology section. This converted SAP data along with the relevant outputs from SBEM must then be added to BREEAM’s Ene 01 Calculator in the BREEAM Assessment Scoring and Reporting Tool. This calculator will then confirm the Energy Performance Ratio (EPR) and number of BREEAM credits achieved.

134

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions

Energy

Where both SBEM and SAP outputs are used, the total credits achieved are determined by area weighting the credits achieved for the domestic and non-domestic parts of the building. The area weighted totals are then added together and rounded down to the nearest whole credit. The same method of area weighting is applied to the percentage improvement on the building's Target Emission Rate. The area weighted credits and percentage improvement are the totals used to determine compliance with BREEAM’s Ene 01 minimum standards. 1CIBSE TM54: 2013, Evaluating operational energy performance of buildings at the design stage 2The Building Regulations 2000, Approved Document Part L2A: The conservation of fuel and power in new buildings other

than dwellings, 2013 edition, HM Government 3www.ofgem.gov.uk

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

135

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ene 02 Energy monitoring Number of credits available

minimum standards

Building type dependent

Yes

Aim To recognise and encourage the installation of energy sub-metering that facilitates the monitoring of operational energy consumption.

Assessment criteria Please note: The first credit is applicable to all building types. The second credit is not applicable to Pre-schools, Primary schools, Law courts, Prisons, Multi-residential and Other buildings: Residential institutions. The following is required to demonstrate compliance.

One credit - Sub-metering of major energy consuming systems

1. Energy metering systems are installed that enable at least 90% of the estimated annual energy consumption of each fuel to be assigned to the various end-use categories of energy consuming systems (see Methodology ). 2. The energy consuming systems in buildings with a total useful floor area greater than 1,000m2. are metered using an appropriate energy monitoring and management system. 3. The systems in smaller buildings are metered either with an energy monitoring and management system or with separate accessible energy sub-meters with pulsed or other open protocol communication outputs, to enable future connection to an energy monitoring and management system (see Relevant definitions ). 4. The end energy consuming uses are identifiable to the building users, for example through labelling or data outputs.

One credit - Sub-metering of high energy load and tenancy areas

5. An accessible energy monitoring and management system or separate accessible energy sub-meters with pulsed or other open protocol communication outputs to enable future connection to an energy monitoring and management system are provided, covering a significant majority of the energy supply to tenanted areas or, in the case of single occupancy buildings, relevant function areas or departments within the building/unit.

Checklists and tables None.

136

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Ene 02 Energy monitoring

Energy

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Sub-metering of major energy consuming systems, criteria 1 to 4 Option 1 - Shell only: These criteria are not applicable. Option 2 - Shell and core: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Sub-metering of high energy load and tenancy areas, criterion 5 Option 1 - Shell only: This criterion is not applicable. Option 2 - Shell and core: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply, subject to the following: meters must be installed on the energy supply to each separate tenanted unit or floor plate within the assessed development. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN3

Scope of submetering for simple building assessments

Dependent upon the building type, the assessor should use their discretion to identify which major energy consuming systems (where present) should be submetered.

CN4

Extensions to existing buildings

Where an existing building is being extended and it has existing building services plant and systems that will be common to both the new extension and existing building, the criteria only apply to the extension. In this case, energy services supplying energy consuming systems from the existing building shall, as a minimum, be metered at the entry points to the extension, e.g. hot water, chilled water, gas and electricity. However the best practice approach would usually be to ensure that the energy metering covers the entire building.

CN5

Modular boiler systems See criterion 1.

Modular boiler systems can be monitored as a whole. See Relevant definitions

CN6

Lighting and small power See criterion 5.

Due to traditional distribution methods, it can be difficult to separate lighting and small power cost effectively. It is acceptable, within a single floor, for lighting and small power to be combined for metering purposes, provided that sub-metering is provided for each floor plate.

General

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

137

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Terms

Description

CN7

Small function areas/departments See criterion 5.

For a building consisting of a number of small function areas or departments, submetering the heating, hot water and combined electricity energy uses is sufficient to achieve this credit. Individual electricity energy uses within each unit do not need to be sub-metered. For the purpose of this BREEAM issue, a small function area/department is defined as less than 200m2.

CN8

Heating and hot water See criterion 5.

Space heating and domestic hot water may be combined with a single heat or gas meter per tenanted area/function area/department, where it is impractical to submeter these items separately.

CN9

Significant majority See criterion 5.

A significant majority of the energy supply to the tenanted areas/function areas/departments covers most of the energy uses but does not have to include very small ones. As a guide, energy uses that cumulatively make-up less than 10% of the energy supply for that area may be excluded.

Building type specific CN10

Buildings situated on campus developments See criterion 5.

The systems for buildings situated on campus developments must be monitored using either an appropriate energy monitoring and management system or another automated control system, e.g. outstations linked to a central computer, for monitoring energy consumption. The criteria only apply to the assessed building. Where energy services are supplied from an existing building on the campus, they shall be metered at the entry points to the assessed building, e.g. hot water, chilled water, gas and electricity. Provision of a pulsed or other open protocol communication output is not sufficient to award the credit for these building types.

CN11

Small tenanted office, industrial or retail units See criterion 5.

For a development consisting of a number of small tenanted units, a single meter per unit for electricity and another for heating is sufficient to achieve this credit. Individual areas within each unit do not need to be sub-metered. For the purpose of this BREEAM issue, a small unit is defined as less than 200m2.

CN12

Large office, industrial or retail units See criterion 5.

For a development consisting of one or more larger units (i.e. greater than 200m2), sufficient sub metering to allow for monitoring of the relevant function areas or departments within the unit must be specified, in addition to metering of the unit as a whole.

CN13

Healthcare buildings: medicalbased systems See criterion 5.

Large-scale medical equipment/systems can be excluded when assessing compliance with this issue (although it is recommended that sub-metering is considered in such instances).

CN14

Single occupant buildings: relevant function areas or departments See criterion 5.

The lists below summarise the commonly found functions by building types. These lists are not exhaustive and where other areas or departments exist, these should also be separately metered.

138

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Ene 02 Energy monitoring

Energy

Ref

Terms

Description

CN15

Office buildings

1. Office areas (metering by floor plate) 2. Catering

CN16

Retail buildings

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

CN17

Industrial units

1. Office areas 2. Operational area 3. Ancillary areas (e.g. canteens etc)

CN18

Education buildings

Kitchens (excluding small staff kitchens and food technology rooms) Computer suites Workshops Lecture halls Conference rooms Drama studios Swimming pools Sports halls Process areas Laboratories High containment suites within laboratories Controlled environment chambers Animal accommodation areas Data centres IT work and study rooms, including IT-equipped library space and any space with provision of more than one computer terminal per 5m2. Individual sub-metering of standard classrooms/seminar rooms is not required.

CN19

Hospitals and other healthcare facilities

1. Operating departments 2. Imaging departments 3. Radiotherapy departments 4. Pathology departments 5. Dialysis departments 6. Medical physics facilities 7. Mortuary and post mortem departments 8. Rehabilitation when including hydrotherapy pools 9. Central sterile supplies departments (or equivalent) 10. Process areas, e.g. commercial-scale kitchens and laundries 11. IT rooms 12. Pharmacy departments 13. Laboratories 14. Tenancy areas (e.g. catering, retail, laundry) In small healthcare buildings (<999m2) with no high energy load areas (as defined above), a single meter per floor plate is sufficient to achieve this credit. Individual areas within each floor plate do not need to be sub-metered.

Sales area Storage and warehouse Cold storage Offices Catering Tenant units

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

139

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Terms

Description

CN20

Other buildings See criterion 5.

Other types of single occupant buildings should use the above lists of function areas as a guide to the level of provision required to comply, bearing in mind the aim of the credit is to encourage the installation of energy sub-metering that facilitates the monitoring of in-use energy consumption (in this case by area).

Methodology Metering strategy Detailed guidance on how to develop an appropriate metering strategy for the energy criteria of a new building is available in CIBSE TM39 Building energy metering 1.

Estimating the annual energy consumption of each end use Where the total consumption of any single end use category (or a combination of end use categories added together) is estimated to account for less than 10% of the annual energy consumption for a given fuel type, it is not necessary for this end use to be sub-metered. In this instance, the design team should demonstrate that the respective end use(s) is expected to account for less than 10% of the annual energy consumption for the fuel type. Where a given end use(s) will clearly account for less than 10% of the total annual energy consumption for the fuel type in question, a simple hand calculation or use of benchmark data to demonstrate this is acceptable.

Estimating the total annual energy consumption Where it is unclear whether an end use(s) would account for 10% of the annual energy consumption for a given fuel type or not, more detailed calculations should be provided. Then the total annual energy consumption should be estimated using a method that estimates actual energy consumption. The energy consumption for each end use may be estimated by using methods described in CIBSE TM54: Evaluating operational energy performance of buildings at the design stage2, using actual operational inputs (rather than those used for building regulations calculations). The weather data used should be the average current weather data for the local area. The data on water consumption from theWat 01 Water consumption issue may be used as inputs for evaluating the energy use of domestic hot water.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

140

Final post construction stage

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Ene 02 Energy monitoring

Energy

Additional information Relevant definitions Accessible meters Energy meters located in an area of the building that allows for easy access to facilitate regular monitoring and readings by the building occupant/facilities manager. Typically this will be the plant room, main distribution room or control room (where a building energy management system (BEMS) is installed). Common areas Developments that have several tenant units, particularly large retail developments, may also share common facilities and access that is not owned or controlled by any one individual tenant, but used by all. Common areas are typically managed and maintained by the developmentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s owner, i.e. landlord or their managing agent. Examples of common areas include an atrium, stairwells, main entrance foyers/reception and external areas e.g. parking. Energy consuming systems Systems that consume energy to perform the following functions within a building: a. Space heating b. Domestic hot water heating c. Humidification* d. Cooling* e. Ventilation, i.e. fans (major)* f. Pumps g. Lighting h. Small power i. Renewable or low carbon systems (separately) j. Controls k. Other major energy-consuming systems/plant, where appropriate. Depending on the building type, this might include for example: plant used for swimming or hydrotherapy pools; other sports and leisure facilities; kitchen plant/catering equipment; cold storage plan;, laboratory plant; sterile services equipment; transportation systems (e.g. lifts and escalators); drama studios and theatres with large lighting rigs; telecommunications; dedicated computer room or suite; dealing rooms; covered car parks; ovens/furnaces; and floodlighting. See also CIBSE TM39: Building energy metering for further information. Note: The systems succeeded by * must not be present where a BREEAM New Construction Simple Buildings assessment is being carried out. Energy monitoring and management system Examples include automatic meter reading systems (AMR) and building energy management systems (BEMS). Automatic monitoring and targeting (aM&T) is an example of a management tool that includes automatic meter reading and data management. Energy supply All types of energy supplied to a building area (function area/department/tenancy/unit) within the boundary of the assessed development; including electricity, gas, heat or other form of energy/fuel that are consumed as a result of the use of, and operations within, each relevant area. Energy meters Energy meters measure the amount of energy used on a circuit where energy is flowing. Primary meters measure the main incoming energy and are used for billing by the utility supplier. They include the principal smart and advanced utility meters to a site for electricity and gas. Sub-meters are the second tier including heat and steam meters and secondary meters installed to measure consumption by specific items of plant or equipment or to discrete physical areas, e.g. individual buildings, floors in a multi-storey building, tenanted areas, function areas.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

141

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Major fans Major fans typically include fans in air handling units (AHUs). Where multiple fans are within an air handling unit, they can be metered as one unit. Small fans such as individual extract fans for single rooms, such as kitchen, bathroom and toilet areas, are not required to be included where they only account for a small proportion of the total annual energy use. Modular boiler systems A modular boiler system consists of a series of boilers that are linked together to meet a variety of heating demands. They are generally composed of several identical boiler units, sometimes stacked, although a mix of condensing and conventional boilers could be used. They operate in increments of capacity, each at around their full capacity and their peak efficiency, so that the overall part load efficiency is greater than it would be for a single boiler. Sub-meter outputs Examples include pulsed outputs and other open protocol communication outputs, such as Modbus.

Other information Building regulations requirements The building regulations for energy use in all four countries of the UK require energy meters to be provided to allow the use of fuel and power consumption to be monitored. The building regulations of Wales, Northern Ireland and England also require energy meters to be provided that enable at least 90% of the estimated annual energy consumption of each fuel to be assigned to the various end-use categories (heating, lighting etc.) with separate monitoring of any renewable systems. Buildings with a total floor area of greater than 1,000 mÂ˛buildings are also required to have automatic meter reading and data collection facilities. This has to be considered for larger buildings in Scotland. The Scotland building regulations recommend that solid mineral fuel or biomass use is recorded, where applicable and they require separate monitoring of low carbon equipment, including combined heat and power installations. The metering provisions are required to be designed to facilitate the benchmarking of energy performance as set out in CIBSE TM46 Energy benchmarks3. Note: This BREEAM scheme is intended for use within the four countries comprising the UK only and should not be used for assessments in British Crown Dependencies such as the Channel Islands and Gibraltar. Assessments in these territories should be assessed using BREEAM International. 1TM39 Building energy metering. CIBSE. 2009. 2TM54 Evaluating operational energy performance of buildings at the design stage. CIBSE. 2013. 3TM46 Energy benchmarks. CIBSE. 2008.

142

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Ene 03 External lighting

Energy

Ene 03 External lighting Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Aim To recognise and encourage the specification of energy efficient light fittings for external areas of the development.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

One credit

1. The building has been designed to operate without the need for external lighting (which includes on the building, signs and at entrances).

OR alternatively, where the building does have external lighting, one credit can be awarded as follows: 2. The average initial luminous efficacy of the external light fittings within the construction zone is not less than 60 luminaire lumens per circuit Watt. 3. All external light fittings are automatically controlled for prevention of operation during daylight hours and presence detection in areas of intermittent pedestrian traffic.

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

143

Energy

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN3

Single building assessments on larger developments or campuses and extensions to existing buildings

Where the building being assessed forms part of a larger development (or is an extension to an existing building) containing common areas and other buildings, the scope of the external lighting criteria apply only to external new and existing lighting within the construction zone of the assessed building.

CN4

Temporary lighting, decorative lighting and floodlighting

Temporary lighting such as theatrical, stage or local display installations, where specified, can be excluded from assessment under this issue. Decorative lighting and floodlighting must however not be exempt from the assessment criteria.

General

Building type specific CN5

Prisons and other secured buildings security lighting

The criteria are concerned only with general external lighting e.g. way-finding, car parking, decorative, signage, landscape, storage areas etc. Lighting specified for specific security purposes within secured buildings, such as prisons, can be excluded from assessment under this issue.

Methodology Average initial luminous efficacy of the external light fittings The individual luminous fluxes of all luminaires within the construction zone are summed (in lumens), then divided by the total circuit Watts for all the luminaires. For lamps other than LED lamps, the luminous flux of a luminaire using those lamps can be determined by multiplying the sum of the luminous fluxes produced by all the lamps in the luminaire by the light output ratio of the luminaire (as confirmed by the luminaire manufacturer). Note: LED lamps are typically integral to the luminaire (LED luminaires). As such, the manufacturers' literature will encompass both lamp and luminaire as a whole.

144

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Ene 03 External lighting

Energy

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Interim post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Additional information Relevant definitions Automatic control An automatic external lighting control system that prevents operation during daylight hours through either time switch or daylight sensor (a manually switched lighting circuit with daylight sensor or time switch override is also acceptable) in addition to providing presence detection in areas of intermittent traffic. Note: for external lighting not fitted with presence detectors, time switches must provide automatic switch off of lighting after a specified curfew hour - except in cases where there is a specific requirement for lighting to be left on all night. Construction zone For the purpose of this issue the construction zone is defined as the site which is being developed for the BREEAMassessed building and its external site areas, i.e. the scope of the new works. Daylight sensor A type of sensor that detects daylight and switches lighting on at dusk and off at dawn. Luminous efficacy in luminaire lumens per circuit Watt The ratio between the luminous flux produced by an entire luminaire (light fitting) (in lumens) and the total power consumed by the lamps and the control gear contained within the luminaire (Watts). Presence detector A sensor that can turn lighting on when a presence is detected in the scanned area, and off after a pre-set time when no presence is detected. Presence detectors must be compatible with the lamp type used as very frequent switching can reduce the life of some lamp types. Time switch A switch with an in-built clock which will allow lighting to be switched on and off at programmed times.

Other information None.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

145

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ene 04 Low carbon design Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Aim To encourage the adoption of design measures, which reduce building energy consumption and associated carbon emissions and minimise reliance on active building services systems.

Assessment criteria This issue is split into two parts: Passive design (2 credits) Low or zero carbon technologies (1 credit). The following is required to demonstrate compliance.

Passive design One credit - Passive design analysis 1. The first credit within issue Hea 04 Thermal comfort has been achieved to demonstrate the building design can deliver appropriate thermal comfort levels in occupied spaces. 2. The project team carries out an analysis of the proposed building design/development to influence decisions made during Concept Design stage (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent) and identify opportunities for the implementation of passive design solutions that reduce demands for energy consuming building services (see compliance note CN4). 3. The building uses passive design measures to reduce the total heating, cooling, mechanical ventilation and lighting loads and energy consumption in line with the findings of the passive design analysis and the analysis demonstrates a meaningful reduction in the total energy demand as a result (see compliance note CN16).

One credit - Free cooling 4. The passive design analysis credit is achieved. 5. The passive design analysis carried out under criterion 2 includes an analysis of free cooling and identifies opportunities for the implementation of free cooling solutions. 6. The building uses ANY of the free cooling strategies listed in compliance note CN5 to reduce the cooling energy demand, i.e. it does not use active cooling.

Low and zero carbon technologies One credit - Low zero carbon feasibility study 7. A feasibility study has been carried out by the completion of the Concept Design stage (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent) by an energy specialist (see Relevant definitions) to establish the most appropriate recognised local (on-site or near-site) low or zero carbon (LZC) energy source(s) for the building/development (see compliance note CN7). 8. A local LZC technology/technologies has/have been specified for the building/development in line with the recommendations of this feasibility study and this method of supply results in a meaningful reduction in regulated carbon dioxide (CO2) emissions (see compliance note CN16).

146

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Ene 04 Low carbon design

Energy

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Passive design analysis, criteria 1 to 3 Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Free cooling, criteria 4 to 5 Option 1 - Shell only: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply subject to the following:: Only free cooling options 1 to 3 listed in compliance note CN5 are applicable. Option 2 - Shell and core: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. LZC feasibility study, criteria 6 to 7 Option 1 - Shell only: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply, subject to the following: Criteria 6: The LZC feasibility study must be completed as part of the shell only design, based on the expected building use and loads specified in the design brief or, where these are not specified, for likely scenarios. Criteria 7: The built form should allow for the future installation of the most cost effective LZC options. Option 2 - Shell and core: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN3

Microgeneration technologies

On-site LZC technologies are only eligible to contribute to meeting the criteria of this issue where the proposed solution can be classified as a microgeneration technology. The requirements for classification as a microgeneration technology must be met as described in compliance note CN9.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

147

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description

CN4

Passive design analysis See criterion 2.

As a minimum, the passive design analysis should cover: 1. Site location 2. Site weather 3. Microclimate 4. Building layout 5. Building orientation 6. Building form 7. Building fabric 8. Thermal mass or other fabric thermal storage 9. Building occupancy type 10. Daylighting strategy 11. Ventilation strategy 12. Adaptation to climate change.

CN5

Free cooling analysis See criterion 6.

The free cooling analysis should demonstrate consideration of appropriate technologies from the following : 1. Night time cooling (which could include the use of a high exposed thermal mass) 2. Ground coupled air cooling 3. Displacement ventilation (not linked to any active cooling system) 4. Ground water cooling 5. Surface water cooling 6. Evaporative cooling, direct or indirect 7. Desiccant dehumidification and evaporative cooling, using waste heat 8. Absorption cooling, using waste heat 9. The building does not require any significant form of active cooling or mechanical ventilation (i.e. naturally ventilated).

CN6

Free cooling scope

The free cooling should apply to all occupied spaces in the building. Small IT rooms and lift motor rooms are excluded. Mechanical ventilation may only be used for small areas, e.g. for kitchenettes and toilets.

CN7

LZC feasibility study See criterion 7.

The LZC study should cover as a minimum: 1. Energy generated from LZC energy source per year 2. Carbon dioxide savings from LZC energy source per year 3. Life cycle cost of the potential specification, accounting for payback 4. Local planning criteria, including land use and noise 5. Feasibility of exporting heat/electricity from the system 6. Any available grants 7. All technologies appropriate to the site and energy demand of the development. 8. Reasons for excluding other technologies 9. Where appropriate to the building type, connecting the proposed building to an existing local community CHP system or source of waste heat or power OR specifying a building/site CHP system or source of waste heat or power with the potential to export excess heat or power via a local community energy scheme.

Ref General

148

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Ene 04 Low carbon design

Energy

Ref

Terms

Description

CN8

LZC feasibility study timing See criterion 7.

When undertaking a feasibility study at a stage later than concept design (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent), an additional element would need to be included in the report to highlight the local LZC energy sources which had been discounted due to the constraints placed on the project by the late consideration, and the reason for their omission. If the feasibility study discounted all local LZC as unfeasible due to the late stage in the project that the study was commissioned, then the credit for the feasibility study must be withheld. If the feasibility study were commissioned at the concept design stage or earlier and in the unlikely event the study concluded that the specification of any local LZC technology were unfeasible, the LZC credit could still be awarded.

CN9

Recognised local LZC technologies See criterion 7.

Technologies eligible to contribute to achieving the requirements of this issue must produce energy from renewable sources and meet all other ancillary requirements as defined by Directive 2009/28/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 23 April 2009 on the promotion of the use of energy from renewable sources and amending and subsequently repealing Directives 2001/77/EC and 2003/30/EC (www.eur-lex.europa.eu/en). The following requirements must also be met: 1. There must be a direct supply of energy produced to the building under assessment. 2. Where covered by the Microgeneration Certification Scheme (MCS), technologies under 50kWe or 45kWth must be MCS (or equivalent) certified products installed by MCS (or equivalent) certified installers. 3. Combined heat and power (CHP) schemes above 50kWe must be certified under the CHPQA standard. CHP schemes fuelled by mains gas are eligible to contribute to performance against this issue. 4. Air source heat pumps can only be considered as a renewable technology when used in heating mode. Refer to Annex VI of Directive 2009/28/EC for more detail on accounting for energy from heat pumps. 5. Where MCS or CHPQA certification is not available, the design team must investigate the availability of alternative accreditation schemes in line with the Directives listed above, or an equivalent country/regional directive or standard. Where an accreditation scheme exists it should be used for the purpose of verifying compliance of the specified LZC technology. If no accreditation scheme exists in the country the design team must demonstrate they have investigated the competence of the installer selected to install the LZC technology and are confident that they have the skill and competence to install the technology appropriately.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

149

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Terms

Description

CN10

Novel LZC technology not listed See criterion 7.

Other systems may be acceptable as part of a LZC strategy under this issue but are not currently included as LZC technologies in any of the approved building energy calculation software packages. Acceptability will be dependent on the nature of the system proposed and the carbon benefits achieved. The BREEAM Assessor must confirm acceptability with BRE before an assessment is submitted. The calculation procedure for the new LZC technology should be submitted for consideration as a 'novel technology' to be included in the 'SBEM-Q' innovation process (see Other information ). The novel technology would only be acceptable for the LZC credit if either: a. It is already demonstrably modelled in one of the approved dynamic simulation compliance tools; b. The calculation procedure has been accepted by the SBEM-Q process and integrated into the SBEM tool; or c. It has been applied for and is in the process of being accepted for SBEM-Q. For one-off LZC technology designs, where it is not viable to obtain SBEM-Q approval, a BREEAM innovation credit can be applied for and subject to approval, obtained instead.

CN11

Waste heat from a building- related operational process See criterion 7.

Waste heat from an operational process that takes place within the assessed building (or on the assessed site) can be considered as ‘low carbon’ for the purpose of this BREEAM issue. This is on the condition that the generation of the heat from the process is integral to the assessed building. Examples of operational processes and functions include manufacturing processes, high temperature oven/kiln, compressors serving process plant, micro-brewery, crematorium, testing and commissioning boilers for training or manufacture and data centres. It does not include waste heat from IT or server rooms, which could be used as part of conventional heat recovery measures.

CN12

Community and near-site schemes See criterion 7.

‘Local’ does not have to mean on-site; community schemes (near-site) can be used as a means of demonstrating compliance, as this BREEAM issue seeks to encourage the installation of on-site and near-site LZC technologies.

CN13

Waste incineration See criterion 7.

Waste heat from an incineration plant can only be considered as low carbon for the purpose of this BREEAM issue under the following circumstances: 1. All other LZC technologies have been considered and discounted in the feasibility study and; EITHER 2. The local authority or region in which the incineration plant is located is demonstrably meeting its annual waste reuse/recycling targets and waste management policies; OR 3. A near or on-site facility connected to the building, via a private wire arrangement, which is demonstrably removing reusable and recyclable waste material prior to incineration.

150

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Ene 04 Low carbon design

Energy

Ref

Terms

Description

CN14

First generation biofuels See criterion 7.

Given the current uncertainty over their impact on biodiversity, global food production and greenhouse gas savings, plus the ease of inter-changeability between fossil fuels, BREEAM does not recognise or reward building systems fuelled by first generation biofuels manufactured from feedstocks, e.g. biofuels manufactured from sugars, seeds, grain, animal fats etc. where these are grown or farmed for the purposes of biofuel production. Subject to review against the criteria set out in compliance note CN15, BREEAM may recognise systems using second generation biofuels (see Relevant definitions) or biofuels manufactured from biodegradable waste materials e.g. biogas, waste vegetable oil or locally and sustainably-sourced solid biofuels e.g. woodchip, wood pellets, where these are not interchangeable with fossil fuels or first generation biofuels.

CN15

Second generation biofuels and biofuels from waste streams See criterion 7.

BREEAM recognises that biofuels produced from biomass which is a by product of other processes may provide a more sustainable alternative to fossil fuels. Typically, these use waste feedstock consisting of residual non-food parts of current food crops, industry waste such as woodchips, other waste vegetable matter and waste fish oil from sustainable fish stocks to produce biofuel. Such biofuels will, in principle be recognised by BREEAM for the purposes of defining low/zero carbon technologies. However due to the emerging nature of such technologies, full details would be required for review by BRE Global prior to confirmation of acceptability. Matters which would be required for consideration include the following: 1. Type, provenance and sustainability of the biomass feedstock 2. Avoidance/minimisation of fossil fuel use in extracting the biofuel 3. Minimising fossil fuel use in transporting the biomass/biofuel 4. Presence of a supply agreement and a robust supply chain 5. Compatibility of the biofuel with the specified boiler/plant and manufacturer’s warranty issues The use of other recycled or waste-derived biofuels such as waste oil from catering may also be recognised by BREEAM subject to the above criteria. For smaller scale applications, the assessor will, in addition, be required to demonstrate that the biofuel is locally sourced. BREEAM does not qualify the term ‘locally sourced’ or specify a minimum supply contract. However the assessor must determine and demonstrate that these are reasonable for the particular application.

CN16

Meaningful reduction See criteria 3 and 8.

The amount of energy or CO2 emissions reduction is not specified in the criteria in this issue. However, it should not be a trivial amount. As a guide, the installation should contribute at least 5% of overall building energy demand and/or CO2 emissions.

Building type specific CN17

Schools: information communication technology (ICT) classrooms

With respect to the free cooling credit, it is possible for ICT classrooms to be designed to avoid the use of active cooling. Hence, they are not exempt from the requirements of this issue, i.e. if active cooling were used to treat these spaces, it would not be possible to achieve the free cooling credit within this BREEAM issue.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

151

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Methodology Passive design analysis The passive design demand reduction is demonstrated by comparing the heating and cooling energy demand and the total heating, cooling, mechanical ventilation and lighting energy consumption for a standard building specification with one with passive design measures. For the standard building, the building fabric specification used should be that of the relevant building regulations notional building or, for Scotland, an equivalent compliant building, The other factors listed in compliance note CN4 should be set as a standard building design for the type of building and project, before passive design measures are implemented. The energy supply used for the both should be mains gas and grid electricity. The equipment and systems efficiencies, internal loads, occupancies and hours of operation should be set as per the actual building specification and are the same for each case. The BREEAM-preferred method of demonstrating total energy demand reductions is through using dynamic simulation modelling. Then the building services energy consumption for each case would normally be estimated using the methods described in CIBSE TM54: Evaluating operational energy performance of buildings at the design stage1. However, BREEAM recognises that this may not be practical at the concept design stage. Therefore an alternative simpler method may be used as follows. Firstly, building load reductions for heating, cooling, mechanical ventilation and lighting are demonstrated by using steady-state or steady-cyclic/quasi-dynamic methods, as described in CIBSE AM11 Building energy and environmental modelling. Then the energy demands are calculated by seasonal/bin or hourly methods, using spreadsheet calculations or building modelling software. These calculations should be carried out by a building services engineer who is a Member of The Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) or by an accredited energy assessor. See Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Relevant definitions.

Free cooling analysis The free cooling demand reduction is demonstrated by estimating the cooling and mechanical ventilation energy savings with free cooling measures compared with the total building services energy demand with the other passive design measures from the passive design analysis. The calculation methods should be the same as for the passive design analysis, as far as possible. Where the free cooling approach(es) chosen cannot be adequately modelled by these methods, the use of an/any alternative method(s) should be justified by the building services engineer or accredited energy assessor, demonstrating that it is/they are appropriate.

Low and zero carbon feasibility study The demand reduction with the low and/or zero carbon (LZC) technologies is demonstrated by comparing regulated carbon dioxide (CO2) emissions with LZC technologies to the actual building regulated emissions without LZCs. When the CO2 savings are compared for different technologies, they may be estimated separately from the building energy model where appropriate, e.g. by using manufacturers' data, simple hand calculations and/or spreadsheets. For the specified technology/technologies, the demand reductions are modelled using dynamic simulation modelling. The energy supply used for the base case is mains gas and grid electricity. If mains gas were not available at the site, then oil may be used instead. The base case includes any passive design or free cooling measures adopted for the first two credits. The actual building energy demands are calculated as for the passive design analysis. Then the carbon dioxide emissions factors used for the building regulations calculations are applied.

152

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Ene 04 Low carbon design

Energy

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

4, 7

Results from a dynamic simulation model demonstrating the feasibility of the free cooling strategy and meeting the first credit for Hea 04.

As per interim design stage

Additional information Relevant definitions Approved building energy modelling software Refer to Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions. Energy specialist An individual who has acquired substantial expertise or a recognised qualification for undertaking assessments, designs and installations of low or zero carbon solutions in the commercial buildings sector and is not professionally connected to a single low or zero carbon technology or manufacturer. First and second generation biofuels First generation biofuels are fuels made from sugar, starch, vegetable oil, or animal fats using conventional technology. Second generation biofuels are fuels from lignocellulosic biomass feedstock using advanced technical processes2.. Common first generation biofuels include vegetable oil, biodiesel and bioalcohols. Free cooling The ability of the building to provide cooling to the internal occupied areas without the need to rely on energyconsuming mechanical cooling. Free cooling is an enhanced passive design method that requires engineering design and modelling to demonstrate its effectiveness. Other similar methods include enhanced passive ventilation and enhanced daylighting. Microgeneration Certification Scheme (MCS) The Microgeneration Certification Scheme (MCS) is an independent scheme that certifies microgeneration products and installers in accordance with consistent standards. It is designed to evaluate microgeneration products and installers against robust criteria, and provides consumers with an independent indication of the reliability of products, assurance that the installation will be carried out to the appropriate standard and a route for complaints should there be any issues. The MCS is a United Kingdom Accreditation Service (UKAS) accredited certification scheme covering all microgeneration products and services. It has support from the Department of Energy and Climate Change (DECC), industry and non-governmental groups as a prime method for making a substantial contribution to cutting the UKâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s dependency on fossil fuels and carbon dioxide emissions. Near-site LZC Refer to BREEAM issue Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

153

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

On-site LZC Refer to BREEAM issue Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions. Payback period The period of time needed for a financial return on an investment to equal the sum of the original investment.

Other information Free cooling aim Free cooling has been highlighted in this issue as it relates particularly to contributing to reducing overheating for adaptation to climate change. It can also make the building much simpler to operate and maintain than one with mechanical cooling. Novel low and zero carbon (LZC) technologies - SBEM-Q In order to deal with the integration of new technologies into SBEM, a new procedure has been established which mirrors the SAP Appendix Q approach to some extent. Appendix Q provides a means whereby validated individual branded product performance information can be accessed and used as an adjunct to the SAP calculation. A product’s performance information is determined by testing against a specification that has been agreed by DECC’s NCM contractor, the relevant manufacturer(s) and industry sector representatives. Product data is listed in the SAP Appendix Q database (at www.ncm-pcdb.org.uk/sap). By following the ‘Innovation' path from that website, manufacturers can apply for novel LZC technologies to be validated under the so-called ‘SBEM-Q’ procedure and then integrated as part of an amendment to the SBEM calculation. LZC feasibility study in building regulations The European Union Energy Performance of Buildings Directive (EPBD) (recast) 2012 (Directive 2010/31/EU), requires that all member states have a methodology for calculating the energy performance of buildings and that the feasibility of high-efficiency alternative systems is considered before construction starts, including energy from renewable sources, cogeneration, district heating and cooling and heat pumps (Article 6). This requirement has been included in the building regulations for England (amendment Regulation 25A, 2013) and Scotland (October 2013) and it has been proposed for the forthcoming regulations in Wales, expected in July 2014. The LZC feasibility study in BREEAM is intended to encourage the study to be done early in the project, not just before construction starts, so that the most appropriate solutions can be adopted. Also, this credit does not permit technologies that are not best practice/sustainable or cannot be modelled with a robust method. 1TM54 Evaluating operational energy performance of buildings at the design stage. CIBSE. 2013. 2Sustainable Bioenergy: a framework for decision makers, United Nations – Energy, 2007.

154

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage

Energy

Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Aim To recognise and encourage the installation of energy efficient refrigeration systems, therefore reducing operational greenhouse gas emissions resulting from the system's energy use.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

One credit - Refrigeration energy consumption

1. The refrigeration system, its controls and components have been designed, installed and commissioned as follows: a. In accordance with the Code of Conduct for carbon reduction in the refrigeration retail sector 1 (see Other information) and BS EN 378-2 Refrigeration systems and heat pumps - Safety and environmental requirements. b. Using robust and tested refrigeration systems/components, normally defined as those included on the Enhanced Capital Allowance (ECA) Energy Technology Product List (ETPL)2 or an equivalent list (see CN5 for a list of components). 2. The refrigeration plant has been commissioned to comply with the criteria for commissioning outlined in BREEAM issue Man 04 Commissioning and handover.

One credit - Indirect greenhouse gas emissions

3. Criteria 1 and 2 are achieved. 4. The installed refrigeration system demonstrates a saving in indirect greenhouse gas emissions (CO2 eq.) over the course of its operational life.

With reference to The Carbon Trust Refrigeration Road Map 3, this can be demonstrated through specification of technologies described in CO2 emissions saving options available when designing a new store/retail concept that deliver savings in comparison with the 'baseline' building. Refer to the Methodology section for further information. Note: For non-retail building types with cold storage refrigeration systems, refer to compliance note CN4.

Checklists and tables None.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

155

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Option 1 - Shell only: This issue is not applicable. Option 2 – Shell and core: Where cold storage systems are specified/installed, all assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue is not applicable.

CN3

Scope of this BREEAM issue

This issue is applicable only in instances where commercial/industrial sized refrigeration and storage systems are specified, for example: 1. storage and refrigeration of food in supermarkets 2. cold storage facilities in industrial, laboratory, healthcare and other buildings. The criteria do not apply to: 1. domestic-scale refrigeration; or 2. refrigeration for kitchen and catering facilities. These types of installation are covered within BREEAM issue Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment. If the building does not contain commercial/industrial sized refrigeration system(s), this issue is not applicable to the assessment.

CN4

Non retail buildings and the Carbon Trust Refrigeration Road Map Action Plan See criterion 4.

The Carbon Trust’s Refrigeration Road Map introduces the main energy saving opportunities for refrigeration use in the retail sector and defines a ‘baseline supermarket’. However, many of the technologies outlined in the Road Map are appropriate to non-food applications and therefore non-retail building types that specify or install cold storage systems. If the ‘baseline supermarket’ does not provide an appropriate benchmark for achieving the second and third credit, the design team can still comply with the criteria by demonstrating a reduction in indirect greenhouse gas emissions (CO2 eq.) against an alternative baseline. The design team must confirm details of the alternative baseline system used, and demonstrates that it is based on a typical installation/technology for that building type. The systems being compared must have the same duty and service conditions and include the relevant consumption from the refrigeration systems ancillary equipment.

General

156

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage

Energy

Ref

Terms

Description

CN5

Components on the ECA Energy Technology Product List See criterion 1b.

Where specified as part of the refrigeration system, products used for the following components must be listed on the ECA Energy Technology Product List (or equivalent list): 1. Air cooled condensing units 2. Automatic air purgers 3. Cellar cooling equipment 4. Commercial service cabinets (cold food storage) 5. Curtains, blinds, sliding doors and covers for refrigerated display cabinets 6. Evaporative condensers 7. Forced air pre-coolers 8. Refrigerated display cabinets 9. Refrigeration compressors 10. Refrigeration system controls.

CN6

Extensions to existing buildings

If the assessed building is an extension to an existing building and there is cold storage plant in the existing building that will serve the new extension, then this plant must meet the criteria in order to achieve any available credits.

Methodology Calculating indirect greenhouse gas emissions (CO eq.) 2

The indirect emissions must be calculated in accordance with the procedures in BS EN 378-1 4- Refrigerating system and heat pumps safety and environmental requirements, Annex B (total equivalent warming impact (TEWI)). Further detail on applying this method to calculate the indirect emissions is available in the Guideline methods of calculating TEWI5 (total equivalent warming impact) published by the British Refrigeration Association (BRA). Calculations must be carried out by an appropriately qualified professional (e.g. a building services engineer), including calculations to justify for assumptions and methodologies for savings in indirect greenhouse emissions.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Refer to generic evidence requirement above

Refrigeration plant commissioning record

Additional information Relevant definitions ECA Energy Technology Product List (ETPL) The ETPL list is part of the government's Enhanced Capital Allowance Scheme, a key part of the government’s programme to manage climate change. The scheme provides a tax incentive to encourage investment in low carbon

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

157

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

energy saving equipment that meets published energy efficiency criteria. The Energy Technology List (ETL) details the criteria for each type of technology, and lists those products in each category that meet them: https://etl.decc.gov.uk/etl/site.html. Indirect operational greenhouse gas emissions These are the indirect greenhouse gas emissions that result from the production of energy used to power the refrigeration systems, cooling plant. This includes the emissions from the production of grid electricity or an on-site source of energy generation, e.g. gas CHP. In the case of refrigeration systems the term ‘direct greenhouse gas emissions’ is also used, this refers to the emissions that occur as a direct result of leakage of refrigerant from the system. The impacts of direct greenhouse gas emissions from refrigeration systems are dealt with in the BREEAM issue Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants. Therefore, only indirect emissions resulting from the energy consumption of the system are covered in this issue.

Other information Code of Conduct for carbon reduction in the retail refrigeration sector The Code of Conduct has been developed by the Carbon Trust, in partnership with the Institute of Refrigeration (IoR) and the British Refrigeration Association (BRA). The Code is intended to compliment the Carbon Trust Refrigeration Road Map. 1Code of Conduct for carbon reduction in the retail refrigeration sector, Carbon Trust, British Refrigeration Association,

Institute of Refrigeration (June 2011). 2Energy Technology List https://etl.decc.gov.uk/etl/site.html 3Refrigeration Road Map – An action plan for the retail sector, Carbon Trust, CTG021, 2012 (http://www.carbontrust.com/resources/guides) 4BS EN 378:2008 Refrigerating systems and heat pumps. Safety and environmental requirements, BSI. 5Guideline methods of calculating TEWI Issue 2, 2006, BRA Specification, British Refrigeration Association.

158

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Ene 06 Energy efficient transportation systems

Energy

Ene 06 Energy efficient transportation systems Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Aim To recognise and encourage the specification of energy efficient transportation systems.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance.

One credit - Energy consumption 1. Where lifts, escalators and/or moving walks (transportation types) are specified: a. An analysis of the transportation demand and usage patterns for the building has been carried out to determine the optimum number and size of lifts, escalators and/or moving walks. b. The energy consumption has been calculated in accordance with BS EN ISO 25745 Energy performance of lifts, escalators and moving walks, Part 2 : Energy calculation and classification for lifts (elevators) and/or Part 3 - Energy calculation and classification for escalators and moving walks, for one of the following: i. At least two types of system (for each transportation type required); OR ii. An arrangement of systems (e.g. for lifts, hydraulic, traction, machine room-less lift (MRL)); OR iii. A system strategy which is ‘fit for purpose’. c. The use of regenerative drives should be considered, subject to the requirements in CN6. d. The transportation system with the lowest energy consumption is specified.

Two credits - Energy efficient features 2. Criterion 1 is achieved.

Lifts 3. For each lift, the following three energy efficient features are specified: a. The lifts operate in a standby condition during off-peak periods. For example the power side of the lift controller and other operating equipment such as lift car lighting, user displays and ventilation fans switch off when the lift has been idle for a prescribed length of time. b. The lift car lighting and display lighting provides an average lamp efficacy, (across all fittings in the car) of > 55 lamp lumens/circuit Watt. c. The lift uses a drive controller capable of variable speed, variable-voltage, and variable-frequency (VVVF) control of the drive motor. 4. Where the use of regenerative drives is demonstrated to save energy, they are specified.

Escalators and/or moving walks Each escalator and/or moving walk complies with at least one of the following:

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

159

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

5. It is fitted with a load-sensing device that synchronises motor output to passenger demand through a variable speed drive; OR 6. It is fitted with a passenger-sensing device for automated operation (auto walk), so the escalator operates in standby mode when there is no passenger demand.

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Option 1 - Shell only: This issue is not applicable. Option 2 - Shell and core: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

Energy consumption (1 credit) 1. Criterion 1 Energy efficient features (1 credit) 2. Criteria 2 and 3 only; criteria 4 to 6 are not applicable.

CN3

Scope of this issue

The criteria relating to lifts do not apply to lifting platforms, wheelchair platform stairlift(s) or other similar facilities to aid persons with impaired mobility. However, any lifting device with a rated speed greater than 0.15m/s must be assessed, inclusive of goods, vehicle and passenger lifts. A demonstration of compliance to the BREEAM criteria relating to the excluded transportation types would be considered best practice for an energy efficient system (despite not being required for the purpose of awarding the available credits).

CN4

Transport analysis

The transport analysis can be in the form of a written statement justifying the lift selection. for the following conditions: where a single lift is provided in a low rise building for the purpose of providing disabled access only; or where a goods lift is selected based on the size of the goods it is intended to carry.

CN5

Building has no lifts, escalators or moving walks

This issue will not be assessed where a building contains no lifts, escalators or moving walks.

General

160

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Ene 06 Energy efficient transportation systems

Energy

Ref

Terms

Description

CN6

Regenerative drives See criteria 1c and 4.

A regenerative drive should only be considered where it produces an energy saving greater than the additional standby energy used to support the drives. Regenerative drives will typically be appropriate for lifts with high travel and high intensity use.

Methodology None.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Additional information Relevant definitions Lift car lighting The level of lift car lighting is determined by the relevant standards. For example, BS EN 81-1 and 2: 1998+A3: 2009 require 50 lux on the car floor and any control surfaces. MRL: Machine room-less lift All equipment is contained in the lift well, not in a separate machine room. Standby condition - lifts A condition when a lift is stationary at a floor and may have reduced the power consumption to a lower level set for that particular lift (from BS EN ISO 25745-1: 2012). The period between when a lift was last used and when a standby condition is entered is defined in BS EN ISO 25745-1 as 5 minutes. Standby condition - escalators and moving walks A condition when the escalator or moving walk is stationary and powered on and it can be started by authorised personnel. Idle condition A condition when a lift is stationary at a floor following a run before the standby mode is entered (from BS EN ISO 25745-1: 2012).

Other information BS EN ISO 25745 - Energy performance of lifts, escalators and moving walks ISO 25745 is planned to consist of three parts, under the general title Energy performance of lifts, escalators and moving walks:

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

161

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Part 1: Energy measurement and verification Part 2: Energy calculation and classification for lifts (elevators) Part 3: Energy calculation and classification for escalators and moving walks. Part 1 was published in October 2012. Drafts of Parts 2 and 3, ISO/DIS 25745-2:2013 and ISO/DIS 25745-2:2013 have been published and reviewed. They are expected to be published in mid to late 2014. In Part 1, it has been estimated that approximately 5% of a building’s total energy consumption can be attributed to the operation of lifts and a large proportion of this can be attributable to standby mode in many situations. BS EN ISO 25745 Parts 2 and 3 have been prepared in response to the rapidly increasing need to ensure and to support the efficient and effective use of energy, providing: 1. A method to estimate energy consumption on a daily and an annual basis for lifts, escalators and moving walks. 2. A method for energy classification of new, existing or modernised lifts, escalators and moving walks. 3. Guidelines for reducing energy consumption that can be used to support building environmental and energy classification systems.

162

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems

Energy

Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Building type dependent

Aim To recognise and encourage laboratory areas that are designed to be energy efficient and minimise the CO2 emissions associated with their operational energy consumption.

Assessment criteria This issue is split into three parts: Pre-requisite Design specification (1 credit) Best practice energy efficient measures (up to 4 credits) - building type dependent. The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

Pre-requisite

1. Criterion 1 within issue Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories has been achieved.

One credit - Design specification

2. Client engagement is sought through consultation during the preparation of the initial project brief (RIBA Stage 1 or equivalent) to determine occupant requirements and define laboratory performance criteria. Performance criteria should include, but not be limited to the following aspects: a. Description of purpose b. Occupant/process activities c. Containment requirements and standards d. Air change rate requirements e. Ventilation system performance and efficiencies f. Heating and cooling requirements g. Interaction between systems h. Flexibility/adaptability of laboratory facilities. 3. The design team demonstrates that the energy demand of the laboratory facilities has been minimised as a result of achieving the defined design performance criteria. This has informed the right-sizing (see Relevant definitions) of the services system equipment (including ventilation supply and extract).

Laboratory containment devices and containment areas (criteria only applicable to buildings containing these facilities) 4. Specification of fume cupboards and other containment devices has been carried out in compliance with criteria 2 and 3 of issue Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories, as appropriate to the containment device specification. 5. Where ducted fume cupboards are specified: a. Compliance with item A in Table - 27. b. The measurement of volume flow rate should be taken in the exhaust duct (at the boundary of the laboratory) to take account of reductions in (inward) volume flow rate from fume cupboard leakage. c. A reduction in air flow does not compromise the defined performance criteria and therefore does not increase the health and safety risk to future building occupants.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

163

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Up to four credits - Best practice energy efficient measures The following criteria are applicable where the laboratory area accounts for at least 10% of the total building floor area (see Relevant definitions). 6. Criteria 1 to 5 are achieved (or criteria 1 to 4 where ducted fume cupboards are not specified). 7. Laboratory plant and systems are designed, specified and installed to promote energy efficiency, demonstrated through compliance with items B to L in Table - 27 (see 7a. and b. below for how credits are awarded). a. Up to 2 credits: The laboratory area (see Relevant definitions) accounts for at least 10% (but less than 25%) of the total building floor area; OR b. Up to 4 credits: The laboratory area accounts for 25% or more of the total building floor area. 8. To achieve credits for energy efficient measures, the chosen measure(s) must have a reasonably significant effect on the total energy consumption of the laboratory, i.e. 2% reduction or greater. This must be demonstrated by calculations or modelling. 9. The energy efficient measures specified do not compromise the defined performance criteria, and therefore do not increase the health and safety risk to future building occupants.

Checklists and tables Table - 27: Best practice energy efficient measures in laboratories Credits1

Item

Category

Energy

Credits1

Item description

Fume cupboard extract

1.5

Fume cupboard volume flow rates (further reduction)

An average design air flow rate of < 0.12m3/s per linear metre (internal width) of fume cupboard workspace

0.5

Grouping and/or isolation of high filtration/ventilation activities

Minimisation of room air change rates and overall facility ventilation flows by grouping together or isolating activities and equipment with high filtration or ventilation requirements.

0.5

Energy recovery - heat

Heat recovery from exhaust air (where there is no risk of cross-contamination) or via refrigerant or water cooling systems.

0.5

Energy recovery – cooling

Cooling recovery via exhaust air heat exchangers (where there is no risk of crosscontamination) or via refrigerant or water cooling systems.

0.5

Grouping of cooling loads

Grouping of cooling loads to enable supply efficiencies and thermal transfer.

0.5

Free cooling

Specification of free cooling coils in chillers or dry air coolers related to laboratory-specific activities.

0.5

Load responsiveness

Effective matching of supply with demand through modularity, variable speed drives and pumps, and other mechanisms.

0.5

Clean rooms

Specification of particle monitoring systems, linked to airflow controls.

0.5

Diversity

Achievement of high levels of diversity in central plant sizing and laboratory duct sizing, where compatible with safety.

0.5

Room air changes rates

Reducing air change rates by matching ventilation airflows to environmental needs and demands of containment devices.

0.5

1. Only whole credits can be awarded in BREEAM. Therefore to achieve a credit for items C to L (above) the laboratory must comply with at least two of the items. In an instance where, for example, three and half credits are achieved this would need to be rounded down to three credits.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

165

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue is not applicable.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue is not applicable.

Scope of this BREEAM issue

This issue is applicable only to Further education, Higher education and Other buildings, Research and development facilities that contain laboratory space and containment devices and/or areas. This issue is not applicable for School buildings (primary and secondary level). The laboratory criteria within issue Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories and guidance within Building Bulletin 88 should be followed for assessing laboratories and containment devices in these building types. Where there are a large number of containment devices (such as fume cupboards) present in a School or sixth form college assessment, BRE should be contacted for further guidance.

General CN3

Methodology None.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

166

Final post construction stage

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems

Energy

Additional information Relevant definitions Laboratory areas Laboratory areas are defined as highly serviced (temperature/ventilation/humidity/containment controlled) spaces where physical/biological or chemical processing and/or testing is carried out. Such areas will have inherently high energy demands. In order to maintain controlled conditions to enable experiments and comply with health and safety standards, typically laboratories: 1. Contain various exhaust and containment devices (such as fume cupboards and microbiological safety cabinets) 2. Are heavily serviced to circulate air and to supply heating, cooling, humidity, and clean air 3. Often require 24-hour access and fail-safe redundant backup systems and uninterrupted power supply or emergency power to enable irreplaceable experiments. Therefore, for the purpose of assessing this BREEAM issue, the definition of laboratory areas excludes any laboratory support areas such as: 1. Write up/offices 2. Meeting rooms 3. Storage 4. Ancillary and other support areas with lower servicing requirements. Teaching and other laboratories/workshops with a limited amount of fume cupboards or other containment devices and/or no energy intensive process equipment specified are excluded, unless the design team can provide evidence that their consumption is at least 50% higher than a typical office due to the laboratory process-related activities. Benchmarks for general offices can be found in Table - 27 in CIBSE TM46 1 Energy benchmarks.Typically, in buildings where 40% of the floor area is laboratory related, only 10% will actually constitute laboratory areas as per the BREEAM definition. Different types of laboratories have different requirements for heating, ventilation and air-conditioning (HVAC), plug load equipment and access. This can lead to enormous variations in energy and water requirements.The main types of laboratories include: 1. Wet laboratories - where chemicals, drugs or other material or biological matter are tested and analysed requiring water, direct ventilation and specialised piped utilities. Typically includes chemical science laboratories. These laboratories require specially designed facilities. 2. Dry laboratories - contain dry stored materials, electronics, and/or large instruments with few piped services. They typically include engineering or analytical laboratories that may require accurate temperature and humidity control, dust control, and clean power. 3. Microbiological/clinical laboratories - often involve working with infectious agents. They typically require higher levels of primary containment and multiple secondary barriers including specialised ventilation systems to ensure directional air flow, air treatment systems to decontaminate or remove agents from exhaust air, controlled access zones, airlocks as laboratory entrances, or separate buildings or modules to isolate the laboratory. 4. In vivo laboratories - these require highly controlled environments for the care and maintenance of flora and fauna. The facilities are complex, and expensive to build and to operate. Tight environmental control over the facility is required to avoid the introduction of contaminants or pathogens, and prevent the possibility of infectious outbreaks, and avoid the transmission of odours. 5. Teaching laboratories - unique to academic institutes, they require space for teaching equipment, storage space for student belongings and less instrumentation than research labs. 6. Clean rooms - refers to a controlled environment (air quality, temperature and humidity) which prevent contamination and the regulating of environmental conditions, to facilitate accurate research and production needs. They are typically used in UK universities for nanotechnology, medical and pharmaceutical research/studies and microelectronics applications. Right-sizing Right-sizing principles encourage the use of better estimates in equipment loads from which services equipment is sized in comparison to traditional methods of estimates based on ‘rated’ data obtained from manufacturers’

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

167

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

literature or design assumptions from previous projects. This can result in construction cost savings in addition to life cycle cost benefits, while taking account of the need for appropriate contingency.

Other information Synergy with BREEAM issue Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions This BREEAM issue has been developed to recognise improvements made to new laboratory areas/buildings that are not currently fully recognised in the National Calculation Methodology, used to assess and award credits in Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions. 1TM46 Energy benchmarks. CIBSE, 2008.

168

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment

Energy

Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Aim To recognise and encourage procurement of energy efficient equipment to ensure optimum performance and energy savings in operation.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance.

Two credits

1. Identify the building's unregulated energy consuming loads and estimate their contribution to the total annual unregulated energy consumption of the building, assuming a typical/standard specification. 2. Identify the systems and/or processes that use a significant proportion of the total annual unregulated energy demand of the development and its operation. 3. Demonstrate a meaningful reduction in the total annual unregulated energy demand of the building. See Table - 28

Table - 28 contains solutions deemed to satisfy compliance for common examples of significant contributors to unregulated energy demand, for a number of different building types/functions.

Checklists and tables Table - 28: Examples of solutions deemed to comply with the criteria for the reduction of unregulated energy load from significantly contributing systems Ref

Function/equipment

Criteria

Small power, plug-in equipment

The following equipment has been awarded an Energy Star 1 rating OR has been procured in accordance with the Government Buying Standards2: 1. Office equipment 2. Other small powered equipment 3. Supplementary electric heating. For domestic scale white goods, the criteria in Ref F(Residential areas) apply.

Swimming pool

1. Where automatic or semi-automatic pool covers, or ‘liquid’ pool covers with an automatic dosing system, are fitted to ALL pools, including spa pools and Jacuzzis (if relevant). 2. The covers envelop the entire pool surface when fully extended. 3. Where the air temperature in the pool hall can be controlled so that it is 1°C above the water temperature.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

169

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Function/equipment

Criteria

Communal laundry facilities with commercial sized appliances

At least one of the following can be demonstrated for commercial sized appliances: 1. Specification of heat recovery from waste water 2. Use of greywater for part of the washing process. This may be recycled from the final rinse and used for the next pre-wash.

Data centres

1. Design is in accordance with the ‘Best practices for the EU Code of Conduct on Data Centres’3 principles with the data centre achieving at least the ‘Expected minimum practice’ level (as defined in the Code of Conduct). 2. Temperature set points are not less than 24°C, as measured at the inlet of the equipment in the rack.

IT-intensive operating areas

1. Uses a natural ventilation and cooling strategy as standard, with forced ventilation only to be used when the internal temperature exceeds 20°C and active cooling only when the internal temperature exceeds 22°C. 2. There is a mechanism to achieve automatic power-down of equipment when not in-use, including overnight.

Residential areas with domestic scale appliances (individual and communal facilities)

Healthcare

Kitchen and catering facilities

170

Domestic scale appliances have the following ratings (or better) under the EU Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme, where provided: 1. Fridges, fridge-freezers: A+ rating 2. Washing machines: A++ rating 3. Dishwashers: A+ rating 4. Washer-dryers and tumble dryers: A rating. OR 5. If any of the appliances will be purchased during occupation by the tenant/owner, information on the EU Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme of efficient white goods must be provided to the residential areas of the building. Note: 1. Any white goods available to purchase from the developer must be compliant with criteria F1 to F4 above. 2. If criterion F5 were chosen to demonstrate compliance, only one of the two available credits could be awarded. The procurement of large-scale equipment (where present, see compliance note CN9) and sets of electrical equipment (where numbering more than 50) has been informed and selected by life cycle costing analysis for at least two options in accordance with HTM07-02, Chapter 3.0 4. The project has incorporated at least two-thirds of the energy efficiency measures outlined in the section summaries of each of the following sections of CIBSE Guide TM50 5 (except as specified): 1. Section 8 (Drainage and kitchen waste removal) 2. Section 9 (Energy controls - specifically controls relevant to appliances) 3. Section 11 (Appliance specification - not fabrication or utensil specifications) 4. Section 12 (Refrigeration) 5. Section 13 (Warewashing: dishwashers and glasswashers) 6. Section 14 (Cooking appliance selection) 7. Section 15 (Water temperatures, taps, faucets and water saving controls). Refrigeration for kitchen and catering facilities should be assessed here, not in Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment

Ref

Function/equipment

Energy

Criteria

Energy efficient white goods scheme and equivalent rating scheme (Category reference F) Energy rating certifications other than the EU labelling scheme will be accepted, providing the energy efficiency performance is equivalent to the EU labelling scheme. This can be any internationally recognised energy efficiency labelling scheme for white goods or a national scheme developed for use in the country of assessment, for example Energy Label (in the EU), Energy Star (in the USA), The Appliance Energy Rating Scheme (in Australia), etc. A statement confirming that the scheme is nationally recognised and can be regarded as equivalent to the EU labelling scheme is required for use. Large-scale equipment in Healthcare (Category reference G) This includes commercial-scale catering and laundry equipment, and all other equipment with connected electrical loads in excess of 10kW rated input power. All medical equipment can be exempted from complying with the criteria.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue is not applicable.

Shell and core CN1

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

1. Criteria 1 and 2; ‘Ref B Swimming pool’ from Table - 28 are not applicable. All other criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN3

Refrigeration equipment

The criteria in ‘Ref A Small power, plug in equipment’ in the Checklists and tables section apply to the following refrigeration equipment (where present): 1. Air cooled condensing units 2. Cellar cooling 3. Commercial service cabinets 4. Curtains/blinds for refrigerated display cabinets 5. Refrigeration compressors 6. Refrigeration system controls 7. Refrigerated display cabinets.

CN4

A meaningful reduction in unregulated energy demand

BREEAM does not specify a level or percentage that defines a meaningful reduction in unregulated energy demand. The project team must justify how they have determined or judged a meaningful reduction from the unregulated energy demand and the assessor must be satisfied that this is an appropriate justification.

General

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

171

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Terms

Description

CN5

Cold storage

The criteria do apply to commercial kitchen refrigeration but not to other commercial or industrial sized refrigeration and storage systems. These systems are covered within the scope of Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage and should be removed from the list of unregulated loads with respect to this issue.

CN6

Lifts, escalators and moving walks

This issue does not apply to lifts, escalators and moving walkways. These systems are covered within the scope of Ene 06 Energy efficient transportation systems and should be removed from the list of unregulated loads with respect to this issue.

CN7

Laboratory systems

This issue does not apply to laboratory ducted fume cupboards. These systems are covered within the scope of Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems and should be removed from the list of unregulated loads with respect to this issue.

CN8

Reuse of equipment

Reuse of electrical equipment does not comply by default, as it may not be the most energy efficient option. However, the credit could be awarded if either of the following criteria are demonstrated: 1. The existing electrical appliances meet the criteria for inclusion on the Enhanced Capital Allowance Scheme Energy Technology Product List 6. 2. Reusing the old equipment would, over the course of its life, be a more energy efficient option than specifying new equipment.

Building specific CN9

Healthcare Large-scale equipment See criterion 1 and Ref G.

This includes commercial-scale catering and laundry equipment and all other equipment with connected electrical loads in excess of 10kW rated input power, including equipment used for medical purposes.

Methodology Estimating annual unregulated energy consumption A method should be used that estimates actual energy use, based on expected equipment loads and hours of operation. The energy uses may be estimated by using simple hand calculations, benchmark data or by the methods described in CIBSE TM54: Evaluating operational energy performance of buildings at the design stage7.

Estimating a significant proportion of annual unregulated energy consumption This methodology is used to estimate which energy uses make-up a significant proportion of the unregulated energy uses and so detailed calculations are not required. The approach should focus on identifying the larger energy uses that should be included and the small energy uses that can be excluded. As a guide, energy uses making up at least 90% of the estimated total annual energy consumption should typically be included (this is a statutory requirement in Wales, Northern Ireland and England – see Ene 02 Other information).

172

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment

Energy

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Additional information Relevant definitions Data centre For the purpose of this BREEAM issue, the term ‘data centres’ includes all buildings, facilities and rooms which contain enterprise servers, server communication equipment, cooling equipment and power equipment, and may provide some form of data service (e.g. large scale mission critical facilities all the way down to small server rooms located in office buildings). Government’s Buying Standards A website listing minimum and best practice standards for equipment being procured for projects. IT-intensive areas These include computer areas where more than one computer per 5m2 is provided, e.g. training suites, design studios, libraries’ IT areas and other areas with a high density of computing devices. Office equipment Computer monitors, desktop computers, scanners, photocopiers, printers, workstations etc. Regulated energy Refer to BREEAM issue Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions. Unregulated energy Building energy consumption resulting from a system or process that is not ‘controlled’, i.e. energy consumption from systems in the building on which the Building Regulations do not impose a requirement. This may include energy consumption from operational-related equipment, e.g. computers, servers, printers, laptops, mobile fume cupboards, cooking, audio-visual equipment and other appliances etc. Unlike the definition for Ene 01 Reduction of emissions, for this issue, it does not include energy consumption from systems integral to the building and its operation, e.g. commercial/industrial refrigeration systems; lifts, escalators and other transportation systems; and ducted fume cupboards; because they are already assessed separately in issues Ene 05, Ene 06 and Ene 07 respectively. White goods and small power equipment Domestic appliances for example washing machines, fridges, freezers, fridge-freezers, tumble dryers, washer-dryers, air movement fans/heaters, etc.

Other information None 1Energy Star labelling scheme, http://www.energystar.gov/index.cfm?c=products.pr_find_es_products or http://www.eu-

energystar.org/en/index.html 2Government Buying Standards, http://sd.defra.gov.uk/advice/public/buying/

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

173

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

3EU Code of Conduct on Data Centres: http://iet.jrc.ec.europa.eu/energyefficiency/sites/energyefficiency/files/best_

practices_v4_0_5-r1.pdf 4HTM 07-02: EnCO de, Making energy work in Healthcare, Department of Health, 2005. 2 5CIBSE TM50: Energy Efficiency in Commercial Kitchens, CIBSE 6Enhanced Capital Allowance scheme, http://www.eca.gov.uk 7TM54: Evaluating operational energy performance of buildings at the design stagey new footnote. CIBSE. 2013

174

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Ene 09 Drying space

Energy

Ene 09 Drying space Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Aim To provide a reduced energy means of drying clothes.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

One credit

1. For self-contained dwellings: An adequate internal or external space with posts and footings, or fixings capable of holding: a. One to two bedrooms: 4m+ of drying line b. Three or more bedrooms: 6m+ of drying line.

OR 2. Individual bedrooms: An adequate internal or external space with posts and footings, or fixings capable of holding: a. Two metres or more of drying line per bedroom for developments with up to 30 individual bedrooms; plus b. One metre of additional drying line for each bedroom over the 30 individual bedroom threshold. AND 3. The space (internal or external) is secure.

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue is not applicable.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

175

Energy

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN3

Multi-residential developments with CSH assessed dwellings See criterion 1.

For buildings with self-contained dwellings also being assessed under the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH), the following applies: Where CSH issue Ene 4 Drying Space has been achieved for all dwellings assessed under the CSH, the requirements for self-contained dwellings under this issue are also met. If this is the case, the credit under this issue can be achieved, provided any self-contained dwellings not assessed under the CSH or individual bedrooms in the building meet the compliance requirements for this issue.

CN4

Adequate internal space See criteria 1 and 2.

This is either: a heated space with adequate, controlled ventilation, complying with the national building regulations relevant to the location of the building (rooms that commonly meet these requirements are a bathroom or utility room); or an unheated outbuilding, where calculations by an appropriate Member of the Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) or an equivalent professional demonstrate that ventilation in the space is adequate to allow drying in normal climatic conditions and to prevent condensation and mould growth. The fixing or fitting needs to be a permanent feature of the room. Internal drying spaces in the following rooms do not comply: 1. Living rooms 2. Kitchens 3. Dining rooms 4. Main halls 5. Bedrooms

CN5

Building has no residential areas.

Please note that where a building contains no residential function this issue is not applicable and will not require assessment.

CN6

Supported living facilities

This issue does not apply to multi-residential assessments of supported living facilities (for safety reasons, to minimise ligature risk to particular residents).

General

Methodology None.

176

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Ene 09 Drying space

Energy

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Additional information Relevant definitions Secure space For self-contained dwellings this can be defined as an enclosed space only accessible to the residents of the dwelling. For buildings with a communal drying space it is an enclosed space with a secure entrance, accessible to the residents of the building only.

Other information Ventilation - building regulations The relevant building regulations document for England for the assessment of this issue is Approved Document F Ventilation 2010 (incorporating further amendments in 2013) (England and Wales).

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

177

Transport

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Transport Category overview Weightings

Minimum standards

Fully fitted 9%

Shell only 11.5%

Shell and core 10%

None

Summary This category encourages better access to sustainable means of transport for building users. Issues in this section focus on the accessibility of public transport and other alternative transport solutions (cyclist facilities, provision of amenities local to a building) that support reductions in car journeys and, therefore, congestion and CO2 emissions over the life of the building.

Category summary table Issue ID

Issue name

Credits

Tra 01

Public transport accessibility

Up to 5 credits

Recognition for developments in proximity to good public transport networks, thereby helping to reduce transport-related pollution and congestion.

Tra 02

Proximity to amenities

Up to 2 credits

Recognition of developments in close proximity of, and accessible to, local amenities which are likely to be frequently required and used by building occupants.

Tra 03

Cyclist facilities

Up to 2 credits

Provision of compliant cycle storage spaces and facilities to encourage safe and healthy cycling

Tra 04

Maximum car parking capacity

Up to 2 credits

Recognition of developments that limit car parking capacity.

Tra 05

Travel plan

To promote sustainable reductions in transport burdens by undertaking a site specific travel assessment/statement and developing a travel plan based on the needs of the particular site.

178

Credit summary

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Tra 01 Public transport accessibility

Transport

Tra 01 Public transport accessibility Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Building type dependent

Aim To recognise and encourage development in proximity of good public transport networks, thereby helping to reduce transport-related pollution and congestion.

Assessment criteria This issue is split into two parts: Accessibility Index (up to 5 credits - building type dependent) Dedicated bus service (1 credit) The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

Up to five credits - Accessibility Index

1. The public transport Accessibility Index (AI) for the assessed building is calculated and BREEAM credits awarded in accordance with the table of building types, AI benchmarks and BREEAM credits in Table - 29 (see checklists and tables). 2. The Accessibility Index is determined by entering the following information in to the BREEAM Tra 01 calculator: a. The distance (m) from the main building entrance to each compliant public transport node b. The public transport type(s) serving the compliant node e.g. bus or rail c. The average number of services stopping per hour at each compliant node during the operating hours of the building for a typical day (see compliance notes and Table - 30 in the Additional Information section).

One credit - Dedicated bus service

3. For buildings with a fixed shift pattern, i.e. where building users will predominantly arrive/depart at set times, one credit can be awarded where the building occupier provides, or commits to providing a dedicated bus service to and from the building at the beginning and end of each shift/day.

This credit is only available in cases where a development is unable to achieve any of the available credits using the Accessibility Index criteria (i.e. its location has a low public transport Accessibility Index).

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

179

Transport

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Checklists and tables Table - 29: .Credits available for each building type relating to the public transport Accessibility Index (AI) score. Accessibility Index

≥2

≥4

Building type

≥8

≥ 10

≥ 12

≥ 18

BREEAM credits available

Offices, Industrial, Multi-residential, Other building type 1

Pre-school, School, Sixth Form

Retail, Law Court, Further Education College, Higher Education type 1, Other building type 2

Higher Education type 2

Healthcare - Hospitals (Acute, Specialist, Teaching, Mental health)

Healthcare - GP surgery, Health centre, Community hospital

Rural location sensitive buildings. Other building type 3

Prison-site, MOD site

Transport hub

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply

Simple buildings CN2

180

Applicable assessment criteria

All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Tra 01 Public transport accessibility

Transport

Terms

Description

CN3

Campus developments, see criterion 1

Where 80% or more of the buildings on a campus-style development, e.g. further or higher education-sites, are within 1000m of the campus' main entrance, then the campuses main entrance can be used as the reference point for the assessment of distance to compliant public transport nodes for this issue. The campus’ main entrance is that which is accessed by the majority of the assessed building’s staff/students/visitors. A site may have more than one main entrance which between them account for the majority of staff, students and visitors that access the site. In such a case either entrance can be used as the basis for the calculation. Where less than 80% of the buildings on the campus development are within 1000m of the campus’ main entrance, the assessed building’s main entrance must be used as the reference point for the assessment of distance to compliant public transport node for this issue. This rule implies that for large campus developments, when distances are too great to be comfortably covered by walking, the needs of the building users would be served better by locating the public transport nodes inside or on the periphery of the campus. Where the building is not part of a centralised campus then its main entrance must be used as the reference point for the assessment of this issue.

CN4

Dedicated bus services, see criterion 3

The credit for the provision of a dedicated bus service is available for any building type with a fixed shift pattern; examples could include schools, offices, retail, factories, prisons etc. The bus must provide transfer to the local population centre, public transport interchange or be a door-to-door service. The credit is provided as an alternative, where the AI of the building is too low to achieve any BREEAM credits, but where the building users will have the option of a dedicated bus service. However, a dedicated bus service can be included in the public transport Accessibility Index calculation as a means of contributing towardss achieving credits via this method (regardless of the shift pattern). Where this is the case, the distance from the main building entrance to the drop-off/pick-up point (the transport node) of the service should be used.

CN5

Phased developments, see criterion 3

In the case of a large phased development where new transport facilities will be provided, but at a later stage than the building being assessed, the assessment can consider such facilities provided that: A commitment has been made to provide transport facilities within the shortest of the following periods, this is demonstrated either within the General Contract Specification or in the form of a Section 106 Agreement: 1. The transport facilities will be available for use by the time 25% of all phases have been completed and are ready for occupation. OR 2. The transport facilities will be available for use within 25% of the total build time for the phase in which the assessed building forms a part, measured from the completion date of that phase. The most appropriate rule for the development in question must be used, ensuring that the time building users have to wait before having use of the transport facilities is as short as possible. Where the transport facilities will not be available for use within a period of five years from occupation of the building, they cannot be considered for determining compliance with the BREEAM criteria.

Ref General

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

181

Transport

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Methodology The methodology for calculating the Accessibility Index uses Transport for London’s Public Transport Accessibility Level (PTAL) method, itself based on a methodology developed in 1992 by the London Borough of Hammersmith and Fulham. For a detailed description of the PTAL methodology see the 'Measuring Public Transport Accessibility Levels Summary' document: See data.london.gov.uk (PDF) .

Calculating the average number of services For the purpose of the calculation, the frequency of public transport is the average number of services per hour. This is calculated by determining the number of stopping services at the node during the peak arrival/departure times for the building or the building's typical day’s operating hours (see definition 'operating hours'), divided by the number of hours within that period. For example: the average number of services for an assessment of a building that operates between 08:00 19:00 hrs (11 hours) and is within proximity of a bus stop with 35 stopping services during this period is 3.2 (equivalent to an average service frequency of approximately 20 minutes).

Multiple services Services that operate from more than one node within proximity of the building, i.e. two separate bus stops served by the same bus, must be considered only once - at the node in closest proximity to the building. Different services at the same node can be considered as separate.

Bi-directional routes Routes will be bi-directional; however for the purpose of calculating the index, consider only the direction with the highest frequency (in accordance with the PTAL methodology).

Buildings in Greater London Transport for London hosts a Planning Information Database that allows users to search for a specific London location by street name, co-ordinates or postcode and then calculate the Accessibility Index (AI) for that location. The Total AI is confirmed for the Point of Interest (POI) within the summary seport, which can be downloaded and used as evidence of compliance for the assessed building. Go to: www.webptals.org.uk

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

1, 2

A completed copy of the Tra 01 calculator

As per interim design stage

1, 2

Documentary evidence supporting the data used to complete the calculator tool.

As per interim design stage

182

Final post construction stage

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Tra 01 Public transport accessibility

Transport

Additional information Relevant definitions Accessibility Index A measure that provides an indicator of the accessibility and density of the public transport network at a point of interest (in the case of BREEAM, a building). The index is influenced by the proximity and diversity of the public transport network and the level or frequency of service at the accessible node. For example, a building that has a single public transport node 500m from its main building entrance with one service stopping every 15 minutes, i.e. four services per hour on average, will score an AI of approximately 1.90. Alternatively, the same node with one service every 15 minutes, but 300m from the building entrance will achieve an AI of 2.26. The same node with two services stopping every 15 minutes will score an AI of 2.85. The greater the number of compliant nodes, services and their proximity to the building, the higher the AI. Additional building type classifications Higher Education type 1: H.E buildings located on a campus where less than 25% of students are resident on the campus or within 1km radius from the campus’ main entrance. Higher Education type 2: H.E buildings located on a campus where 25% or more of the students are resident on the campus or within 1km radius from the campus’ main entrance. Other Building - type 1: A building predominantly occupied by staff/employees with occasional business related visitors. Other Building - type 2: A building occupied by a number of core staff/employees with a larger number of consistently frequent visitors/users (either resident or non-resident). Other Building - type 3: As type 2, but building types specifically required to be located rurally as a result of its function, i.e. a building which would never be located within an urban area, e.g. a National Park visitor centre (see definition of rural and rural location sensitive buildings location). Compliant transport node A compliant node includes any bus service with a stop within 650m and any railway station within 1000m of the assessed building’s main entrance, measured via a safe pedestrian route (not ‘as the crow flies’). The service stopping at each node must provide transport from, or onward travel to, either an urban centre, major transport node or a community focal point e.g. doctor’s surgery, library, school or village centre. Only local services should be assessed and any national public transport services should be excluded from the analysis, unless such a service can be said to provide a local commuter service. Prison and M.O.D sites: The distance requirement for a compliant node for buildings on these sites is 1000m for both bus and rail. Main building entrance The main building entrance is the entrance to the assessed building which is directly connected to the main building reception, circulation routes, lifts/stairs and is available to the majority of the building’s staff and visitors on arrival, it is not the site entrance (unless the site entrance is also the building entrance e.g. building with a boundary on a public highway). For prison/MOD site assessments, the main entrance should be taken as the gatehouse entrance. Operating hours BREEAM seeks to define the building’s accessibility to the public transport network for the period during which the majority of building users will travel to and from the building. In most cases the normal operating hours of the building can be used. Where shift patterns see the majority of building users (over 80%) arriving or leaving during a certain period, for example an office building where the majority of office workers arrive between 8.00-10.00, then that period can be used as an alternative to the operating hours of the building. This accounts for some building types that operate a 24 hour day and on a shift work basis. During what typically would be deemed unsociable hours, and therefore periods where there is little if any public transport operating, such periods are not required to be accounted for in the assessment of this issue. Where the assessed building operates on a 24-hour basis or the operating hours are unknown at the time of assessment, then

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

183

Transport

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

refer to and use the table of default operating hours, which can be found in the additional information section of this issue. BREEAM Tra 01 calculator tool A spreadsheet-based calculator used to determine the Accessibility Index for the assessed building and the number of BREEAM credits achieved. Rural location A rural location is defined in this context as a site clearly not within or on the boundary of a small, medium or large urban cover. An urban cover will have a population of 3000 people or more, located within a tract of continuously built-up urban land extending 20 hectares or more. Therefore, the definition of rural includes village locations, green field sites or small urban centres with a population of less 3000 people within a tract of land no greater than 20 hectares. Such locations will most likely be on a local bus route to larger urban areas or other local towns and may have local shops and other facilities. This classification is based on the Department of Transport National Travel Survey definition, which specifies urban areas based on the extent of urban development indicated on Ordnance Survey maps Rural location sensitive buildings This definition includes any of the building types (listed below) where there is a demonstrable social or economic need from a rural population for the service/demand, which the new building is intended to meet; and therefore locating the building at an alternative site which could have higher public transport accessibility levels, i.e. within an urbanised area, is unfeasible. The following building types are examples of those that may fall into this category. 1. Offices where providing services to the local community 2. Industrial where providing services to the local community 3. Retail where providing services to the local community 4. Pre-school, primary and secondary school 5. GP surgery Typical day The typical day is that which represents the period when travel to and from the building by its users and visitors will be at its highest. For most buildings this should be taken as a mid-week day. In choosing a typical day the assessor should check that timetabled information for that day is, within reason, representative of the public transport provision for the entire operating week (excluding Sundays).

Other information Table - 30: Default hours of operation by building type for a typical day Building type

Default hours

Commercial

08.00 - 19.00

Pre-school, school, sixth form college

07.30 -22.00,15.00 - 17.30

Further & Higher Education

08.00 - 19.00

Healthcare

07.00 - 20.00 (encompassing visiting hours and the typical daytime shift pattern)

Retail: Shopping centre

09.00 - 19.00

Retail: Supermarket

08.00 - 22.00

184

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Tra 01 Public transport accessibility

Transport

Building type

Default hours

Retail: Service provider

08.00 - 18.00

Retail: Convenience store

07.00 - 22.00

Retail: DIY/retail park

08.00 - 20.00

Retail: shop

08.30 - 17.30

Multi-residential accommodation

08.00 - 19.00

Court

08.00 - 19.00

Prison

07.00 - 20:00 (encompassing visiting hours and the typical daytime shift pattern)

Other Buildings

08.00 - 07.00 Or use any of the above hours, as appropriate to the building type.

24 hour use building

07.00 - 20.00

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

185

Transport

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Tra 02 Proximity to amenities Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Building type dependent

Aim To encourage and reward a building location that facilitates easy access to local services and so reduces the environmental, social and economic impacts resulting from multiple or extended building user journeys, including transport-related emissions and traffic congestion.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

Up to two credits

1. Where the building is located within close proximity of, and accessible to, local amenities which are likely to be frequently required and used by building occupants, as outlined in Table - 31. 2. Where a building type is indicated to have core amenities (Labeled as C in Table - 31) at least two of these must be provided as a part of the total number required. The remaining number of amenities required can be met using any other applicable amenities (including any remaining core amenities).

Checklists and tables Table - 31: Credits available for Tra02 for different building types Building types Criteria

Type 5 (Two credits available)

Type 1

Type 2

Type 3

Type 4

No. of BREEAM credits

No. of amenities

500

1000

500

Appropriate food outlet

Access to cash

Proximity (metres)

186

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Type 6

Tra 02 Proximity to amenities

Transport

Building types Criteria

Type 5 (Two credits available)

Type 1

Type 2

Type 3

Type 4

Access to an outdoor open space (public or private, provided suitably sized and accessible to building users)

Access to a recreation/leisure facility for fitness/sports

Publicly available postal facility

Community facility

Over the counter services associated with a pharmacy

Public sector GP surgery or general medical centre Child care facility or school

Type 6

Key: ü - Amenity relevant to building type C - Core amenity for building type Building Types: Type 1: Offices, Retail, Industrial, Courts Type 2: Pre-school, Schools, Sixth Form Type 3: Higher Education and Further Education Type 4: Healthcare Type 5: Multi-residential (two credits are available and each can be awarded independently of the other). Type 6: Other Building types This issue is not applicable to prison buildings/developments.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

187

Transport

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN3

Collective amenities

One type of amenity may also exist within or as part of other types of amenities, e.g. a grocery store in a petrol station, cash point or pharmacy in a supermarket etc. It is not a requirement of this issue that each amenity is ‘stand alone’.

CN4

Amenities within assessed building or on-site

An amenity within the building or on the same site as the proposed development, e.g. where the assessed building is part of a campus, retail or business park/centre, complies with the assessment criteria.

CN5

Phased developments

The guidance provided in BREEAM issue Tra 01 Public transport accessibility, concerning phased developments, also applies to this issue.

General

Methodology None.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

All

Where the amenities do not currently exist but are due to be developed a letter from the client/developer confirming: 1. The location and type of amenities to be provided 2. The timescale for development of the amenities.

As per interim design stage

Additional information Relevant definitions Accessible amenities Amenities (as listed) that are within the required proximity (distance in metres) of the building and accessible via safe pedestrian routes, e.g. pavements/paths and safe crossing points or, where provided, dedicated pedestrian crossing points. The distance should not be measured in a straight line, ‘as the crow flies’.

188

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Tra 02 Proximity to amenities

Transport

Access to an outdoor open space (public or private, suitably sized and accessible to building users) A space that enables building users to take an appropriate break from internal building activities, for example, an office building would benefit from a space to sit outside and have lunch. These spaces will need to be suitably sized to ensure that the space supports a reasonable number of building users associated with the development and should not form a part of the public highway. Appropriate food outlet A means of accessing a food supply that is affordable to the majority of the building's users as well as being appropriate for their day-to-day needs. For example, a small office building would benefit from having a small shop selling sandwiches or snacks for a multi-residential building would benefit from having a restaurant in the local area. Access to a recreation/leisure facility A facility that will allow building users to exercise and maintain a healthy lifestyle. This could include a local leisure centre, tennis courts, an on-site gym or, for a school, a local playground. Child care or school The intention of this amenity is to provide child support for potential building users, this could include a nursery, child minding facilities or a school local to the development. A school cannot be considered an amenity to a BREEAM assessment of the same school. Community facility An internal space that is inclusive to the majority of building users who will occupy the assessed building/development. The facility will serve to facilitate community activities for the assessed building and its users. For example, for a multi-residential building this could be a community hall or for an office building, a public house.

Other information None.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

189

Transport

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Tra 03 Cyclist facilities Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Building type dependent

Aim To encourage building users to cycle, so promoting exercise and helping reduce congestion and emissions, by ensuring adequate provision of cyclist facilities.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

One credit - Cycle storage (excluding sheltered housing, care homes, supported living facilities and prison building types) 1. Compliant cycle storage spaces that meet the minimum levels set out in Table - 32 (see checklists and tables) are installed.

One credit - Cyclist facilities (excluding sheltered housing, care homes and supported living facilities, Student residents, key accommodation, transport hub and MOD residential and prison building types) 2. Criterion 1 has been achieved. 3. At least two of the following types of compliant cyclist facilities have been provided for all staff and pupils (where appropriate) (see relevant definitions for the scope of each compliant cyclist facility): a. Showers b. Changing facilities c. Lockers d. Drying spaces .

One credit - Cycle storage and cyclist facilities (sheltered housing, care homes and supported living facilities and prison building types only) 4. Where criteria 1 to 3 have been met for cycle space and cycle facilities requirements.

190

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Tra 03 Cyclist facilities

Transport

Checklists and tables Table - 32: Cycle storage criteria for each building type Building type

No. spaces per unit of measure

Unit of measure

Notes

Commercial Offices, Industrial

10 staff

20 public car parking spaces

Total

Pre-school or creche

10 staff

Primary school

Per form or class in year group

Secondary schools and sixth form, Further and Higher education (FE and HE)

10 staff & pupils/students total

Retail Large retail

Small retail

The number of staff should be the maximum number using the building at any time/shift. The staff spaces must be provided in addition to customer spaces. While they do not need to be separate from customer spaces, this is encouraged. This is subject to providing a minimum of 10 cycle customer spaces. Any retail development that provides at least 50 customer cycle storage spaces will comply regardless of the number of parking spaces. The spaces must be publicly accessible within proximity of a main building entrance. Compliant cyclist facilities are intended for staff only i.e. it is not a requirement of compliance to provide facilities for customers.

Education

For example: where a primary school has been designed to accommodate three classes per year, a total of 15 compliant cycle storage spaces are provided for the whole school. Where there are varying numbers of forms/classes per year, the calculation must be based on the year with the greatest number of classes/forms. FE/HE: student numbers must account for both underand post-graduates, as well as PhD students and PostDoctorates.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

191

Transport

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Healthcare All healthcare building types

10 staff

2 consulting rooms OR 10 beds

Prison establishment located building

10 staff

Law Court

10 building occupants (staff and visitors)

10 staff

2 residents

10 staff

Unit of measure: use the measure which is the largest for the building type e.g. if hospital then use beds, if GP surgery then use consulting rooms. The requirement for consulting rooms/beds is subject to a minimum of four compliant cycle storage spaces being provided.

Courts and Prisons Only one credit available with the provision of two cyclist facilities.

Multi-residential Student residences, key worker accommodation

Sheltered housing, Care homes, Supported living facility

1 compliant wheelchair or electric buggy storage spaces

10 residents*

The requirement is subject to a minimum of one compliant space being provided.

* Or spaces specified in accordance with the number required as identified by the likely resident profile. Where the resident profile is not the elderly or physically disabled or impaired then, where appropriate, the requirement for wheelchair or electric buggy spaces should be changed to compliant cycle spaces.

Other buildings Type 1* Type 2*

192

Use the criteria defined for office buildings. 1

10 staff

10 visitors or beds

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Tra 03 Cyclist facilities

Type 3*

Transport

20 staff

A single credit can be awarded where spaces for staff only are provided as well as the appropriate compliant cyclist facilities. The Compliance note allowing a reduction to the cyclist provision in rural locations has been accounted for in the unit of measure for this transport type. It should not therefore be applied again.

20 building visitors/beds

Transport hubs

10 public users

Apply the sliding scale (as per compliance note) to a maximum of 5000 daily public users. Public users refer to regular peak time users of the service who start and/or finish their public transport journey at the assessed building.

MOD nonresidential

10 living-out personnel

These criteria apply to MOD buildings where the majority of personnel live off-site.

MOD residential

2 residents

Note : Where the number of building users (based upon the unit of measure) exceeds 200 the sliding scale of compliance can be used to identify the appropriate number of cycle spaces required (see Methodology section).

* See relevant definitions in the BREEAM issueTra 01 Public transport accessibility for classification of other buildings - type 1, 2 and 3.

Compliance notes Terms

Description

CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

CN1.1

Shell and core requirements

Where the credits are being sought the compliant number of cycle storage spaces must be provided as part of the base build. Compliant cyclist facilities (showers, changing areas etc.) can be provided in shell and core areas of the building as part of the base build. Alternatively, compliance can be demonstrated where the shell and core building is designed to facilitate future installation of the compliant number and type of cyclist facilities by the tenant/owneroccupier through the provision of an appropriately sized and dedicated space in the base building, including either the installation of the appropriate services (for showers) or infrastructure to allow the future installation of the relevant services e.g. capped water supply, service or ventilation ducts, drainage etc.

Ref Shell and core

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

193

Transport

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN2.1

Use of local compliant cycle storage

For all buildings which form part of a larger site/development, use of existing local BREEAM compliant cycle storage space is acceptable.

CN2.2

Compliant cyclist facilities and non-compliant local storage spaces

Where the assessed building has compliant cyclist facilities, plus access to some local cycle storage spaces that are not BREEAM compliant, one credit can still be awarded.

CN2.3

Compliant cycle spaces but no cyclist facilities

Where the assessed building meets the minimum number of compliant cycle spaces required for two credits, but does not have or meet the minimum provision for compliant cyclist facilities, then one credit can be awarded.

CN3

Existing/new site-wide facilities

For assessments of new infill buildings on an existing site where there exist shared compliant facilities, or where the new building will form a part of a larger development (e.g. campus, retail or business park), the required number of facilities can be determined on a development-wide basis. The number of compliant facilities must be large enough to cater for the building occupants of the assessed building, in addition to the occupants of any existing or other new buildings that will share those facilities.

CN4

Building locations with a high level of public transport accessibility

For sites where at least 50% of the available BREEAM credits for Public transport accessibility (Tra 01) have been awarded (rounded to the nearest whole credit), the number of compliant cycle spaces required in Table - 32 can be reduced by 50%. This reduction will also reduce the requirement for compliant showers or lockers by the same margin for most building types by default, since the calculation is based on the number of cycle storage spaces. Building types where the number of required showers/lockers is not based on cycle storage provision can reduce the actual requirement for compliant showers/lockers by 50%.

General

194

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Tra 03 Cyclist facilities

Transport

Ref

Terms

Description

CN5

Rural locations

For sites in rural locations the following can be applied; 1. Where the distance to the nearest urban location is greater than 10 miles, the number of compliant cycle spaces can be reduced by 50%. 2. Where the distance to the nearest urban location is greater than 20 miles, the number of compliant cycle spaces can be reduced by 70%. 3. Where the distance to the nearest urban location is greater than 30 miles, the number of compliant cycle spaces can be reduced by 90%. This reduction will also reduce the requirement for compliant shower/lockers by the same margin for most building types by default, since the calculation is based on the number of cycle storage spaces. Building types where the number of required showers/lockers is not based on cycle storage provision can reduce the actual requirement for compliant showers/lockers by 50%, 70% or 90% as appropriate. A percentage reduction in this context cannot be applied in addition to the 50% reduction due to the building's Public Transport Accessibility level (as described in the Compliance note above). The definition of a rural location (and urban location) can be found in the BREEAM issue Tra 01 Public transport accessibility – Additional information.

CN6

Number of building occupants unknown

If it is not possible to confirm the number of building occupants commuting to the development, e.g. speculative developments, then the default occupancy rates given in the table in Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity – Table - 33: can be used to determine a default number of users. Alternatively, the number of building occupants in an existing development of similar type and size can be used (the assessor must justify/validate the number used in their certification report).

Building type specific CN7

Education (schools only) Compliant showers - additional requirements See criterion 3.

In the case of a pre-school or primary school shower provision is for staff only and set at a rate of one shower for every 10 cycle storage spaces provided (subject to a minimum of one shower being provided). For example, where a primary school has been designed to accommodate three classes per year, a total of 15 compliant spaces are required to meet the BREEAM criteria for cycle storage, and therefore two showers for staff use would be required for compliance with the cycle facilities criterion. In secondary schools (and sixth forms) where there are less than 100 pupils, a minimum of two showers must be provided for pupils with one male and one female shower (where applicable). A minimum of one shower for staff should be provided in all cases.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

195

Transport

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Terms

Description

CN8

Sheltered housing or care homes and supported living facilities See criterion 3.

Compliant wheelchair and buggy storage facilities are those that meet the following: 1. Charging points for electric buggies (at least two) provided within the storage space 2. Storage area must be secure yet easily accessible 3. Lighting of the storage facility must be compliant with the external (or internal where relevant) lighting criteria defined in BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort. The lighting must be controlled to avoid operation during daylight hours, where there is sufficient daylight in or around the facility. 4. Where access to and from the building main entrance needs to be tightly controlled for the safety/security of residents, and it can be demonstrated that compliance with points 2 and 3 above impact on this (e.g. where residents include those with mental health problems), these two items can be excluded from the compliance requirements.

CN9

Residential buildings with transient visitors such as hotels, hostels and training centre

The unit of measure for visitors or beds does not apply in residential buildings with transient visitors, e.g. hotels, hostels, training centres where the visitor typically resides for less than one month. For a secure accommodation unit compliance should be based on visitors (not beds). In this case, cyclist facilities for staff must be accessible to all building users to ensure that visitors and patients/community members that will travel to and use or work within the building are provided for.

Methodology Sliding scale of compliance To recognise the increased confidence in availability that occurs where there is larger scale provision of facilities, it is acceptable to reduce the provision requirement for building users by increasing the standard unit of measure (defined in Table - 32) and potentially the provision of cyclist facilities on a sliding scale as follows: 1. For buildings with more than 200 users but less than 300, the unit of measure can be increased by a ratio of 1.5. 2. For buildings with more than 300 users but less than 400, the unit of measure can be increased by a ratio of 2. 3. For buildings with more than 400 users, the unit of measure can be increased by a ratio of 2.5. For example, an office building with 800 users would be required to provide the following number of cycle storage spaces: 1-200 users @ 1 space per 10 users = 20 spaces 201-300 users @ 1 space per 15 users (standard unit of measure x 1.5) = 7 spaces 301-400 users @ 1 space per 20 users (standard unit of measure x 2) = 5 spaces 401+ users @ 1 space per 25 users (standard unit of measure x 2.5) = 16 spaces Total compliant cycle storage spaces required = 48 spaces The sliding scale of compliance does not apply to the following building types: small and large retail, primary schools, multiresidential buildings and MOD residential buildings.

196

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Tra 03 Cyclist facilities

Transport

Minimum cycle storage provision Where the calculated number of required cycle storage spaces is less than four, total provision should be based on the lower of the following: a. A minimum of four compliant storage spaces must be provided OR b. One space per user (staff and where appropriate other user groups).

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Additional information Relevant definitions Additional building type classifications See relevant definitions in the BREEAM issueTra 01 Public transport accessibility for classification of other buildings type 1, 2 and 3 Compliant cycle storage spaces Compliant cycle storage spaces are defined as those that meet the following: 1. Cycles can be secured within spaces in rack(s).They are covered overhead and the cycle racks are set in or fixed to a permanent structure (building or hard-standing). Alternatively the cycle storage may be located in a locked structure fixed to or part of a permanent structure with appropriate surveillance. 2. The distance between each cycle rack, and cycle racks and other obstructions, e.g. a wall, allows for appropriate access to the cycle storage space, to enable bikes to be easily stored and accessed. 3. The storage facility or entrance to the facility is in a prominent site location that is viewable/overlooked from either an occupied building or a main access to a building. 4. The cycle storage facility has adequate lighting, this could be demonstrated with the lighting criteria defined in BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort. The lighting must be controlled to avoid out-of-hours use and operation during daylight hours, where there is sufficient daylight in or around the facility. Compliant showers Compliant showers are defined as those that meet the following: 1. Provision of one shower for every 10 cycle storage spaces, subject to a minimum provision of one shower. 2. Any development providing eight showers or more will comply regardless of the number of cycle storage spaces provided. 3. Both male and female users must be catered for i.e. either separate showers within shared gender-specific facilities (required provision split 50-50) or single shower cubicles and changing space for mixed use. 4. The showers do not need to be dedicated to cyclists and can be those shared with other users/uses. Compliant changing facilities Compliant changing facilities are defined as those that meet the following: 1. Appropriately sized for the likely/required number of users. The assessor should use their judgement to determine whether the changing area is appropriately sized given the number of cycle storage spaces or 2. Changing areas must include adequate space and facilities to hang or store clothing and equipment while

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

197

Transport

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

changing or showering, e.g. bench seat and/or hooks. 3. Toilet/shower cubicles cannot be counted as changing facilities. Compliant lockers Compliant lockers are defined as those that meet the following: 1. The number of lockers is at least equal to the number of cycle spaces required. 2. Lockers are either in or adjacent to compliant changing rooms. 3. The lockers are sized appropriately for the storage of a cyclist's equipment. Compliant drying spaces A compliant drying space is defined as a space that is specifically designed and designated with adequate heating/ventilation for the drying of wet clothes. A plant room for example is not a compliant drying space. Small retail type Includes smaller retail units/shops that may form part of a wider retail/business district, city or town centre or mixed use development and typically do not have the scope to provide their own dedicated cyclist facilities. Large retail type Includes large retail developments, such as shopping centres, retail parks and supermarkets, which typically will have covered or uncovered parking or external areas and therefore scope to provide their own dedicated cycle facilities.

Other information None.

198

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity

Transport

Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Building type dependent

Aim To encourage the use of alternative means of transport other than the private car to and from the building, thereby helping to reduce transport-related emissions and traffic congestion associated with the building’s operation.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

Up to two credits - Car parking capacity

1. The building’s car parking capacity is compared to the maximum car parking capacity benchmarks in Table - 33 and the relevant number of BREEAM credits awarded. For most building types, except those where stated, the benchmarks vary according to the building's public transport Accessibility Index (AI determined in accordance with BREEAM issue Tra 01 Public transport accessibility). Therefore, for these building types the AI must be determined prior to assessing this issue. This is required to ensure that the building’s car parking capacity is relative to the development's accessibility to the public transport network.

Checklists and tables Table - 33: Credits available in Tra04 Maximum car parking capacity for different building types Building type

Criteria Building’s Accessibility Index <4

≥4-<8

No. of credits

≥8

Max. parking capacity 1 space per x building users, where x is: Office, industrial, student residences and key worker accommodation

Sheltered housing, care homes and supported living facility

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

199

Transport

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Building type

Criteria Building’s Accessibility Index <4

Further and Higher Education

Other Building – Transport type 1 and 2

Other Building – MOD (where building users are ‘living-out personnel’)

≥4-<8

No. of credits

≥8

For the building types listed below, the maximum number of parking spaces provided must not be greater than the total of the following: Healthcare - Hospitals (acute, specialist, teaching, mental health)

One parking space for every four staff, plus; One parking space for every four beds, plus Two parking spaces for each consulting, examination, treatment, therapy room and A&E cubicle.

Healthcare - GP surgery, health centre, community hospital

One parking space for every two medical staff, plus; One parking space for every three nonmedical staff, plus; Two parking spaces for each consulting, examination, treatment, therapy room and A&E cubicle.

Pre-school, schools, sixth form, Retail, Prison, Court, Other Building – Transport type 3, Other Building – Transport hubs

Issue not assessed for these building types

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

200

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity

Ref

Terms

Transport

Description

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue is not applicable.

CN3

Exclusions

Parking spaces set aside for the following building users can be excluded provided these spaces are dedicated for that use i.e. sized accordingly with the appropriate signage/markings. 1. Disabled 2. Parent & baby 3. Motorbike 4. Car share In the case of excluding car share spaces, the future building occupier will need to confirm they have an enforceable car share policy.

CN4

Parking shared with other buildings

Where the assessed building forms part of a wider site development, e.g. campus, business park, hospital, and parking is not designated to individual buildings, then the assessor has two options: 1. Assess compliance on the basis of parking capacity for the whole development, accounting for all existing and new users and parking spaces. 2. Assess compliance using a pro-rata of parking capacity to building users e.g. if the assessed building is occupied by 20% of the developmentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s total occupants, then attrib-ute 20% of the total parking spaces to the assessed build-ing for the purpose of the assessment.

General

Methodology None.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

All

Where relevant, a completed copy Tra 01 calculator confirming the building's Accessibility Index

As per interim design stage.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

201

Transport

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Additional information Relevant definitions Accessibility Index Refer to Tra 01 Public transport accessibility. Building Users Where the term building users is referenced in this BREEAM issue it refers to the following, where relevant to the building type: 1. Staff (who will work within the building). 2. Students (who will access the building for work or study during a typical academic term-time/semester day). 3. Residents (who will reside permanently or for a short period of time in the building). If known, or can be reasonably estimated, project specific occupancy figures should be used. If this is not possible, for example where the building is a speculative development, use the default occupancy rates given in Table - 34 in the Other information section (below) to determine the number of users. Where the number of building users is variable, provision of parking spaces should be based on the maximum number of building users likely to be using the building at any time during a typical day. Care homes For the purpose of BREEAM, care homes are defined as those buildings which are legally required to register with the Commission for Social Care Inspection by the Care Standards Act, 2000. Sheltered housing Sheltered housing falls within Class C3 of the Town and Country Planning (Use Classes) Order 1987, and can be defined as self-contained accommodation, usually with an emergency alarm system, communal facilities and a resident warden. This includes all sheltered housing defined as 'Category 1, 2, 2.5 and 3' in accordance with the 1969 Ministry of Housing and Local Government Circular 82/69 and Local Authority Guidelines. MOD Living-out personnel This refers to staff that work in the assessed building and are not residents on the MOD site where the assessed building is located. Other building types See the BREEAM issueTra 01 Public transport accessibility for a definition of other building types 1, 2 and 3.

Other information Table - 34: Default occupancy rates by building type Building type and function area

Occupant density

Business

Building type and function area

Occupant density

Secure Residential Institution

Office area (including reception areas)

0.111

Cell

0.190

Food preparation area (staffed)

0.108

Reception

0.121

Small workshop/category lab space

0.068

Hall/lecture theatre/assembly area

0.183

Eating/drinking area

0.141

Industrial

202

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity

Transport

Building type and function area

Occupant density

Building type and function area

Occupant density

Food preparation area

0.213

Workshop - small-scale

0.048

Industrial process area

0.022

Laundry

0.086

Laboratory

0.107

Classroom

0.183

Reception

0.110

Office and consulting areas

0.093

Warehouse storage

0.009

Food preparation area

0.111

Generic Office Area

0.108

Libraries, Museums, Galleries

Hospitals, care homes

Reception

0.095

Reception

0.152

Food preparation area

0.176

Post Mortem Facility

0.050

Hall/lecture theatre/assembly area

0.150

Food preparation area

0.161

Laboratory

0.098

Physiotherapy Studio

0.200

Workshop - small-scale

0.062

Bedroom Unit

0.105

Display and Public areas

0.150

Laundry

0.117

Generic Office Area

0.099

24-hours consulting/treatment areas

0.000

General Assembly and Leisure, Clubs, Theatres

Assembly areas/halls

1.000

Dry sports hall

0.047

Hydrotherapy pool hall

0.100

Fitness Studio

0.132

Industrial process area

0.124

Fitness suite/gym

0.170

Laboratory

0.080

Food preparation area

0.131

Operating theatre

0.125

Hall/lecture theatre/assembly area

0.175

Classroom

1.000

Auditoria

0.341

Diagnostic Imaging

0.100

Ice rink

0.225

Generic Ward

0.175

Performance area (stage)

0.049

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

203

Transport

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Building type and function area

Occupant density

Building type and function area

Occupant density

Office and consulting areas

0.195

Public circulation areas

0.241

Reception

0.126

Primary Healthcare Reception

0.11

Sales area - general

0.102

Office and consulting areas

0.082

Swimming pool

0.163

Workshop - small-scale

0.067

Further and Higher Education Residents Bedroom

0.120

Generic Office Area

0.116

Classroom

0.203

Display area

0.001

Food preparation area

0.096

Community/day centres

Hall/lecture theatre/assembly area

0.202

Reception

0.108

Computer lab

0.231

Dry sports hall

0.047

Laboratory

0.106

Food preparation area

0.143

Laundry

0.105

Workshop - small scale

0.064

Reception

0.112

Hall/lecture theatre/assembly area

0.169

Workshop - small scale

0.068

Office and consulting areas

0.106

Office and consulting areas

0.098

Other spaces/buildings

Hotels

Data Centre

0.096

Bedroom

0.094

Server Room

0.096

Food preparation area

0.108

Heavy Plant Room

0.096

Reception

0.105

Generic Office Area

0.106

204

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity

Transport

Notes for Table - 34 of default occupancy rates: 1. The net floor area for each function must be multiplied by the equivalent occupant density to determine an overall occupancy for the function area. 2. Not all potential building areas are listed, only those required to reflect estimated building occupancy for the building type. For example, an office building may have a canteen but it will be the staff that predominantly uses the canteen. The office staff numbers will be estimated using the default occupancy rate for the office area; therefore to include the canteen would result in double counting of occupancy. 3. If a building type is not listed, occupancy rates for a similar building type or function area may be used. 4. The above occupancy rates have been sourced from the activity database of the Simplified Building Energy Model (SBEM).

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

205

Transport

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Tra 05 Travel plan Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Aim To recognise the consideration given to accommodating a range of travel options for building users, thereby encouraging the reduction of reliance on forms of travel that have the highest environmental impact.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

One credit

1. A travel plan has been developed as part of the feasibility and design stages. 2. A site specific travel assessment/statement has been undertaken to ensure the travel plan is structured to meet the needs of the particular site and covers the following (as a minimum): a. Where relevant, existing travel patterns and opinions of existing building or site users towardss cycling and walking so that constraints and opportunities can be identified. b. Travel patterns and transport impact of future building users. c. Current local environment for walkers and cyclists (accounting for visitors who may be accompanied by young children) d. Disabled access (accounting for varying levels of disability and visual impairment) e. Public transport links serving the site f. Current facilities for cyclists. 3. The travel plan includes a package of measures to encourage the use of sustainable modes of transport and movement of people and goods during the buildings operation and use. 4. If the occupier is known, they must be involved in the development of the travel plan and they must confirm that the travel plan will be implemented post construction and be supported by the buildings management in operation.

Checklists and tables None.

206

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Tra 05 Travel plan

Transport

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Applicable assessment criteriaBoth options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN1.1

Shell and core requirements

A travel plan is still required even if the end user/occupier is not known, albeit that it may only be an interim travel plan or one that broadly addresses all the issues covered in the assessment criteria. The developer must confirm that they will hand over a copy of the travel plan to the buildingâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s future tenant(s)/owner-occupier, so that it may inform their own travel plan/strategy.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue is not applicable to simple buildings assessments.

CN3

Existing travel plan See criterion 3

The credit can be awarded if the assessed building is part of a site that has an existing up-to date organisational travel plan that is compliant with BREEAM, is applicable to all building users (in existing and assessed new buildings) and accounts for the additional travel resulting from users of the new building.

CN4

Travel assessment or Statement see criterion 2

A travel assessment (also referred to as transport assessment) will be required where a proposed development is likely to have significant transport and related environmental impacts. The study area for a transport assessment related to a proposed development should be determined in discussion between the developer and appropriate authorities. A transport statement is required where the proposed development is not likely to have a significant transport impact. A transport statement is suitable to demonstrate compliance with BREEAM when the proposed development is expected to generate relatively low numbers of trips or traffic flows, with minor transport impacts. For further guidance refer to: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/guidance-on-transportassessment

General

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

207

Transport

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Terms

Description

CN5

Travel plan measures See criterion 3

The following measure could be considered as part of the travel plan for development: Providing parking priority spaces for car sharers Providing dedicated and convenient cycle storage and changing facilities Lighting, landscaping and shelter to make pedestrian and public transport waiting areas pleasant Negotiating improved bus services, i.e. altering bus routes or offering discounts Restricting and/or charging for car parking Criteria for lobby areas where information about public transport or car sharing can be made available. Pedestrian and cycle friendly (for all types of user regardless of the level of mobility or visual impairment) via the provision of cycle lanes, safe crossing points, direct routes, appropriate tactile surfaces, well-lit and signposted to other amenities, public transport nodes and adjoining off-site pedestrian and cycle routes Providing suitable taxi drop-off/waiting areas Ensuring that rural buildings are located with appropriate transport access to ensure that they adequately serve the local community (where procured to do so e.g. community centre).

Methodology None.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Additional information Relevant definitions Travel plan A travel plan is a strategy for managing all travel and transport within an organisation, principally to increase choice and reduce reliance on the car by seeking to improve access to a site or development by sustainable modes of transport. A travel plan contains both physical and behavioural measures to increase travel choices and reduce reliance on single occupancy car travel.

208

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Tra 05 Travel plan

Transport

Building users Where the term 'building users' is used, this refers to the following, as appropriate to building type: 1. Staff (commuter journeys and business travel) 2. Pupils/students 3. Visitors 4. Patients 5. Customers 6. Community users 7. Personnel who make deliveries/collections to and from the development 8. Contractors/service providers, who regularly work at and access the building/development 9. Residents of multi-residential buildings.

Other information None.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

209

Water

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Water Category overview Weightings

Minimum standards

Fully fitted 7%

Shell only 4%

Shell and core 7.5%

Wat 01, Wat 02

Summary This category encourages sustainable water use in the operation of the building and its site. Issues in this section focus on identifying means of reducing potable water consumption (internal and external) over the life time of the building and minimising losses through leakage.

Category summary table Issue ID

Issue name

Credits

Wat 01

Water consumption

Reducing the demand for potable water through the provision of efficient sanitary fitting, rainwater collection and water recycling systems

Wat 02

Water monitoring

Specification of a water meter/s on the mains water supply to encourage water consumption management and monitoring to reduce the impacts of inefficiencies and leakage.

Wat 03

Water leak detection

Recognition of leak detection systems capable of detecting a major water leak on the mains water supply Flow control devices that regulate the supply of water to each WC area/facility to reduce water wastage.

Wat 04

Water efficient equipment

Identify a building's total unregulated water demand and mitigate or reduce consumption through systems and/or processes.

210

Credit summary

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Wat 01 Water consumption

Water

Wat 01 Water consumption Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Yes

Aim To reduce the consumption of potable water for sanitary use in new buildings from all sources through the use of water efficient components and water recycling systems.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

Up to five credits

1. An assessment of the efficiency of the building’s domestic water-consuming components is undertaken using the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator. 2. The water consumption (L/person/day) for the assessed building is compared against a baseline performance and BREEAM credits awarded based upon Table - 35. 3. The efficiency of the following ‘domestic scale’ water-consuming components must be included in the assessment (where specified): a. WCs b. Urinals c. Taps (wash hand basins and where specified kitchen taps and waste disposal unit) d. Showers e. Baths f. Dishwashers (domestic and commercial sized) g. Washing machines (domestic and commercial or industrial sized).

The BREEAM Wat 01 calculator defines the building types and activity areas for which the above components must be assessed. 4. Where a greywater and/or rainwater system is specified, its yield (L/person/day) is used to off-set non potable water demand from components that would otherwise be supplied using potable water. 5. Any greywater systems must be specified and installed in compliance with BS 8525-1:2010 Greywater Systems - Part 1 Code of Practice1. Any rainwater systems must be specified and installed in compliance with BS 8515:2009+A1:2013 Rainwater Harvesting Systems - Code of practice2. 6. Healthcare and prison buildings: refer to the relevant compliance note for additional criteria regarding the specification of particular water-consuming component controls.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

211

Water

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Checklists and tables Table - 35: BREEAM Credits available for percentage improvement over baseline building water consumption % improvement

No. of BREEAM credits

12.5%

25%

40%

50%

55%

65%

Exemplary performance

Note: for some building types an alternative approach to compliance must be used to award credits (for further information please refer to the Methodology section, below, and the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator)

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

All criteria Option 1 - Shell only: This issue is not applicable Option 2 - Shell and core: This issue is applicable subject to CN1.1 below Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

CN1.1

Shell and core assessments

Option 2 - Shell and core Compliance for this issue must be assessed on the basis of all water-consuming components and greywater and/or rainwater systems specified and installed by the developer. Components or systems listed in the criteria and sited within tenant areas that are not being specified by the developer, but will be specified by the tenant, do not need to be assessed for a shell and core project.

Simple buildings CN2

212

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Wat 01 Water consumption

Ref

Water

Terms

Description

No fittings present

Where a project under assessment contains none of the specified components, the performance specification for components provided in facilities in an adjacent and accessible building must be used in the calculation, i.e. those facilities most likely to be used by the occupants and visitors of the assessed building. This rule also applies where a project under assessment consists solely of an extension to an existing building, i.e. where the extended building contains no new sanitary facilities because there are facilities present within the existing building.

General CN3

Building specific CN4

Healthcare Components in healthcare facilities See criterion 6.

In addition to meeting the criteria defined above, the flushing control for each WC or urinal in a healthcare facility must be suitable for operation by patients with frail or infirm hands or activated by electronic sensors. Components in clinical areas may be omitted from the calculation. For the purpose of this compliance note ‘clinical areas’ refers to all areas where a scrub-up trough, clinical sink or clinical basin is installed. This is not an exhaustive list and guidance should always be sought from the appropriate professional, such as a health authorities Infection control officer or a client infection control representative or equivalent, to ascertain areas of exemption specific to infection control and other considerations. Although exempt, HTM07-04 contains guidance on water savings from medicalrelated activities. Furthermore, in some cases, the use of water efficient fittings and appliances may not be appropriate to the needs of the patient, and inappropriate specification may adversely affect the incidence and propagation of infections. In such instances, the assessor will need to confirm with BRE Global whether fcomponents from the relevant building areas are exempt. The design team should also consult NHS guidelines concerning appropriate selection of sanitary fittings and fixtures and the control of Legionella.

CN5

Prisons Components in prison cells on HM Prison developments See criterion 6.

In addition to meeting the criteria defined above, the following requirements apply: Where sanitary components are specified within a prison cell, a volume controller must be specified on the individual fittings or water supply to each cell. A volume controller is an automatic control device to turn off the water supply once the maximum pre-set volume is reached within a defined period.

Methodology A non-domestic building’s water efficient performance is determined using the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator in one of two ways, using either the standard approach (common building types) or alternative (other building type) approach. Each approach is summarised below.

Standard Wat01 method The standard BREEAM method determines water efficiency (measured in L/person/day and m3 /person/yr) for a building based on the buildings actual component specification and default usage patterns for the building type and its activity areas. This modelled output is compared with the same output for a baseline component specification and the percentage improvement used to determine the number of BREEAM credits achieved.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

213

Water

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

The baseline component specification is equivalent to the water efficiency of industry standard components (seeTable - 36), steered by the minimum levels required by the Water Supply (Water Fittings) Regulations. The BREEAM percentage improvement benchmarks have then been determined based on progressively more efficient standards for waterconsuming components and, for the higher levels of performance, the specification of greywater and rainwater systems. The standard approach is the default method for calculating water efficiency of a BREEAM assessed building and is that used for most of the common building types, where usage data are available. For buildings types where usage data are not available, and therefore the standard approach of determining performance cannot be used, an alternative approach to compliance must be used (described below). Refer to the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator for the current list of building types which can be assessed using the standard approach.

Alternative Wat01 method Where it is not possible to use the standard approach to determine the buildings water consumption total (L/person/day) the assessment can be completed on an elemental basis, as follows: 1. Using the list of applicable domestic scale water-consuming components (see criterion 3), determine those that are specified/present in the assessed building. 2. Compare the actual specification for each component type with the table of water efficient consumption levels by component type (Table - 36) to determine the level of performance for each type. Note that the volumes quoted are maximums for that level and the % WC or urinal flushing demand is a minimum for that level. 3. Define each component’s level of performance in the 'Other building type calculator' worksheet of the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator. a. For the alternative approach, the calculator applies a building type specific weighting to each component level to reflect its ‘in-use’ consumption relative to the other components present. A component with high ‘in-use’ water consumption therefore has a larger weighting than one with lower ‘in-use’ consumption and contributes relatively more to the building’s overall level of performance under this BREEAM issue. b. The weightings are derived from data on actual water consumption per day from non-domestic buildings, sourced from BNWAT22 3. They can be found in the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator. 4. Based upon the performance categorisation of each component type and the component weighting, the calculator will determine an overall level of performance and award the relevant number of BREEAM credits as follows: Greywater/rainwater level achieved Overall component level

Baseline

0 credits

1 credit

2 credits

Level 1

1 credit

2 credits

3 credits

Level 2

2 credits

3 credits

4 credits

Level 3 or 4

3 credits

4 credits

5 credits

Level 5

4 credits

5 credits

214

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Wat 01 Water consumption

Water

Note: 1. An innovation credit for exemplary level performance can be awarded where the component specification achieves level 5 and > 95% of WC or urinal flushing demand is met using recycled nonpotable water. 2. Due to the use of the weightings, the overall component level achieved will not necessarily be a whole number, e.g component level 4. Where this is the case the methodology will always round down to the nearest component level and therefore BREEAM credit(s) level, e.g. if the component specification achieved is 3.6 credits, the actual number of credits awarded is 3 credits (the methodology will not round up to 4 credits because the performance specification for 4 credits has not been achieved). 3. Where the assessed building development has multiple specifications for the same water-consuming component type, the number of fittings and component level achieved for each specification can be entered in the 'Other building type calculator'. Using this information, the calculator will determine the buildingâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s aggregated performance level for that component type. Please note: while attempts have been made to align the benchmarking of both methodologies described above, they do determine performance in different ways. The number of BREEAM credits awarded by each method could therefore differ for the same water component specification. This could lead to variation in the credits achieved when applying BREEAM New Construction to a number of different building types that form a part of the same overall development.

Component type Table - 36 outlines the standards, by component type, used to define the performance levels set in BREEAM. These defined levels of efficiency have been steered by a range of published sources of information (see references4) and therefore reflect robust levels of typical, good, best and exemplary practice. Table - 36: Water efficient consumption levels by component type Component

Performance levels (quoted numbers are minimum performance required to achieve the level) Base

Unit

4.5

3.75

Effective flush volume (litres)

Wash hand basin taps

7.50

4.50

3.75

litres/min

Showers

3.50

litres/min

Baths

200

180

160

140

120

100

litres

Urinal (2 or more urinals)

7.50

1.50

0.75

litres/bowl/hour

Urinal (1 urinal only)

litres/bowl/hour

Greywater/ rainwater system

25%

50%

75%

Kitchen tap: kitchenette

7.50

litres/min

10.30

8.30

7.30

6.30

litres/min

Kitchen taps: restaurant (pre-rinse nozzles only)

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

% of WC/urinal flushing demand met using recycled non-potable water

215

Water

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Component

Performance levels (quoted numbers are minimum performance required to achieve the level) Base

Unit

Domestic sized dishwashers

litres/cycle

Domestic sized washing machines

litres/use

Waste disposal unit

litres/min

Commercial sized dishwashers

litres/rack

Commercial/ Industrial sized washing machines

7.50

4.50

litres/kg

Please note that specifying components for a building in accordance with the above levels will result, in most cases, in the corresponding number of BREEAM credits being achieved. However, please bear in mind that the component specifications above are akin to thresholds between each level. Therefore caution should be taken when defining a component specification for a BREEAM assessed building using exactly the same levels as the threshold levels. It is recommended that, where Wat 01 BREEAM credits are being targeted, the performance of a particular building’s component specification is verified using the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator before committing to a particular specification and ordering/installing components. This will provide greater assurance that the component specification achieves the targeted number of BREEAM credits.

Water-consuming components - data requirements Table - 37: defines for each component type the appropriate data that will need to be collected from manufacturers’ product information to complete the assessment Domestic component

Data requirements

WCs

Actual maximum or, where dual flush, effective flush volume in litres/use.

Urinals

Flush volume in litres/use for single use flush urinals. For cistern fed systems, the flushing frequency/hour and cistern capacity in litres.

Taps

Flow rate of each tap, at full flow rate in litres per minute measured at a dynamic pressure: For high pressure (Type 1) taps - 3 ± 0.2 bar (0.3 ± 0.02 MPa) OR For low pressure (Type 2) taps - 0.1 ± 0.02 bar (0.01 ± 0.002 MPa) (BS EN 200:2008, sanitary tapware, single taps and combination taps for supply systems of type 1 and 2. General technical specifications) This includes any reductions achieved with flow restrictions.

216

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Wat 01 Water consumption

Water

Showers

Flow rate of each shower at the outlet using cold water (T 30˚C), in litres per minute measured at a dynamic pressure 3 ± 0.2 bar (0.3 ± 0.02 MPa) for high pressure (Type 1) supply systems OR 0.1 ± 0.05 bar (0.01 ± 0.005 MPa) for low pressure (Type 2) supply systems (BS EN 1112:2008, Sanitary tapware. Shower outlets for sanitary tapware for water supply systems type 1 and 2. General technical specifications).

Kitchen taps

Maximum flow rate litres/minute.

Baths

Capacity to overflow in litres. Taps on baths should not be included in the calculation, as the water consumption from bath taps is taken account of in the use factor for baths. The calculation of water consumption for baths will assume 40% of the capacity to the overflow. This is to reflect that: a) Users tend not to fill the bath to overflow; and b) The displacement effect the user has on the actual volume of water required for a bath.

Dishwasher

Litres/cycle for domestic applications and/or appliances or litres/rack for commercial applications and/or appliances.

Washing machine

Litres/use for domestic applications (for a typical wash cycle) and/or appliances or litres/kg for commercial applications and/or appliances, e.g. in hotels.

Waste disposal unit

Flow rate in litres/minute.

Unspecified water-consuming components As the methodology and BREEAM credits for water efficiency compare the buildings modelled water consumption performance against the performance of a baseline specification for the same component types, where a component type is not specified it is not accounted for in the methodology, i.e. the component is excluded from both the proposed and baseline building. Therefore no benefit is gained in terms of BREEAM performance, by deciding not to specify a particular component. However, the methodology will reflect the reduction in overall water consumption (litres/person/day) for the building, as a result of not specifying a particular component.

Buildings with a greywater and rainwater system(s) The following information is required where a greywater and/or rainwater system is specified: Rainwater: In accordance with BS 8515 ‘intermediate approach’: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Collection area (m2) Yield co-efficient (%) Hydraulic filter efficiency (%) Rainfall (average mm/year).

Rainwater: In accordance with BS 8515 ‘detailed approach’: 1. Daily rainfall collection (litres) Greywater: in accordance with BS 8525 : 1. Manufacturer or system designer details. 2. The percentage volume of waste water collected (and reused) from the following (where relevant); wash hand basins, showers, kitchen basins, dishwashers, baths, washing machines and sources of waste water from non-domestic components.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

217

Water

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Where greywater and/or rainwater systems are specified, a minimum level of component efficiency must be achieved to award 4 or 5 BREEAM credits and the exemplary level credit. This is to avoid awarding a higher number of BREEAM credits where performance from less efficient fittings is off-set by the specification of a greywater and/or rainwater collection system. The intention behind this is to ensure demand reduction is prioritised before offsetting consumption. Where a greywater/rainwater system is specified/installed, the component specification must achieve a percentage reduction in water consumption (over the baseline specification) equivalent to that required for 2 credits, i.e. a 25% improvement. Where this level is achieved, all of the total water demand met by greywater/rainwater sources can contribute to the overall percentage improvement required to achieve BREEAM credits. If it is not achieved, the percentage of greywater/rainwater allowable will be equivalent to the percentage improvement in water consumption achieved for the component specification, i.e. percentage improvement on baseline performance. For example, ifa 20% improvement only is achieved, and therefore the building is not meeting the 25% requirement, only 20% of the water demand met via greywater/rainwater sources can be used to off-set water consumption from the micro components. This minimum requirement does not apply where only 1, 2 or 3 credits are sought or where no greywater/rainwater system is specified, i.e. percentage improvement is based solely on the water efficiency of the microcomponent specification. BRE Global may allow some exemptions to this rule in instances where a particular fitting type requires a high flow rate due to specialised end user requirements, and its specification prevents compliance with 25% improvement.

Buildings with a mixture of different functional areas For the majority of buildings using the standard Wat 01 method, the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator defines the building type and range of different water-consuming activity areas within that building; for example, a retail development with sales area and goods storage or an office that includes a canteen and gym. However, where carrying out a single assessment of a building/development which consists of a diverse mix of activity areas/building types, all of which can be assessed separately within the calculator, the following applies: Determine the building’s total water consumption performance by carrying out separate assessments for each relevant activity area/building type. On completion of each assessment, the assessor will need to determine the percentage improvement as follows: (T × T ) + ... + (T nAct × T nOcc)  I = 100 × 1 − 1Act 1Occ (T1Base × T1Occ) + ... + (T nBase × T nOcc)  

Where: I = Overall improvement (%) TnAct = the modelled net water consumption (L/person/day) for each building type TnBase = the modelled baseline water consumption for the corresponding building type TnOcc = the total default occupancy rate for the corresponding building type. Where greywater/rainwater systems are specified, the assessor should take care to avoid unintended double counting of the yield from such systems and using it to off-set demand for each activity area/building type.

Fixed water use The BREEAM water efficiency calculation includes an allowance for fixed water use. This includes water consumption for vessel filling (for building users drinking water), cleaning in kitchens and food preparation in buildings with a catering facility. Fixed uses are included to provide greater accuracy in reporting of the building’s overall estimated water consumption. As these uses are fixed for both actual and baseline building models, their totals do not influence the achievement of BREEAM credits.

Other permissible component demand for non-potable water The focus of this BREEAM issue is the performance of the building's permanent domestic scale water-consuming components. Where a grey water or rainwater system is specified, the yield from the system should be prioritised for such uses, i.e. WC or urinal flushing. However, where the building demonstrates that it has other consistent (i.e. daily) and equivalent levels of non-potable water demand, and such demands are intrinsic to the building’s operation, then it is permissible for the

218

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Wat 01 Water consumption

Water

demand from these non-domestic uses to be counted, i.e. the demand for rainwater/greywater yield from such systems/components can be used as well as, or instead of non-potable water demand from the building's WC/urinal components. Examples of consistent and intrinsic demands could include laundry use in hotels/multi-residential developments or horticultural uses in garden centres, botanical gardens and golf courses. Demand for general landscaping and ornamental planting irrigation are not considered as equivalent/intrinsic by BREEAM.

Other permissible sources of non-potable water The methodology allows for the collection and recycling of non-potable water from the relevant components listed in the criteria i.e. taps, showers, baths and dishwashers or washing machines. In addition, where non-potable water is collected from a non domestic component or source that is intrinsic to the building, then the amount collected can be accounted for in the methodology. This could include for example wastewater from active hygiene flushing, i.e. a regular hygiene flushing programme to minimise poor water quality in a potable cold or hot water system. In order for the method to account for this total, the design team will need to confirm to the assessor the yield from the component/system (in litres) and the frequency of that yield (in days), i.e. if once a week, the frequency would be seven days.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

A completed copy of the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator

As per interim design stage

Documentary evidence supporting the data used to complete the calculator tool.

As per interim design stage

Additional information Relevant definitions BREEAM Wat 01 calculator for New Non-Domestic Buildings The BREEAM Wat 01 calculator is a method for the assessment of water efficiency in most common types of new non-domestic buildings. The calculator assesses the contribution that each internal domestic scale water-consuming component (as listed in the criteria) has on whole building water consumption). The calculator and accompanying guidance on its application is available separately from this Scheme Document. Please note; the calculator is a compliance tool and not a design tool for water demand and drainage systems. The tool uses default usage and occupancy rates to provide a benchmark of the typical consumption given the specified fittings (in L/person/day and m3 /person/year) and their impact on the building's overall water efficiency. Due to the impacts and differences of actual user behaviour and occupancy rates the results of the method will not reflect directly the actual water use during building operation. The results from the methodology should, therefore, not be used for the purpose of comparison with or prediction of actual water consumption from a non-domestic building. Domestic scale components Domestic scale components include water consumed (potable and non-potable) by internal building components including kitchen taps, wash hand basin taps, baths, showers and dishwashers, WCs, urinals, washing machines and waste disposal units.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

219

Water

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Effective flush volume Effective flush volume is the volume of water needed to clear the toilet pan and transport any contents far enough to avoid blocking the drain. The effective flush volume of a single flush WC is the volume of water used for one flush. The effective flush volume of a dual flush WC is the ratio of full flush to reduced flush. This is taken to be one full flush for every three reduced flushes for non-domestic buildings and one full flush for every two reduced flushes in domestic (residential) buildings/areas. The effective flush volume can therefore be calculated as follows, using a 6/4 litre dual flush volume WC as an example: Non-domestic: {(6 litre x 1) + (4 litre x 3)}/4 = 4.5 litre effective flushing volume (for a 6/4 dual flush WC) Domestic: {(6 litre x 1) + (4 litre x 2)}/3 = 4.67 litre effective flushing volume (for a 6/4 dual flush WC) The differing ratio between non-domestic and domestic buildings reflects the different patterns of user behaviour between these building types. Greywater recycling The appropriate collection, treatment and storage of domestic wastewater (which is defined as that discharged from kitchens, baths or showers, laundry rooms and similar) to meet a non-potable water demand in the building e.g. WC flushing, or other permissible non-potable use on the site of the assessed building. Potable water Water suitable for human consumption that meets the requirements of Section 67 (Standards of Wholesomeness) of the Water Industry Act 1991 5 is referred to as 'wholesome water'. Non-potable water Any water other than potable water, also referred to as unwholesome water (BS 8525, see references). Rainwater recycling The appropriate collection and storage of rainwater run-off from hard outdoor surfaces to meet a non-potable water demand in the building e.g. WC flushing, or other permissible non potable use on the site of the assessed building. Clinical areas Refer to BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort.

Other Information None 1BS 8525-1:2010, Greywater systems – Part 1 code of practice, BSi, 2010. 2BS 8515:2009+A1:2013, Rainwater harvesting systems – Code of practice, BSi, 2009. 3BNWAT22: Domestic water consumption in domestic and non-domestic properties (version 1.1). Market Transformation

Programme, 2007. 4AECB Water Standards: Delivering buildings with excellent water and energy performance, vol 2 The water standards, technical background report (version 1), Grant, Thorton, AECB, 2009. BNWAT22: Domestic water consumption in domestic and non-domestic properties (version 1.1). Market Transformation Programme, 2007. BNWAT07: Baths - water efficiency performance tests (version 2.0). Market Transformation Programme, 2007. BNWAT23: Reliability of information on water consumption of appliances (version 1), Market Transformation Programme, 2007. BS6465-3:2006, Sanitary installations – Part 3: Code of practice for the selection, installation and maintenance of sanitary and associated appliances. BSi, 2006.CIRIA W10, Key Performance Indicators for water use in hotels, Rachel Waggett and Catherine Arotsky, CIRIA, 2006. CIRIA W11, Key Performance Indicators for water use in offices, Waggett, Arotsky, CIRIA, 2006. Conserving water in buildings, a practical guide. Environment Agency, 2007. Enhanced Capital Allowance Water Technology List criteria: www.eca-water.gov.uk Report by Entec UK Ltd for CLG: Research to Assess the Costs and Benefits of Improvements to the Water Efficiency of New Non-household Buildings, Final Report, Oct 2009. SD129: Certification and Listing of Low Flush WC appliances. BRE Global, 2008

220

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Wat 01 Water consumption

Water

SD174: Certification and Listing of Water Efficient Terminal Fittings. BRE Global, 2008. SD175: Certification and Listing of Water Efficient Baths. BRE Global, 2008. The Building Regulations 2000, Part G: Sanitation, hot water safety and water efficiency (2010 edition). HM Government. Waterwise: www.waterwise.org.uk Water Efficiency Calculator for New Dwellings. Communities and Local Government, 2009. Water efficient product labelling scheme: www.water-efficiencylabel.org.uk Water Supply (water fittings) Regulations 1999, DEFRA. Sustainable Products 2006: Policy Analysis and Projections, Market Transformation Programme, Defra, 2006. Water UK - Macerators, the impact on sewers: www.water.org.uk/home/policy/positions/waste-macerators-position-paper Water Efficient Buildings, water and planning, guidance for planners http://www.water efficient-buildings.org.uk/ 5Great Britain, The Water Industry Act 1991. London: The Stationery Office

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

221

Water

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Wat 02 Water monitoring Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Yes (criterion 1 only)

Aim To ensure water consumption can be monitored and managed, and therefore encourage reductions.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

One credit

1. The specification of a water meter on the mains water supply to each building; this includes instances where water is supplied via a borehole or other private source. 2. Water-consuming plant or building areas, consuming 10% or more of the buildingâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s total water demand, are either fitted with easily accessible sub-meters or have water monitoring equipment integral to the plant or area (see Compliance notes). 3. Each meter (main and sub) has a pulsed or other open protocol communication output to enable connection to an appropriate utility monitoring and management system, e.g. a building management system (BMS), for the monitoring of water consumption (see Relevant definitions). 4. If the site on which the building is located has an existing BMS, managed by the same occupier/owner (as the new building), the pulsed/digital water meter(s) for the new building must be connected to the existing BMS.

Checklists and tables None.

222

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Wat 02 Water monitoring

Water

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Criteria 1, 3 and 4 Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Criterion 2 Option 1 - Shell only: This criterion is not applicable. Option 2 - Shell and core: This criterion is applicable. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

CN3.1

Shell and core assessments

Option 2 - Shell and core Compliance with criterion 2 must be demonstrated for water-consuming plant/building areas identifiable by the developer (also see Relevant definitions). Water-consuming plant/building areas to be added/installed by the tenant do not need to be assessed for this issue.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

223

Water

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description

CN3

Water-consuming plant or building area See criterion 2.

As a minimum, this includes the following (where present): 1. Buildings with a swimming pool and its associated changing facilities (toilets, showers etc.). 2. On-sites with multiple units or buildings, e.g. shopping centres, industrial units, retail parks etc. separate sub meters are fitted on the water supply to the following areas (where present): Each individual unit supplied with water Common areas (covering the supply to toilet blocks) Service areas (covering the supply to outlets within storage, delivery, waste disposal areas etc.) Ancillary/separate buildings to the main development with water supply. 3. Laboratory: in any building with a laboratory or containing laboratories, a separate water meter is fitted on the water supply to any process or cooling loop for ‘plumbed-in’ laboratory process equipment. 4. Healthcare: for sites with multiple departments, e.g. large health centres or acute hospitals, separate sub-meters are fitted on the supply to the following areas where present: Staff and public areas Clinical areas and wards Letting areas: on the water supply to each tenant unit Laundries Main production kitchen Hydrotherapy pools Laboratories CSSD/HSDU, pathology, pharmacy, mortuary and any other major process water use Supplementary supply of water from a cold water tank .

CN4

10% of water demand See criterion 2.

The sub-meter requirement does not necessarily apply in the following cases, where the assessor confirms there will be no additional monitoring benefit resulting from their installation: 1. Where a building has only one or two small sources of water demand (e.g. an office with sanitary fittings and a small kitchen) 2. Where the building has two sources of water demand, one significantly larger than the other, and the water consumption for the larger demand is likely to mask the smaller demand.

CN5

Extensions to existing buildings See criterion 4.

If no new water supply is being installed because the occupants of the extended building will use the facilities in, and therefore water supply to the existing building, then the following must be provided in the existing building; 1. A water meter for the mains water supply 2. Sub-meters for large water-consuming plant or facilities, e.g. evaporative cooling, swimming pool etc. (where present). The meters provided must have a pulsed output or connection to existing BMS in accordance with the assessment criteria.

CN6

No water supply to the building or unit

If there is no installed water supply to the assessed building because there will be no water-consuming fittings in the building, then in such instances the guidance given in the above Compliance note for extensions to existing building applies.

Ref General

224

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Wat 02 Water monitoring

Water

Methodology None.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in the ‘BREEAM Evidential Requirements’ section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria

Additional information Relevant definitions Staff areas Refer to BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort. Clinical areas Refer to BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort. Patient areas Refer to BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort. CSSD Central Sterile Supply Department HSDU Hospital Sterilisation and Disinfection Unit Meter outputs Examples include pulsed outputs and other open protocol communication outputs, such as Modbus. Utility monitoring and management system Examples include automatic meter reading systems (AMR) and building energy management systems (BEMS). Automatic monitoring and targeting (aM&T) is an example of a management tool that includes automatic meter reading and data management.

Other information None.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

225

Water

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Wat 03 Water leak detection Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Aim To reduce the impact of water leaks that may otherwise go undetected.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

One credit - Leak detection system

1. A leak detection system which is capable of detecting a major water leak on the mains water supply within the building and between the building and the utilities water meter is installed. The leak detection system must be: a. A permanent automated water leak detection system that alerts the building occupants to the leak OR an in-built automated diagnostic procedure for detecting leaks is installed. b. Activated when the flow of water passing through the water meter/data logger is at a flow rate above a pre-set maximum for a pre-set period of time. c. Able to identify different flow and therefore leakage rates, e.g. continuous, high and/or low level, over set time periods. d. Programmable to suit the owner/occupiers’ water consumption criteria. e. Where applicable, designed to avoid false alarms caused by normal operation of large water-consuming plant such as chillers.

One credit - Flow control devices

2. Flow control devices that regulate the supply of water to each WC area/facility according to demand are installed (and therefore minimise water leaks and wastage from sanitary fittings).

Checklists and tables None.

226

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Wat 03 Water leak detection

Water

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

CN5.1

Applicable assessment criteria

Leak detection system, criterion 1 Both options:All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

WC Areas or facilities

Option 2 - Shell and core: The water supplies to WC areas or facilities must be assessed as per criterion 2 regardless of whether or not the WC areas or facilities are fitted out.

Flow control devices, criterion 2 Option 1 - Shell only: This criterion is not applicable to this shell and core assessment option. Option 2 - Shell and core: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

Leak detection systems (1 credit) 1. Criterion 1 is applicable. OR 2. Install automatic excess flow valves at relevant locations to protect property from damage caused by leaking pipes or tanks. Flow control devices (1 credit) 3. Criterion 2 is applicable.

CN6.1

Automatic excess flow valve See CN2, point 2.

An automatic excess flow valve acts as a flow switch (‘fuse’) to automatically stop the flow of water and prevent uncontrolled release when the flow of water exceeds a predetermined rate (such as may occur in the event of failure of water supply pipes and tanks).

CN3

Leakage rates See criterion 1.

This issue does not specify what the high and low level leakage rates should be, however the leak detection equipment installed must have the flexibility to distinguish between different flow rates to enable it to be programmed to suit the building type and owner/occupier’s usage patterns.

CN4

System criteria See criterion 1.

It is anticipated that the leak detection credit will usually be achieved by installing a system which detects higher than normal flow rates at meters and/or sub-meters. It does not necessarily require a system that directly detects water leakage along part or the whole length of the water supply system.

General

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

227

Water

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Terms

Description

CN5

Water utilities meters See criterion 2.

Where there is a water utilities meter at the site/building boundary, it may be necessary to install a separate flow meter (or alternative measurement system) just after the utility meter to detect leaks; however, if the water utility company agrees to some form of leak detection being installed on their meter, this would also be acceptable.

CN6

Flow control device See criterion 2.

The following could be considered as types of flow control devices:

CN7

Flow control systems See criterion 2.

Flow control systems may control combined WC areas, such as male and female toilets within a core; they are not required for each individual sanitary appliance. The criteria are set to encourage the isolation of the water supply to each WC block when it is not being used.

CN8

Single WCs See criterion 2.

The flow control criteria for this issue do apply to facilities which have only a single WC (potentially within smaller or low occupancy buildings). In these instances shutoff could be provided via the same switch that controls the lighting (whether proximity detection or a manual switch).

CN9

No water supply to the building or/unit See criteria 1 and 2.

These credits are still assessed where there are no installed fittings and therefore no water supply to the building. In these instances the facilities likely to be used by the future occupants of the assessed building must meet the criteria, e.g. those facilities within the nearest accessible building.

CN10

Extensions to existing buildings See criteria 1 and 2.

If the water supply to the new extension is via the existing building then the water supply to the existing building must be assessed against the criteria of this issue.

A time controller, i.e. an automatic time switch device to switch off the water supply after a predetermined interval A programmed time controller, i.e. an automatic time switch device to switch water on and/or off at predetermined times. A volume controller, i.e. an automatic control device to turn off the water supply once the maximum pre-set volume is reached A presence detector and controller, i.e. an automatic device detecting occupancy or movement in an area to switch water on and turn it off when the presence is removed A central control unit, i.e. a dedicated computer-based control unit for an overall managed water control system, utilising some or all of the types of control elements listed above.

Building type specific CN11

Clinical areas in healthcare buildings

The criteria for this issue do not apply to toilet facilities in clinical areas.

Methodology None.

228

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Wat 03 Water leak detection

Water

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in the ‘BREEAM Evidential Requirements’ section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria

Additional information Relevant definitions Clinical areas Refer to Hea 01 Visual comfort.

Other information None.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

229

Water

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Wat 04 Water efficient equipment Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Aim To reduce unregulated water consumption by encouraging specification of water efficient equipment.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

One credit

1. The design team has identified all unregulated water demands that could be realistically mitigated or reduced. 2. System(s) or processes have been identified to reduce the unregulated water demand, and demonstrate, through either good practice design or specification, a meaningful reduction in the total water demand of the building.

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Criteria 1 and 2 Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

CN1.1

Only irrigation systems present See criterion 1.

Where the only unregulated water demand comes from an irrigation system specified/installed by the developer, then this system must be used for the purpose of assessing compliance.

CN1.2

No irrigation systems presentSee criterion 1.

Where no irrigation systems are specified, and therefore there are no unregulated water demands for the building, this issue can be awarded by default for these shell and core assessment options.

230

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Wat 04 Water efficient equipment

Ref

Terms

Water

Description

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue is not applicable.

Reducing unregulated water consumption See criterion 2.

BREEAM does not prescriptively define all potential means or solutions for reducing unregulated water consumption. The design team needs to demonstrate to the assessor that they have identified key areas of water consumption in the building and that a reduction in unregulated water consumption has been achieved using existing 'tried and tested' solutions or new innovative solutions relevant to the building and its functional requirements.The following are some examples of solutions deemed to satisfy compliance for a number of different building types or functions (where the unregulated water demand for that function is one of/the significant contributor in the building): 1. Drip-fed subsurface irrigation incorporating soil moisture sensors. The irrigation control should be zoned to permit variable irrigation to different planting assemblages. 2. Reclaimed/recovered water from a rainwater collection or waste water recovery system, with appropriate storage, i.e. greywater collection from building functions or processes that use potable water, e.g. vehicle wash, training water in fire stations, sanitary facilities, irrigation etc. This should take into account the Government Buying Standards1 where appropriate to the building type. 3. External landscaping and planting that relies solely on precipitation, during all seasons of the year. 4. All planting specified is restricted to contextually appropriate species that thrive without irrigation and will continue to do so in those conditions likely as a result of climate change, i.e. typically warmer and drier conditions.

General CN3

Methodology None.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Final post construction stage

231

Water

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Additional information Relevant definitions Unregulated water For the purposes of this BREEAM Issue, unregulated water is water not used for domestic purposes and is therefore not regulated by Building Regulations or other relevant legislation. This includes, but is not limited to, equipment used for irrigation and, for the relevant building types, vehicle wash plant/equipment.

Other information None. 1http://sd.defra.gov.uk/advice/public/buying/products/water-using-products/

232

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Materials

Materials Category overview Weightings

Minimum standards

Fully fitted 13.5%

Shell only 17.5%

Shell and core 14.5%

Mat 03

Summary This category encourages steps taken to reduce the impact of construction materials through design, construction, maintenance and repair. Issues in this section focus on the procurement of materials that are sourced in a responsible way and have a low embodied impact over their life including extraction, processing and manufacture and recycling.

Category summary table Issue ID

Issue name

Credits

Credit summary

Mat 01

Life cycle impacts

Up to 6

Reductions in the buildingâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s environmental life cycle impacts through assessment of the main building elements.

Mat 02

Hard landscaping and boundary protection

Reductions in the environmental life cycle impacts through assessment of the hard landscaping and boundary protection elements.

Mat 03

Responsible sourcing of materials

Materials sourced in accordance with a sustainable procurement plan. Key building materials are responsibly sourced to reduce environmental and socio-economic impacts.

Mat 04

Insulation

Recognition of the use of thermal insulation which has a low embodied environmental impact relative to its thermal properties.

Mat 05

Designing for durability and resilience

The building incorporates measures to reduce impacts associated with damage and wear-andtear. Relevant building elements incorporate appropriate design and specification measures to limit material degradation due to environmental factors.

Mat 06

Material efficiency

Opportunities and measures have been identified and taken to optimise the use of materials.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

233

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Mat 01 Life cycle impacts Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Building type dependent

Aim To recognise and encourage the use of construction materials with a low environmental impact (including embodied carbon) over the full life cycle of the building.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

Up to six credits

1. BREEAM awards credits on the basis of the building’s quantified environmental life cycle impact through assessment of the main building elements, as set out in Table - 38 below:

Table - 38: Elements assessed by building type Building type

Element type assessed External walls

Windows

Roof

Upper floor slab

Office

Retail

Industrial

Education

Healthcare

Prisons

Courts

Multi-residential

Other buildings

234

Internal walls

Floor finishes/ coverings

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Mat 01 Life cycle impacts

Materials

2. Credits are awarded on the basis of the total number of points achieved, as set out in Table - 39 below, and calculated using the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator. This point’s score is based on the Green Guide rating(s) achieved for the specifications that make up the main building elements (as in Table - 38). Note: Where an independently verified third party Environmental Product Declaration (EPD), covering part of or the whole life cycle, is available for a material or product that forms part of an assessed building element, this can be used to increase the contribution of that element to the building’s Mat 01 performance. (Refer to Calculation procedure where a specific Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) is available for a material in the Methodology section for more details.) Table - 39: Allocation of credits by building type and Mat 01 points Building type

Total Mat 01 points achieved 1 and 2 ≥2

≥4

≥5

≥8

≥ 10

≥ 12

≥ 14

Office

Retail

Industrial

Education

Healthcare

Prisons

Courts

Multi-residential

Other buildings

Available BREEAM credits

1. Please refer to the Methodology section for a description of the methodology used to determine the number of points and BREEAM credits achieved. 2. Where the total points achieved exceeds the level required for maximum credits see the exemplary level criteria as the building may be eligible for an additional innovation credit.

3. Life cycle greenhouse gas emissions (kgCO eq.) for each element are also required to be reported based on a 60-year 2 building life. Where specific data is not available for a product or element, generic data should be used. Generic data can be obtained from the online Green Guide for each element and must be entered in to the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

235

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Exemplary level criteria The following outlines the two exemplary level routes available to achieve up to three innovation credits for this BREEAM issue.

Route 1: Using the Green Guide to Specification (elemental approach) - one credit 4. Where assessing four or more applicable building elements, the building achieves at least two points in addition to the total points required to achieve maximum credits under the standard BREEAM criteria (as outlined in the table above) OR 5. Where assessing fewer than four applicable building elements, the building achieves at least one point in addition to the total points required to achieve maximum credits under the standard BREEAM criteria. Where the assessed building does not specify an element listed above, see the compliance note CN3 regarding the exemplary level benchmark.

Route 2: Using compliant life cycle assessment software tools (whole building approach) - two credits 6. Where the design team has used an IMPACT compliant software tool (or equivalent) to measure the environmental impact of the building. 7. Where the design team can demonstrate how the use of an IMPACT compliant software (or equivalent) has benefited the building in terms of measuring and reducing its environmental impact. See CN16 8. Where the design team submit the building information model (BIM) from the IMPACT compliant software tool (or equivalent) for the assessed building to BRE Global (via the project’s appointed BREEAM Assessor). See compliance note CN17. Further information about IMPACT is provided in the Other information section of this BREEAM issue. Please note a project can achieve all three innovation credits where it is complying with exemplary level criteria 4 to 8, i.e. one route is not necessarily exclusive of the other: a project can comply with both routes 1 and 2 or choose to comply with only route 1 or only route 2.

Checklists and tables None

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

236

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Mat 01 Life cycle impacts

Materials

Ref

Terms

Description

CN 1.1

Floor finishes and internal walls See criterion 1.

Where floor finishes and internal walls are applicable to the building type being assessed, the following applies to both the options. In addition to the main building elements, all building areas where floor finishes and/or internal walls are being specified/installed by the developer must be accounted for in the assessment of this issue (including those in common areas, show areas and other fitted out areas). Office buildings: If the developer has specified floor finishes in a show area only (for compliance with BREEAM issue Wst 04 Speculative floor and ceiling finishes), the area and Green Guide rating of the floor finishes in the show area must be accounted for in the assessment of Mat 01.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN3

Element not specified See criteria 1, 2, 4 and 5.

Where the building does not contain an element listed above, for example there are no upper floors in a single storey building, the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator allows the BREEAM Assessor to exclude the element from the assessment. In such instances the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator will recalculate the standard and exemplary level benchmarks on the basis of the remaining applicable elements.

CN4

Element consisting of more than one specification See criterion 2.

Where more than one specification is present for a given element, the Green Guide rating and area for each specification should be entered into the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator. The calculator will then determine the total points on the basis of each specification rating and area as a proportion of the whole element.

CN5

Finding exact Green Guide Ratings. See criterion 2.

While exact matches in specifications are not always found, it should be possible to identify a similar specification and use its rating for the purposes of assessment (also see compliance note CN6 ‘No Green Guide rating match’).

CN6

No Green Guide rating match. See criterion 2.

Where a generic Green Guide rating cannot be found for a specification, the BREEAM Assessor can use the online Green Guide Calculator to determine a bespoke Green Guide rating for the specification (for any elements except floor finishes and windows). Licensed BREEAM Assessors can access the calculator viawww.thegreenguide.org.uk. If a required component is not present via the online Green Guide Calculator, the BREEAM assessor will need to submit a Bespoke Green Guide Query proforma detailing the sepcification detials. BRE Global will respond to the query with a solution and/or guidance to enable completion of a specification. Refer to the Green Guide Calculator online tool guidance for more information.

General

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

237

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Terms

Description

CN7

Environmental Profile Certification of products See criterion 2.

Products with certified Environmental Profiles can be used to demonstrate compliance with this BREEAM issue. Products are certified with a “product specific” Green Guide rating as part of a relevant elemental specification, e.g. a manufacturer’s concrete block as part of an external wall specification. This rating can be used in the same way as a generic Green Guide rating for this BREEAM issue. (See the Additional information section for a screenshot example of a product listing from Green Book Live.) Where a certified product forms part of a different specification, for the same or different element type (i.e. different to that described on the Environmental Profile certificate), the guidance within the Methodology section concerning Environmental Product Declaration types should be followed. This procedure outlines how BREEAM gives additional recognition for materials with robust Environmental Product Declaration types. Refer to the BRE Environmental Profile Methodology under the Additional information section for more information on where to source an Environmental Profile Certificate.

CN8

Self-generated Environmental Product Declaration

A company self-generated Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) that has been independently verified would be acceptable, where evidence is provided to demonstrate that the EPD is produced in accordance with requirements of ISO 14020 series.

CN9

Reporting life cycle GHG emissions See criterion 3.

Where the data is available, it is a requirement that the life cycle greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions (kgCO eq.) for each specification are gathered and reported, via 2 the BREEAM scoring and reporting tool. BREEAM Assessors can source this information as follows: For generic Green Guide ratings the kgCO2eq. is reported via the online Green Guide www.thegreenguide.org.uk. Simply click on the relevant specification type (having already defined the building, category and element type) and the kgCO2eq. are reported along with the individual category ratings for that element, at the bottom of the page (see screen shot in the Additional information section). The information is not available at present for bespoke Green Guide ratings. For Green Guide ratings based on a product manufacturer’s certified Environmental Profile, Assessors will find the kgCO2eq. in the product’s Environmental Profile Certificate appendix, in the ‘Characterised data’ section (against the ‘Climate Change’ issue).

CN10

New elements containing reused materials See criterion 2.

If a new element is specified, e.g. an external wall, and part of that element includes a reused material e.g. reclaimed bricks, the BREEAM Assessor will need to submit a Bespoke Green Guide Query proforma. BRE Global will then calculate the rating and confirm the result to the Assessor.

CN11

Existing elements reused in the new construction

Only new elements need to be assessed. Existing in situ elements adjoining a new construction, e.g. an existing building facade, do not require assessment. If this BREEAM scheme is being used to assess a major refurbishment project, where the assessed building is reusing existing in situ elements as part of its structure, those elements can be allocated an A+ Green Guide rating. If the existing element will contain substantial new materials, the BREEAM Assessor will need to submit a Bespoke Green Guide Query proforma. BRE Global will then calculate the rating and confirm the result to the assessor.

238

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Mat 01 Life cycle impacts

Materials

Ref

Terms

Description

CN12

Partial assessments See criterion 1.

Where the assessment covers only some of the floors in the building, the roof must still be assessed as it is protecting the assessed building below. If the roof is directly above domestic accommodation (e.g. flats), the equivalent domestic Green Guide rating for the roof must be used as opposed to the ratings for non-domestic roofs. Roof areas not protecting parts of the assessed building or space can be omitted from the assessment.

CN13

Specialist floor finishes in operational areas See criterion 1.

Specialist floor finishes (see definition) in operational areas of buildings fall outside the scope of the Green Guide. In such instances, only non-specialist floor finishes and those in non-operational areas of the building should be included in the assessment of this BREEAM issue. See also the guidance in the Additional information section on floor finishes.

CN14

Roof lights, patio doors and glazed conservatories See criterion 1.

For the purpose of this issue any doors with a large expanse of glazing, such as patio doors, should be assessed as windows. Similarly, glazed areas of conservatories and roof lights should be assessed as windows.

CN15

Where integral insulated cold storage units form a part of the building fabric

For insulated cold storage units forming an integral part of the building fabric the following must be followed 1. Where the cold storage unit forms part of, or is integral to the external wall element: As an external wall type the insulated units will be assessed in the Green Guide on the basis that it is a normal temperature building without the extra insulation, so a standard thickness of insulation will be considered. As such, the walls of the insulated unit should be treated as part of the external wall element for the assessment of this BREEAM issue. 2. Where the cold storage unit forms part of, or is integral to a ceiling element: As a roof element of the insulated unit, suspended ceilings are not included within the Green Guide. Therefore, the roof of the insulated unit will be assessed as a standard construction from the deck upwards, assuming a standard thickness of insulation. As such, the roof of the insulated unit should be treated as part of the ceiling element for the assessment of this BREEAM issue. 3. Where the cold storage unit forms part of an internal wall element: The insulated unit will be treated as meeting a very specific functional unit outside the scope of the internal wall elements listed in the Green Guide. The wall to the insulated unit should therefore be excluded from the assessment of the internal wall element.

CN16

Demonstrating benefit See criterion 7.

This should take the form of a short qualitative statement from the design team providing comments on the following: 1. How and at what stages of the design the tool was utilised. 2. How the tool helped (or did not help) steer the design process to optimise cost and mitigate environmental impacts, giving examples of specific changes to the building design/specification that resulted.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

239

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Terms

Description

CN17

Scope of IMPACT Compliant (or equivalent) Tools and Data Submission Requirements See criterion 8.

Guidance note GN08: Scope of IMPACT Compliant (or equivalent) Tools and Data Submission Requirements, available via the Assessor Extranet, outlines in detail the requirements for submitting the BIM from IMPACT compliant (or equivalent) software tools. The Guidance Note also contains instructions on how tools other than IMPACT compliant software tools can demonstrate equivalency for the purpose of this assessment issue. Assessors should review Guidance note GN08 and ensure that submissions meet the criteria relevant to demonstrate compliance.

Methodology Determining the number of BREEAM credits achieved as a result of each element’s Green Guide rating The Green Guide uses an A+ to E rating system, whereby the rating relates to the relative life cycle performance of a specification in comparison with other types of specifications available for a particular building element type e.g. external wall. Three steps are undertaken to translate the performance of all the separate individual elemental specifications and their Green Guide ratings into an overall building performance score for life cycle impact, against which BREEAM credits can be awarded. Each of these steps is undertaken using the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator and the information collated by the BREEAM assessor. The steps in this process are as follows:

Step 1: Translating the Green Guide rating into points The first step in the calculation procedure is translating a specification’s Green Guide rating into a number of points. The table below illustrates the points available by Green Guide rating. Green Guide rating

Mat 01 points

A+

0.5

0.25

The maximum number of points available for an assessed building is a product of the number of elements assessed multiplied by three. For example, for an office building five elements are assessed so there are a maximum of 15 points available; furthermore 12 of those 15 points must be achieved to award all five BREEAM credits. While it may appear that three points are available for each element assessed, and in many assessments this may be the case, the actual maximum number of points available for a particular element will depend on the impact of the element type compared with the other elements present and assessed (refer to step 3 below). This is because this issue assesses the life cycle impact of the whole building, taking into account the relative performance and therefore contribution of the main building elements towardss the building’s overall performance.

240

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Mat 01 Life cycle impacts

Materials

Step 2: Weighting the performance of individual specifications within an elemental category Where an element consists of several different specifications, the overall points achieved for that element are weighted according to the relative area and Green Guide rating of each of the individual specifications. An example of this is provided below for an external wall element consisting of three different types of external wall specification. Element type

Specification

Area (m2)

% of element type

Generic Green Guide rating

Points

Area weighted points

External wall

External wall type 1

280

26%

A+

0.78

External wall type 2

350

33%

0.5

0.17

External wall type 3

435

41%

0.41

1065

100%

1.36

Element total

This adjustment is made to ensure the contribution of points is balanced in accordance with the life cycle performance of each specification.

Step 3: Weighting the performance of individual elements relative to all elements assessed Step three is completed in two parts: Part 1: This weights the performance of the building elements based on its area relative to the overall area of the different elements. This is calculated by multiplying the area of each element by the weighted Green Guide score, adding the total for all elements and then dividing by the total area of the assessed elements. For example, a 20-storey office block will have a smaller roof area than external wall area, and so the area weighting will take this into account by giving a smaller weighting to the points score for the roof in comparison to the external walls. Part 2: The range of impacts, measured using Ecopoints, for each of the elements will differ and therefore, so will the increments between each Green Guide rating level. For example, the external walls have a larger Ecopoints range than the internal walls, therefore, if both elements achieve the same Green Guide rating, the rating of the external walls achieves a higher proportion of the overall points than the rating for the internal walls, thus recognising the relatively higher reduction possible in the environmental impact of the external walls, due to the larger Ecopoints range for that element.

Calculation procedure where a specific Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) is available for a material The online Green Guide provides users (design teams and clients) with information on the relative life cycle environmental impacts for a range of different building elemental specifications, e.g. external wall, roof, windows etc. Each specification’s online Green Guide rating is based on verified LCA data for generic construction products assessed according to BRE’s Environmental Profiles Methodology. There are many different schemes producing EPDs for products or services complying with BS ISO 14025 using life cycle analysis (LCA) according to the BS ISO 14040 series. There is a specific construction product and service variant of BS ISO 14025; BS ISO 21930.. Where a third party verified EPD is available for a product that forms part of an assessed element, for example a concrete block used in an external wall, the EPD can potentially be used to uplift the element’s BREEAM performance, i.e. points and therefore credits achieved. The degree of uplift available in such instances depends on three factors:

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

241

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

1. The assessed element’s existing Green Guide rating 2. The proportion of the total environmental impact of the element that the material with the EPD contributes 3. The manufacturer’s Environmental Product Declaration type for the relevant product/material(s). Using this information, the points achieved for the existing Green Guide rating of the element is adjusted as follows (using the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator): 1. The proportion of the total environmental impact of the assessed element that the material with the EPD contributes is determined using the online Green Guide Calculator 1. The online Green Guide Calculator will list the relative environmental impact of each constituent material of a defined element as a percentage. Select the percentage for the relevant material and enter this into the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator. If an element cannot be defined using the online Green Guide Calculator, the Assessor will need to complete a Bespoke Green Guide Query Proforma and submit it to BRE Global, who will then confirm the relevant proportional impact of the material(s) in question. This will also be required for a material with a BRE Environmental Profile, which is specified as part of an element that differs from the elemental description on which that profile is based (See compliance note CN6). 2. Define the Environmental Product Declaration type and tier level (seeTable - 40 below) for the material(s) in question. Table - 40: The Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) type and tier ranking EPD tier level

EPD description

A third party, independently verified EPD (See also CN8) covering the whole life cycle (i.e. cradleto-grave).

A third party, independently verified EPD (See also CN8) covering the partial life cycle (i.e. cradleto-gate or cradle-to-gate with options*).

*Partial life cycle EPD can cover: 1. The product stage only: such an EPD covers raw material supply, transport, manufacturing and associated processes; this EPD is said to be “cradle- to-gate”; 2. The product stage and selected further life cycle stages: such an EPD is said to be “cradle-to-gate with options”. In both cases, the EPD must be produced in accordance with the requirements of the ISO 14020 series, particularly ISO 14025 and ISO 21930 2 (concerning environmental labels and declarations) and ISO 14040 3 and 14044 4 (concerning life cycle assessment).

3. Once the element’s Green Guide rating and the relevant material(s) proportional impact and EPD type and tier level have been defined, the points uplift can be calculated (see Table - 41 below). The BREEAM Mat 01 calculator does this by multiplying the material’s proportional impact by the maximum points uplift available for the Green Guide rating achieved for the element. The points uplift is then added to the points already achieved for that element’s generic Green Guide rating (see worked example below). The BREEAM Mat 01 calculator then continues its calculation procedure, as outlined in steps 2 and 3 above, to determine the number of BREEAM credits achieved.

242

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Mat 01 Life cycle impacts

Materials

Table - 41: Green Guide points uplift by EPD type Existing Green Guide rating

Generic Green Guide rating points

EPD tier 1 Max. points uplift

EPD tier 2 Max. points uplift

A+

0.75

0.50

0.25

0.125

The points uplift for tier 1 has been linked to the points available for achieving generic Green Guide ratings. An element whose constituent materials have each had their life cycle impacts quantified and independently verified i.e. tier 1 EPD, will achieve a points uplift to the next level above that achieved for the elements generic Green Guide rating. The tier 2 points uplift is set relative to tier 1, based on the fact that a tier 2 EPD covers only part of the material/element life cycle, i.e. cradle-to-gate and not the full life cycle, i.e. cradle-to-grave. Example: The following is an example of the above calculation for a theoretical external wall specification with a generic Green Guide B rating (which equates to one point). External wall specification

Proportion of element impact

EPD tier

Points uplift

Load bearing concrete cladding

65%

0.65 x 1.0 = 0.65

Limestone finish

17%

None

Medium density solid block

10%

0.1 x 1.0 = 0.1

Plasterboard and paint

0.05 x 0.5 = 0.025

Insulation

None

Total points uplift

0.78

Total points achieved for element

1.78

In the above example therefore, having product specific Environmental Product Declarations for 80% (by impact) of the Green Guide B rated element’s materials results in a points uplift of 0.78 (a 78% uplift on the element’s BREEAM performance in this instance). This uplift could make a difference in the number of BREEAM credits achieved for the building.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

243

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

1-5

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

1-5

A copy of the output from the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator tool, including the Green Guide rating and element number for each specification assessed 1 . The online Green Guide Calculator output (where relevant).

As per interim design stage

1-5

Documentary evidence detailing how the calculator tool has been completed.

As per interim design stage

6-8

A copy of the statement demonstrating benefit of using IMPACT compliant software (or equivalent) AND a BRE Global email confirmation for receipt of the model.

As per interim design stage

1. Element numbers are unique but the available specifications may change. As a result assessors should keep a note of the element numbers they use to give Green Guide rating advice on BREEAM assessments for auditing purposes.

Additional information Relevant definitions BREEAM Mat 01 calculator A spreadsheet-based calculator required to determine the number of credits achieved for this BREEAM issue, based on each applicable element’s Green Guide rating. See Calculation procedures below for a description of how BREEAM determines the number of credits achieved for the life cycle impact of the building’s main material elements. Ecopoint The Ecopoint used in the online Green Guide is a single score that measures the total environmental impact of a product or process as a proportion of overall impact occurring in Europe. The annual environmental impact caused by a typical European citizen therefore creates 100 Ecopoints. Green Guide ratings are derived by sub-dividing the range of Ecopoints/m2 achieved by all specifications considered within a building element. Environmental Product Declaration BS EN ISO 14025:2010 5 defines an environmental label or environmental declaration as a claim which indicates the environmental aspects of a product or service. BS EN ISO 14020:2001 6 goes on to state that environmental labels and declarations provide information about a product or service in terms of its overall environmental character, a specific environmental aspect, or any number of aspects. The BRE’s Environmental Profile Methodology and the Green Guide to Specification are both examples of EPDs. Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) is the tool underpinning EPD and the LCA should conform to the requirements of the BS ISO 14040 series.

244

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Mat 01 Life cycle impacts

Materials

BRE Environmental Profile Methodology BRE Environmental Profile Methodology and subsequent product certification involves calculating the ‘cradle-tograve' environmental profile of a building material, product or system, and services. This is a measure of all key environmental impacts, during extraction, processing/manufacture, use (including maintenance and refurbishment) and disposal, over a 60-year study period. Once certified, environmental profiles are reviewed on an annual basis to ensure they remain valid, and are recalculated every three years. Frequently updated lists of building materials, products and systems assessed and certified under the Environmental Profiles Certification Scheme can be viewed at www.greenbooklive.com. The listing also includes the Green Guide rating for the approved products. Where a product specified is claiming certification against the BRE Environmental Profiles Methodology, the BREEAM Assessor should ask for a copy of the certificate and its appendix (which contains characterised data, normalised data and the Ecopoints score) or the certificate number and certifying body from the relevant manufacturer or, alternatively, they can verify the claim via Green Book Live listings. The BREEAM Assessor should include a reference to the BRE Global Approved certificate number in their assessment report. An example screenshot of a product specific Environmental Profile listing on Green Book Live is provided in the Other information section of this issue. Green Guide to Specification The Green Guide to Specification is an easy-to-use, comprehensive reference website and electronic tool, providing guidance for specifiers, designers and their clients on the relative environmental impacts for a range of different building elemental specifications. The generic elemental ratings within the online Guide are based on LCA data generated using the BRE Environmental Profiles Methodology. The Environmental Profiles Methodology has been peer reviewed to comply with BS ISO 14040 and represents the Product Category Rules for BRE Global’s environmental labeling scheme (EPD - ISO 14025, Type III) for construction products and elements. www.thegreenguide.org.uk Green Guide element number A unique BRE Global reference number given to a Green Guide rating for any particular building element type specification. Both standard Green Guide ratings and those calculated using the online Green Guide Calculator will have an element number. Online Green Guide Calculator BRE Global have developed the online Green Guide Calculator to enable BREEAM and CSH assessors to quickly and efficiently generate Green Guide ratings for a significant proportion of specifications not listed in the online Green Guide. The Green Guide Calculator database is based on the components currently used to create specifications within the online Green Guide. These components can be selected and combined to generate instant Green Guide ratings for a multitude of different specifications. To access the Green Guide Calculator, you must be a licensed BREEAM/EcoHomes/Code for Sustainable Homes Assessor. Please note that, at the time of writing, the Green Guide Calculator is not yet available for public use. Reused materials Reused materials are materials that can be extracted from the waste stream and used again without further processing, or with only minor processing, that does not alter the nature of the material (e.g. cleaning, cutting, fixing to other materials). Specialist floor finishes For the purpose of BREEAM specialist floor finishes are defined as those which have been designed to meet specific high performance requirement such as chemical resistance, temperature resistance, impact resistance, thermal shock protection, electrical resistivity, anti-microbial and easy decontamination.

Other information Using the online Green Guide to Specification The Green Guide categorises ratings by building type and element. When using the online Green Guide, (www.thegreenguide.org.uk), the main page asks the user to select a building type from the following options:

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

245

Materials

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Domestic Commercial (offices) Health Retail Industrial Education

To obtain the appropriate Green Guide ratings for the assessed building elements, select the category that corresponds to the assessed building type. See below for guidance on which category to select for building types not listed above. Please note there are a number of common building elements (see below) and therefore Green Guide ratings. As these elements are common, any building type can be selected to determine the appropriate rating (regardless of the actual nondomestic building type being assessed). Table - 42: Building type and the use of appropriate Green Guide ratings Building type

Green Guide ratings

Further or Higher Education buildings

When carrying out a BREEAM assessment of a Further or Higher Education building, in most cases the Green Guide ratings listed under the ‘Education’ category can be used. Alternatively, if the elemental specification of the building/space is more akin to a commercial, retail, industrial or health specification in terms of its Green Guide functional unit, then select and use the Green Guide ratings from the relevant the building type.

Prison buildings

To obtain appropriate ratings for elements that are not common (upper floors, roofs and floor finishes), select the ‘healthcare’ category. For prison building types that are more akin to commercial buildings in their construction e.g. visitors’ centres, catering buildings, sports halls select the commercial category. These categories include ratings that are most appropriate to the elemental specifications used for these types of prison buildings.

Law court buildings

To obtain appropriate Green Guide ratings for elements that are not common (internal walls, roof, upper floor slab and floor finishes) select the ‘schools’ category for court buildings. This category includes ratings that are most appropriate to the elemental specifications used for this building type. For floor finishes, it is permissible to select flooring from another building type other than schools, if the function/use in the assessed building is more appropriate to that type.

Other buildings

For many other building types assessed it may be clear which category of building type to select for Green Guide purposes (for elements that are not common). If it is not clear the BREEAM assessor will need to contact BRE Global for advice, supplying a description of the building including the relevant function(s). BRE Global will then confirm to the BREEAM assessor the appropriate category to select.

Common elements

The following elements, for the purpose of non-domestic buildings, have common Green Guide ratings irrespective of the building type: 1. External walls 2. Landscaping 3. Windows - commercial The user can therefore search for ratings for the above elements under any building category.

Guidance for the assessment of floor finishes The online Green Guide, under each building type, has categories of flooring specifications commonly used for the key floor areas for that building type. For example, the Retail category contains ratings for hard and soft floor finish specifications for public access areas based on the functional unit for that type of space.

246

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Mat 01 Life cycle impacts

Materials

However, any given building will normally contain several different floor areas with different wear requirements. Therefore, the BREEAM Assessor will need to refer to floor finishes under other building type categories to find the relevant specification and Green Guide rating for the building (if floor finishes are one of the applicable elements). For example, for ‘back of house’ office and corridor areas in a retail development, it will be necessary to search the floor finishes specifications and ratings under the ‘commercial’ category of the online Green Guide. To aid users of the online Green Guide, there is a diagram that will direct you to the appropriate ratings to be used for other floor areas. The diagram is found in the guidance under the Floor Finishes category. Specialist floor finishes in operational areas of buildings fall outside the scope of the Green Guide. This is due to the specific high performance requirements of the specifications, such as chemical, temperature and/or impact resistance etc., all of which limit the options available for specification. For this reason such floor finishes can be omitted from the assessment.

IMPACT (Integrated Material Profile And Costing Tool) IMPACT is a specification and database for software developers to incorporate into their tools to enable consistent Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) and Life Cycle Costing (LCC). IMPACT compliant tools work by allowing the user to attribute environmental and cost information to drawn or scheduled items in the BIM. IMPACT takes quantity information from the BIM and multiplies this by environmental impact and/or cost ‘rates’ to produce an overall impact and cost for the whole (or a selected part) of the design. The results generated by IMPACT allow the user to: analyse the design to optimise cost and environmental impacts. compare whole building results to a suitable benchmark to assess performance, which can be linked to building assessment schemes. The benefit of BIM enabled whole building assessment is that the calculations are based on real design data and accurate quantities, rather than generic specifications for particular building elements. IMPACT compliant tools also allow users to accurately model the life cycle performance of primary structures and substructures, which are not covered by the Green Guide to Specification. IMPACT was developed by an industry consortium led by BRE. The work was funded by the UK’s Technology Strategy Board. Further information about IMPACT and IMPACT compliant software tools (identified by the IMPACT compliant logo) is available from www.impactwba.com

Submission of an IMPACT (or equivalent) BIM BRE Global requires the submission of the Building Information Model (BIM) from the IMPACT compliant software tool (or equivalent) in order to: Facilitate the establishment of robust building level life cycle performance benchmarks in BREEAM. This will enable future BREEAM versions to recognise and reward those designs which achieve above average performance. Fulfil BREEAM Quality Assurance requirements Conduct further research using data from real life projects. Any data supplied to BRE Global will be treated in confidence and the use of BIM data for research purposes will ensure individual projects are unidentifiable.

Tools equivalent to but not compliant with IMPACT Tools that are considered by BRE Global to be equivalent to an IMPACT Compliant tool will be eligible for the same Exemplary credits. Equivalence will be judged by BRE Global based on the following:Suitability of the BIM content for refining benchmarks Format in which the BIM is transmitted. Please contact BRE Global at the earliest opportunity to establish equivalence status of a non-IMPACT compliant software tool.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

247

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Indoor Air Quality and the Green Guide flooring category ratings The online Green Guide does not cover the potential health and wellbeing issues associated with flooring materials and indoor air quality, this impact is covered in BREEAM issue Hea 02 Indoor air quality.

Screenshot of a specification from the BRE online Green Guide

248

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Mat 01 Life cycle impacts

Materials

Screenshot of a product specific Environmental Profile listing on Green Book Live

1At the time of publishing this scheme document (May 2014) this functionality is not present in the Online Green Guide

Calculator. 2BS EN ISO 21930:2007 Sustainability in building construction. Environmental declaration of building products. BSi, 2007. 3BS EN ISO 14040:2006 Environmental management. Life cycle assessment. Principles and framework. BSi, 2006 4BS EN ISO 14044:2006 Environmental management. Life cycle assessment. Requirements and guidelines. BSi, 2006 5BS EN ISO 14025:2010, Environmental labels and declarations - Type III environmental declarations, Principles and procedures. BSi, 2010. 6BS EN ISO 14020, Environmental labels and declarations - General principles. BSi, 2001.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

249

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Mat 02 Hard landscaping and boundary protection Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Aim To recognise and encourage the specification of materials for boundary protection and external hard surfaces that have a low environmental impact, taking into account of the full life cycle of materials used.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

One credit

1. Where at least 80% of all external hard landscaping and 80% of all boundary protection (by area) in the construction zone achieves an A or A+ rating, as defined in the Green Guide to Specification. Green Guide ratings for the specification (s) of each element can be found at www.thegreenguide.org.uk

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

250

Applicable assessment criteria

All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Mat 02 Hard landscaping and boundary protection

Materials

Terms

Description

CN3

Green Guide Online

When using the Green Guide for the purpose of assessing this BREEAM issue, ratings for landscaping elements are common across all building types. The rating will therefore be the same irrespective of the building type selected via the Green Guide online.

CN4

Finding exact Green Guide ratings

While exact matches in specifications are not always found, it should be possible to identify a similar specification and use its rating for the purposes of assessment. Where no similar specification can be found, seek guidance from BRE for the appropriate rating.

CN5

Green Guide rating via Environmental Profile Certification

Where applicable, products with Environmental Profiles Certification can be used to demonstrate compliance with this BREEAM issue. Products are certified with a product specific Green Guide rating and this rating can be used in the same way as a generic Green Guide rating. See Mat 01 Life cycle impacts – Methodology for more information.

CN6

Minor alteration of existing elements

Where there is hard landscaping or boundary protection which is to remain as existing, then, provided no more than 20% of the total area of the existing hard landscaping and boundary protection elements are subject to minor alterations, repair or maintenance, these elements can be awarded an A+ rating for the purposes of determining compliance with this issue.

CN7

No hard landscaping or boundary protection

If one of the elements is not present, e.g. boundary protection, then the credit must be assessed on the basis of the specification of the single element, e.g. hard landscaping. Where the development has neither element, the credit can be awarded.

CN8

Building façade forming boundary

Any part of an external building façade (of either the assessed building or any other neighbouring building) that forms a part of the site boundary should be excluded from the assessment of this credit.

CN9

Existing natural features

Any existing or specified natural boundary protection (such as hedging or other living barrier) should be awarded with an A+ rating for the purposes of this analysis.

Ref General

Building type specific CN10

Prison buildings secure perimeter zones/areas

The criteria for hard surfaces are applicable only to those areas outside of the secure perimeter zone, but within the overall curtilage of the site. The criteria for boundary protection apply to all specifications within the secure perimeter zone and external zone, including its borders and curtilage, i.e. the whole site. The criteria DO NOT apply to the secure perimeter fence, wall or any other fencing subject to security standards.

Methodology None.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

251

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

All

The Green Guide rating and element number for the assessed specifications.

As design stage

Additional information Relevant definitions Construction zone For the purpose of this BREEAM issue the construction zone is defined as the site and its boundary which is being developed for the BREEAM-assessed building and the external site areas that fall within the scope of the new works. Green Guide Refer to Mat 01 Life cycle impacts Green Guide Element Number Refer to Mat 01 Life cycle impacts Scope of hard landscaping For the purpose of assessment, hard landscaping includes (but is not limited to) parking areas (including manoeuvring areas, lanes, roads within the parking area), pedestrian walkways, paths, patios. The definition excludes basement parking, access or approach roads and designated vehicle manoeuvring areas, balconies, roof terraces, specialist sports areas (running tracks, netball areas etc.) and retaining walls.

Other information None.

252

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials

Materials

Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Yes (criterion 1 only)

Aim To recognise and encourage the specification and procurement of responsibly sourced materials for key building elements.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

Pre-requisite

1. All timber and timber based products used on the project is 'Legally harvested and traded timber' (see Relevant definitions). Note: a. It is a minimum requirement for achieving a BREEAM rating (for any rating level) that compliance with criterion 1 is confirmed. b. For other materials there are no pre-requisite requirements at this stage.

One credit - Sustainable procurement plan

2. The principal contractor sources materials for the project in accordance with a documented sustainable procurement plan (see the Relevant definitions in the Additional information section).

Up to 3 credits - Responsible sourcing of materials (RSM)

3. The available RSM credits (refer to Table - 1) can be awarded where the applicable building materials (refer to Table - 2) are responsibly sourced in accordance with the BREEAM methodology, as defined in steps 1 to 2 in the Methodology section below.

Table - 43: The number of BREEAM credits achieved is determined as follows RSM credits

% of available RSM points achieved

≥ 54%

≥ 36%

≥ 18%

Exemplary level criteria The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve one innovation credit for this BREEAM issue: 4. Where at least 70% of the available RSM points are achieved.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

253

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D – BREEAM UK New Construction and Shell and Core Project Assessments of this Scheme Document for further description of the above options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

All criteria relevant to building type and function apply.

CN3

A government licence See criterion 1.

A government licence, e.g. a UK Forestry Commission felling licence certificate, can be used to provide evidence of legally sourced timber but does not meet the definition of a third party timber certification scheme and so does not comply with the responsible sourcing requirements of this issue.

CN4

Sustainable procurement plan See criterion 2.

For design stage assessments where the principal contractor has not yet been appointed, a specification or a letter of intent from the party responsible for appointing the principal contractor must be provided confirming a requirement for the principal contractor to have in place a sustainable procurement plan. Refer to The BREEAM evidential requirements section for more guidance on providing letters of commitment.

CN5

BREEAM recognised responsible sourcing certification schemes and their point scores See criterion 3.

Guidance Note (TBC) available in the Resources section of the BREEAM website, provides a table of responsible sourcing certification schemes recognised under BREEAM, their scope and associated point scores. This table is reviewed on a regular basis and BREEAM Assessors must ensure they use the current table.

General

254

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials

Materials

Ref

Terms

Description

CN6

Checking responsible sourcing claims See criterion 3.

Confirmation of manufacturers and suppliers claims should be sought from the relevant responsible sourcing scheme provider. Many of the organisations who administer RSM certification schemes will, via their website, list companies and products that have been certified against their standards, including the scope of any such certification. Some schemes, including BES 6001 via www.greenbooklive.com, will provide downloadable copies of the relevant certificate, which can in turn be used as evidence of compliance for this BREEAM issue.

CN7

Specified reused materials See criterion 3.

Where reused materials are specified for the development, . these can be allocated ten points.

CN8

Specified recycled materials See criterion 3.

Where evidence can be provided that certified products used in the building contain a high proportion (≥90%) repurposed or recycled content , these can be allocated points as per Table -1 in Guidance Note (TBC).

CN9

Route 1 Cut- off See step 1 in the Methodology section.

Any material type within a location/use category, other than Ceiling and Internal partitions/internal walls (see Table - 2), which clearly accounts for less than 1m3per 1000 m2 of gross internal floor area, can be excluded from assessment. Fixings, adhesives, many finishing materials (but not all) and ironmongery would normally fall below this threshold. Material types within Ceiling and Internal partitions/internal walls location/use categories, which clearly account for less than 0.33 m3per 1000 m2 of gross internal floor area, can be excluded from assessment. Calculations will not normally be required to justify such exclusions.

Methodology There are two routes to demonstrating compliance with this issue. Either of the routes or a combination may be followed for any situation: Route 1 is intended for use in the majority of situations where detailed information on quantities of materials is not readily available. Route 2 is intended for situations where a more detailed analysis is possible due to the availability of sufficient detail on material quantities and associated supply chains. Route 3 (a combination of routes 1 and 2) is intended for situations where details on material quantities are only available for some of the materials.

Route 1: Lowest responsible sourcing certification scheme point score The following steps outline the methodology to be followed for this route to determine the number of credits achieved for responsible sourcing. The calculations outlined below are undertaken using the BREEAM Mat 03 calculator and the relevant project information, collated by the project team.

Step 1: Confirm the presence of 'Location/use categories' and materials Identify from 'Location/use categories' list under Table - 2 all location/use categories present in the building. Allocate from 'material category' list all materials that make-up each location/use category identified. Exclude all materials within a location/use category that meet the cut-off criteria set out in CN9.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

255

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Note: The most appropriate category for each particular material type must be selected. Where none of the categories are appropriate use ‘other’. Products made up of constituent materials (such as windows, doors, etc.) must be broken down into constituent materials and assessed separately following the category allocation process described above. As before, any material that falls below the cut-off threshold (see CN9) should be excluded from the assessment. Table - 44: Location/use and material categories. Location/use categories 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

Ceiling (including ceiling finishes) Door/window Floor (including floor finishes) Insulation Internal partition/internal walls (including finishes) Roof (including roof finishes) Structure, primary and secondary External wall ( e.g cladding, lining, render, including finishes ) Building service Hard landscaping Other

Material categories 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Timber/ timber-based products (TBP) Concrete/ cementitious (plaster, mortar, screed etc.) Metal Stone/ aggregate Clay-based (pavers, blocks, bricks, roof tiles, etc.) Gypsum Glass Plastic, polymer, resin, paint, chemicals and bituminous Animal fibre/skin, cellulose fibre Other

Table - 45: Location/use and material categories.

Step 2: Confirm the responsible sourcing certification scheme point score achieved for each applicable material For each material type identified as applicable in step 1, determine whether or not it is covered by a BREEAM-recognised Responsible Sourcing Certification Scheme certificate (see Additional information section). Refer to Guidance Note (TBC) available in the Resources section of the BREEAM website for the most up-to date list of BREEAM recognised Responsible Sourcing Certification Schemes, their scope and corresponding point score. Note: 1. The responsible sourcing certification scheme (RSCS) point score is determined based on the rigour of responsible sourcing demonstrated by the supplier(s) or manufacturer(s) of that material through the use of recognised responsible sourcing certification schemes.

256

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials

Materials

Step 3: Point allocation and award of credits The data entered in steps 1 and 2 is used by the BREEAM Mat 03 tool to calculate the number of RSM points achieved and award credits accordingly. This award of credits is determined as follows: For materials that have been given the same material category (timber/timber-based product has been used to illustrate), the tool: 1. first finds the average responsible sourcing certification scheme (RSCS) point score for timber/timber-based products that have the same 'location/use' category. This is repeated for every 'location/use' category present, 2. then selects the location/use category with the lowest average RSM point score, The above process is repeated for each material category. The results for all material categories are summed and the difference between the total and the maximum total possible expressed as a percentage. The percentage is then converted to a credit score according to the Table - 1.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

257

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

An example calculation for route 1 is provided below. Location/ use category

Material category

RSCS point score

Average point score*

RSM point score allocation**

Door/ window

Timber/ timber-based product 1

Timber/ timber-based product 2

Timber/ timber-based product 1

Timber/ timber-based product 2

Timber/ timber-based product 1

Timber/ timber-based product 2

Door/ window

Metal product 1

Ceiling

Metal product 1

2.5

Metal product 2

Concrete/ cementitious product 1

Concrete/ cementitious product 2

Concrete/ cementitious product 3

Concrete/ cementitious product 1

Concrete/ cementitious product 2

Floor

External wall

Structure primary and secondary

Internal partition

258

6.5

5.5

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials

Materials

Location/ use category

Material category

RSCS point score

Average point score*

RSM point score allocation**

Structure primary and secondary

Clay-based product 1

Clay-based product 2

Clay-based product 1

Roof

* Average point scores for a given material in that location/use category ** The point score allocation is the lowest point score, rounded, in the previous column, for a given material category.

Point allocation and award of credits Material category

Point scores achieved

Maximum point score

% available points achieved 30%

Timber/ timber-based product

Metal

Concrete/ cementitious

Clay-based

Total score

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Credits achieved 1

259

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Route 2: Proportion of materials responsibly sourced This route allows for a more detailed calculation of the responsibly sourced materials in a building where information on material quantities are available. It follows a similar methodology to that set out for route 1 above but allows for a detailed calculation, based on the relative quantity of each material to weight the point scores, thus influencing the final result. Following route 2 leads to a more accurate final result and typically leads to a higher score. The required calculations are performed by the Mat 03 calculator tool. An example calculation for route 2 is provided below. The example illustrates the calculation for a single material category (timber/ timber-based products (TBP)). This process is repeated for each material category present in the building to determine the final RSM score. Material

RSCS point

category

score

Quantity (m 3 , kg)

Point score weighted

Max. point

Total score

score

Total max.

% total score

score

(A)

(B)

(C)

(D)

(E)

(F)

(G)

Timber/ TBP 1

100

400

1000

700

1500

46.7%

Timber/ TBP 2

300

500

Timber/ TBP 1

100

300

1000

1300

3000

43.3%

Timber/ TBP 2

200

1000

2000

Timber/ TBP 1

300

1800

3000

3200

5000

64%

Timber/ TBP 2

200

1400

2000

Door/ window

Floor

External wall

Average % total score (H)

51.3%

RSM score (I)

5.13

Description of columns shown in the example Responsible sourcing certification scheme (RSCS) point score achieved, A Quantity (m3 , kg), B Point score weighted by quantity, C = responsible sourcing certification scheme (RSCS) point score achieved x quantity C=AxB Maximum point score weighted by quantity, D = 10 x quantity D = 10 x B Total score achieved, E = sum of point scores weighted by quantity E = sum of C scores Total maximum score, F = sum of maximum scores weighted by quantity F = sum of D scores Total score achieved, G = sum of point scores weighted by quantity/ sum of maximum scores weighted by quantity

260

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials

Materials

G = E/ F Average percentage, H = average of total scores achieved H = average of G scores RSM score achieved, I =10 x average percentage I =10 x H

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

261

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Route 3: Combination of routes The following table illustrates the awarding of credits where a combination of routes is used. In the example below route 2 has been used to calculate the points for timber/ timber-based products. For all other materials present, route 1 has been used to allocate points. The figures shown have been taken from the relevant tables under route 1 and 2 example calculations provided above. Note: Only one route can be selected per material category. Material category

RSCS point score

Timber/ timber-based product (using route 2)

Maximum point score

5.13

Metal (using route 1)

Concrete/ cementitious (using route 1)

Clay-based (using route 1)

13.13

Total score

Percentage of available points 32.83%

Credits achieved 1

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

All

See The BREEAM evidential requirements section for a list of general evidence types that can be used to demonstrate compliance with the relevant criteria for this issue.

All

Completed copy of the Mat 03 calculator tool

As per interim design stage.

All

Documentary evidence detailing how the calculator tool has been completed.

As per interim design stage.

262

Final post construction stage

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials

Materials

Additional information Relevant definitions BREEAM Mat 03 calculator A calculator tool used by the BREEAM Assessor to determine the number of BREEAM credits achieved for BREEAM issue Mat 03. BREEAM recognised responsible sourcing certification schemes These are third party schemes evaluated and approved by BRE Global for recognition under BREEAM. Refer to Guidance Note (TBC) available in the Resources section of the BREEAM website for information on the evaluation criteria and the process for the evaluation and acceptance of schemes, including application and appeals. Chain of custody (CoC) This is a process used to maintain and document the chronological history of the evidence/path for products from forests to consumers. Timber must be tracked from the certified forest to the finished product. All the steps, from the transportation of timber from the forest to a sawmill until it reaches the customer, must maintain adequate inventory control systems that allow for separation and identification of the certified product. Chain of custody certification ensures that a facility has procedures in place to track timber from certified forests and avoid confusion with non-certified timber. Chain of custody is established and audited according to the rules of relevant forest certification systems. See also definition of CITES below. Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species (CITES) The Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of wild fauna and flora (CITES) works by subjecting international trade in specimens of selected species to certain controls. All import, export, re-export and introduction from the sea of species covered by the Convention has to be authorised through a licensing system. Each Party to the Convention must designate one or more Management Authorities in charge of administering that licensing system and one or more Scientific Authorities to advise them on the effects of trade on the status of the species. The species covered by CITES are listed in three Appendices, according to the degree of protection they need. 1. Appendix I includes species threatened with extinction. Trade in specimens of these species is permitted only in exceptional circumstances. 2. Appendix II includes species not necessarily threatened with extinction but in which trade must be controlled in order to avoid utilisation incompatible with their survival. 3. Appendix III contains species that are protected in at least one country, which has asked other CITES Parties for assistance in controlling the trade. Appendices I and II of the CITES list illustrate species of timber that are protected outright. Appendix III of the CITES list illustrates species that are protected in at least one country. If a timber species used in the development is on Appendix III it can be included as part of the assessment as long as the timber is not obtained from the country/countries seeking to protect this species. Composite material Composite material can be defined as an engineered material made from two or more constituent materials with significantly different physical or chemical properties and which remain separate and distinct on a macroscopic level within the finished structure. Resin based composites such as glass reinforced plastic and polymeric render and timber composites such as chipboard or particleboard, MDF, OSB, plywood, hardboard, laminated veneered lumber, glulam and cement bonded particleboard are all required to be assessed for responsible sourcing. Legally harvested and traded timber BREEAM follows the UK government's definition of legally sourced timber, as outlined in the Central Point of Expertise on Timber (CPET) 5th Edition report on the UK Government Timber Procurement Policy, which states that legal timber and wood-derived products are those that originate from a forest where the following criteria are met:

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

263

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

1. The forest owner/manager holds legal use rights to the forest. 2. There is compliance by both the forest management organisation and any contractors with local and national legal criteria including those relevant to: a. Forest management b. Environment c. Labour and welfare d. Health and safety e. Other partiesâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; tenure and use rights f. All relevant royalties and taxes are paid. 3. There is full compliance with the criteria of CITES. Relevant documentation demonstrating the above must be provided or made available on request subject to the availability of such materials in the country concerned. The policy requires all timber and wood-derived products to be from only: 1. Independently verifiable legal and sustainable sources OR 2. Forest Law Enforcement, Governance and Trade (FLEGT) - licensed timber or equivalent sources. Further information on the UK Government's Timber Procurement Policy and compliant responsible sourcing certification schemes is available from the CPET (Central Point of Expertise on Timber) website www.cpet.org.uk/. Pre-consumer waste stream Waste material generated during manufacturing processes; this excludes reuse of materials such as rework, regrind or scrap generated in a process and capable of being reclaimed within the same process that generated it. Post-consumer waste stream Waste material generated by households or by commercial, industrial and institutional facilities in their role as end users of the product, which can no longer be used for its intended purpose. This includes returns of material from the distribution chain. Responsible sourcing The management and implementation of sustainable development principles in the provision, procurement and traceability of construction materials and components. In BREEAM, this is demonstrated through auditable third party certification schemes. Refer to Guidance Note (TBC) available in the Resources section of the BREEAM website for an up to date table of responsible sourcing certification schemes recognised by BRE Global Ltd. for the purposes of a BREEAM assessment. Reused materials Materials that can be extracted from the waste stream and used again without further processing, or with only minor processing, that does not alter the nature of the material (e.g. cleaning, cutting, fixing to other materials). Recycled material Materials diverted from the pre-consumer and/or post-consumer waste streams that require significant processing before they can be used again. For further information please see Calculating and declaring recycled content in construction products, 'Rules of Thumb' Guide (WRAP, 2008) www.wrap.org.uk Sustainable procurement plan A plan that sets out a clear framework for the responsible sourcing of materials to guide procurement throughout a project and by all involved in the specification and procurement of construction materials. The plan may be prepared and adopted at an organisational level or be site/project specific and for the purposes of BREEAM compliance, will cover the following as a minimum: 1. Risks and opportunities are identified against a broad range of social, environmental and economic issues. BS 8902:2009 Responsible sourcing sector certification schemes for construction products- Specification can be used as a guide to identify these issues. 2. Aims, objectives and targets to guide sustainable procurement activities. 3. The strategic assessment of sustainably sourced materials available locally and nationally. There should be a policy

264

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials

Materials

to procure materials locally where possible. 4. Procedures are in place to check and verify that the sustainable procurement plan is being implemented/adhered to on individual projects. These could include setting out measurement criteria, methodology and performance indicators to assess progress and demonstrate success. Responsible sourcing certification scheme point scores A graded scale to reflect the rigour of the certification scheme used to demonstrate responsible sourcing, forming the basis for awarding credits in the BREEAM issue Mat 03. Refer to Guidance Note (TBC) available in the Resources section of the BREEAM website for an up-to-date table of responsible sourcing certification schemes recognised by BRE Global Ltd for the purposes of a BREEAM assessment.

Other information BES 6001:2008 Framework Standard for Responsible Sourcing of Construction Products This is a BRE Global standard that provides a framework for the assessment and certification of the responsible sourcing of construction products. The Standard has been structured so that compliance can be demonstrated through a combination of meeting the requirements of other recognised certification schemes, establishing written policies, setting objectives and targets and engaging with relevant stakeholders. To comply with the standard a product must meet a number of mandatory criteria. Where a product demonstrates compliance beyond the mandatory levels, higher levels of performance can be achieved. The standard's performance ratings range from Pass to Good, Very Good and Excellent. The development of this standard and subsequent certification schemes will, it is envisaged, provide construction products, not wholly covered under current recognised standards, a means for demonstrating their responsibly sourced credentials. In turn this will allow clients, developers and design teams to specify responsibly sourced construction products with greater assurance and provide a means of demonstrating compliance with the assessment criteria for this BREEAM issue. To view a list of products approved to BES 6001 and additional information about the standard visit: www.greenbooklive.com

Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) and Programme for the Endorsement of Forest Certification (PEFC) validity A CPET document may be helpful to assessors with respect to determining the validity of FSC and PEFC certificates. See www.cpet.org.uk.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

265

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Mat 04 Insulation Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Aim To recognise and encourage the use of thermal insulation which has a low embodied environmental impact relative to its thermal properties

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

One credit - Embodied impact

1. Any new insulation specified for use within the following building elements must be assessed: a. External walls b. Ground floor c. Roof d. Building services. 2. The Insulation Index for the building fabric and services insulation is the same as or greater than 2.5. See the Methodology section for a description of calculating the Insulation Index.

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

266

Applicable assessment criteria

Embodied impact - criteria 1 to 2 Both options: All new insulating products being specified or installed by the developer must be accounted for in the assessment of this issue. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Mat 04 Insulation

Ref

Terms

Materials

Description

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

All criteria relevant to building type and function apply.

Insulation incorporated as part of an off-site manufactured element

If the insulation is incorporated as a component of an element that has been manufactured off-site (in order to maximise material optimisation), e.g. a wall or roof, and that element has been assessed as part of Mat 01, then for the purpose of assessing the insulation for this BREEAM issue, a Green Guide rating of A+ should be used. The same rule applies to insulation that has a significant additional function, such as providing supporting structure, e.g. structural insulated panels (SIPS). In the Green Guide, the actual insulation will be listed within the element title, rather than under the generic insulation category.

General CN3

Methodology Insulation Index calculation The Insulation Index is calculated using the BREEAM Mat 04 calculator which uses the following calculation methodology: For each type of thermal insulation used in the relevant building elements, the volume weighted thermal resistance provided by each type of insulation is calculated as follows: 1. (Area of insulation (m2) x thickness(m))/thermal conductivity (W/m.K) OR 2. Total volume of insulation used (m3)/thermal conductivity (W/m.K)

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

267

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

The volume weighted thermal resistance for each insulation material is then multiplied by the relevant Green Guide point(s) from the following table to give the Green Guide rating corrected value: Table - 46: Green Guide rating points/element Green Guide rating

Points/element

A+

0.5

0.25

To calculate the Insulation Index, the sum of the Green Guide rating corrected values for all insulating elements is divided by the sum of the volume weighted thermal resistance values. See example calculation below. Note a. Where more than one insulation type is present for a given element, the rating, area and conductivity for each insulation type should be entered into the BREEAM Mat 04 calculator and an average is calculated (by volume). b. Where no similar insulation can be found assessors should seek guidance from BRE on the appropriate rating. c. Where an independently verified third party Environmental Product Declaration (EPD), covering part of or the whole life cycle, is available for an insulating material/product, this can be used to increase the contribution of that material/product to the building’s Mat 04 performance. See below for more detail.

Example calculation as carried out by the BREEAM Mat 04 calculator The Insulation Index is calculated for a building using the following types of insulation: Type 1 Walls Area = 450m2 Thermal insulation thickness = 100mm Thermal conductivity = 0.023W/mK Green Guide rating = A (2 points) Volume weighted thermal resistance: ((450 x 0.100)/ 0.023) = 1956 Green Guide rating correction: 1956 x 2 = 3912 Type 2 Building services Volume of insulation used = 21m3 Thermal conductivity = 0.022W/mK Green Guide rating = C (0.5 points) Volume weighted thermal resistance: (21/0.022) = 955 Green Guide rating correction: 955 x 0.5 = 477 Type 3 Roof

268

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Mat 04 Insulation

Materials

Area = 210m2 Thermal insulation thickness = 120mm Thermal conductivity = 0.027W/mK Green Guide rating = A+ (3 points) Volume weighted thermal resistance: ((210 x 0.120)/ 0.027) = 933 Green Guide rating correction: 933 x 3 = 2799 Type 4 Ground floor Area = 210m2 Thermal insulation thickness = 120mm Thermal conductivity = 0.027W/mK Green Guide rating = B (1 point) Volume weighted thermal resistance: ((210 x 0.120)/ 0.027) = 933 Green Guide rating correction: 933 x 1 = 933 Total volume weighted thermal resistance = 1956 + 955 + 933 + 933 = 4777 Green Guide rating correction = 3912 + 477 + 2799 + 933 = 8121 Insulation Index: Green Guide Rating Correction/Total volume weighted thermal resistance = 8121/ 4777 = 1.7 (credit not achieved)

Calculation procedure where a specific Environmental Product Declaration is available for a material Please refer to Mat 01 Life cycle impacts – Methodology Note: Step 1 of the methodology outlined in BREEAM issue Mat 01 (the proportion of the total environmental impact of the assessed element) is not applicable for this issue as the insulation is assessed as a single material in BREEAM issue Mat 04 and not as part of a larger building element containing other materials (as in BREEAM issue Mat 01).

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

All

A completed copy of the Mat 04 calculator tool

As per interim design stage

Additional information Relevant definitions Environmental Product Declaration Refer to Mat 01 Life cycle impacts Green Guide Refer to Mat 01 Life cycle impacts

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

269

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Green Guide element number Refer to Mat 01 Life cycle impacts Insulation index A measure of performance used in BREEAM that seeks to assess the thermal properties of insulation products used in the building relevant to the embodied impact of that insulating material. BREEAM Mat 04 calculator A spreadsheet-based tool used by the BREEAM Assessor to determine the Insulation Index and therefore, whether the BREEAM credit is achieved. Materials optimisation Material optimisation means adopting a resource-efficient approach to design which results in less material being used in the design (i.e. lean design), and/or less waste is produced in the construction process, without compromising the design concept. Whilst this assessment issue is focused on the embodied impact of the insulation material specified, the design team should consider solutions that optimise the use of the material and therefore minimise construction waste. SeeMat 06 Material efficiency for more information.

Other information None.

270

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Mat 05 Designing for durability and resilience

Materials

Mat 05 Designing for durability and resilience Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Aim To recognise and encourage adequate protection of exposed elements of the building and landscape, therefore minimising the frequency of replacement and maximising materials optimisation.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

One credit Protecting vulnerable parts of the building from damage. 1. The building incorporates suitable durability and protection measures or designed features/solutions to prevent damage to vulnerable parts of the internal and external building and landscaping elements. This must include, but is not necessarily limited to: a. Protection from the effects of high pedestrian traffic in main entrances, public areas and thoroughfares (corridors, lifts, stairs, doors etc.). b. Protection against any internal vehicular/trolley movement within 1m of the internal building fabric in storage, delivery, corridor and kitchen areas. c. Protection against, or prevention from, any potential vehicular collision where vehicular parking and manoeuvring occurs within 1m of the external building faĂ§ade for all car parking areas and within 2m for all delivery areas.

Protecting exposed parts of the building from material degradation 2. The relevant building elements incorporate appropriate design and specification measures to limit material degradation due to environmental factors. (See Methodology for the process to assess this criterion). See Table - 47in theChecklists and tablessection for a list of applicable elements, environmental factors and material degradation effects to consider.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

271

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Checklists and tables Table - 47: Applicable building elements, environmental factors and material degradations effects to consider. Applicable building elements, environmental factors and material degradation effects Applicable building elements 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Foundation/substructure/lowest floor/retaining walls External walls Roof/balconies Glazing: windows, skylight External doors Railings/balusters (where exposed to external environment) Cladding (where exposed to external environment) Staircase/ramps (where exposed to external environment) Hard landscaping

Environmental factors 1. Environmental agents, including: a. Solar radiation b. Temperature variation c. Water/moisture d. Wind e. Precipitation, e.g. rain and snow f. Extreme weather conditions: high wind speeds, flooding, driving rain, snow 2. Biological agents, including: a. Vegetation b. Pests, insects c. Pollutants, including: d. Air contaminants e. Ground contaminants Material degradation effects (includes, but not necessarily limited to the following) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

272

Corrosion Dimensional change, e.g. swelling or shrinkage Fading/discolouration Rotting Leaching Blistering Melting Salt crystallisation Abrasion

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Mat 05 Designing for durability and resilience

Materials

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Protecting vulnerable parts of the building from damage - criterion 1 Where vulnerable elements identified form part of the shell and core developer’s remit: Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply and must be accounted for in the assessment of this issue. Where vulnerable elements identified are internal and do not form a part of the shell and core developer's remit, i.e. they are in speculative areas and compliance is subject to the tenants/future occupiers fit-out specification: Both options: These areas can be excluded from assessment. Protecting exposed parts of the building from material degradation - criterion 2 Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN3

Suitable durability measures See criterion 1.

Suitable durability and protection measures to vulnerable parts of the building can include: 1. Bollards/barriers/raised kerbs to delivery and vehicle drop-off areas 2. Robust external wall construction, up to 2m high 3. Corridor walls specified to Severe Duty (SD) as per BS 5234-2 1and, for Healthcare buildings, Health Technical Memorandum 56 - Partitions2. 4. Protection rails to walls of corridors 5. Kick plates/impact protection (from trolleys etc) on doors 6. Hard-wearing and easily washable floor finishes in heavily used circulation areas (i.e. main entrance, corridors, public areas etc) 7. Designing out the risk without the need for additional materials specification to protect vulnerable areas.

CN4

Vehicle impact protection See criterion 1c.

Any vehicle impact protection measures specified must be positioned at an adequate distance from the building to protect the fabric from impact from any vehicle with a measurable overhang of the body from the wheel track, in particular for any goods delivery areas. In vehicle movement areas only; where the specification of external robust wall construction is specified to comply with the credit, additional protection must be provided to ensure against potential damage to the robust façade from vehicle movement, i.e. specifying bollards or protection rails.

General

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

273

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Terms

Description

CN5

Preventing excessive material use

The specification or design measures chosen should reflect the need to balance the additional specification of materials with the need to protect building elements to minimise their replacement, insuring against excessive material use and promoting materials optimisation.

CN6

Public/common areas

Consideration should be given to materials specification in public/common areas (especially public waiting areas and toilet areas) to provide protection against potential malicious or physical abuse, as far as possible.

Methodology Protecting exposed parts of the building from material degradation The following outlines the process to assess criterion 2. 1. Identify from the list of ‘applicable building elements’ under Table - 47 the elements that are appropriate to the building being assessed. 2. Establish from the ‘environmental factors’ list those factors that are likely to cause material degradation effects in the identified applicable building elements. 3. Confirm the design and specification measures in place to limit these degradation effects. 4. The assessor should use their professional judgement in determining whether the design team have adequately demonstrated that they have designed and specified materials and/or measures which will be effective in preventing unnecessary deterioration so reducing frequent replacements, repairs and maintenance through the life cycle of the building. 5. At post construction stage, where the design and specification measures installed differ from that proposed at design stage, the assessor must ensure that these measures still meet the aims of the criterion as detailed in point 4 above.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

274

Final post construction stage

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Mat 05 Designing for durability and resilience

Materials

Additional information Relevant definitions Materials efficiency Refer to BREEAM issue Mat 04 Insulation

Other information None 1BS 5234-2: Partitions (including matching linings) – Specification for performance criteria for strength and robustness

including methods of test, BSI 1992. 2HTM 56 Partitions, 3rd Edition, Department of Health, 2005.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

275

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Mat 06 Material efficiency Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Aim To recognise and encourage measures to optimise material efficiency in order to minimise environmental impact of material use and waste.

Assessment criteria The following is required to show compliance for:

One credit

1. Opportunities have been identified, and appropriate measures investigated and implemented, to optimise the use of materials in building design, procurement, construction, maintenance and end of life , 2. The above is carried out by the design/construction team in consultation with the relevant parties (see CN3) at each of the following RIBA stages: a. Preparation and Brief b. Concept Design c. Developed Design d. Technical Design e. Construction.

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

276

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Mat 06 Material efficiency

Ref

Terms

Materials

Description

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Relevant parties

All parties (as relevant to the project stage) involved in the design, specification and/or construction of the building should be consulted. This includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Client/developer 2. Cost consultant 3. Architect 4. Structural/civil engineers 5. Building services engineers - mechanical, electrical 6. Principal contractor 7. Demolition/strip-out contractor 8. Environmental consultant 9. Project management consultant 10. Materials/component manufacturers/suppliers.

Evidence requirements

BRE has avoided being overly-prescriptive with the evidence requirements for this issue, recognising that this is a complex environmental and design issue, where solutions and approaches are largely influenced by building specific factors. The evidence required to demonstrate compliance will vary according to RIBA stage. A few examples have been provided below:

General CN3

reports (at Preparation and Brief stage) outlining the activity relating to material efficiency ( ideas discussed, analysis and decisions taken) drawings or building integrated model (BIM), calculations showing reduction of material use through design (Concept Design/Developed Design stages) meeting notes, construction program, responsibilities schedule (indicating parties consulted). The BREEAM Assessor should use their judgement in determining whether the aim and intent of the credit has been met using appropriate project information to back their judgement. BRE Global will endorse the BREEAM Assessor's judgement through the Quality Assurance audit where a reasonable justification to award the credit on the basis of project team actions and proposed design solutions is evident.

Methodology None.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

277

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Additional information Relevant definitions Material efficiency The process of undertaking a building project to enable the most efficient use of materials over the lifecycle of the building and its component. This includes using fewer materials, reusing existing demolition/strip-out materials and, where appropriate, procuring materials with higher levels of recycled content It may also include the adoption of alternative means of design/construction that result in lower materials usage and lower wastage levels including offsite manufacture and use of pre-assembled service pods.

Other information Optimising material use The construction industry accounts for approximately 55% of the total annual materials consumption and buildings contribute 50% of total emissions of CO2e. They are also responsible for 30% of total UK water use and 35% of arising waste.The breakdown of global industrial carbon emissions shows that 55% comes from the manufacture and processing of five stock materials- steel (25%), cement (19%), paper (4%), plastic and aluminum (3%). Optimising material use is one the key resource efficiency goals for any sustainability strategy. This involves various components to ensure efficient use of materials, waste prevention and reduction, minimal damage to the environment and depletion of natural resources. This new BREEAM issue aims to encourage and support efforts to reduce the amount of materials use in building design without compromising on the structural stability. BRE intends to further develop the assessment criteria for this issue in future updates of BREEAM and as such BRE would welcome any feedback on the application of this assessment issue to assist with the evolution of the criteria and inclusion of additional guidance on compliance in future BREEAM versions.

Tools to guide material efficiency strategies The following provide frameworks for the consideration and review of resource efficiency in design and construction:

BS 8895 Designing for material efficiency in buildings projects - Part 1: Code of practice for Strategic Definition and Preparation and Brief 1standard outlines specific material efficiency process, key tasks, team members and their responsibilities and outputs specific to each RIBA work stage along with supporting guidance and tools. This serves as a useful tool to assist the design team in developing and implementing material efficiency strategies for their developments.

WRAP Designing out Waste: A design team guide for Buildings2. This document outlines five principles of designing out waste and can be applied during design development, and serve as prompts for investigating opportunities for material efficiency in design.

278

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Mat 06 Material efficiency

Materials

1BS 8895: Designing for material efficiency in building projects - Part1: Code of practice for Strategic Definition and

Preparation and Brief. BSI, 2013 2Designing out Waste: A design team guide for Buildings, WRAP

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

279

Waste

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Waste Category overview Weightings

Minimum standards

Fully fitted 8.5%

Shell only 11.0%

Shell and core 9.5%

Wst 01, Wst 03

Summary This category encourages the sustainable management (and reuse where feasible) of construction, operational waste and waste through future maintenance and repairs associated with the building structure. By encouraging good design and construction practices, issues in this section aim to reduce the waste arising from the construction and operation of the building, encouraging its diversion from landfill. It includes recognition of measures to reduce future waste as a result of the need to alter the building in the light of future changes to climate.

Category summary table Issue ID

Issue name

Credits

Wst 01

Construction waste management

Development of a construction resource management plan. Reducing construction waste related to on-site construction and off-site manufacture/fabrication. Diverting non-hazardous construction (on-site and dedicated off-site manufacture/fabrication), demolition and excavation waste (where applicable) generated by the project from landfill.

Wst 02

Recycled aggregates

Percentage levels of recycled or secondary aggregate specified against set targets.

Wst 03

Operational waste

Provision of suitable space and facilities to allow for segregation and storage of operational recyclable waste volumes generated by the assessed building/unit, its occupant(s) and activities.

Wst 04

Speculative floor and ceiling finishes

Specification of floor and ceiling finishes only where agreed with the occupant or for tenanted areas where the future occupant is not known, carpets, other floor finishes and ceiling finishes are installed in a show area only to reduce wastage.

280

Credit summary

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Waste

Issue ID

Issue name

Credits

Credit summary

Wst 05

Adaptation to climate change

Encourage consideration and implementation of measures to mitigate the impact of more extreme weather conditions arising from climate change over the lifespan of the building.

Wst 06

Functional adaptability

Encourage consideration and implementation of measures to accommodate future changes to the use of the building and its systems over its lifespan.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

281

Waste

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Wst 01 Construction waste management Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Yes

Aim To promote resource efficiency via the effective management and reduction of construction waste.

Assessment criteria This issue is split into two parts: Construction resource efficiency (3 credits) Diversion of resources from landfill (1 credit). The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

Up to three credits - Construction resource efficiency

1. Where a Resource Management Plan (RMP) has been developed covering the non-hazardous waste related to on-site construction and dedicated off-site manufacture or fabrication (including demolition and excavation waste) generated by the building’s design and construction (see CN3). 2. Where construction waste related to on-site construction and dedicated off-site manufacture/fabrication (excluding demolition and excavation waste) meets or is lower than the following (Table - 48:

Table - 48: Construction waste resource efficiency benchmarks BREEAM credits

Amount of waste generated per 100m2 (gross internal floor area) m3

tonnes

≤ 13.3

≤ 11.1

Two credits

≤ 7.5

≤ 6.5

Three credits

≤ 3.4

≤ 3.2

Exemplary level

≤ 1.6

≤ 1.9

One credit

Note - Volume (m3) is actual volume of waste (not bulk volume). 3. Where existing buildings on the site will be demolished a pre-demolition audit of any existing buildings, structures or hard surfaces is completed to determine if, in the case of demolition, refurbishment/reuse is feasible and, if not, to maximise the recovery of material from demolition for subsequent high grade/value applications. The audit must be referenced in the RMP and cover: a. Identification of the key refurbishment/demolition materials. b. Potential applications and any related issues for the reuse and recycling of the key refurbishment and demolition materials in accordance with the waste hierarchy.

282

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Wst 01 Construction waste management

Waste

One credit - Diversion of resources from landfill

4. The following percentages of non-hazardous construction (on-site and off-site manufacture/fabrication in a dedicated facility), demolition and excavation waste (where applicable) generated by the project have been diverted from landfill:

Table - 49: Diversion from landfill benchmarks BREEAM credits

Type of waste

One credit

Exemplary level

Volume

Tonnage

Non demolition

70%

80%

Demolition

80%

90%

Excavation

N/A

Non demolition

85%

90%

Demolition

85%

95%

Excavation

95%

5. Waste materials will be sorted into separate key waste groups as per Table - 50 (according to the waste streams generated by the scope of the works) either on-site or through a licensed contractor for recovery.

Exemplary level criteria The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM issue: 6. Non-hazardous construction waste generated by the building’s design and on-site construction and off-site manufacture or fabrication (excluding demolition and excavation waste) is no greater than the exemplary level resource efficiency benchmark (outlined in Table - 48). 7. The percentage of non-hazardous construction (on-site and dedicated off-site manufacture/fabrication), demolition and excavation waste (if relevant) diverted from landfill meets or exceeds the exemplary level percentage benchmark (outlined in Table - 49). 8. All key waste groups are identified for diversion from landfill in the RMP.

One credit - Construction resource efficiency - simple buildings

9. Where projects have a Resource Management Plan (RMP) with the aim of minimising and monitoring waste.

Two credits - RMP measurements and reporting - simple buildings

10. Where criterion 9 above has been met. 11. The developed and implemented waste management procedures recorded in the RMP ensure that the following are measured and reported on : a. Construction waste generated by the project in m3 or tonnes per 100m2 gross internal floor area (excluding demolition and excavation waste). b. The proportion of this construction waste diverted from landfill, i.e. reused/recycled/recovered. This data must be reported at the final post construction stage of the BREEAM assessment, via the BREEAM assessment and reporting process (in addition to any other internal or external reporting of the data that may occur). Note: where existing buildings on the site will be demolished, a pre-demolition audit of any existing buildings, structures or hard surfaces must be completed to determine if, in the case of demolition, refurbishment/reuse is feasible. If the audit finds that this is not feasible, then its purpose is to maximise the recovery of material from demolition for subsequent high grade/value applications. The audit must be referenced and cover: c. Identification of the key refurbishment/demolition materials. d. Potential applications and any related issues for the reuse and recycling of the key refurbishment and demolition materials.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

283

Waste

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Exemplary level criteria - simple buildings

12. The first three construction resource efficiency credits have been achieved. 13. Non-hazardous construction waste measurement/monitoring records details of the source of the waste arisings, by associating the waste with project work packages (see Methodology). 14. Where the project meets or improves on the BREEAM exemplary level benchmark (Table - 49) for the diversion from landfill of non-hazardous construction and demolition waste (where generated).

Checklists and tables None

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Option 1 – Shell only: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Option 2 – Shell and core: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

Construction resource efficiency (3 credits) One credit 1. Criterion 9. Two credits 2. Criteria 10 and 11. Diversion from landfill (1 credit) 3. Criteria 4 and 5. Exemplary level credit 4. Criteria 12 to 14.

General CN3

284

Resource Management Plan records

The project waste arisings should be recorded and include construction, demolition and excavation waste. Note that the performance benchmarks for the award of credits do not include demolition and excavation waste.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Wst 01 Construction waste management

Waste

Ref

Terms

Description

CN4

Limited site space for segregation and storage See criterion 5.

Where space on site is too limited to allow materials to be segregated, a waste contractor may be used to separate and process recyclable materials off-site. Similarly, manufacturers’ take-back schemes could also be used. Where this is the case, evidence must be produced which demonstrates that segregation of materials is carried out to the agreed levels and that materials are reused/recycled as appropriate. Such evidence could be Environment Agency/Scottish Environment Protection Agency/Environment Agency Wales/Northern Ireland Environment Agency Waste Return Forms.

CN5

Waste from temporary support structures

Any waste generated on site for the purposes of the development (excluding demolition and excavation waste) must be taken account of in the assessment of this issue. If temporary support structures, or any other materials/system brought on site to facilitate construction of a building, enter the waste stream (albeit for recycling), then they will need to be classified as construction waste and therefore contribute to the construction waste benchmark necessary to facilitate assessment with this issue. If the support structure is reused by the contractor (or by another contractor) on other sites, then it hasn’t been discarded and therefore doesn’t enter the waste stream. Thus it wouldn’t be included in the waste generated and hence the benchmark figures for this issue. The same would apply to timber formwork where reused.

Methodology Work packages For the simple building exemplary criteria, the waste arisings need to be associated with the source of waste by project work packages. These work packages could include: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

Asbestos removal External and site works Fixtures and fittings Groundworks and excavation Refurbishment Remediation Re-roofing Services Soft strip Substructure Superstructure.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

285

Waste

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

All

A copy of the Resource Management plan and, where relevant, pre-demolition audit.

As per interim design stage

Additional information Relevant definitions Best practice construction waste management plan (see RMP and SWMP) Best practice is a combination of commitments to: 1. Design out waste (materials optimisation) 2. Reduce waste generated on site 3. Develop and implement procedures to sort and reuse/recycle construction and demolition waste on-site and offsite (as applicable) 4. Follow guidance from: Defra (Department of Environment, Food and Rural Affairs) BRE (Building Research Establishment Ltd) WRAP (Waste and Resources Action Programme) Welsh Government. Dedicated off-site manufacturing or fabrication Refer to definition under Man 03 Responsible construction practices. Diversion from landfill Actions to avoid waste being disposed of in landfill include: Reusing the material on-site (in situ or for new applications) Reusing the material on other sites Community reuse and recycling Salvaging or reclaiming the material for reuse Returning material to the supplier via a ‘take-back’ scheme Recovery of the material from site by an approved waste management contractor and recycled or sent for energy recovery. Resource Management Plan (RMP) The aim of the RMP is to promote resource efficiency and to prevent illegal waste activities. Resource efficiency includes minimising waste at source and ensuring that clients, designers and principal contractors assess the use, reuse and recycling of materials and products on and off the site. A compliant RMP is one that defines: 1. A target benchmark for resource efficiency, i.e. m3 of waste per 100m2 or tonnes of waste per 100m2 2. Procedures and commitments for minimising non-hazardous waste in line with the target benchmark 3. Procedures for minimising hazardous waste 4. A waste minimisation target and details of waste minimisation actions to be undertaken 5. Procedures for estimating, monitoring, measuring and reporting hazardous and non-hazardous site waste. If waste data is obtained from licensed external waste contractors, the data needs to be reliable and verifiable, e.g. by using data from EA/SEPA/EA Wales/NIEA Waste Return Forms

286

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Wst 01 Construction waste management

Waste

6. Procedures for sorting, reusing and recycling construction waste into defined waste groups (see additional guidance section), either on-site or through a licensed external contractor 7. Procedures for reviewing and updating the plan 8. The name or job title of the individual responsible for implementing the above. A Site Waste Management Plan is a form of Resource Management Plan and for BREEAM should be written in line with best practice (see definition of Best practice construction waste management plan) Site Waste Management Plans Some locations may have a legal requirement, due to government requirements, to produce a Site Waste Management Plan (SWMP) containing prescribed details. This should be complied with as necessary. To achieve any of the construction waste management credits the assessed development, regardless of value or locality, must have a BREEAM compliant Resource Management Plan that should be written in line with best practice (see definition of Best practice construction waste management plan). Waste hierarchy The order of priority for the management of waste where waste generation could or does occur. This is listed in descending order of environmental preference in The Waste (England and Wales) Regulation 2011 1 as: Prevention Reuse Recycle Recover Dispose. Waste minimisation This term encompasses two elements of the waste hierarchy: Waste reduction/prevention = using less material in design, manufacture and installation, keeping products for longer, using no hazardous materials Reuse = using products again for the same purpose for which they were conceived, which may require checking, cleaning or repairing (preparing for reuse). Types of waste minimisation actions include: 1. Set and report against waste reduction targets 2. Design for standardisation of components 3. Avoid waste from excavation/groundworks and consider opportunities for zero cut and fill 4. Return packaging for reuse 5. Consider community reuse of surplus/off-cuts 6. Include waste minimisation initiatives and targets in tenders/contracts and engage with the supply chain 7. Consider use of BIM (Building Information Modelling) 8. Design for off-site/modular build 9. Design for flexibility, adaptability and future deconstruction 10. Design to use fewer materials 11. Use of reusable temporary elements such as shuttering and protection. This list is not exhaustive and other waste minimisation actions can be taken.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

287

Waste

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Construction waste groups Table - 50: Construction waste groups European Waste Catalogue

Key group

Examples

170102

Bricks

170101

Concrete

Pipes, kerb stones, paving slabs, concrete rubble, precast and in situ

170604

Insulation

Glass fibre, mineral wool, foamed plastic

1501

Packaging

Paint pots, pallets, cardboard, cable drums, wrapping bands, polythene sheets

170201

Timber

Softwood, hardwood, board products such as plywood, chipboard, medium density fibreboard (MDF)

1602

Electrical and electronic equipment

Electrical and electronic TVs, fridges, air-conditioning units, lamps equipment

200301

Canteen/office

Office waste, canteen waste, vegetation

1301

Oils

Hydraulic oil, engine oil, lubricating oil

1703

Asphalt and tar

Bitumen, coal tars, asphalt

170103

Tiles and ceramics

Ceramic tiles, clay roof tiles, ceramic, sanitary ware

1701

Inert

Mixed rubble/excavation material, glass

1704

Metals

Radiators, cables, wires, bars, sheet

170802

Gypsum

Plasterboard, plaster, fibre cement sheets

170101

Binders

Render, cement, mortar

170203

Plastics

Pipes, cladding, frames, non-packaging sheet

200307

Furniture

Tables, chairs, desks, sofas

1705

Soils

Soils, clays, sand, gravel, natural stone

Most relevant EWC

Liquids

Non-hazardous paints, thinners, timber treatments

Most relevant EWC

Hazardous

Defined in the Hazardous Waste List (HWL) of the European Waste Catalogue (EWC)

288

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Wst 01 Construction waste management

Waste

European Waste Catalogue

Key group

Examples

Most relevant EWC

Floor coverings (soft)

Carpets, vinyl flooring

Most relevant EWC

Architectural features

Roof tiles, reclaimed bricks, fireplaces

170904 (Mixed)

Mixed/other

Efforts should be made to categorise waste into the above categories wherever possible.

Other information BREEAM construction resource efficiency benchmarks The resource efficiency benchmarks used in BREEAM have been derived using data collected from hundreds of real life projects using BRE's SMARTWaste system, from July 2008 to March 2013. The BREEAM credits are aligned to the benchmarks as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.

One credit: Performance in the top 50% of projects (better than standard practice) Two credits: Performance in the top 25% of projects (good practice) Three credits: Performance in the top 10% of projects (best practice) Exemplary level: Performance in the top 5% of projects (exemplary practice).

For more information please see www.smartwaste.co.uk

Why does BREEAM exclude demolition and excavation waste from the resource efficiency benchmarks? BREEAM does not include demolition and excavation (D&E) waste in its resource efficiency benchmark, despite it often being the largest tonnage of waste on-site, because the amount of D&E waste produced is site-dependant. Furthermore, it is not necessarily possible to reduce the amount of demolition waste (unless a decision is taken not to demolish in the first place). Including D&E waste in an overall construction resource efficiency benchmark would: 1. Not encourage sites with unavoidably large amounts of D&E waste to focus on reducing waste arising from construction materials (which would have further knock-on environmental impacts); and 2. Mean that sites with little or no D&E waste would find compliance with the benchmark more straight forward, which would weaken the drivers for reducing construction waste resulting from the specification and use of new building materials. BREEAM aims to ensure that, where D&E waste is generated, it is diverted from landfill and where possible reused for high grade use on-site to reduce the volume of new materials produced/required in the supply chain (which themselves may go on to generate additional waste). One credit and an exemplary level credit are available where it can be demonstrated that D&E waste has been diverted from landfill.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

289

Waste

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Tools for preparing, implementing and reviewing a RMP SMARTWaste® is a web-based membership tool allowing users to measure and monitor construction-site impacts.. The tool can be used for: Preparing, implementing and reviewing SWMPs orRMPs Online measuring and reporting on Waste (aligned to defined waste groups) Site energy, fuel and water use CO2 production from energy usage Procurement of certified/sustainable timber Industry waste benchmarks Links to BREMAP. This membership tool is frequently updated and offers the user flexibility, reporting and support. Templates are available to meet the latest BREEAM credits and can also be downloaded. More information is available at www.smartwaste.co.uk. Other tools for preparing, implementing and reviewing a RMP are available from the Waste and Resources Action Programme (WRAP) www.wrap.org.uk.

WRAP and UKCG waste reporting guidelines WRAP have guidelines for measuring and reporting construction, demolition and excavation waste which have been developed with the United Kingdom Contractors Group (UKCG). This differs from SMARTWaste in a number of ways. For the WRAP/UKCG method, only materials taken off-site as waste are to be recorded as waste. It is optional to record data for materials that are reused on-site but these should not be reported. The WRAP/UKCG method also has default diversion from landfill rates for waste sent off-site to waste destinations. For example, it is assumed that 50% of inert soil and stones (EWC 17 05 04) and brick, concrete, tiles and ceramics (EWC 17 01 01, EWC 17 01 02, EWC 17 01 03, and EWC 17 01 07) sent to landfill will go to beneficial reuse (e.g. landfill engineering and restoration). SMARTWaste and BREEAM do not make this assumption. 1The Waste (England and Wales) Regulations 2011, Environmental Protection, England and Wales, Statutory Instrument No.

988.

290

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Wst 02 Recycled aggregates

Waste

Wst 02 Recycled aggregates Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Aim To recognise and encourage the use of recycled and secondary aggregates, thereby reducing the demand for virgin material and optimising material efficiency in construction.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

One credit - Recycled aggregates

1. The percentage of high grade aggregate that is recycled or secondary aggregate, specified in each application (present) must meet the following minimum % levels (by weight or volume) to contribute to the total amount of recycled or secondary aggregate, as specified in . 2. The total amount of recycled or secondary aggregate specified, and meeting criterion 1, is greater than 25% (by weight or volume) of the total high grade aggregate specified for the development. Where the minimum level in criterion 1 is not met for an application, all the aggregate in that application must be considered as primary aggregate when calculating the total high grade aggregate specified. 3. The recycled or secondary aggregates are EITHER: a. Construction, demolition and excavation waste obtained on-site or off-site OR b. Secondary aggregates obtained from a non-construction post-consumer industrial by product source (see Relevant definitions section).

Exemplary level criteria The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM issue. 4. The percentage of high grade aggregate that is recycled or secondary aggregate, specified in each application (present) must meet the exemplary minimum levels (by weight or volume), as defined in the table above. Where this minimum level is not met, all the aggregate in that application must be considered as primary aggregate when calculating the total high grade aggregate specified. 5. Where the total amount of recycled or secondary aggregate specified is greater than 35% (by weight or volume) of the total high grade aggregate specified for the project. Where the minimum level in criterion 1 is not met for an application, all the aggregate in that application must be considered as primary aggregate when calculating the total high grade aggregate specified. 6. The contributing secondary aggregate must not be transported more than 30 km by road transport.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

291

Waste

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Checklists and tables Table - 51: Minimum levels (by weight and volume) of high grade aggregate specified per application (where present) that is recycledor secondary aggregate Min. % One credit

Application

Min. % Exemplary performance

Bound Structural frame

15%

30%

Bitumen or hydraulically bound base, binder, and surface courses for paved areas and roads

30%

75%

Building foundations

20%

35%

Concrete road surfaces

15%

45%

Pipe bedding

100%

N/A

Granular fill and capping (see Relevant definitions section)

100%

N/A

Unbound

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

292

Applicable assessment criteria

All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Wst 02 Recycled aggregates

Waste

Terms

Description

CN3

Off-site recycled aggregates

Where off-site recycled aggregates from construction, demolition and excavation waste are used, they should be produced according to the relevant Quality Protocol or comply with the relevant BS/EN standards for aggregates.

CN4

Aggregates in offsite manufactured applications

Where any of the listed applications have been manufactured off-site, the aggregate present in these applications should be included in the assessment of this issue.

Ref General

Methodology None.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Calculation confirming the amount of recycled or secondary aggregate to be used.

Calculation confirming the amount of recycled or secondary aggregate used.

Additional information Relevant definitions Air cooled blast furnace slag Air cooled blast furnace slag is classified as a by product (rather than a waste) and can therefore be used as an aggregate without the need for a quality protocol. The slag used must meet the requirements of the European and BS Aggregates Standards that apply to the end use application (e.g. bitumen bound, unbound etc.). Granular fill and capping (as high grade aggregate) For granular fill to be considered a ‘high grade aggregate’, it must conform to one of the following classes under the Specification for Highway Works (SHW) Series 600 Earthworks: 1. Class 6A, 6I and 6N - Selected well graded granular material 2. Class 6B - Selected coarse granular material 3. Class 6C, 6D, 6J and 6L - Selected uniformly graded granular material 4. Class 6E, 6G, 6H, 6K, 6M, 6P and 6R - Selected granular material 5. Class 6F (and the various sub classes) - Selected coarse and fine graded material 6. Class 6Q - Well graded, uniformly graded or coarse graded material. If the application is capping, then granular materials should conform to one of the following classes under the Specification for Highway Works (SHW) Series 600 Earthworks:

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

293

Waste

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

1. Class 6F - Selected coarse and fine graded material 2. Class 6S - Selected well graded granular material. If the application is capping, then stabilised materials should conform to one of the following classes under the Specification for Highway Works (SHW) Series 900 Earthworks: 1. Class 9A - Cement stabilised well graded granular material 2. Class 9B - Cement stabilised silty cohesive material 3. Class 9C - Cement stabilised conditioned pulverised fuel ash cohesive material 4. Class 9D - Lime stabilised cohesive material 5. Class 9E - Lime and cement stabilised cohesive material 6. Class 9F - Lime and cement stabilised well graded material. Low grade aggregate uses Crushed masonry used as fill material for general landscaping is not considered to be high grade. This practice is now commonplace on construction-sites due to increased landfill costs. Materials optimisation Refer to Mat 04 Insulation Post-consumer waste stream Waste material generated by households or by commercial, industrial and institutional facilities in their role as end users of the product, which can no longer be used for its intended purpose. This includes returns of material from the distribution chain. Waste materials generated during manufacturing processes are pre-consumer waste streams and are excluded. These streams include re-utilisation of materials such as rework, regrind or scrap generated in a process and capable of being reclaimed within the same process that generated it. Quality Protocol The purpose of a Quality Protocol is to provide a uniform control process for producers, from which they can reasonably state and demonstrate that their product has been fully recovered and is no longer a waste. It also provides purchasers with a product quality-managed to common standards, which increases confidence in performance. Aggregates that do not meet the requirements of a Quality Protocol and/or relevant aggregate standards will still be considered waste. Protocols exists for: Aggregates produced from inert waste Use of pulverised fuel ash (PFA) and furnace bottom ash (FBA) in bound applications. Recycled aggregates Recycled aggregates are those derived from reprocessing materials previously used in construction, e.g. crushed concrete or masonry from construction and demolition waste material. Secondary aggregates By products of industrial processes that can be processed to produce secondary aggregates. Secondary aggregates are subdivided into manufactured and natural, depending on their source. Recognised non-construction post-consumer or post-industrial by products include: 1. China clay waste 2. Slate overburden 3. Pulverised Fuel Ash (PFA) 4. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (GGBFS) 5. Air cooled blast furnace slag 6. Steel slag 7. Furnace Bottom Ash (FBA) 8. Incinerator bottom ash 9. Foundry sands 10. Recycled glass 11. Recycled plastic 12. Spent oil shale 13. Colliery spoil 14. Municipal solid waste treatment residues.

294

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Wst 02 Recycled aggregates

Waste

Other information Further guidance Details on the European Standards for Aggregates (2004) are available at: http://aggregain.wrap.org.uk/quality/aggregates_standards/european.html The Environment Agency publishes and updates Quality Protocols: http://www.environment-agency.gov.uk/business/sectors/142481.aspx Current guidance: The Quality Protocol for production of aggregates from inert waste.http://www2.wrap.org.uk/downloads/0083_ Quality_Protocol_A4.0bd6bd91.87.pdf Steel slag, incinerator bottom ash aggregates and furnace bottom ash (from coal fired power generation) are not covered by the above Quality Protocol but are/will be covered by their own quality protocols. WRAP has information, tools and guidance on the use of recycled and secondary aggregates:http://aggregain.wrap.org.uk

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

295

Waste

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Wst 03 Operational waste Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Yes

Aim To recognise and encourage the provision of dedicated storage facilities for a building’s operational-related recyclable waste streams, so that this waste is diverted from landfill or incineration.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

One credit - Operational waste

1. Dedicated space(s) is provided for the segregation and storage of operational recyclable waste volumes generated by the assessed building/unit, its occupant(s) and activities. This space must be: a. Clearly labelled, to assist with segregation, storage and collection of the recyclable waste streams b. Accessible to building occupants or facilities operators for the deposit of materials and collections by waste management contractors c. Of a capacity appropriate to the building type, size, number of units (if relevant) and predicted volumes of waste that will arise from daily/weekly operational activities and occupancy rates. 2. Where the consistent generation in volume of the appropriate operational waste streams is likely to exist, e.g. large amounts of packaging or compostable waste generated by the building’s use and operation, the following facilities are provided: a. Static waste compactor(s) or baler(s); situated in a service area or dedicated waste management space. b. Vessel(s) for composting suitable organic waste resulting from the building’s daily operation and use; OR adequate space(s) for storing segregated food waste and compostable organic material prior to collection and delivery to an alternative composting facility. c. Where organic waste is to be stored/composted on-site, a water outlet is provided adjacent to or within the facility for cleaning and hygiene purposes.

Additionally for healthcare buildings only 3. The specified/installed operational waste facilities are compliant with the relevant NHS guidelines for that part of the UK (See Compliance Note

Additionally for multi-residential buildings with self-contained dwellings/bedsits only 4. Each dwelling/bedsit has a provision of three internal storage containers, as follows: a. A minimum total capacity of 30 litres b. No individual container smaller than 7 litres c. All containers in a dedicated non obstructive position d. The storage containers for recycling are provided in addition to non-recyclable waste storage.

Additionally for multi-residential buildings with individual bedrooms and communal facilities only 5. The above storage requirements (criterion 4) for self-contained dwellings/bedsits are met for every six bedrooms. 6. The recyclable storage is located in a dedicated non-obstructive position in either: a. Communal kitchens; OR b. Where there are no communal kitchens present, in a communal space such as communal lounges or utility areas.

296

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Wst 03 Operational waste

Waste

7. Home composting facilities and a home composting information leaflet is provided within the kitchen area or communal space for each self-contained dwelling, bedsit or communal kitchen.

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Criteria 1 and 2 Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Criteria 3 to 7 Both options: These criteria are not applicable. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

CN1.1

End-occupier not known See criterion 2.

If the end-occupier is not known but the function/areas of the assessed building suggest that large amounts of packaging or compostable waste is likely to be generated during the buildingâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s operation, e.g. it is a retail or industrial development or contains a large catering facility, then an appropriately sized space and services/infrastructure to accommodate the relevant facilities must be provided. The facilities themselves do not necessarily need to be provided/installed to demonstrate compliance for a shell and core project assessment.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Country-specific

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

297

Waste

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Terms

Description

CN3

Country specific guidance

The following Standards or Building Regulations etc. are relevant for the assessment of the issue: England For Healthcare assessments, where the criterion refers to the use of HTM07-01, the version for England should be used.

298

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Wst 03 Operational waste

Waste

Terms

Description

CN4

Determining if the dedicated space complies See criteria 1 and 2.

The design team demonstrates that the provision of waste management facilities for the assessed building is adequate given the building type, occupier (if known), operational function and likely waste streams and volumes to be generated. Where it is not possible to determine what provision should be made, the following guide for minimum storage space provision should be used: 1. At least 2m2 per 1000m2 of net floor area for buildings < 5000m2 2. A minimum of 10m2 for buildings ≥ 5000m2 3. An additional 2m2 per 1000m2 of net floor area where catering is provided (with an additional minimum of 10m2 for buildings ≥ 5000m2). The net floor area should be rounded up to the nearest 1000m2.

CN5

Extensions to existing buildings

Where there are facilities within the existing building, these can be used to assess compliance. The scope of these facilities must be adequate to cater for the total volume of predicted recyclable waste arising from the new and existing buildings.

CN6

Multiple building assessments and buildings that form part of a wider estate See criterion 1c.

Where the assessment applies to one or more buildings/units that are part of a wider estate or campus, the design team can choose to demonstrate compliance through the provision of dedicated centralised storage space and waste management facilities with the capacity to accommodate the recyclable waste material generated from all buildings and their activities.

CN7

Limited space or vehicle access for a compactor/baler See criterion 2.

For developments that have limited space for static installations, compliance can be assessed on the basis of the provision of adequate space for a smaller portable compactor or baler.

CN8

Internal storage areas

Where the facilities are situated internally, vehicular gate heights/widths and manoeuvring and loading space must be sized to ensure ease of access for vehicles collecting recyclable materials.

CN9

General waste

The area for storage of recyclable materials must be provided in addition to areas and facilities provided for dealing with general waste and other waste management facilities, e.g. compactors, balers and composters.

CN10

Small industrial units See criterion 1.

For an industrial building or development consisting of a number of smaller units, each ≤ 200m2 floor area, shared facilities that meet the above criteria for the building/development as a whole are sufficient to achieve this credit.

CN11

Shopping centres and retail parks See criterion 1.

For shopping centres and retail parks there must be adequate space to cater for each tenant and their potential recyclable waste volumes. Tenants that occupy a large proportion of the centre, i.e. ‘flagship tenants’, must have their own dedicated compliant facilities. For smaller non-flagship tenant units, compliant central or common facilities on-site or dedicated spaces for individual units will meet the assessment criteria for this BREEAM issue.

Ref General

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

299

Waste

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description

Building specific CN12

Home composting information leaflet (multi-residential buildings) See criteria 4, 5, 6 and 7.

The leaflet must provide information on: How composting works and why it is important The materials that can be composted (e.g. raw vegetable peelings and fruit, shredded paper, tea bags, etc.); and Details of the operation and management plan for the communal composting scheme. Where a green/kitchen waste collection scheme is in operation, the information leaflet provided by the Local Authority is sufficient to meet the information leaflet criteria.

CN13

Multi-residential: supported living facility

Where it is not possible to locate the recycling bins within a communal area, which is accessible to residents, for safety reasons (e.g. where the residents have mental health problems and free access to these facilities would pose significant risk of self-harm or harm to others) it is acceptable to locate them within a dedicated nonobtrusive position accessible to staff only, but in close proximity to the areas where recyclable waste material is generated.

Methodology None.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Additional information Relevant definitions Accessible space Accessible space is typically within 20m of a building entrance. Depending on the size of the building, site restrictions or tenancy arrangements, it may not be possible for the facilities to be within 20m of a building entrance. In such circumstances, judgement on whether the space is ‘accessible’ to the building occupants and vehicle collection must be made. Clinical waste Waste-derived from medical practices and defined as bodily fluids and wastes, drugs and medical equipment; and other waste which, unless rendered safe, may prove hazardous or infectious to persons coming into contact with it.

300

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Wst 03 Operational waste

Waste

Dedicated non-obstructive position An easily accessible cupboard under the sink or any other cupboard in the kitchen, next to the storage or likely area for storing non-recyclable waste, where practical. Where a kitchen cupboard location is not possible the bins can be located near to the kitchen, in a utility room or connected garage, for example. Flagship or anchor tenant The largest and primary tenant within a retail development, typically department store-type retailers. Waste compactor or baler A machine that is designed to compress waste streams in order to improve storage and transport efficiency.

Other information Recyclable storage The following footprint dimensions (informed by the Metric handbook, Planning and design data) can act as a guide when determining size and accessibility criteria for the recyclable storage space: 1. Compactor dimensions: about the size of one car parking bay; 4.8 x 2.4m 2. Skip: the footprint of an 8 and 12 cubic yard skip measures 3.4m x 1.8m, therefore allow a minimum of 2.0m width and 4.0m length or 8m2 area for the storage and access of such containers 3. Wheeled bins: 360 litre = 0.86m x 0.62/660 L= 1.2m x 0.7m/1100 L = 1.28m x 0.98m 4. Roll-on-roll-off containers: allow a minimum of 6.1m x 2.4m 5. Vehicle access: the following are dimensions for lorry types that are typically used to collect waste. Therefore gate height/widths should not be smaller than these measurements: a. Dustcart: medium capacity; length = 7.4m Height = 4m width 3.1m b. Skip lorry: length = 7m Height = 3.35m width 3.1m. Consideration must also be given to any other types of vehicle requiring access to this area, e.g. lorries for roll on/off containers.

Recycling bins Individual recycling bins located at convenient locations throughout the building are necessary to maximise recycling rates.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

301

Waste

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Wst 04 Speculative floor and ceiling finishes Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Aim To encourage the specification and fitting of floor and ceiling finishes selected by the building occupant and therefore avoid unnecessary waste of materials.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

One credit - Speculative floor and ceiling finishes Office building types only 1. For tenanted areas (where the future occupant is not known), prior to full fit-out works, carpets, other floor finishes and ceiling finishes have been installed in a show area only. 2. In a building developed for a specific occupant, that occupant has selected (or agreed to) the specified floor and ceiling finishes.

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

302

Applicable assessment criteria

Option 1- Shell only: This issue is not applicable. Option 2- Shell and core: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Wst 04 Speculative floor and ceiling finishes

Ref

Terms

Waste

Description

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

General

None.

General CN3

Building specific CN4

Office: Show area See criterion 1.

A show area could be either a floor plate or an individual office. However, to award this credit it must be less than 25% of the net lettable floor area.

Methodology None.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Additional information Relevant definitions None.

Other information None.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

303

Waste

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Wst 05 Adaptation to climate change Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Aim To recognise and encourage measures taken to mitigate the impact of extreme weather conditions arising from climate change over the lifespan of the building.

Assessment criteria A number of BREEAM issues within the New Construction scheme contain assessment criteria which aim to support mitigation of the impacts of extreme weather events arising from climate change. The main credit in this issue focuses on structural and fabric resilience not covered in other issues. An Exemplary credit is awarded where a holistic approach on adaptation to climate change has been covered, demonstrated by achieving credits in other issues. The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

One credit - Adaptation to climate change – structural and fabric resilience

1. Conduct a climate change adaptation strategy appraisal for structural and fabric resilience by the end of Concept Design (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent), in accordance with the following approach: a. Carry out a systematic (structural and fabric resilience specific) risk assessment to identify and evaluate the impact on the building over its projected life cycle from expected extreme weather conditions arising from climate change and, where feasible, mitigate against these impacts. The assessment should cover the following stages: i. Hazard identification ii. Hazard assessment iii. Risk estimation iv. Risk evaluation v. Risk management.

Exemplary credit – Responding to adaptation to climate change A holistic approach to the design and construction of the current building's life cycle, to mitigate against the impacts of climate change, is represented by the achievement of these criteria. The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM issue: 2. Achievement of the Structural and fabric resilience criterion in this issue and the following criteria points or credits:

Hea 04 Thermal comfort (Link to Wst 05 issue:- to preventing increasing risks of overheating) Criterion 6 in the second credit of the Hea 04 issue has been achieved.

Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions (Link to Wst 05 issue: to maximise energy efficiency contributing to low carbon emissions resulting from increasing energy demands) At least eight credits in this issue have been achieved.

304

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Wst 05 Adaptation to climate change

Waste

Ene 04 Low carbon design (Link to Wst 05 issue: to maximise opportunities to avoid unecessary carbon emissions) The Passive design analysis credit in this issue has been achieved.

Wat 01 Water consumption (Link to Wst 05: to minimise water demands in periods of drought) A minimum of three credits in this issue have been achieved.

Mat 05 Designing for durability and resilience (Link to Wst 05 issue: to avoid increased risks of deterioration and higher maintenance demands) Criterion 2 relating to material degradation in this issue has been achieved.

Pol 03 Surface water run-off (Link to Wst 05: to minimise the risks of increased flood risk and surface water run-off affecting the site or others) Flood risk – a minimum of one credit has been achieved. Surface water run-off – two credits have been achieved.

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Adaptation to climate change – structural fabric and resilience 1. Criterion 1

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Relevant bodies See hazard identification item 1 under Methodology.

This includes but is not limited to the following:

General CN3

Local authorities Statutory bodies e.g. Defra, EA, NIEA, SEPA etc Technical bodies e.g. CIBSE, UKCIP.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

305

Waste

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Methodology Hazard identification

1. Review the evidence/information from relevant bodies to identify and understand the expected impacts of increased extreme weather events climate change for on the building. 2. Identify likely hazards (see Relevant definitions).

Hazard assessment

1. Identify the scale of the hazards identified.

Risk estimation

1. Identify the risk presented by these hazards to the building and the likely impact of the hazards taking into account the following aspects as a minimum: a. Structural stability b. Structural robustness c. Weather proofing and detailing d. Material durability e. Health and safety of building occupants and others f. Impacts on building contents and business continuity.

Risk evaluation 1. 2. 3. 4.

Evaluate the potential impact of these risks on the building. Determine the tolerable risk threshold. Check the sensitivity of the risk assessment. Identify areas where the risks are unacceptable in health and safety, life cycle assessment and financial terms.

Risk management

1. Identify risk reduction measures. 2. Mitigate the hazards as far as is practically feasible. 3. Adapt the design/specification to incorporate the measures identified by the risk assessment in the final design.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Additional information Relevant definitions Durability The ability to withstand wear, pressure, or damage. Hazard A hazard is a situation or event which has the potential to cause harm. It may be an accidental or a malicious action, insufficient strength or resistance, or excessive deviation from intended limits.

306

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Wst 05 Adaptation to climate change

Waste

Resilience The ability of a building or structural system or material to withstand an accidental or exceptional loading or other incident without experiencing an undue degree of damage or decrease in performance, such that progressive collapse, loss of performance or disproportionate degree of damage occurs. Structural and fabric resilience BREEAM defines this as the ability of a structure to withstand an increased burden of weather/increase pressure/hazards associated with climate change. Examples of increased pressures/hazards include: 1. Solar radiation 2. Temperature variation 3. Water/moisture 4. Wind 5. Precipitation e.g rain and snow 6. Extreme weather conditions: high wind speeds, flooding, driving rain, snow; rainwater ponding 7. Subsidence/ground movement. Systematic risk assessment A structured approach to help professionals identify, evaluate and manage risk, where the reduction of the risks identified is integral to the process. It includes: Identifying the hazards Eliminating the hazards, as far as reasonably practicable Reducing the risks from each hazard, aso far as reasonably practicable Developing the building design to be robust.

Other information This new BREEAM issue aims to encourage and support efforts to mitigate the future impacts of climate change on the building by considering a number of relevant factors during the design stages. BRE have avoided being overly-prescriptive with the assessment criteria in order to allow a degree of flexibility in its application and demonstrating compliance, recognising that this is a complex environmental and design issue where solutions and approaches are largely influenced by site location and building specific factors. This places a greater emphasis on the BREEAM Assessor to use their judgement in determining whether the project team and the building design has met the aim and intent of the credit and its criteria, using appropriate project information to back their judgement. BRE will endorse the BREEAM Assessor's judgement through the Quality Assurance audit where a reasonable justification to award the credit on the basis of project team actions and proposed design solutions is evident. BRE would welcome any feedback on the application of this assessment issue to assist with the evolution of the criteria and inclusion of additional guidance on compliance in future BREEAM versions. The National Adaptation Programme1 report has been drawn up by the government, industry and other non-government organisations working together. It contains a mix of policies and actions to help the UK to adapt successfully to future weather conditions, by dealing with the risks and making the most of the opportunities. The book "Design for climate change"2 describes buildings and issues as part of the Design for Future Climate, Adapting Buildings programme, the largest programme focusing on the climate change adaptation of buildings in the UK. This programme from the Technology Strategy Board (TSB) aimsto improve the climate resilience of building projects. The book has guidance on construction, including structural stability. The BRE report 3, Potential implications of climate change in the built environment, discusses climate change adaptation strategies, including some for structural resilience.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

307

Waste

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Wst 06 Functional adaptability Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Aim To recognise and encourage measures taken to accommodate future changes of use of the building over its lifespan.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

One credit - Functional adaptability

1. A building-specific functional adaptation strategy study has been undertaken by the client and design team by Concept Design (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent), which includes recommendations for measures to be incorporated to facilitate future adaptation. 2. Functional adaptation measures have been implemented (RIBA Stage 4 or equivalent) in accordance with the functional adaptation strategy recommendations, where practical and cost effective. Omissions have been justified in writing to the assessor.

Checklists and tables None

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Simple buildings CN2

308

Applicable assessment criteria

All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply..

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Wst 06 Functional adaptability

Waste

Terms

Description

CN3

Functional adaptation strategy study

This should consider: 1. The potential for major refurbishment, including replacing the faĂ§ade. 2. Design aspects that facilitate the replacement of all major plant within the life of the building e.g. panels in floors/walls that can be removed without affecting the structure, providing lifting beams and hoists. 3. The degree of adaptability of the internal environment to accommodate changes in working practices. 4. The degree of adaptability of the internal physical space and external shell to accommodate change in-use. 5. The extent of accessibility to local services, such as local power, data infrastructure etc.

CN4

Functional adaptation implementation

The implementation will be specific to the building and scope of project, but information should be made available to the assessor covering: 1. The feasibility for multiple/alternative building uses and area functions e.g.related to structural design of the building 2. Options for multiple building uses and area functions based on design details e.g. modularity 3. Routes and methods for major plant replacement e.g.networks and connections have flexibility and capacity for expansion 4. Accessibility for local plant and service distribution routes e.g.detailed information on building conduits and connections infrastructure 5. The potential for the building to be extended, horizontally and/or vertically.

Ref General

Methodology None.

Evidence Ref

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

All

Functional adaptation strategy and implementation plan report

As per interim design stage

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

309

Waste

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Additional information Relevant definitions Building functional adaptation Work to an existing building that responds to a required change of use or requirements and goes beyond maintenance and repairs. These changes solve functional problems and could provide significant improvements. The functional adaptation works could include alterations, conversions and/or extensions. Functional adaptability The ability of a building to be adapted for a change in operational requirements within the same building type or for use as a different building type.

Other information The Health Technical Memorandum 07-07 4 includes guidance on future-proofing healthcare buildings. 1National Adaptation Programme: Making the country resilient to a changing climate. Defra; 2013 2Gething B, Puckett K, Design for climate change. RIBA; 2013 3Graves HM, Phillipson MC, Potential implications of climate change in the built environment. BRE Centre for Environmental

Engineering: BRE East Kilbride; 2000 4Health Technical Memorandum 07-07: Sustainable health and social care buildings. Department of Health; 2013

310

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Land Use and Ecology

Land Use and Ecology Category overview Weightings

Minimum standards

Fully fitted 10%

Shell only 13%

Shell and core 11%

LE 03

Summary This category encourages sustainable land use, habitat protection and creation, and improvement of long term biodiversity for the building’s site and surrounding land. Issues in this section relate to the reuse of brownfield sites or those of low ecological value, mitigation and enhancement of ecology and long term biodiversity management.

Category summary table Issue ID

Issue name

Credits

Credit summary

LE 01

Site selection

Recognition of the reuse of previously developed and contaminated land where appropriate remediation has taken place.

LE 02

Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features

Recognition of the use of sites of ‘low ecological value’, and the protection of existing features prior to and during site operations.

LE 03

Minimising impact on existing site ecology

Recognition of steps taken to avoid impacts on existing site ecology.

LE 04

Enhancing site ecology

Recognition of steps taken to enhance site ecology through the advice of a suitably qualified ecologist.

LE 05

Long term impact on biodiversity

The production of a long term landscape and habitat management plan to encourage measures that improve the sites long term biodiversity.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

311

Land use

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

LE 01 Site selection Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Aim To encourage the use of previously occupied and/or contaminated land and avoid land which has not been previously disturbed.

Assessment criteria This issue is split into two parts: Previously occupied land (1 credit) Contaminated land (1 credit) The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

One credit - Previously occupied land

1. At least 75% of the proposed development’s footprint is on an area of land which has previously been occupied by industrial, commercial or domestic buildings or fixed surface infrastructure.

One credit - Contaminated land

2. A contaminated land specialist’s site investigation, risk assessment and appraisal has deemed land within the site to be affected by contamination. The site investigation, risk assessment and appraisal have identified: a. The degree of contamination b. The contaminant sources/types c. The options for remediating sources of contamination which present an unacceptable risk. 3. The client or principal contractor confirms that remediation of the site will be carried out in accordance with the remediation strategy and its implementation plan as recommended by the contaminated land specialist.

Checklists and tables None.

312

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

LE 01 Site selection

Land Use and Ecology

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN3

Temporary works See criterion 1.

Undeveloped areas of the site to be used for temporary works (e.g. temporary offices/parking, material/machinery storage) must be considered as development on undeveloped land and therefore included in the calculations unless they have been defined as ‘land of low ecological value’ (LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features).

CN4

Infill development See criterion 1.

New buildings developed within the boundary of existing sites do not automatically comply with the reuse of land criteria. At least 75% of the land on which the new building will be sited must meet the definition of 'previously occupied' (for prisons, refer to the building type specific compliance note below).

CN5

Prior decontamination See criteria 2 and 3.

The credit for use of contaminated land can only be awarded where remediation has taken place to enable development of the site for the assessed building, or a larger phased development that includes the assessed building (see below). The credit is not achievable for instances where historical remediation and development of the site has occurred outside the scope of the current development proposals.

CN6

Large sites split into smaller plots See criteria 2 and 3.

Where contamination of a large site has been remediated and has then been packaged up into smaller plots of land for individual buildings (possibly as part of a phased development strategy), the credit can be awarded regardless of the plot location of the assessed building within the wider development plan. This is on the condition that the site could not have been developed without remediation work taking place.

CN7

Health and safety related decontamination See criteria 2 and 3.

Contaminated land that has been decontaminated solely for health and safety reasons (rather than for the specific purpose of re-development) does not comply.

General

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

313

Land use

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Terms

Description

CN8

Asbestos See criteria 2 and 3.

Where the only remediation required is the removal of asbestos within an existing building fabric, the site cannot be classified as contaminated land. However, where asbestos is found to be present in the ground this will be classed as contamination for the purposes of assessing this issue.

Building specific CN9

Education (schools only) Playing fields See criterion 1.

Development of a playing field within the construction zone can be counted as development on previously occupied land only if an equivalent area of playing field is reinstated within one year of the completed construction works; and where such reinstatement will not encroach on land of high ecological value as defined in BREEAM issue LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features

CN10

Prisons See criterion 1.

All land within a secure perimeter fence on an existing prison-site can be classified as previously occupied land. Therefore assessments of buildings located within this area will achieve the credit. If the secure perimeter fence of a prison is being extended to accommodate the proposed building, or the proposed building is located on a completely new site, then the building must comply with the assessment criteria defined above.

Methodology None.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

A copy of the remediation strategy and implementation plan

As per interim design stage

Additional information Relevant definitions Construction zone For the purpose of this BREEAM issue the construction zone is defined as any land on the site which is being developed (and therefore disturbed) for buildings, hard standing, soft landscape, site access, plus a 3m wide zone measured outward from the boundary. It also includes any areas used for temporary site storage and buildings. If it is not known exactly where buildings, hard standing, site access and temporary storage will be located it must be assumed that the construction zone is the entire site.

314

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

LE 01 Site selection

Land Use and Ecology

Contaminated land specialist An individual that holds a degree or equivalent qualification in chemistry, environmental science/management, earth sciences, civil engineering or a related subject, and has a minimum of three years relevant experience (within the last five years) in site investigation, risk assessment and appraisal. Such experience must clearly demonstrate a practical knowledge of site investigation methodologies and understanding of remediation techniques and national legislation on the subject; as well as acting in an advisory capacity to provide recommendations for remediation. Land affected by contamination Land that could not be legally or safely developed/built on to the proposed end use without the remediation of contamination. Contamination is defined as any substance or agent in, or on the ground within the construction zone, which presents an unacceptable risk to human health, property and/or the environment. For the purposes of BREEAM, substances or agents that could present unacceptable contamination risks are defined as those that act as a barrier to the development of land, which could include certain plant species such as, but not limited to, Japanese Knotweed and Giant Hogweed. Previously occupied land For the purposes of this issue BREEAM defines previously occupied land as that which is or was occupied by a permanent structure, including any associated fixed surface infrastructure (the definition is based on the National Planning Policy Framework1 definition of Previously Developed Land). The definition excludes: 1. Land that is or has been occupied by agricultural or forestry buildings. 2. Land that has been developed for minerals extraction or waste disposal by landfill purposes where provision for restoration has been made through development control procedures. 3. Land in built-up areas such as parks, recreation grounds and allotments which, although they may feature paths, pavilions and other buildings, have not been previously occupied. 4. Land that was previously occupied but where the remains of the permanent structure or fixed surface structure have blended into the landscape in the process of time (to the extent that it can reasonably be considered as part of the natural surroundings). Proposed development Any development (building, hard landscaping, car park and access roads) that falls within the boundary of the assessed site. Remediation Any activity undertaken to prevent, minimise, remedy or mitigate the risk caused by contaminated land to human health, the environment or local resources such as sources of potable water.

Other information None. 1National Planning Policy Framework. www.gov.uk/government/publications/national-planning-policy-framework--2

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

315

Land use

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Aim To encourage development on land that already has limited value to wildlife and to protect existing ecological features from substantial damage during site preparation and completion of construction works.

Assessment criteria This issue is split into two parts: Ecological value of site (1 credit) Protection of ecological features (1 credit) The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

One credit - Ecological value of site

1. Land within the construction zone is defined as ‘land of low ecological value’ using either: a. The BREEAM checklist for defining land of low ecological value (see Checklists and tables below); OR b. A Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) who has identified the land as being of ‘low ecological value’ within an ecological assessment report, based on a site survey.

One credit - Protection of ecological features

2. All existing features of ecological value within and surrounding the construction zone and site boundary area are adequately protected from damage during clearance, site preparation and construction activities in line with BS42020: 2013 1. 3. In all cases, the principal contractor is required to construct ecological protection recommended by the SQE, prior to any preliminary site construction or preparation works (e.g. clearing of the site or erection of temporary site facilities).

316

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features

Land Use and Ecology

Checklists and tables BREEAM checklist for defining land of low ecological value If the answer to all questions in the checklist is ‘no’, the land can be defined as having a low ecological value and the credit awarded. Should any of the questions be answered ‘yes’, the credit can only be awarded on confirmation from a Suitably Qualified Ecologist that the site is of low ecological value. The checklist should be completed by either the BREEAM Assessor, using appropriate evidence submitted by the design team or completed by the design team and submitted to the assessor along with appropriate supporting evidence. The answers to the checklist must be based on an evaluation of the site prior to any site clearance or construction activities (refer to Compliance notes for further details). Table - 52: BREEAM checklist for defining land of low ecological value ID

Question

Yes

Has the Planning Authority required that an ecological survey or statement be prepared?

□

Is the development within 2km of a Special Area of Conservation (SAC), Special Protection Area (SPA) or Ramsar site? 1. www.natureonthemap.org.uk 2. www.magic.gov.uk 3. Local Plan Proposals Map.

□

Is the development within 500m of a Site of Special Scientific Interest (SSSI) 1. www.natureonthemap.org.uk 2. www.magic.gov.uk 3. Local Plan Proposals Map.

□

Are any of the following habitats present on, or within 100m of the construction zone? 1. Broad-leaved woodland* 2. Water courses (rivers, streams or canals) ** 3. Wetlands (ponds, lakes, marshland, fenland, reed bed) 4. Flower-rich meadow/grassland 5. Heathland (habitat/plants that thrive on acidic soils, such as heather and gorse).

□

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

317

Land use

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Question

Are any of the following features present within or on the boundary of the construction zone? 1. Trees of ecological value (see definition of 'Features of ecological value') 2. Mature hedgerow (field hedgerows over 1m tall and 0.5m wide)*** 3. Existing buildings (occupied or derelict) with either pitched tile, slate or shingle roofs, lofts, wall hanging tiles, weatherboarding or dense climbing plants, soffits and cellars, basements, ice houses etc.

Yes

□

Notes: * The Countryside Survey defines woodland as ‘having over 25% canopy cover of trees and shrubs, over a metre high’. Broad-leaved woodland should be taken to mean broad-leaved, mixed and Yew woodland. ** The Countryside Survey defines the broad habitats of rivers and streams as running watercourses ranging from small headwater streams to large rivers. This broad habitat, along with wetlands, includes the open water itself and the vegetation along the water’s edge. *** The Countryside Survey defines a hedge as ‘a line of woody vegetation that has been subject to management so that trees no longer take their natural shape.’ http://www.countrysidesurvey.org.uk

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

No features of ecological value See criterion 2.

Where there are no features of ecological value, the credit for the protection of ecological features can only be awarded if the construction zone is defined as ‘land of low ecological value’.

General CN3

318

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features

Land Use and Ecology

Ref

Terms

Description

CN4

Use of a Suitably Qualified Ecologist See criterion 1.

Where a Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) is employed and has, using their professional judgement, defined the site as land of low ecological value, this assessment/judgement overrides any assessment determined using the BREEAM checklist for defining land of low ecological value. The Suitably Qualified Ecologist must base their findings on data collected from a site visit conducted at appropriate time(s) of the year, when different plant and animal species are evident. The content of the Ecology Report is to be representative of the existing site’s ecology prior to the commencement of initial site preparation works (i.e. before RIBA Stage 5 Construction). Where the ecologist has not visited the site at the appropriate times the credit cannot be awarded (except in the circumstances indicated below in the Compliance note 'Site clearance prior to purchase of the site'). See Additional information for the BREEAM definition of a Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE).

CN5

Features of little or no ecological value See criterion 1.

If a Suitably Qualified Ecologist has confirmed that a feature present on the site has little or no ecological value (see Relevant Definitions), or where a tree is deemed to create a significant danger to the public or occupants by a statutory body or qualified arboriculturalist, then that feature may be exempt from the 'protection of ecological features' requirement of this issue.

CN6

Prior removal of features of ecological value

If features of ecological value have been removed as part of the site clearance activities then the development cannot achieve the credits, even if they are to be replaced as part of a new soft landscape strategy.

CN7

Site clearance prior to purchase of the site See criteria 1 and 2.

For sites cleared prior to purchase of the site and less than five years before assessment, a Suitably Qualified Ecologist should estimate the site’s ecological value immediately prior to clearance using available desktop information (including aerial photography) and the landscape type/area surrounding the site. Where it is not possible for the ecologists to determine that the site was of low ecological value prior to the site clearance then the credits must be withheld, i.e. where there is no evidence and therefore justification for awarding the credits. For sites cleared more than five years ago, the ecological value of the site is to be based on the current situation on the basis that within five years, ecological features would have started to re-establish themselves and therefore act as an indicator of the site’s ecological value.

CN8

Verification of a report written by an ecologist not meeting the BREEAM SQE criteria See criterion 1b.

Where a Suitably Qualified Ecologist is verifying an Ecology Report produced by another ecologist who does not meet the SQE criteria, they must, as a minimum, review the report and confirm in writing that they have found it to: 1. Represent sound industry practice. 2. Report and recommend correctly, truthfully and objectively. 3. Be appropriate given the local site conditions and scope of works proposed. 4. Avoid invalid, biased and exaggerated statements. Additionally, written confirmation from the third party verifier that they comply with the definition of a Suitably Qualified Ecologist is required.

Methodology None.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

319

Land use

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Where a Suitably Qualified Ecologist is not employed: BREEAM checklist for defining land of low ecological value.

As per interim design stage.

Additional information Relevant definitions Construction zone As defined for BREEAM issue LE 01 Site selection. Ecology related subject Depending on the ecological content (minimum 60%), the following degrees might be considered relevant: Ecology, Biological Sciences, Zoology, Botany, Countryside Management, Environmental Sciences, Marine and Freshwater Management, Earth Sciences, Agriculture, Forestry, Geography, Landscape Management. Features of ecological value Features requiring protection during site clearance and construction in accordance with BS 42020: 2013 to maintain their presence and ecological value, which include as a minimum: 1. Trees determined to be of value using one of the following measures: a. More than 10 years old (or where age is unknown where the trunk diameter is over 100mm) b. Tree of significant ecological value (as defined by BS 5837: 2012 2 and confirmed by the Suitably Qualified Ecologist or qualified arboriculturalist). 2. Hedges and natural areas requiring protection. 3. Watercourses and wetland areas. Note: Where a tree is deemed to create a significant danger to the public or occupants by a statutory body or qualified arboriculturalist, then that feature may be exempt from the 'protection of ecological features' requirement of this issue. Peer review A peer review is defined as the process employed by a professional body to demonstrate that potential or current full members maintain a standard of knowledge and experience required to ensure compliance with a code of conduct and professional ethics.

320

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features

Land Use and Ecology

Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) An individual achieving all the following items can be considered to be 'suitably qualified' for the purposes of compliance with BREEAM: 1. Holds a degree or equivalent qualification (e.g. N/SVQ level 5) in ecology or a related subject. 2. Is a practising ecologist, with a minimum of three years relevant experience (within the last five years). Such experience must clearly demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting ecology in relation to construction and the built environment; including acting in an advisory capacity to provide recommendations for ecological protection, enhancement and mitigation measures. Examples of relevant experience are: ecological impact assessments; Preliminary Ecological Appraisals (PEA); Phase 2 habitat and fauna surveys; and habitat creation. 3. Is covered by a professional code of conduct and subject to peer review. Full members of the following organisations, who meet the above criteria, are deemed Suitably Qualified Ecologists for the purposes of BREEAM: a. Chartered Institution of Water and Environmental Management (CIWEM) b. Chartered Institute of Ecology and Environmental Management (CIEEM) c. Institute of Environmental Management and Assessment (IEMA) d. Landscape Institute (LI) e. The Institution of Environmental Sciences (IES).

Other information Very often there is the potential for a site to increase its biodiversity value through appropriate design and management, regardless of whether enhancing biodiversity is required to gain planning consent. This BREEAM assessment issue provides the opportunity to reward those projects that contribute to protecting and enhancing biodiversity, improve living environments and meet environmental objectives. While not mandatory, BREEAM recommends that a Suitably Qualified Ecologist is appointed to ensure that a project maximise biodiversity gains. Although a large number of developments are not required to undertake formal ecological assessments as part of the planning process because of the nature of the existing site, they may have potential to be of biodiversity value. Verification of this is best achieved by the appointment of a Suitably Qualified Ecologist. The Suitably Qualified Ecologist’s recommendations may impact on specifications worked-up by other design team members, such as landscape architects or drainage engineers. BREEAM recommends that collaborative input between the ecologist and relevant professionals is sought from the concept stage of the development to highlight opportunities and constraints and allow effective integration of these aspects into the ecologist’s recommendations. Organisations and institutes, including the Chartered Institute of Ecology and Environmental Management (CIEEM) and the Association of Wildlife Trust Consultancies (AWTC), provide lists of ecologists working within a particular region that may meet the SQE requirements.

Relating Ecology Reports to BREEAM Guidance on relating ecology reports to BREEAM was provided in BREEAM New Construction 2011 Appendix F. This information will be available in a Guidance Note to be provided on the BREEAM website. 1BS 42020: 2013: Biodiversity - Code of Practice for Planning and Development, BSI 2013 2BS 5837: 2012: Trees in relation to design, demolition and construction - Recommendations, BSI 2012

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

321

Land use

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

LE 03 Minimising impact on existing site ecology Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Yes

Aim To minimise the impact of a building development on existing site ecology.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

Two credits - Change in ecological value 1

1. The change in ecological value of the site is equal to or greater than zero plant species, i.e. no negative change, using the methods outlined in either (a) or (b) below: a. Determine the following information and input this data in to the BREEAM LE 03/LE 04 calculator: i. The broad habitat type(s) that define the landscape of the assessed site in its existing pre-developed state and proposed state (see Table - 53). ii. Area (m2) of the existing and proposed broad habitat types. OR b. Where a Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) has been appointed and, based on their site survey, they confirm the following and either the assessor or ecologist inputs this data in to the BREEAM LE 03/LE 04 calculator: i. The broad habitat types that define the landscape of the assessed site in its existing pre-developed state and proposed state. ii. Area (m2) of the existing and proposed broad habitat plot types. iii. Average total taxon (plant species) richness within each habitat type.

One credit - Change in ecological value 2

2. Where the change in ecological value of the site is less than zero but equal to or greater than minus nine plant species i.e. a minimal change, use the methods outlined in either 1(a) or (b) above.

322

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

LE 03 Minimising impact on existing site ecology

Land Use and Ecology

Checklists and tables Table - 53: Broad habitat types (Source: Countryside Survey 2007) Broad habitat type

Description

Acid grassland

Vegetation dominated by grasses and herbs on a range of lime-deficient soils which have been derived from acidic bedrock or from superficial deposits such as sands and gravels. They characteristically include a range of calcifuge or ‘lime-avoiding’ plants.

Arable and horticultural

Includes all arable crops such as different types of cereal and vegetable crops, together with orchards and more specialist operations such as market gardening and commercial flower growing. Freshly ploughed land, fallow areas, short term set-aside and annual grass leys are also included in this category.

Boundary and linear features

This habitat includes a diverse range of linearly arranged landscape features such as hedgerows, lines of trees (whether they are part of a hedgerow or not), walls, stone and earth banks, grass strips and dry ditches. These features may occur separately or in combinations forming multielement boundaries. This habitat type also includes some of the built components of the rural landscape, including roads, tracks and railways. The narrow strips of semi-natural vegetation along verges or cuttings are also included.

Bracken

Stands of vegetation greater than 0.25ha in extent which are dominated by a continuous canopy cover (> 95% cover) of bracken (Pteridium aquilinum) at the height of the growing season.

Built-up and gardens

Covers urban and rural settlements, farm buildings, caravan parks and other man-made built structures such as industrial estates, retail parks, waste and derelict ground, urban parkland and urban transport infrastructure. It also includes domestic gardens and allotments. This category has been split in to three individual broad habitat categories for the purpose of BREEAM: 1. Gardens, allotments and urban parkland 2. Built-up (maintained buildings and infrastructure) 3. Derelict land (where the land was previously used for major historical industrial use or development). This split is to reflect the differing impact of development in these types of habitats.

Broad-leaved, mixed and yew woodland

This form of woodland is dominated by trees that are more than 5m high when mature, which form a distinct, although sometimes open, canopy with a cover of greater than 20%. It includes stands of native broad-leaved trees (such as oak, ash and beech), non-native broad-leaved trees (such as sycamore and horse chestnut), and yew trees, where the percentage cover of these trees in the stand exceeds 20% of the total cover of the trees present. Scrub vegetation, where the woody component tends to be mainly shrubs (usually less than 5m high), is included if the cover of woody species is greater than 30%.

Calcareous grassland

Vegetation dominated by grasses and herbs on shallow, well-drained soils, which are alkaline, as a result of the weathering of chalk, limestone or other types of base-rich rock. They characteristically include a range of calcicoles or ‘lime-loving’ plants.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

323

Land use

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Broad habitat type

Description

Coniferous woodland

Dominated by trees that are more than 5m high when mature, which form a distinct, although sometimes open, canopy which has a cover of greater than 20%. It includes stands of both native conifers (Scots pine but not yew) and non-native conifers (such as larch and Sitka spruce) where the percentage cover of these trees in the stand exceeds 80% of the total cover of the trees present.

Mixed woodland

This is not a category in its own right, but has been included separately by BRE Global for clarification. Many areas of woodland contain both broad-leaved and coniferous trees. There is not a separate Broad habitat type for mixed woodland. Instead where mixtures occur they are assigned to the broad-leaved, mixed and yew woodland habitat type if the proportion of conifers is less than 80%. The separation of coniferous from broad-leaved, mixed and yew habitat is applied at a stand or sub-compartment level within large woodlands to avoid areas that are predominantly coniferous being treated as mixed because they are part of a larger wood, of which 20% consists of pure broad-leaved trees. Therefore, most areas of mixed woodland that are assigned to the broad-leaved, mixed and yew woodland habitat type would normally have much more than 20% broad-leaved or yew trees.

Dwarf shrub heath

Vegetation that has a greater than 25% cover of plant species from the heath family or dwarf gorse species. It generally occurs on well-drained, nutrient-poor, acid soils.

Improved grassland

Occurs on fertile soils and is characterised by the dominance of a few fast-growing species, such as rye grass and white clover. These grasslands are typically used for grazing and silage, but they can also be managed for recreational purposes. They are often intensively managed using fertiliser and weed control treatments, and may also be ploughed as part of the normal rotation of arable crops but if so, they are only included in this Broad habitat type if they are more than one year old.

Inland rock

Habitat types that occur on both natural and artificial exposed rock surfaces, such as inland cliffs, caves, screes and limestone pavements, as well as various forms of excavations and waste tips, such as quarries and quarry waste.

Neutral grassland

Found on soils that are neither very acid nor alkaline. They support different types of vegetation communities compared to acid and calcareous grasslands in that they do not contain calcifuge (‘lime-avoiding’) plants which are found on acid soils, or calcicole (lime-loving) plants which are found on calcareous soils. Unimproved or semi-improved Neutral grasslands may be managed as hay meadows, pastures or for silage. They differ from Improved grassland in that they are less fertile and contain a wider range of herb and grass species. Usually the cover of rye grass is less than about 25%.

324

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

LE 03 Minimising impact on existing site ecology

Land Use and Ecology

Table - 54: Inclusive analysis of average total taxon richness by broad habitat in ‘Fields and Other Main Land Cover Parcels plots’ in Great Britain. Broad habitat type

Previously undeveloped land

Previously developed land (within broad habitat type)** & **** (Time period that the site has been unoccupied/unmaintained and therefore derelict)

Average total taxon (plant species) richness* < 5 Years

5-10 Years

10 - 20 Years

20 30+Years

Acid grassland

19.58

5.87

14.69

19.58

Arable and horticultural land

10.25

Boundary and linear features

15.42

Bracken

19.29

Built-up (buildings and infrastructure)**&***

Calcareous grassland

43.02

12.91

32.27

43.02

Coniferous woodland

14.05

6.00

14.99

19.99

Gardens, allotments and urban parkland***

19.99

6.00

14.99

19.99

Dwarf shrub heath

15.87

4.76

11.90

15.87

Improved grassland

14.28

4.28

10.71

14.28

Inland rock

16.74

Mixed, broad-leaved and yew woodland

20.91

Neutral grassland

20.44

6.13

15.33

20.44

Derelict land**

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

325

Land use

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Broad habitat type

Previously undeveloped land

Previously developed land (within broad habitat type)** & **** (Time period that the site has been unoccupied/unmaintained and therefore derelict)

Average total taxon (plant species) richness* Source: Acknowledgement - Countryside Survey data owned by NERC – Centre for Ecology and Hydrology. Countryside Survey © Database Right/Copyright NERC– Centre for Ecology and Hydrology. All rights reserved. *Total taxon richness is higher plant species only, no bryophytes (non flowering plants). Figures are based on the average species richness per 200m2 plot. **The derelict land and built-up figures are not from the Countryside Survey data (see Additional information). ***BRE Global has split the 'Built-up and gardens' Countryside Survey category into these headings to reflect the differing impact of building on these types of land. ****The ecological value of derelict sites is time dependent; a linear scale has been used to determine intermediate values between zero ecological value, where development occurs within 5 years from the end of occupation and maintenance works, and the value at 30 years based on the full species richness for the relevant broad habitat. This presents a minimum figure which can be amended on the advice of a Suitably Qualified Ecologist and their site survey.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN3

Assessment of a single development on a larger site

Where the assessment is of a single building that forms part of a larger development and the soft landscape and ecological features form a common part of the whole site, for the purpose of assessing this issue the broad habitat types for the entire site must be used.

CN4

Infill developments on existing occupied site

Where a new building is an infill on an existing occupied site, then the construction zone for the new building would be the area of site assessed for the purposes of this issue.

General

326

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

LE 03 Minimising impact on existing site ecology

Land Use and Ecology

Ref

Terms

Description

CN5

Site clearance prior to purchase of the site

Refer to BREEAM issue LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features – Compliance notes

CN6

Green roofs/walls See criterion 1b.

The contribution of plant species on a green roof can only be incorporated within the calculation where a Suitably Qualified Ecologist has been appointed to advise on suitable plant species for the roof. Presently green walls cannot be considered compliant within this BREEAM issue due to concerns over high maintenance requirements which are often not selfsupporting/sustainable, resulting in deterioration of these plants. If the assessor feels that the green wall specified meets the aims of this issue and will be selfsustaining, details can be sent to BRE Global for consideration. Ground planted plants trained up a framework supported by the building would be acceptable (confirmed by the SQE) as these are not so dependent on systems and maintenance.

Methodology Calculating the change in ecological value for a site The change in ecological value is determined by measuring the diversity (species richness and cover) of plants on the site immediately before site clearance/preparation and after construction of the assessed development. The ecological value is expressed as an area-weighted average of plant species richness for the site’s broad habitat types. This enables BREEAM to use plant species as an indicator of the development’s impact on the site’s existing ecological value. A simple example of the calculation is outlined below. 1. Calculate the ecological value of a previously developed existing site: A 2065m2 existing site consists of the following types of land and, using data from the table above, plant species richness: 1. a. 1865m2 hard landscape = 0 species b. 200m2 urban parkland = 19.99 species The ecological value of the site in its existing condition is calculated as follows, for each broad habitat type; Number of species on broad habitat type x broad habitat type area as % of total area. Therefore, for the example site: 1. a. Hard landscape: {(0 species x (1865m2/2065m2)} = 0 b. Urban parkland: {(19.99 species x (200m2/2065m2)} = 1.94 c. Ecological value of the existing site = 0 + 1.94 = 1.94

Calculate the ecological value of the site in its proposed, post-developed state The 2065m2 post construction-site consists of the following types of land: a. 1375m2 of building = 0 species. b. 550m2 of hard landscape = 0 species c. 140m2 has remained as urban parkland = 19.99 species

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

327

Land use

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

The ecological value of the proposed site is as follows: a. b. c. d.

Building: {(0 species x (1375m2/2065m2)} = 0 Hard landscape: {(0 species x (550m2/2065m2)} = 0 Urban parkland: {(19.99 species x (140m2/2065m2)} = 1.36 Ecological value of the proposed site = 0 + 0 + 1.36 = 1.36

The ecological impact is the difference between the two ecological values: a. Change in ecological value: 1.36 (after) – 1.94 (before) = - 0.58 Therefore, as the ecological value has decreased by no less than minus nine, for this example one credit can be awarded.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

1, 2

Where relevant: A completed copy of the BREEAM LE 03/LE 04 calculator

As per interim design stage. For large mixed use/multi-building developments, where the whole site has not been completed and ecological enhancements have not yet been added, or where features are being added at a later date in an appropriate planting season: Evidence from the client or principal contractor confirming planting will be completed within 18 months from completion of the development.

1, 2

Documentary evidence supporting the data used to complete the calculator tool.

As per interim design stage

Additional information Relevant definitions Average total taxon (plant species richness) The ecological value of a site expressed as an area weighted average of plant species richness for a site's broad habitat types. Note: BREEAM uses plant species richness as an indicative measure of ecological value of the assessed site and therefore an indication of ecological impact resulting from its development. Construction zone Refer to BREEAM issue LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features. Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) Refer to BREEAM issue LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features.

328

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

LE 03 Minimising impact on existing site ecology

Land Use and Ecology

Other information See LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features ‘Other information’ for information that also applies to LE 03 Minimising impact on existing site ecology. Where green roofs are specified The GRO Green Roof Code1 provides guidance on green roof design, installation and maintenance and maximising their environmental benefits.

Countryside Survey (2007) data The data used in this BREEAM issue has been obtained from the Countryside Survey 2007 tables; www.countrysidesurvey.org.uk Broad habitat definitions have been sourced from: www.countrysidesurvey.org.uk Some of the Countryside Survey broad habitat data have not been used within this BREEAM issue either because the broad habitat supports no taxon richness or because it is unlikely that buildings will be constructed within these habitat types e.g. bog, fen etc.

BREEAM assumptions In order to use the Countryside Survey data within BREEAM, BRE Global has made the following assumptions: 1. Built-up (maintained buildings and hard landscaping) have a plant species richness of zero. 2. The previously developed land category is relevant for derelict sites within a broad habitat type where plant species found in that habitat are likely to reclaim the site if left to do so over a defined period of time. BRE Global has assumed this is the case for land found within the grassland, heath, derelict, gardens, allotments and urban parkland habitats. It has not been assumed for other categories as BRE Global is unable to confirm an appropriate period over which planting will re-establish itself on derelict land within these other broad habitat types. 3. A period of 5 to 10, 10 to 20 and 20 to 30 year’s dereliction is used; the species richness figures against each period for a particular habitat type are based on a re-establishment rate of 30% of richness, 75% and 100% respectively. 4. BRE Global has split the ‘Built-up and gardens’ category from the Countryside Survey into ‘Gardens, allotments and urban parkland’, ‘Derelict’ and ‘Built-up’ habitat types. This split is to reflect the differing impact of building on this type of land. 1The GRO Green Roof Code: Green Roof Code of Practice for the UK 2011, Groundwork Sheffield.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

329

Land use

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

LE 04 Enhancing site ecology Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Building type dependent

Aim To encourage actions taken to enhance the ecological value of the site as a result of development.

Assessment criteria This issue is split into three parts: Ecologist's report and recommendations (1 credit) Increase in ecological value (1 credit) Simple buildings specific (1 credit) The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

One credit - Ecologist's report and recommendations (Except buildings on HM Prison-sites where two credits are available for compliance with criteria 1, 2 and 3) 1. A suitably qualified ecologist (SQE) has been appointed by the client or their project representative by the end of the Preparation and Brief stage (RIBA Stage 1 or equivalent) to advise on enhancing the ecology of the site at an early stage. 2. The SQE has provided an Ecology Report with appropriate recommendations for the enhancement of the site’s ecology at Concept Design stage (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent). The report is based on a site visit/survey by the SQE (see also CN4). 3. The early stage advice and recommendations of the Ecology Report for the enhancement of site ecology have been, or will be, implemented in the final design and build.

One credit - Increase in ecological value (All building types except those on HM Prison-sites) 4. The criteria of the first credit are met. 5. The recommendations of the Ecology Report for the enhancement of site ecology have been implemented in the final design and build, and the SQE confirms that this will result in an increase in ecological value of the site, with an increase of six plant species or greater (refer also to Compliance note CN8 for alternative means of compliance). 6. The increase in plant species has been calculated using the BREEAM LE 03/LE 04 calculator, using actual plant species numbers.

OR One credit - Simple buildings only (see also CN2)

7. The project team has sought recommendations from recognised ‘local’ ecological expertise and generic guidance in the form of published guidance documents, information leaflets to inform the adoption of locally relevant ecological measures that enhance the ecological value of the site. These measures may include: a. Planting of native species or those with a known attraction or benefit to local wildlife b. Adoption of horticultural good practice (e.g. no or low use of residual pesticides) c. Installation of bird, bat and/or insect boxes at appropriate locations on the site. Only native floral species or those with a known attraction or benefit to local wildlife can be considered for the purpose of enhancing the ecological value of the site.

330

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

LE 04 Enhancing site ecology

Land Use and Ecology

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

Criteria 1 to 6 are applicable (2 credits) OR Criterion 7 is applicable (1 credit)

CN2.1

Local expertise See criterion 7.

The following clarifies the requirement for criterion 7. Guidance may be sought from bodies such as The Wildlife Trusts, the Royal Horticultural Society, etc. to inform the adoption of locally relevant ecological measures that enhance the ecological value of the site.

CN3

Early stage involvement from the SQE See criterion 1.

The role of the SQE during the Preparation and Brief stage (RIBA Stage 1 or equivalent) will be to advise on early stage site layout and development density decisions so that opportunities to enhance site ecology are maximised. SQE involvement at the Concept Design stage (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent) will be necessary to provide more detailed ecological recommendations (see Definitions) based on the outline design.

CN4

Timing of ecologist's survey and report See criterion 2.

The suitably qualified ecologist must carry out site surveys of existing site ecology, on which their report is based (or to provide verification where the report is prepared by others) at the Concept Design stage (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent) in order to facilitate and maximise potential ecological enhancement.

CN5

Appropriate recommendations See criterion 2.

Appropriate recommendations for enhancing the ecological value of the site are to include, and go beyond, compliance criteria for all current EU and UK legislation relating to protected species and habitats. These recommendations may include ecological recommendations as detailed in the Relevant Definitions.

General

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

331

Land use

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Terms

Description

CN6

Guidance for ecologists and assessors

Guidance on relating ecology reports to BREEAM was provided in BREEAM New Construction 2011 Appendix F. This information will be available in a Guidance Note to be provided on the BREEAM website.

CN7

Plant species See criterion 5.

Native floral or plant species contributing to local, regional and/or UK Priority Species/Habitats, or those species specified by the SQE with a known attraction or benefit to local wildlife can be considered for the purpose of increasing the number of species on-site, as well as general enhancement.The planting area, density and mixture of different species must be specified with input from both the SQE and the landscape architect (where employed), to address the following three points: The enhancement of the ecological value of the site The best possible chance of establishment and long term survival of the species within the habitat Links to and support of the local ecosystem beyond the site boundary.

CN8

Increase in ecological value See criterion 5.

BREEAM uses plant species richness as an indicative measure of ecological value of the assessed site. The second credit is achieved on the basis that an increase in ecological value post development is achieved, compared to the value of the site pre-development. Where the SQE identifies that an increase in the ecological value of the site can be achieved without meeting the target of an increase of six plant species the credit can be awarded if there is clear justification which addresses the following three points: The enhancement of the ecological value of the site The best possible chance of establishment and long term survival of the species within the habitat Links to and support of the local ecosystem beyond the site boundary. The BREEAM Assessor must rely on the professional judgement of the SQE when determining compliance on this issue.

CN9

Infill construction on existing sites with limited space for ecological enhancements or overriding security requirements See criterion 1.

Where it is not possible to implement ecological enhancements within the construction zone due to overriding security issues, or where space for ecological enhancements within the zone is severely limited, ecological enhancements made to other areas of the site can be taken into account and used to determine the number of BREEAM credits achieved. These enhancements must be made within the boundary of the wider existing development and be planned and commissioned on a similar timescale to the assessed development. Examples of instances where this Compliance note may apply include new ‘infill’ building developments within existing HM Prison-sites, further and higher education campuses, mental health establishments, retail or business parks.

Methodology For the methodology used to calculate the increase in plant species refer to the Methodology section in BREEAM issue LE 03 Minimising impact on existing site ecology – Methodology

332

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

LE 04 Enhancing site ecology

Land Use and Ecology

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

A completed copy of the BREEAM LE 03/LE 04 calculator

As per interim design stage. For large mixed use or multi-building developments, where the whole site has not been completed and ecological enhancements have not yet been added, or where features are being added at a later date in an appropriate planting season: evidence from the client or principal contractor confirming any planting will be completed within 18 months from completion of the development.

Documentary evidence supporting the data used to complete the calculator tool.

As per interim design stage.

Refer to generic evidence requirement above

For large mixed use or multi-building developments, where the whole site has not been completed and ecological enhancements have not yet been added, or where features are being added at a later date in an appropriate planting season: evidence from the client or principal contractor confirming any planting will be completed within 18 months from completion of the development.

Additional information Relevant definitions Ecological recommendations Ecological recommendations are defined as measures adopted to enhance the ecology of the site. Measures may include but are not limited to: 1. The planting of locally appropriate native species or non-native species with a known attraction or benefit to local wildlife. 2. The adoption of horticultural good practice (e.g. no, or low, use of residual pesticides). 3. The installation of bird, bat and/or insect boxes at appropriate locations on the site. 4. Development of a full Biodiversity Management Plan including avoiding clearance/works at key times of the year (e.g. breeding seasons). 5. The proper integration, design and maintenance of Sustainable Drainage systems (SUDs) (such as rain gardens), green roofs, green walls, community orchards, community allotments etc.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

333

Land use

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) Refer to BREEAM issue LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features.

Other information Flora Locale (www.floralocale.org) may be a useful site for finding suppliers of British flora. Biological Records Centres and the National Biological Network collate data on species findings for the UK. Design teams, assessors and ecologists can support the collation of species data by providing survey records from the assessed development to the local Biological Records Centre (www.brc.ac.uk/irecord) or nationally to the National Biological Network.

334

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

LE 05 Long term impact on biodiversity

Land Use and Ecology

LE 05 Long term impact on biodiversity Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Aim To minimise the long term impact of the development on the site and the surrounding areaâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s biodiversity.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

Up to two credits

1. Where a Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) is appointed prior to commencement of activities on-site and they confirm that all relevant UK and EU legislation relating to the protection and enhancement of ecology has been complied with during the design and construction process. 2. Where a landscape and habitat management plan, appropriate to the site, is produced covering at least the first five years after project completion in accordance with BS 42020:2013 1 Section 11.1. This is to be handed over to the building owner/occupants for use by the grounds maintenance staff. 3. Where additional measures to improve the assessed site's long term biodiversity are adopted, according to Table - 55.

Where criteria 1 to 3 are met credits can be awarded as follows: No. of credits

No. of additional measures

Where the Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) confirms that some of the additional measures listed in Table - 55 are not applicable to the assessed development, the credits can be awarded as follows: Applicable additional measures All Credits

Number of additional measures to assess

N/A

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

335

Land use

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Checklists and tables Table - 55: Additional measures for the improvement of long term biodiversity Ref

Additional measure for the improvement of long term biodiversity

The principal contractor nominates a Biodiversity Champion with the authority to influence site activities and ensure that detrimental impacts on-site biodiversity are minimised in line with the recommendations of a Suitably Qualified Ecologist.

The principal contractor trains the site workforce on how to protect site ecology during the project. Specific training must be carried out for the entire site workforce to ensure they are aware of how to avoid damaging site ecology during operations on-site. Training should be based on the findings and recommendations for protection of ecological features highlighted within a report prepared by a Suitably Qualified Ecologist.

The principal contractor records actions taken to protect biodiversity and monitor their effectiveness throughout key stages of the construction process. The requirement commits the principal contractor to make such records available where publicly requested.

Where a new ecologically valuable habitat appropriate to the local area is created. This includes a habitat that supports nationally, regionally or locally important biodiversity, and/or which is nationally, regionally or locally important itself; including any UK Biodiversity Action Plan (UK BAP) priority habitats2, Local Biodiversity Action Plan (LBAP) habitats, those protected within statutory sites (e.g. SSSIs), or those within non-statutory sites identified in local plans. Local biodiversity expertise should be sought during the Preparation and Brief (RIBA Stage 1 or equivalent) to help identify species of local biodiversity importance on-site and ensure that the proposals support local priorities.

Where flora and/or fauna habitats exist on-site, the contractor programmes site works to minimise disturbance to wildlife. For example, site preparation, ground works, and soft landscape have been, or will be, scheduled at an appropriate time of year to minimise disturbance to wildlife. Timing of works may have a significant impact on, for example, breeding birds, flowering plants, seed germination, amphibians etc. Actions such as phased clearance of vegetation may help to mitigate ecological impacts. This additional requirement will be achieved where a clear plan has been produced detailing how activities will be timed to avoid any impact on-site biodiversity in line with the recommendations of a Suitably Qualified Ecologist.

336

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

LE 05 Long term impact on biodiversity

Land Use and Ecology

Education buildings (pre-schools, schools and sixth form colleges only) A partnership has been set up by the design team with a local group that has wildlife expertise (e.g. local Wildlife Trust or similar local body) and the group has: a. Provided advice early in the design process regarding protecting and/or providing habitat for species of local importance on the site. b. Provided advice to ensure the design is in-keeping with the local environment. In particular this should draw on their local knowledge of any features or species of ecological interest on or near the site. c. Provided, or will continue to provide, ongoing support and advice to the educational establishment to help them manage, maintain and develop the outdoor space in the longer term. A suitable starting point for discussion with the local wildlife group would be to ask for advice on how to take account of the Local Biodiversity Action Plan (LBAP) in the school/college landscape design.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer toAppendix D – BREEAM UK New Construction and Shell and Core Project Assessments for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue is not applicable.

Where additional measures are not applicable See criterion 3.

In all cases it is necessary to employ a Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) to achieve credits for this BREEAM issue. As a minimum the SQE must provide the following in writing: 1. Confirmation that criteria 1 and 2 have been achieved 2. Clarification of how many of the additional measures for criterion 3 are applicable and have been achieved 3. Guidance on how to achieve Additional measure 4 (where possible). Where the Suitably Qualified Ecologist confirms that none of the additional measures are applicable (due to the nature of the site and its surroundings) full credits can be awarded for demonstrating compliance with criteria 1 and 2.

General CN3

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

337

Land use

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description

Building specific CN4

Education (preschool, school and sixth form college buildings only) Additional measure 6: Ongoing support and advice

This could take the form of meetings several times a year with staff/pupils/students working party to help them plan conservation and ecological enhancement work, or activities relating the ecology in or near the school or college grounds.

CN5

Prisons Additional measure 4

The Prison Service Biodiversity Action Plan (PSBAP)3 should be referred to for prison buildings where Additional measure 4 is being assessed. For habitats that are not listed in the PSBAP guidance on appropriate habitat creation should be sought from the National Biodiversity Network and the UKBAP.

Methodology None.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Additional information Relevant definitions Biodiversity Biodiversity is defined as the variety of life on earth. It includes all species, animal, plants, fungi, algae, bacteria and the habitats that they depend upon. Biodiversity Action Plan A plan which sets specific, measurable, achievable, realistic and time bound conservation targets for species and habitats. The JNCC (Joint Nature Conservation Committee) website www.jncc.defra.gov.uk provides information on Biodiversity Action Plans and the UK Post-2010 Biodiversity Framework. Biodiversity Champion An individual formally tasked by the principal contractor with the responsibility for monitoring and influencing site activities and minimising detrimental impact on biodiversity. The individual must have sufficient authority and time onsite and knowledge of ecology and construction to carry out the role. The Biodiversity Champion need not be an ecologist or ecological expert. This may be the same person as the Sustainability Champion in Man 03 Responsible construction practices.

338

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

LE 05 Long term impact on biodiversity

Land Use and Ecology

Local group with wildlife expertise A local group with wildlife expertise could be the local Wildlife Trust or an alternative group that has been involved in local wildlife conservation/enhancement projects. Prison Service Biodiversity Action Plans (BAPs) A Biodiversity Action Plan that is produced in compliance with Prison Service requirements as set out in the Strategy Statement of Action for a Prison Service Biodiversity Action Plan. The Prison Service BAP comprises three stages, the first of which involves managing SSSI sites. The second stage addresses the management of sites that are not designated, but which may have land which has local, county or regional importance on biodiversity. The third stage addresses the rest of the prison estate, principally comprising urban prisons. The PSBAP falls under the Ministry of Justice (MOJ) Statement for Biodiversity, the MOJ’s commitment to supporting its diverse biological estate. Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) Refer to LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features

Other information Guidance on relating ecology reports to BREEAM was provided in BREEAM New Construction 2011 Appendix F. This information will be available in a Guidance Note to be provided on the BREEAM website. BS 42020: 2013 Section 11.1 states that the following should be included in long term management plans for habitats, species and biodiversity features: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.

Description and evaluation of features to be managed Ecological trends and constraints on-site that could influence management Aims and objectives of management Appropriate management options for achieving aims and objectives Prescriptions for management actions Preparation of a work schedule (including an annual work plan capable of being rolled forward over a five year period) Body or organisation personnel responsible for implementation of the plan Monitoring and remedial measures (see 11.2) Funding resources and mechanisms to ensure sustainable long term delivery of the proposed management.

BS 42020: 2013 also states that the level of detail required for any given site should be that which is necessary to ensure the effective management of the biodiversity features present. 1BS 42020: 2013 Biodiversity - Code of Practice for Planning Development, BSI 2013 2For information on UK BAP Priority Habitats refer to Joint Nature Conservation Committee: www.jncc.defra.gov.uk, 3Statement of Action and Strategy for a Prison Service Biodiversity Action Plan, HMPS, 2003.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

339

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Pollution Category overview Weightings

Minimum standards

Fully fitted 10%

Shell only 6%

Shell and core 11%

None

Summary This category addresses the prevention and control of pollution and surface water run-off associated with the building's location and use. Issues in this section aim to reduce the buildings impact on surrounding communities and environments arising from light-pollution, noise, flooding and emissions to air, land and water.

Category summary table Issue ID

Issue name

Credits

Credit summary

Pol 01

Impact of refrigerants

Avoidance or reduction of the impact of refrigerants through specification and leak prevention/detection.

Pol 02

NO emissions x

Up to 3

Reduction in emissions of Nitrous-oxides (NO ) x arising from the building's space and water heating systems.

Pol 03

Surface water run-off

Development of sites with a low probability of flooding where the design minimises the impact of flooding through careful masterplanning. Surface water run-off is managed to be no worse than the pre-development scenario. Watercourse pollution prevention systems are in place.

Pol 04

Reduction of night time light pollution

External light pollution is eliminated through effective design or the removal of the need for unnecessary external lighting.

Pol 05

Reduction of noise pollution

Measures to reduce the likelihood of disturbance arising as a result of noise from fixed installations on the development.

340

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants

Pollution

Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Aim To reduce the level of greenhouse gas emissions arising from the leakage of refrigerants from building systems.

Assessment criteria This issue is split into two parts: Buildings that use no refrigerants (3 credits) OR for buildings that use refrigerants Pre-requisite Impact of refrigerant (1 to 2 credits) Leak detection (1 credit). The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

Three credits - No refrigerant use

1. Where the building does not require the use of refrigerants within its installed plant/systems.

OR alternatively, where the building does require the use of refrigerants, the three credits can be awarded as follows:

Pre-requisite

2. All systems (with electric compressors) must comply with the requirements of BS EN 378:2008 1 (parts 2 and 3) and where refrigeration systems containing ammonia are installed, the Institute of Refrigeration Ammonia Refrigeration Systems Code of Practice2.

Two credits - Impact of refrigerant

3. Where the systems using refrigerants have Direct Effect Life Cycle CO2 equivalent emissions (DELC CO2e) of ≤ 100 kgCO2e/kW cooling/heating capacity. To calculate the DELC CO2e please refer to the Relevant definitions in the Additional information section and the Methodology section. OR 4. Where air-conditioning or refrigeration systems are installed the refrigerants used have a Global Warming Potential (GWP) ≤ 10.

One credit - Impact of refrigerant

5. Where the systems using refrigerants have Direct Effect Life Cycle CO2 equivalent emissions (DELC CO2e) of ≤ 1000 kgCO2e/kW cooling/heating capacity.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

341

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

One credit - Leak detection

6. Where systems using refrigerants have a permanent automated refrigerant leak detection system installed; OR where an in-built automated diagnostic procedure for detecting leakage is installed. In all instances a robust and tested refrigerant leak detection system must be installed and must be capable of continuously monitoring for leaks. 7. The system must be capable of automatically isolating and containing the remaining refrigerant(s) charge in response to a leak detection incident ( see Other information section for additional information).

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Option 1 – Shell only: This issue is not applicable. Option 2 – Shell and core: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

CN1.2

Avoiding the need for refrigerants

Option 2 - Shell and core If the building is designed in such a way that it avoids the need for refrigerant containing building services, and therefore no 'refrigerant-using' building services or systems will be specified for the fit-out, then the available credits can be awarded by default.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue is not applicable.

Refrigerant charge of less than 6kg

For installations of small multiple hermetic systems only where the refrigerant charge in each unit is less than 6kg, the credit for leak detection and containment can be awarded by default. This is on the basis that the risk of a large refrigerant leak due to system failure is minimised, as individual leaks from each system will be small where leakage occurs, and therefore there is little life cycle benefit of requiring leak detection equipment on each small system. Note: solutions such as this may be less energy efficient and as such may impact on the achievement of credits under Ene 01.

General CN3

342

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants

Pollution

Ref

Terms

Description

CN4

Specification of multiple systems

Where more than one air-conditioning/refrigeration system is installed in the building, the assessor must source the relevant technical data for each system and enter it in to the Pol 01 calculator. The calculator will then determine the weighted average DELC for the multiple installation and the BREEAM credits can be awarded or withheld accordingly.

CN5

Leak detection See criteria 6 and 7.

The refrigerant leak detection criteria are still applicable in instances where any type of non-solid refrigerant is present, i.e. even if the refrigerant meets BREEAM’s DELC CO2e benchmark(s). Exceptions to this are systems that use natural and environmentally benign refrigerants, such as air and water (for example lithium bromide/water absorption chillers) and installations of small multiple hermetic systems, where compliance note 3 above applies. These types of system/refrigerants will achieve the leak detection credit by default.

Methodology The number of Pol 01 BREEAM credits achieved is determined by the assessor using the BREEAM Pol 01 calculator. The Direct Effect Life Cycle CO2e emissions (DELC) per kW of cooling/heating capacity are calculated using the following equation: [Refigerant loss operational + refrigerant loss system retirement] × GWP Cooling Capacity (kW)

Where: Refrigerant loss operational: (Ref charge x Sys op-life x (L1 + L2 + S1 + S2))/100 Refrigerant loss system retirement = Ref charge x (1 - Ref RecEff /100) Where: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Ref charge: Refrigerant charge (kg) Sysop-life: System operational lifetime (years) Ref RecEff : Refrigerant Recovery Efficiency factor (%) L1: Annual Leakage Rate (units: % Refrigerant charge) L2: Annual Purge Release factor (% Refrigerant charge) S1: Annual Service Release (% Refrigerant charge) S2: Probability factor for catastrophic failure (%Refrigerant charge loss/year) GWP: Global Warming Potential of refrigerant Cooling/heating capacity (kW).

The following default values must be used, where system specific data is not available: Sysop-life: System operational design life (years): See Table - 56 Ref RecEff : Refrigerant recovery efficiency factor (%): 95% L1: Annual leakage rates (% refrigerant charge): See Table - 57. L2: Annual purge release factor (% refrigerant charge): 0.5 (if the system does not require an annual purge, zero should be used).

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

343

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

S1: Annual service release (% refrigerant charge): 0.25 (this applies where the system requires opening up to carry out the annual service. For systems which do not require opening up, there will be no associated annual release of refrigerant, therefore a default of zero should be used). S2: Probability factor for catastrophic failure (% refrigerant charge loss/year): 1% (based on a failure rate of 1 in 100 systems). The following information must be sourced from the design team’s mechanical and electrical engineer and/or system manufacturer: System type Ref charge: Refrigerant charge (kg) GWP: Global Warming Potential of refrigerant(s) Cooling/heating capacity (kW). Table - 56: Default system operational design life values System type

Default system operational design life values (years)

Small/medium capacity chillers

Large capacity chillers

Unitary Split

Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) system

All other systems

These figures are based on those reported in LOT 6 for air-conditioning units and the British Refrigeration Association’s (BRA) Guideline Methods of Calculating TEWI (2006)3 Note: The following should be considered when determining whether the system specified is defined as small/medium/large: Large capacity chiller: centrifugal compressor Medium capacity chiller: scroll/screw compressor Small capacity chiller: scroll compressor.

Table - 57: Average annual leakage rates for the UK Annual leakage rate (% of charge per annum)

System type

Cold storage and display systems Integral cabinets

Split/condensing units

18%

Centralised

19%

344

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants

Pollution

Annual leakage rate (% of charge per annum)

System type

Air-conditioning systems Unitary split

15%

Small-scale chillers

10%

Medium/large chillers

Heat pumps

These figures are based on those reported in LOT 6 for air-conditioning units and also Table 2 of the Market Transformation Programmes Briefing Note for Commercial Refrigeration no. 36, ‘Direct Emission of Refrigerant Gases’ (version 1.2). The figures are based on the average of the leakage rates from the four separate studies reported in Table 2 (where a range is reported the higher value was used).

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

3, 5

Completed copy of the Pol 01 calculator tool

As per interim design stage

3, 5

Documentary evidence supporting the data used to complete the calculator tool.

As per interim design stage

Additional information Relevant definitions Direct effect life cycle (DELC) carbon dioxide equivalent A measure of the effect on global warming arising from emissions of refrigerant (in the case of this BREEAM assessment issue) from the equipment to the atmosphere over its lifetime (units: kgCO2eq.). The calculation involves estimating the total refrigerant release over the period of operation and subsequent conversion to an equivalent mass of carbon dioxide. Should the system use several different refrigerants, e.g. a primary refrigerant and a secondary coolant, or a cascade system, individual calculations are made for all refrigerants which contribute to the direct effect (see Methodology section for a description of how DELC is calculated). Moderately airtight enclosure This can be defined as an enclosure that does not produce a draught or significant fresh air ingress that would dilute any leaked refrigerant gas (dilution may prevent detection).

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

345

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Refrigerant leak detection An automated permanently installed multi-point sensing system, designed to continuously monitor the atmosphere in the vicinity of refrigeration equipment and, in the event of detection, raise an alarm. The system may be aspirated or have multiple sensor heads linked to a central alarm unit or BMS. Various sensor types are available including infra-red, semi-conductor or electro-chemical. Refrigerant recovery The process of removing refrigerant from a system and storing it in an airtight container. Refrigerant pump down The specification of automatic refrigerant pump down can further limit potential losses and damage to the environment and have subsequent economic benefits to the building owner. Under the United Kingdom Environmental Protection Act 1990 unwanted refrigerant and refrigerating system oil are classified as either controlled or hazardous waste. Not only is it an offence to discharge them to the environment, but there are procedures regarding transport, storage, transfer of ownership and ultimate disposal. Article 16 of EC Regulation 2037/2000 specifies that used CFCs and HCFCs must be recovered for destruction or recycling/reclamation. Robust and tested refrigerant leak detection system This is normally defined as that included on the Enhanced Capital Allowance (ECA) Energy Technology Product List 4 (or an equivalent list). Where the system does not fall within the scope of the ECA energy technology product list or an equivalent list, the design team must demonstrate to the assessor that the system specified meets the principles of the scheme as far as is applicable. Small-scale white goods These should be defined as domestic scale white goods and would also include small individual display cabinets, for example drinks cabinets in small retail shops. Systems using refrigerants The criteria of this issue apply to air-conditioning and refrigeration systems installed in the building for the following uses, regardless of the systems refrigerant charge (kg), including: Comfort cooling and/or space heating (including assessment of refrigerants in heat pumps) Cold storage, including commercial food/drink display cabinets but excluding small scale white goods (see definition above) Process-based cooling loads e.g. servers/IT equipment. Global Warming Potential (GWP) GWP is defined as the potential for global warming that a chemical has relative to 1 unit of carbon dioxide, the primary greenhouse gas. In determining the GWP of the refrigerant, the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) methodology using a 100-year Integrated Time Horizon (or ITH) should be applied. Refrigerant There are three main make-ups of refrigerants: 1. Hydrogenated Fluorocarbon Refrigerants (HFCs) are made up of hydrogen, fluorine, and carbon. Because they do not use a chlorine atom (which is used in most refrigerants) they are known to be one of the least damaging to the earth's ozone layer. 2. Hydrogenated Chlorofluorocarbon Refrigerants (HCFCs) are made up of hydrogen, chlorine, fluorine, and carbon. These refrigerants contain minimal amounts of chlorine; they are not as detrimental to the environment as some other refrigerants. 3. Chlorofluorocarbon Refrigerants (CFCs) contain chlorine, fluorine and carbon. These refrigerants carry high amounts of chlorine so they are known to be the most hazardous to the ozone layer. The use of CFCs and HCFCs as refrigerants has been addressed under the Montreal protocol. Phase-out programmes have been agreed resulting in these substances no longer being used as refrigerants in all new build and most existing situations. The industryâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s favoured replacements are currently HFCs which are often potent global warming contributors. Hydrocarbons and ammonia-based refrigerants have low or zero GWP and are therefore preferred long term options. These are now widely available and are valid alternatives to HFCs in all buildings, provided health and safety issues are fully addressed. The United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP) hosts a HCFC Help Centre which contains information about the

346

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants

Pollution

management and phase out of HCFCs and alternatives to HCFCs in the refrigeration and air-conditioning sector http://www.uneptie.org/ozonaction/topics/hcfc.asp.

Other information Automatic isolation and containment of refrigerant An example of a system which would meet criterion 7 could be one which initiates an automated shut down and pump-down of the refrigerant into a separate storage tank.

Common refrigerants Table - 58: List of some common refrigerant types with low GWP R-Number

Chemical name

GWP 100-yr

R-30

Dichloromethane

R-170

Ethane

R-290

Propane

R-600

Butane

R-600a

Isobutane

R-702

Hydrogen

5.8

R-717

Ammonia

R-718

Water

0.2 ±0.2

R-729

Air (nitrogen, oxygen, argon)

R-744

Carbon dioxide

R1150

Ethylene

R-1234yf

2,3,3,3-Tetrafluoropropene

R-1270

Propylene

Sources: The United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP) ‘2006 Report of the Refrigeration, Air-conditioning and Heat Pumps Technical Options Committee’ (pages 32-34): http://ozone.unep.org/teap/Reports/RTOC/index.shtml Appendix A of the Department of Trade and Industry guidance ‘Refrigerant and Air Conditioning CFC and HCFC Phase Out: Advice on Alternatives and Guidelines for Users’.http://www.berr.gov.uk/files/file29101.pdf BS EN 378-1:2008+A2:2012: Refrigerating systems and heat pumps - Safety and environmental requirements. Part 1: Basic requirements, definitions, classification and selection criteria - Annex E.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

347

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

The formula used to calculate the Direct Effect Life Cycle CO2e emissions in BREEAM is based on the Total Equivalent Warming Impact (TEWI) calculation method for new stationary refrigeration and air-conditioning systems. TEWI is a measure of the global warming impact of equipment that takes into account both direct emissions (as assessed in this BREEAM issue) and indirect emissions produced through the energy consumed in operating the equipment (which is assessed in the BREEAM energy section). Refer to BS EN 378-1 5 and the British Refrigeration Association’s (BRA) Guideline Methods of Calculating TEWI for further details. The BRA publication also includes sectorial release factors for new systems designed to best practice standards.

REAL Zero The refrigeration and air-conditioning sector supported by the Carbon Trust is working across all sectors of business and industry, to help achieve significant reductions in carbon emissions due to refrigerant leakage from installed systems. The Institute of Refrigeration led initiative, Real Zero, is building a clearer understanding of where and why leakage occurs as well as how to prevent it. For further information including guidance notes, calculators/tools and case study information visit: http://www.ior.org.uk/real zero 1BS EN 378 Refrigerating systems and heat pumps - Safety and environmental requirements, BSI, 2008 2Ammonia Refrigeration Systems Code of Practice, Institute of Refrigeration, 2009 3Guideline Methods of Calculating TEWI Issue 2, (2006), BRA Specification. 4www.etl.decc.gov.uk 5BS EN 378-1 Refrigerating systems and heat pumps - Safety and environmental requirements Part 1: Basic requirements,

definitions, classification and selection criteria. BSI, 2008

348

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Pol 02 NOx emissions

Pollution

Pol 02 NO emissions x Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Building type dependent

Aim To contribute to a reduction in national NO emission levels through the use of low emission heat sources in the building. x

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

Up to three credits (all building types except Industrial)

1. Where the plant installed to meet the building’s delivered heating and hot water demand has, under normal operating conditions, a NO emission level (measured on a dry basis at 0% excess O2) as follows: x NO Emission levels for heating and hot water (mg/kWh) x

Credits

≤ 100 mg/kWh

1 credit

≤ 70 mg/kWh

2 credits

≤ 40 mg/kWh

3 credits

Two credits (Industrial building types only) NO Emission levels for heating and hot water (mg/kWh) x

Credits

Office and associated areas ≤ 70 mg/kWh

1 credit

Operational areas ≤ 70 mg/kWh

1 credit

2. Report via the BREEAM scoring and reporting tool the direct and indirect NO emissions in mg/kWh and energy x consumption in kWh/m2/yr arising from systems installed to meet the building's space heating, cooling and hot water demands.

Checklists and tables None.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

349

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN3

New build extensions to existing buildings

If the heating/hot water demand for the new extension is being met by an existing system, then the NO emission level for the existing system must be assessed against x the criteria of this issue.

CN4

Highly insulated building

Where the heating load for a highly insulated building is less than or equal to 7% of the heat load for a Building Regulations compliant building of the same size and type, one credit can be awarded regardless of the NO emission level. Figures used for x calculations of the percentage of total heat demand must be based on the output from approved building energy calculation software.

CN5

NO data x provided in different units

Where NO data is provided in different units or at a level of excess oxygen greater than x zero, the manufacturer/supplier must be asked to convert this to comply with the BREEAM criteria. Alternatively, the assessor may adjust the figure using the relevant correction factors provided in the Methodology section. Note that the conversion factors provided do not apply where combined heat and power (CHP) systems are being assessed. Where CHP systems are used, the information must be obtained from the system manufacturer.

CN6

Grid electricity

Where grid electricity is used to supply a heating system, the NO should be assumed to x be 617 mg/kWh for the purpose of BREEAM. This is to reflect the likely NO emissions x from grid electricity over the next 10 years based on the predicted generation mix in the UK.

CN7

Heat recovery

Heat recovery can be considered as having zero NO emissions for the purpose of this x issue.

CN8

Open flues

No credits may be awarded for open flue heating or hot water systems.

General

350

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Pol 02 NOx emissions

Pollution

Ref

Terms

Description

CN9

Water heating benchmark and point of use heaters

Where the water heating can be demonstrated to be less than 10% of the building's total energy consumption, these credits can be awarded based solely on the NO x emissions from space heating.

CN10

Assessment and reporting of a building's NO x emissions from cooling

At present the Pol 02 issue does not benchmark and award credits for NO emission x levels associated with a building's cooling demands. To facilitate possible future benchmarking of this kind and alignment with European Standards on the Sustainability of Construction Works, BREEAM does require, as a condition of achieving any credits for this issue, the reporting of both direct and indirect NO emissions resulting from x meeting the building's heating, cooling and hot water demands. In the case of indirect emissions, this refers primarily to emissions associated with grid electricity, where grid electricity is a/the source of energy for the building's heating, cooling and/or hot water demands. Direct NO emissions are those resulting from the x burning of fuel on-site or in the assessed building to meet heating, cooling and/or hot water demands, for example via a gas/oil-fired/biomass boiler.

Building type specific CN11

Industrial Office/operational areas not present

First credit: Where the assessed building is designed without an office area, the first credit does not apply. One credit is therefore available where compliance with the operational area benchmark is met. Second credit: Where the operational area of the assessed building is designed to be untreated, the second credit does not apply. One credit is therefore available where compliance with the office area benchmark is met. Where there is no office area and no heating in the operational area, this issue is not assessed.

Methodology Conversion factors Manufacturers should be asked to supply NO emissions data in mg/kWh, measured on a dry basis. Where this is not possible x the assessor may use the following conversion factors to convert figures in parts per million (ppm), mg/MJ, mg/m3 or wet NO . x It should be noted that these conversion factors assume worst case efficiencies and are likely to give conservative answers. This could have the effect of lowering the number of credits achieved. Note that these conversion factors are not applicable where combined heat and power (CHP) systems are being used. Please see the calculation procedures below for further details on assessing CHP systems for this issue. 1. Figures in mg/m3 should be multiplied by 0.859 in order to gain emissions in mg/kWh1. A conversion may also be necessary for data not calculated at 0% excess oxygen (see below). 2. Figures in ppm should be multiplied by 1.76 in order to obtain mg/kWh. A conversion may also be necessary for data not calculated at 0% excess oxygen (see below). 3. Figures in mg/MJ should be multiplied by 3.6 in order to show emissions in mg/kWh (1 kWh = 3.6 MJ). A conversion may also be necessary for data not calculated at 0% excess oxygen (see below).

Wet NO conversion factor x This issue’s criteria are based on dry NO values – almost all manufacturers will quote emissions measured on a dry basis. x However if wet NO figures are supplied, these will need to be converted to dry. The following formula should be used to x

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

351

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

determine the wet NO conversion factor 2: x Conversion factor c = 100/(100-y) Where y is the % water vapour content measured in the gas. This figure should be obtained from the manufacturer.

Excess oxygen correction If a NO emission rate is quoted by the manufacturer in mg/m3 or ppm, then it should be established at what % excess oxygen x this emission was measured. The greater the amount of excess oxygen in the flue gases at the time of measurement, the more 'diluted' the NO emissions. It is therefore important to convert any emission rate back to 0% excess oxygen. For the x purpose of BREEAM, the following conversion factors can be used for the most frequently used rates supplied by manufacturers: Table - 59: Excess oxygen conversion factors % Excess O 2

Conversion (c)

x 1.17

x 1.40

15%

x 3.54

Conversion factor c = 20.9/(20.9 – x) Where x = % excess O2 (NOT excess air) and 20.9 is the percentage of O2 in the air.

Calculating NO emission levels from combined heat and power (CHP) systems x Where CHP systems are specified, it is only necessary to consider the heat-related NO emissions for the assessment of this x issue. NO emissions are allocated to heat and electricity in line with the electrical output and the relationship between the heat input x and the heat output. A NO emission rate equivalent to the current rate for grid electricity should be assumed for the electrical x output (i.e. 617 mg/kWh supplied), and the remaining NO should be allocated to the heat input. Only the heat-related x component is then compared with the benchmark scale. The following formula should be used to determine this: X = (A - B)/(C/D) Where: Term

Description

NO emissions per unit of heat supplied (mg/kWh heat). x

NO emissions per unit of electricity generated (mg/kWhelec), i.e. the NO emitted by the CHP x x system per unit of electricity generated. It is essential that this figure is obtained from the installer/supplier of the system and should be based on the system when operating at full load.

NO emissions per unit of electricity supplied from the grid (mg/kWhelec) this should be x assumed to be 617 mg/kWh.

Heat to Electricity Ratio of the CHP scheme.

Overall system efficiency (%). When carrying out the calculation, enter the figure as a decimal, e.g. if the efficiency is 80%, then enter 0.8 into the calculation.

352

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Pol 02 NOx emissions

Pollution

The above methodology determines the net NO emissions from CHP-generated electricity compared with central x generation of electricity and allocates this amount to the heat production. Where x is calculated to be negative, it should be assumed to be zero.

Calculating the average NO emission levels from multiple systems x Where the CHP or other heating system type operates in conjunction with another system, an average NO emission rate x should be used based on the ratio of power output from each source, i.e. multiply the emissions of each system by the percentage of heat demand it supplies and total these values. This is likely to be the case where a CHP system has been sized on the base power demand rather than the heat demand and therefore a secondary heating system is required. The following formula can be used for such cases:

(

)

(

)

Average NOX = N 1× H 1 / HT + N 2 × (H 2 / HT ) … + Nn × (Hn / HT ) Where: Term

Description

NO emissions rate for source 1 x

NO emissions rate for source 2 x

NO emissions rate for source n x

Total heat output from all sources

Heat output from source 1

Heat output from source 2

Heat output from source n

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

353

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Calculating NO emission levels from heat pumps x For the purpose of assessing this BREEAM issue, either of the formulas below can be used to determine the contributing NO x emissions from a heat pump:

MHeat =

M Elec ×WElec WHeat

MHeat =

M Elec EER

Where: Term

Description

MHeat

NO emission per unit of heat generated in mg/kWhHeat x

MElec

NO emissions from UK grid electricity mg/kWh, this should be assumed to be 617 mg/kWhElec x

WElect

Total quantity of electricity consumed by heat pump kWhElec

WHeat

Total quantity of heat produced by heat pump kWhHeat

EER

Energy Efficiency Ratio (also referred to as Co-efficient of Performance)

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

1, 2

Calculations showing the average NO x emissions for the building where multiple systems are present.

As per interim design stage

Additional information Relevant definitions Approved building energy calculation software Refer to BREEAM issue Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions. NO emissions x NO emissions are pollutant gases produced by the combustion of fossil fuels. NO reacts with heat and sunlight to x x produce ozone that can cause serious respiratory problems. It also reacts with water to produce acid rain which has a detrimental effect on ecosystems. For the purposes of BREEAM, NO emission levels are required in units of mg/kWh, x measured on a dry basis at 0% excess oxygen levels.

Other information Some systems may find it difficult to achieve credits in this issue, including:

354

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Pol 02 NOx emissions

Pollution

Heat pumps Heat pumps powered by grid electricity are likely to indirectly produce emission rates higher than those required by BREEAM and are therefore typically unable to achieve credits under this issue. However, there is a formula for determining NO x emissions from heat pumps in the Methodology section. Please note, the energy saved by using certain types of heat pumps is recognised in the energy section of BREEAM.

District heating District heating systems that incinerate waste usually have NO emission rates higher than the levels set to achieve any BREEAM x credits.

Biomass Biomass systems are recognised as reducing the impact of fossil fuel depletion, by employing a renewable fuel source (provided it is sustainably sourced). However, biomass can produce a significant amount of NO and so may not achieve this x credit. They may, however, gain recognition in the energy section of BREEAM. 1BS EN 15502-1:2012 Gas-fired heating boilers Part 1: General requirements and tests. 2BS EN 14792:2005 Stationary Source emissions - Determination of mass concentration of nitrogen oxides (NO ) - Reference

method: Chemiluminescence.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

355

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Pol 03 Surface water run-off Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Aim To avoid, reduce and delay the discharge of rainfall to public sewers and watercourses, thereby minimising the risk and impact of localised flooding on and off-site, watercourse pollution and other environmental damage.

Assessment criteria This issue is split into three parts; Flood risk (1 to 2 credits) Surface water run-off (2 credits) Minimising water course pollution (1 credit).

Up to two credits - Flood resilience Two credits - Low flood risk 1. Where a site-specific flood risk assessment (FRA) confirms the development is situated in a flood zone that is defined as having a low annual probability of flooding (in accordance with current best practice national planning guidance). The FRA must take all current and future sources of flooding into consideration (see CN5).

One credit - Medium/high flood risk 2. Where a site-specific FRA confirms the development is situated in a flood zone that is defined as having a medium or high annual probability of flooding and is not in a functional floodplain (in accordance with current best practice national planning guidance). The FRA must take all current and future sources of flooding into consideration (see CN5). 3. To increase the resilience and resistance of the development to flooding, one of the following must be achieved: a. The ground level of the building and access to both the building and the site, are designed (or zoned) so they are at least 600mm above the design flood level of the flood zone in which the assessed development is located (see CN8 ); OR c. The final design of the building and the wider site reflects the recommendations made by an appropriate consultant in accordance with the hierarchy approach outlined in section 5 of BS 8533:2011 1.

Two credits - Surface water run-off Pre-requisite 4. An Appropriate Consultant is appointed to carry out, demonstrate and/or confirm the development's compliance with the following criteria:

One credit 5. Where drainage measures are specified to ensure that the peak rate of run-off from the site to the watercourses (natural or municipal) is no greater for the developed site than it was for the pre-development site. This should comply at the 1-year and 100-year return period events. 6. Relevant maintenance agreements for the ownership, long term operation and maintenance of all specified SuDS are in

356

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Pol 03 Surface water run-off

Pollution

place. 7. Calculations include an allowance for climate change; this should be made in accordance with current best practice planning guidance (see definitions).

One credit 8. Where flooding of property will not occur in the event of local drainage system failure (caused either by extreme rainfall or a lack of maintenance); AND EITHER 9. Drainage design measures are specified to ensure that the post development run-off volume, over the development lifetime, is no greater than it would have been prior to the assessed siteâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s development for the 100-year 6-hour event, including an allowance for climate change (see criterion 14). 10. Any additional predicted volume of run-off for this event is prevented from leaving the site by using infiltration or other Sustainable Drainage System (SuDS) techniques. OR (only where criteria 9 and 10 for this credit cannot be achieved): 11. Justification from the Appropriate Consultant indicating why the above criteria cannot be achieved, i.e. where infiltration or other SuDS techniques are not technically viable options. 12. Drainage design measures are specified to ensure that the post development peak rate of run-off is reduced to the limiting discharge. The limiting discharge is defined as the highest flow rate from the following options: a. The pre-development 1-year peak flow rate; OR b. The mean annual flow rate Qbar; OR c. 2L/s/ha. Note that for the 1-year peak flow rate the 1-year return period event criterion applies (as described in the peak run-off criteria above). 13. Relevant maintenance agreements for the ownership, long term operation and maintenance of all specified SuDS are in place. 14. For either option, above calculations must include an allowance for climate change; this should be made in accordance with current best practice planning guidance.

One credit - Minimising watercourse pollution

15. There is no discharge from the developed site for rainfall up to 5mm (confirmed by the Appropriate Consultant). 16. In areas with a low risk source of watercourse pollution, an appropriate level of pollution prevention treatment is provided, using appropriate SuDS techniques. 17. Where there is a high risk of contamination or spillage of substances such as petrol and oil (see Compliance notes for a list of areas), separators (or an equivalent system) are installed in surface water drainage systems. 18. Where the building has chemical/liquid gas storage areas, a means of containment is fitted to the site drainage system (i.e. shut-off valves) to prevent the escape of chemicals to natural watercourses (in the event of a spillage or bunding failure). 19. All water pollution prevention systems have been designed and installed in accordance with the recommendations of documents such as Pollution Prevention Guideline 3 (PPG 3)2 and/or where applicable the SUDS manual3. For areas where vehicle washing will be taking place, pollution prevention systems must be in accordance with Pollution Prevention Guidelines 13 4. 20. A comprehensive and up-to date drainage plan of the site will be made available for the building/site occupiers. 21. Relevant maintenance agreements for the ownership, long term operation and maintenance of all specified SuDS must be in place. 22. Where present, all external storage and delivery areas designed and detailed in accordance with the current best practice planning guidance (see Other information for further information).

Two credits - Surface water run-off - Simple buildings For 'simple buildings', the below criteria should be applied in place of the surface water run-off criteria above (please see CN2 for more information).

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

357

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

23. Either of the following criteria is met: a. There is a decrease in the impermeable area by 50% or more, from the pre-existing impermeable hard surfaces; OR b. Where all run-off from the roof for rainfall depths up to 5mm from all new and existing parts of the building have been managed on-site using source control methods OR

One credit - Surface water run-off - Simple buildings

24. Either of the following criteria is met: a. There is no increase in the impermeable surfaces as a result of the new construction; OR b. If there is an increase in the impermeable surface as a result of the new construction then the following must be met: i. Hard standing areas - where there is an extension or increase in the hard standing areas and hence an increase in the total impermeable area as a result of the new construction, the hard standing area must be permeable or be provided with on-site SuDS to allow full infiltration of the additional volume, to achieve the same end result. The permeable hard standing must include all pavements and public rights of way, car parks, driveways and nonadoptable roads, but can exclude small garden paths which will drain onto a naturally permeable surface. ii. Building (new build/extension) - where there is an increase in building footprint, extending onto any previously permeable surfaces, the additional run-off caused by the area of the new build/extension must be managed onsite using an appropriate SuDS technique for rainfall depths up to 5 mm.

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

358

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Pol 03 Surface water run-off

Ref

Terms

Pollution

Description

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

Flood risk (1 or 2 credits) 1. Criterion 1 (2 credits) OR 2. Criteria 2 and 3 (1 credit) Surface water run-off (1 or 2 credits) 3. Criterion 23 (2 credits) OR 4. Criterion 24 (1 credit) Minimising water course pollution (1 credit) 5. Criteria 15 to 22 Exemplary level credit (1 credit) 6. Criteria 4 to 14

General CN3

Alternative standards and recommendations from an appropriate statutory body See criteria 1 and 2.

None of the credits can be awarded where the assessed development has proceeded against the recommendation of the statutory body on the basis that the flooding implications are too great (this includes a recommendation given by the statutory body even where such a recommendation cannot or is not statutorily enforced). Where the local authority (or other statutory body) has set more rigorous criteria than those above these must be met in order to achieve the relevant credit(s).

CN4

Contaminated sites See criteria 5-22

Drainage designs for sites must take into account legislation relating to contaminated sites, however in many circumstances even on contaminated sites there may be opportunities for the installation of some SuDS techniques. Please see the Other information section for more details.

Flood resilience CN5

Sources of flooding See criteria 1 and 2.

The Flood Risk Assessment (FRA) must detail the risk of flooding from the following sources: 1. Fluvial (rivers) 2. Tidal 3. Surface water: sheet run-off from adjacent land (urban or rural) 4. Groundwater: most common in low-lying areas underlain by permeable rock (aquifers) 5. Sewers: combined, foul or surface water sewers 6. Reservoirs, canals and other artificial sources. Please see Other information section which provides more detail on the above sources of flooding. The content of the FRA should be based on historic trends, but should also account for predicted changes to the climate which may impact on the flood risk to the site in future.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

359

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Terms

Description

CN6

Functional flood plain See criterion 3.

The BREEAM credit for locating in a flood zone of ‘medium or high annual probability’ cannot be awarded where the building is located in the functional flood plain. This is defined in the current best practice national planning guidance for each country’. If the building assessed is or has been defined as ‘water-compatible development’, confirmation should be provided from the local planning authority that they are satisfied with the proposals.

CN7

Flood defences See criteria 1, 2 and 3.

Third party defences There are many landscape feature defences, owned by third parties, which due to their location act as a flood defence by default, e.g. motorway, railway embankments, walls etc. It can be assumed that such embankments will remain in place for the lifetime of the development, unless the assessor or project team have reason to believe otherwise. For walls, assurance must be sought that the wall is likely to remain for the design life of the building. Pre-existing flood defences In an area protected by existing flood defences (designed to withstand a certain magnitude of flooding) the appropriate number of flood risk credits can be awarded where the defences reduce the risk to ‘low’ or ‘medium’ and the following conditions are met: 1. The development is not located in an area where new flood defences have to be, or have been, constructed to minimise the risk of flooding to the site and its locality purely for the purpose of the development and/or its wider master plan. 2. The development is located on previously developed land (as defined by the criteria in BREEAM issue LE 01 Site selection. 3. The relevant agency confirms that, as a result of such defences, the risk of a flood event occurring is reduced to low or medium risk. If firm confirmation is not provided then the credit cannot be awarded. A statutory body’s local/regional office may be able to provide more information on existing defences in the area in which the assessed development is located.

CN8

360

600mm threshold See criterion 3a.

It is accepted that, for buildings located in medium and high risk flood zones, areas of the car park and site access may be allowed to flood and therefore fall below the 600mm threshold. In such cases the credit is still achievable provided safe access to the site, and the groundfloor of the building can be maintained (i.e. they are 600mm above the design flood level) to ensure the building and site do not become an ‘island’ in the event of a flood. Where the development has been permitted and the ground levels of the topography/infrastructure immediately adjacent to the site fall below the 600mm threshold, the credit can still be awarded, provided there are no other practical solutions for access to the site above this level and the assessed building, and access to it, meet the assessment criteria. As much of the external site area as possible (or as required by an appropriate statutory body) should be designed at or above the threshold. For buildings located in medium or high flood risk zones, any areas used to store sensitive, historical, hazardous, valuable and perishable materials, e.g. radioactive materials, microbiological facilities, server rooms, libraries, etc., must be located above the 600mm threshold.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Pol 03 Surface water run-off

Pollution

Ref

Terms

Description

CN9

Level of detail required in the FRA for smaller sites See criteria 1 and 2.

For smaller sites, e.g. less than 1 ha (10,000 m2), the level of detail required in an acceptable FRA will depend on the size of the site and the arrangement of buildings on that site. For a small site with a relatively simple arrangement of buildings this might consist of a brief report. For larger sites with a higher density of buildings a more detailed assessment would be appropriate. For small simple sites (2000 m2 and less), an acceptable FRA could be a brief report carried out by the contractorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s engineer confirming the risk of flooding from all sources of flooding, including information obtained from the Environment Agency, water company/sewerage undertaker, other relevant statutory authorities, site investigation and local knowledge.

Surface water run-off CN10

Sites with many buildings

Where the assessed building is part of a larger development of buildings, there are a number of options for assessment of the surface water run-off credits: 1. The individual building and its associated hard standing areas can be assessed independently where the run-off is being dealt with on a building-by-building basis (i.e. each building has its own dedicated sub-catchment that serves only that building). 2. When assessing the run-off from a number of buildings (including domestic and non-domestic buildings) the assessment must take into account the drainage from the local sub-catchment serving all those dwellings/buildings. Note that proportioning cannot be used to calculate the percentage of run-off discharging into the local sub-catchment resulting from just the assessed building. 3. The whole development can be assessed for compliance. Whichever approach is taken to demonstrate compliance, it must be consistent when completing both the rate of run-off and volume of run-off calculations.

CN11

Discharge to the sea or tidal estuaries

The peak rate of run-off and volume run-off criteria can be deemed to be met by default if the site discharges rainwater directly to a tidal estuary or the sea. The site must discharge run-off directly into the tidal estuary or the sea, if these criteria are to be awarded by default. Typically, this would mean that drainage pipes would only carry run-off from the site and that they would not need to cross privately owned land outside the boundary of the development before reaching the sea. Please see Relevant definitions section for a definition of tidal estuary.

CN12

No change in impermeable area

Where the man-made impermeable area draining to the watercourse (natural or municipal) has decreased or remains unchanged post development, the peak and volume rate of run-off requirements for the surface water run-off credits will be met by default. Flow rate calculations will not need to be provided. Instead, drawings clearly showing the impermeable areas of the site draining to the watercourse should be provided for the pre- and post development scenarios. Figures must also be given (ideally on the drawings) to show a comparison between the areas of drained impermeable surfaces pre- and post development. In this instance a flood risk assessment must be carried out and any opportunities identified to reduce surface water run-off are implemented.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

361

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Terms

Description

CN13

Limiting discharge flow rate See criterion 12.

For the surface water run-off credits, where the limiting discharge flow rate would require a flow rate of less than 5 l/s at a discharge point, a flow rate of up to 5 l/s may be used where required to reduce the risk of blockage.

CN14

Highways and impermeable areas

Where new non-adoptable highways are built, including those for developments with a mixture of buildings, all of the new impermeable surfaces must be included in calculations to demonstrate compliance with the peak rate of run-off and volume of run-off criteria. Where buildings are built beside existing highways or where adoptable highways are built, the impermeable area of the highway does not need to be included in the calculations.

CN15

Derelict sites. See criteria 5,7, 11,12 and 14.

If the site has been derelict for over five years, the Appropriate Consultant must assess the previous drainage network and make reasonable assumptions to establish probable flow rates and volumes. To do this they should use best practice simulation modelling, to determine the 1 year and 100 year peak flow rates at the relevant discharge points. To complete the calculations, a site visit prior to development will be required unless accurate data already exists from a previous survey. The resultant professional report can then be used to determine the pre-development volumes and rates of run-off. Without this professional input, the site must be deemed greenfield pre-development, assuming Soil type 5 for the calculation of the pre development site run-off.

CN16

Rainwater harvesting

BS 8515 Rainwater harvesting systems: Code of Practice, Annex A5 must be followed where rainwater harvesting systems are specified for storm water control. To ensure flood risk is not increased if the rainwater harvesting system is, for some reason, unavailable, the exceedance flow route capacity provided in accordance with CIRIA report C635 should ignore the beneficial effect of the rainwater harvesting system.

Minimising watercourse pollution CN17

5mm discharge for minimising watercourse pollution See criterion 15.

In a small number of sites it may not be possible for the first 5mm of rainfall to be prevented from leaving site completely. Where this is the case, an appropriately qualified professional must design the system to ensure that the intent of this criterion has been met as far as possible and provide justifications to explain why the criterion could not be fully achieved on the site. Where this can be justified, the awarding of the water quality credit would not be affected, provided all other relevant criteria have been achieved.

CN18

5mm requirement - end-of-pipe solutions See criterion 15.

End-of-pipe solutions, such as ponds and basins, will only be deemed to comply with the 5mm criteria where the principal run-off control to prevent discharge from the first 5mm of a rainfall event, is achieved using source control and site control methods.

CN19

5mm requirement - green roofs See criterion 15.

Green roofs can be deemed to comply with this requirement for the rain that falls onto their surface. However evidence is still required to demonstrate that the 5mm rainfall from all other hard surfaces on-site is being dealt with, to allow this credit to be awarded.

362

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Pol 03 Surface water run-off

Pollution

Ref

Terms

Description

CN20

Areas that are a source of pollution See criteria 17, 18 and 19.

For the purpose of assessing the watercourse pollution credit, an area that presents a risk of watercourse pollution includes vehicle manoeuvring areas, car parks, waste disposal facilities, delivery and storage facilities or plant areas.

CN21

Extension or infill building on existing site

Where the assessment is of an individual building on an existing site, i.e. infill development, the watercourse pollution criteria apply to areas within the construction zone that present a risk of pollution, as well as any areas external to the construction zone that are affected by the new works, i.e. drainage onto or from the proposed development.

CN22

Suitable level of treatment See criteria 16 to 22.

In all cases the Appropriate Consultant should use their professional judgement to determine the most appropriate strategy for minimising watercourse pollution.

CN23

Roof plant See criteria 18,19, 21 and 22.

Roof-top plant space must be considered where there is a risk from polluting substances such as petrol or oil. Refrigerants are not assessed under the pollution aspect of this issue, as the main risk of pollution is to air and not the watercourse.

Methodology Calculating peak rate of run-off Key publications that should be referred to for guidance on calculating the peak rate of run-off include: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

The SuDS Manual6. Preliminary rainfall run-off management for developments 7. National planning policy guidance/statement for the specific country. IH Report 124, Flood estimation for small catchments (Marshall and Bayliss, 1994)8. Flood Estimation Handbook (Centre for Ecology and Hydrology, 1999)9.

Greenfield sites of less than 50 ha The calculation of greenfield run-off rates must be in accordance with IH Report 124, Flood estimation for small catchments (Marshall and Bayliss, 1994). The pro-rata method on the size of catchment detailed in Table 4.2 in The SuDS Manual, CIRIA C697 (2007) must be followed.

Greenfield sites of 50 ha to 200 ha The calculation of greenfield run-off rates must be in accordance with IH Report 124, Flood estimation for small catchments (Marshall and Bayliss, 1994). Flood Estimation Handbook (Centre for Ecology and Hydrology, 1999) can be used for these sites as an alternative, where there is a preference to do so, but only if the catchment is considered to be suitable for its application.

Greenfield sites of more than 200 ha The calculation of greenfield run-off rates must be in accordance with the Flood Estimation Handbook (Centre for Ecology and Hydrology, 1999) and any subsequent updates. Where the Flood Estimation Handbook is not considered appropriate for the development, IH Report 124 can be used.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

363

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Brownfield sites The calculation of brownfield run-off rates should be as follows: If the existing drainage is known then it should be modelled using best practice simulation modelling, to determine the 1-year and 100-year peak flow rates at discharge points (without allowing surcharge of the system above cover levels to drive greater flow rates through the discharge points). If the system is not known, then the brownfield run-off should be calculated using the greenfield run-off models described above but with a Soil Type 5.

Limiting discharge rate The limiting discharge for each discharge point should be calculated as the flow rates from the pre-developed site. The calculation should include the total flow rate from the total area of the site feeding into the discharge point (this should include both BREEAM-assessed and non BREEAM-assessed parts of the development, if applicable). The discharge point is defined as the point of discharge into the watercourse/sewers (including rivers, streams, ditches, drains, cuts, culverts, dykes, sluices, public sewers and passages through which water flows, see Relevant definitions in the Additional information section). Where this calculation results in a peak flow rate of less than 5 l/s, the limiting discharge rate may be increased up to a level of no more than 5 l/s at the point of discharge from the site to reduce the risk of blockage. For example, if the flow rate for the 1 year and 100 year events were 4 l/s and 7 l/s respectively, then the limiting discharges would be 5 l/s and 7 l/s. Similarly, if it was calculated to be 2 l/s and 4 l/s, then a maximum of 5 l/s limiting discharge rate could be applied to both discharge points. Sites should not be subdivided to enable higher overall limiting discharge rates to be claimed. It is, however, recognised that some sites may require more than one discharge point as a result of the local topography or existing surrounding drainage infrastructure, and in such cases, the limiting discharge flow rate may be increased to a level no more than 5 l/s at each discharge point. The assessor should seek evidence that the number of discharge points is necessary due to topography and/or infrastructure limitations. Evidence may be in the form of a topographical map and an explanation from the Appropriate Consultant as to why multiple discharge points are required, stating that it is not feasible to have fewer discharge points.

100-year peak rate event: excess volume of run-off The storage of excess flows from the 100-year event does not necessarily have to be contained within the drainage system or SuDS features (the features designed solely for the purpose of drainage). Where appropriate, storage of some or all of this volume can be achieved using temporary surface flooding of areas such as a playing field. Specific consideration should be given to overland flow routing. Overland flood flows and temporary storage of flood water on the surface must not be so frequent as to unreasonably inconvenience residents and other users.

Designing for exceedance guidance CIRIA publication C635 (2006) Designing for exceedance in urban drainage – good practice 10 should be referred to for guidance.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

364

Final post construction stage

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Pol 03 Surface water run-off

Pollution

Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

Calculation results for the pre and post development peak rate of run-off

Refer to generic evidence requirement above

Information showing the proposed drainage solution, system failure flood flow routes, potential flood ponding levels and ground floor levels

As per interim design stage

9, 10, 11, 12

Calculation results for the pre and post development volume of run-off

Refer to generic evidence requirement above

Calculation results for the limiting discharge

As per interim design stage.

6, 13, 21

No 'specific' evidence applies at Design Stage

Relevant maintenance agreements for the ownership, long term operation and maintenance of all specified SuDS.

23b, 24b.ii).

Calculation of the 5mm rainfall event from the relevant areas

Refer to generic evidence requirement above

Additional information Please note this section will be revised when the National Standards for Sustainable Drainage and associated regulations come into force.

Relevant definitions Adoptable highways For the purposes of BREEAM, an ‘adoptable’ highway is a highway that is the responsibility of the highways authority in terms of installation and maintenance of surface water drainage which only carries run-off from the highway itself. This means that to fall under the definition of an ‘adoptable highway’ the drainage network must not be directly connected to any other upstream drainage network (e.g. from a private development) and only handle run-off from the adoptable highway. Where drainage within the highway will carry run-off from both the highway and housing, it is not regarded as an 'adoptable' highway. In this instance the drainage design must take account of the highway runoff. Appropriate consultant A consultant with qualifications and experience relevant to designing SuDS and flood prevention measures and completing peak rate of run-off calculations. Where complex flooding calculations and prevention measures are required, this must be a specialist hydrological engineer. Appropriate statutory body This refers to either the appropriate national body (i.e.The Environment Agency in England and Wales, the Rivers Agency in Northern Ireland and the Scottish Environment Protection Agency in Scotland) or the relevant local authority/internal drainage board. Catchment The area contributing surface water flow to a point on a drainage or water course. It can be divided into subcatchments.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

365

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Control devices Any drainage structure or unit designed to control the run-off of storm water. Examples of SuDS control devices are check dams within swales and basins, and combined weir/orifice controls for ponds. Examples of traditional control devices are throttles constructed with pipes and vortex controls. The control devices must be capable of regular inspection and maintenance, and the system should be fail-safe so that upstream flooding does not result from blockage or other malfunction. For guidance on control devices, refer to The SuDS manual (CIRIA C697, 2007) and other best practice guidelines. Current best practice national planning guidance These are current at the time of publication: Planning Practice Guidance - Flood Risk and Coastal Changes– England; Planning Policy Statement 15 – Northern Ireland; Scottish Planning Policy 7 - Scotland; Technical Advice Note - Wales. Design flood level The maximum estimated water level during the design storm event. The design flood level for a site can be determined through either known historical data or modelled for the specific site. Design flood event An historic or notional flood event of a given annual flood probability, against which the suitability of a proposed development is assessed and mitigation measures, if any, are designed. Design storm event Historic or notional weather conditions of a given annual probability, against which the suitability of a proposed development is assessed and mitigation measures, if any, are designed. Discharge point The discharge point(s) is the point at which the run-off from the site leaves the site boundary and enters a watercourse. Flood defences Flood defences do not completely remove the risk of flooding, but they do reduce it. Building in areas where flood defences are present (and appropriately designed to withstand a certain magnitude of flooding) is therefore preferable to those built in medium/high risk areas without defences. However, for the purpose of this issue, it is still preferable to build in areas of low risk than encourage development of new flood defences in areas with a higher risk of flooding purely for the sake of new development. Flood event A flooding incident characterised by its peak level or flow, or by its level or flow hydrograph. Flood probability The estimated probability of a flood of given magnitude occurring or being exceeded in any specified time period. For example, the 100-year flood has a 1% chance of occurring in any given year. Flood risk The combination of the flood probability and the magnitude of the potential consequences of the flood event. Flood risk assessment A study to assess the risk of a site flooding, and to assess the impact that any changes or development on the site will have on flood risk to the site and elsewhere. A Flood Risk Assessment (FRA) should be prepared according to relevant planning policy and technical guidance documents. The FRA must account for future climate change and detail any necessary adaptation measures where/if required. Where more than five years have passed since the FRA was carried out, evidence would be required to demonstrate that the basis of the FRA has not changed in that time. Flood storage The temporary storage of excess run-off or river flow in ponds, basins, reservoirs or on the flood plain during a flood event.

366

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Pol 03 Surface water run-off

Pollution

Flood zones Flood zones are defined in the relevant planning, policy and technical guidance documents for each country in the UK: Planning Practice Guidance - Flood Risk and Coastal Changes (England), TAN15 (Wales), SPP7 (Scotland), PPS15 (Northern Ireland). Please note, PPS15 does not categorise flood risk zones and there are no similar publicly available flood maps covering Northern Ireland. Assessments in Northern Ireland will therefore need to rely on-site-specific flood risk assessments, or other relevant date/surveys, to determine the extent of flood risk for a specific development, and use the same definitions as those outlined for England (Table - 60 ). The Northern Ireland Department of Environment or Rivers Agency may offer further advice or recommendations in this respect http://www.doeni.gov.uk/ and http://www.dardni.gov.uk/ While the definitions of flood zones and probabilities of flooding are generally the same throughout the UK, there are some differences. The definitions are outlined in Table - 60. Greenfield A site which has either never been built on, or one which has remained undisturbed for five years or more. Greenfield run-off rate The rate of run-off that would occur from the site in its undeveloped and therefore undisturbed state. Hard surfaces These include roofs, car parks, access roads, pavements, delivery/service yards and external hard landscaping. Footpaths less than 1.5 m wide which have free drainage to soft landscaped areas on both sides may be excluded. Infiltration The passage of water into a permeable surface, such as soil, permeable paving, soakaways and so on. Limiting discharge The limiting discharge is based upon the calculated pre-development flow rate at a discharge point. Level of pollution prevention treatment When used in the context of one, two or three levels of treatment for surface water, the treatment level should be regarded as the number of SuDS components in series through which run-off passes from the originating surface on which rainfall fell to the site discharge point. Where a SuDS component has more than one treatment process, it might be considered to provide more than one level of treatment. In these circumstances advice should be sought from the BREEAM office. Low risk areas (with respect to watercourse pollution) Low risk areas can be defined as areas where the risk of contamination or spillage of substances such as petrol and oil is reduced. For the purpose of this credit, roofs and small car parks may be considered as low risk areas. Peak run-off rate (referred to as Qp [m3/sec]) This is the highest rate of flow from a defined catchment area assuming that rainfall is uniformly distributed over the drainage area, considering the entire drainage area as a single unit and estimation of flow at the most downstream point only. Pre-development The state of the site under assessment immediately prior to purchase of the site by the client/developer (or, where the client has owned/occupied the site for a number of years, its current state). Qbar An estimation of the mean annual flood flow rate from a catchment (see Report IH124 Flood estimations for small catchments). Rainwater discharge Rainwater discharge is the rainwater which flows from the development site to watercourses and sewers. It is also referred to as run-off.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

367

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Run-off This is usually rainwater, but can also be groundwater or overspill from sewers and other sources. Sewerage undertaker This is a Body, typically a water company, with statutory responsibility for sewerage and sewerage disposal and also surface water from roofs and yards of premises. Soakaways A subsurface structure designed to promote the infiltration of surface water into the ground. As a general point, soakaways may be shallow and broad – as in a blanket under permeable paving, or deeper structures. Deeper, point source soakaways should be avoided for road and car park drainage, but shallow structures providing infiltration in an extensive way (infiltration trenches and permeable paving) do not need oil separators. SuDS management train An approach to drainage design that combines a sequence of appropriate surface water drainage structures using SuDS systems for management of the run-off to treat the flow, reduce run-off volume and restrain the run-off rate in order to minimise man’s impact on the environment. Additional benefits associated with operation and maintenance, ecology and amenity are aspects which are considered when designing a management system. The management train incorporates a hierarchy of techniques: 1. Source control. Examples of SuDS techniques include: Soakaways Porous/pervious paving Roof water directed to garden (rather than piped drains) Rainwater reuse/harvesting Green roofs Other surface infiltration, attenuation and conveyance techniques that deal with run-off at source. 2. Site/local control. Examples of SuDS techniques include: Swales Pond Infiltration basins Detention basin Larger soakaways Pervious (porous or permeable) paving. 3. Regional control. Examples of techniques include: Balancing ponds Wetlands Large detention basin. SuDS techniques One or more components built to manage surface water run-off to prevent flooding and pollution, including for example: wet ponds, infiltration basins, detention basins, swales, reed beds, pervious (porous or permeable) paving, soakaways, rainwater harvesting, filter strips, filter drains and trenches with or without perforates pipes, green roofs and underground attenuation storage. For more information refer to The SuDS manual (CIRIA C697, 2007). Surface water run-off Water flow over the ground surface to a drainage system. This occurs if the ground is impermeable, is saturated or if the rainfall is particularly intense. Tidal estuary A tidal estuary is defined as a semi-enclosed coastal body of water which has a free connection with the open sea and within which seawater is measurably diluted with fresh water derived from land drainage. An estuary should be unconstrained tidal waters, i.e. there should be no barriers or constricted shorelines that would restrict the free flow of water into the open sea in any conditions. The impact on the total volume of run-off from the site (and other sites which may in future discharge into the estuary) should be insignificant in terms of the overall water levels in the estuary. Tidal rivers (i.e. where no or limited measurable seawater content is present during normal tidal movements) cannot be included as part of the estuary for the purposes of BREEAM.

368

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Pol 03 Surface water run-off

Pollution

Treatment Improving the quality of water by physical, chemical and/or biological means. Types of oil separator Class 1 Separators: These are designed to achieve a concentration of less than 5 mg/l oil under standard test conditions. They should be used when the separator is required to remove very small oil droplets, such as those arising from car park run-off. Class 2 Separators: These are designed to achieve a concentration of less than 100 mg/l oil under standard test conditions. They are suitable for dealing with discharges where a lower quality requirement applies and/or for trapping large spillages. Both classes can be produced as ‘full retention’ or ‘by pass’ separators: Full retention separators: These treat the flow that can be delivered by the drainage system, which is normally equivalent to the flow generated by a rainfall intensity of 50mm/hr. Bypass separators: These fully treat all flows generated by rainfall rates of up to 5mm/hr. Flows above this rate are allowed to bypass the separator. These separators are used when it is an acceptable risk not to provide full treatment for high flows. Pollution Prevention Guideline 3 contains more detailed guidance on the selection and sizing of an appropriate type of separator. Volume of run-off The volume of run-off that is generated by rainfall occurring on the site. This is typically measured in cubic metres. Additional predicted volume of run-off is the difference between the volumes of run-off pre- and post development. Watercourses and sewers A term that includes rivers, streams, ditches, drains, culverts, dykes, sluices, sewers and passages through which water flows.

Other information Definition of flood zones by country Table - 60: Definition of flood zones by country Definition

England

Wales

Scotland

Low annual probability of flooding

Zone 1 Less than 1 in 1000 chance of river and sea flooding (< 0.1%).

Zone A Considered to be at little or no risk. Zone B If site levels are greater than the flood levels used to define adjacent extreme flood outline.

Little or no risk area As defined for England.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

369

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Definition

England

Wales

Scotland

Medium annual probability of flooding

Zone 2 Between 1 in 100 and 1 in 1000 chance of river flooding (1% – 0.1%) and between a 1 in 200 and 1 in 1000 chance of sea flooding (0.5% – 0.1%).

Zone B If site levels are not greater than the flood levels used to define adjacent extreme flood outline. Zone C Equal to or greater* than 0.1% (river, tidal or coastal flooding). * For the purposes of BREEAM assume upper probability of flooding no greater than that specified for England.

Low to medium risk area Watercourse, tidal or coastal flooding in the range 0.1% – 0.5% (1:1000 – 1:200).

High annual probability of flooding

Zone 3a High Probability 1 in 100 or greater chance of river flooding (>1%) and a 1 in 200 or greater chance of flooding from the sea (>0.5%). Zone 3b The Functional Floodplain Land where water has to flow or be stored in times of flood.

Zone C1 and C2 * For the purposes of BREEAM assume the same lower and upper probability of flooding as that specified for England.

Medium to high risk areas Annual probability of watercourse, tidal or coastal flooding: greater than 0.5% (1:200).

Please note: Northern Ireland PPS15 does not categorise flood risk zones and there are no similar publicly available flood maps covering Northern Ireland. Assessments in NI will therefore need to rely on-site-specific flood risk assessments, or other relevant data/surveys, to determine the extent of flood risk for a specific development, and use the same definitions as those outlined for England. The Northern Ireland Department of Environment or Rivers Agency may offer further advice or recommendations in this respect www.doeni.gov.uk and www.riversagencyni.gov.uk

Sources of flooding and flood risk 1. Streams and Rivers: Flooding that can take place from flows that are not contained within the channel due to high levels of rainfall in the catchment. 2. Coastal or Estuarine: Flooding that can occur from the sea due to a particularly high tide or surge, or a combination of both. 3. Groundwater: Where the water table rises to such a height where flooding occurs. Most common in low-lying areas underlain by permeable rock (aquifers), usually due to extended periods of wet weather. 4. Sewers and highway drains: Combined, foul or surface water sewers and highway drains that are temporarily overloaded due to excessive rainfall or due to blockage. 5. Surface water: The net rainfall falling on a surface (on or off the site) which acts as run-off which has not infiltrated into the ground or entered into a drainage system. 6. Infrastructure failure: Canals, reservoirs, industrial processes, burst water mains, blocked sewers or failed pumping stations.

SuDS - sustainable drainage systems A sequence of management practices and control structures designed to drain surface water in a more sustainable fashion than some conventional techniques. Examples of SuDS devices include:

370

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Pol 03 Surface water run-off

Pollution

Holding ponds Swales Reed beds Permeable paving - in areas where local geological and hydrological conditions allow this to function, e.g. block paved surface on permeable sub-base over gravel bed to store the water and allow it to seep into the soil. For less permeable soils, the gravel layer might be deeper and the water taken to a soakaway although this is not an option in some areas Local or centralised soakaways either as full systems or as ‘overflow’ or ‘holding’ systems, in areas where local geological and hydrological conditions allow them to function Run-off from roofs collected as a part of a rainwater harvesting system Run-off from roofs directed to a local soakaway or other holding facility such as tanks, ponds, swales etc. Green roofs. For more information refer to The SuDS Manual (CIRIA C697, 2007).

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

371

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

External storage and delivery areas guidance documents Wales and England For assessment in Wales and England, the recommendations of the Environment Agency’s publication Pollution Prevention Pays Guidance, 2013 11 should be followed.

Specification of oil/petrol interceptors For the purpose of assessing the watercourse pollution credit, Pollution Prevention Guide 3 Use and design of oil separators in surface water drainage systems (2006) defines the type of areas on a development where separators are required. PPG3 is produced on behalf of the Environment and Heritage Service (Northern Ireland), Scottish Environment Protection Agency and Environment Agency (England and Wales). In some instances, where the risk of contamination is infrequent and potential spills will be small, oil interceptors may not be required if appropriately designed sustainable urban drainage systems are specified. Refer to PPG3 for additional guidance.

Contaminated sites Examples of contamination legislation that should be considered includes: the Water Resources Act 1991, the Environmental Protection Act 1990, the Groundwater Directive (2006/118/EC) and, more recently the Groundwater (England and Wales) Regulations 2009. Where the site risk assessment confirms that infiltration SuDS techniques are not appropriate, SuDS techniques that do not allow infiltration, such as swales lined with an impermeable membrane, can be used. It may be the case that only some areas of the site are contaminated and therefore infiltration SuDS techniques can be used elsewhere on the site. There may also be a requirement to remediate the contaminated soils, creating opportunities for the use of infiltration SuDS post-remediation. 1BS 8533:2011 Assessing and managing flood risk in development - Code of Practice, 2011 2Pollution Prevention Guideline (PPG) 3 Use and design of oil separators in surface water drainage systems, Environment

Agency/SEPA/Environment and Heritage Service, 2006. 3C697 The SUDS Manual, CIRIA 2007. 4Pollution Prevention Guidelines (PPG) 13 Vehicle washing and cleaning, Environment Agency/SEPA/Environment and Heritage Service, 2007 5BS 8515:2009 Rainwater harvesting systems - Code of Practice, (Annex A1:2013) 6C697 The SUDS Manual, CIRIA 2007. 7Preliminary rainfall run-off management for developments, W5-074/A/TR/1 Revision E, EA/DEFRA (January 2012) Useful Link: http://www.uksuds.com/sudsguidancedocument.htm 8IH Report 124, Flood estimation for small catchments (Marshall and Bayliss, 1994) 9Flood Estimation Handbook (Centre for Ecology and Hydrology, 1999) 10CIRIA publication C635 (2006) Designing for exceedence in urban drainage – good practice 11Pollution Prevention Pays, Environment Agency, 2013.

372

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Pol 04 Reduction of night time light pollution

Pollution

Pol 04 Reduction of night time light pollution Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Aim To ensure that external lighting is concentrated in the appropriate areas and that upward lighting is minimised, reducing unnecessary light pollution, energy consumption and nuisance to neighbouring properties.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

One credit

1. Where external lighting pollution has been eliminated through effective design that removes the need for external lighting without adversely affecting the safety and security of the site and its users.

OR alternatively, where the building does have external lighting, one credit can be awarded as follows: 2. The external lighting strategy has been designed in compliance with Table 2 (and its accompanying notes) of the ILP Guidance notes for the reduction of obtrusive light, 2011 1. 3. All external lighting (except for safety and security lighting) can be automatically switched off between 23:00 and 07:00. 4. If safety or security lighting is provided and will be used between 23:00 and 07:00, this part of the lighting system complies with the lower levels of lighting recommended during these hours in Table 2 of the ILP’s Guidance notes. 5. Illuminated advertisements, where specified, must be designed in compliance with ILE Technical Report 5 – The Brightness of Illuminated Advertisements2

Checklists and tables None.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

373

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

General

None.

General CN3

Methodology The following provides guidance on when and how to apply the criteria to the external lighting associated with a building being assessed: 1. Where the assessment is of an individual building on an existing site then only those areas affected by the works, i.e. within the construction zone, need to be assessed. Where the assessment is of a building that forms part of an entire new development, the criteria apply site-wide. 2. If the scope of the assessment covers a new extension only, then only new lighting specified as part of the extended works need to be assessed. 3. Flush stud lights used for safety purposes in vehicle manoeuvring areas may be excluded from the assessment. 4. Where light fittings are specified to comply with specific security standards and these conflict with the BREEAM criteria they can be excluded from the assessment of this issue. In these circumstances the assessor must obtain evidence confirming the specific security standards and that they are applicable to the assessed development.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

374

Final post construction stage

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Pol 04 Reduction of night time light pollution

Pollution

Additional information Relevant definitions Construction zone For the purpose of this issue the construction zone is defined as the site which is being developed for the BREEAMassessed building and its external site areas, i.e. the scope of the new works.

Other information The ILP Guidance notes for the Reduction of Obtrusive Light, 2011 are available free of charge from the ILP website www.theilp.org.uk. Table 2 of the ILP guidance and its accompanying notes outlines four sets of recommendations: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Limits to the average upward light ratio of the luminaires, to restrict sky glow. Limiting illuminance at the windows of nearby properties for which light trespass might be an issue. Limiting the intensity of each light source in potentially obtrusive directions beyond the site boundaries. Limiting the average luminance of the building, if it is floodlit.

In each case the limiting values depend on the location of the site of the building (for example rural, urban or city centre). A calculation of illuminance (b) or intensity (c) is not required if all luminaires are cut-off types and angled so that light in potentially obtrusive directions is blocked. 1GN01 Guidance notes for the reduction of obtrusive light, Institution of Lighting Professionals(ILP), 2011. www.theilp.org.uk 2Technical Report No. 5: The Brightness of Illuminated Advertisements, Institution of Lighting Engineers (ILE), Third Edition,

2001.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

375

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Pol 05 Reduction of noise pollution Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Aim To reduce the likelihood of noise arising from fixed installations on the new development affecting nearby noise-sensitive buildings.

Assessment criteria Applicability: The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

One credit

1. Where there are, or will be, no noise-sensitive areas or buildings within 800m radius of the assessed development.

OR 2. Alternatively, where the building does have noise-sensitive areas or buildings within 800m radius of the development, one credit can be awarded as follows: a. Where a noise impact assessment in compliance with BS 7445 1 has been carried out and the following noise levels measured/determined: i. Existing background noise levels at the nearest or most exposed noise-sensitive development to the proposed development or at a location where background conditions can be argued to be similar. ii. The rating noise level resulting from the new noise source (see CN4). 3. The noise impact assessment must be carried out by a suitably qualified acoustic consultant holding a recognised acoustic qualification and membership of an appropriate professional body (see Relevant definitions in the Additional information section). 4. The noise level from the proposed site/building, as measured in the locality of the nearest or most exposed noisesensitive development, is a difference no greater than +5dB during the day (07:00 to 23:00) and +3dB at night (23:00 to 07:00) compared to the background noise level. 5. Where the noise source(s) from the proposed site/building is greater than the levels described in criterion 4, measures have been installed to attenuate the noise at its source to a level where it will comply with criterion 4.

Checklists and tables None.

376

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Pol 05 Reduction of noise pollution

Pollution

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Option 1 – Shell only: This issue is not applicable. Option 2 – Shell and Core: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue is not applicable.

CN3

Attenuating noise at its source See criteria 4 and 5.

BS 8233:1999 2 gives recommendations for the control of noise in and around buildings. Confirming the specification of attenuation measures in accordance with this Code of Practice can be used as a method of demonstrating compliance with criterion 4.

CN4

Compliance at the design stage See criterion 2.

At the design stage of assessment, where noise-sensitive areas or buildings are present, actual measurement is unlikely to be possible due to the planned but non-existent installation. In such situations compliance can be demonstrated through the use of acousticians’ calculations or by scale model investigations. For such cases BS 7445-2 states that 'as universally agreed prediction models do not exist, the method adopted should be carefully described in the acoustician’s report' and that 'when available, prediction models accepted by relevant authorities should be used'. Where prediction through these methods is not possible, measurement will be necessary using either a noise source similar to that proposed or, alternatively, measurement of the actual noise from the installation (once installed); compliance with the latter approach requires a written commitment to appoint a suitable qualified acoustician to carry out the required measurements post-installation, and a further commitment to attenuate the noise source in compliance with criteria 4 and 5 of BREEAM (if proved necessary by the measurements).

CN5

Untreated buildings

This assessment issue does not apply to buildings designed to be untreated, i.e. where internal spaces will not be serviced by heating, ventilation or air-conditioning systems and therefore have no noise generating plant. Examples of such building types could include industrial warehouse storage.

General

Methodology None.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

377

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Additional information Relevant definitions Noise-sensitive area Landscapes or buildings where the occupiers are likely to be sensitive to noise created by the new plant installed in the assessed building, including: 1. Residential areas 2. Hospitals, health centres, care homes, doctor’s surgeries etc. 3. Schools, colleges and other teaching establishments 4. Libraries 5. Places of worship 6. Wildlife areas, historic landscapes, parks and gardens 7. Located in an Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty (AONB) or near a Site of Special Scientific Interest (SSSI) 8. Any other development that can be considered noise-sensitive. Suitably qualified acoustician An individual who holds a recognised acoustic qualification and membership of an appropriate professional body. The primary professional body for acousticians in the UK is the Institute of Acoustics.

Other information None. 1BS 7445:1 Description and measurement of environmental noise, Part 1: Guide to quantities and procedures, British

Standards Institute, 2003. BS 7445:2 Description and measurement of environmental noise, Part 2: Guide to the acquisition of data pertinent to land use, British Standards Institute, 1991. BS 7445:3 Description and measurement of environmental noise, Part 3: Guide to application to noise limits, British Standards Institute, 1991. 2BS 8233 Sound insulation and noise reduction for buildings, Code of practice, British Standards Institute, 1999.

378

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Innovation

Innovation Category overview Weightings Fully fitted 10%

Minimum standards Shell only 10%

Shell and core 10%

Summary The innovation category provides opportunities for exemplary performance and innovation to be recognised that are not included within, or go beyond the requirements of the credit criteria. This includes exemplary performance credits, for where the building meets the exemplary performance levels of a particular issue. It also includes innovative products and processes for which an innovation credit can be claimed, where they have been approved by BRE Global Ltd. The cost-saving benefits of innovation are fostered and facilitated by helping encourage, drive and publicise accelerated uptake of innovative measures.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

379

Innovation

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Inn 01 Innovation Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Aim To support innovation within the construction industry through the recognition of sustainability related benefits which are not rewarded by standard BREEAM issues.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance; Up to a maximum of 10 credits are available in aggregate from a combination of the following:

Exemplary level of performance in existing BREEAM issues

1. Where the building demonstrates exemplary performance by meeting defined exemplary level performance criteria in one or more of following BREEAM assessment issues: a. Man 01 Project brief and design (Simple buildings only) b. Man 03 Responsible construction practices c. Man 05 Aftercare d. Hea 01 Visual comfort e. Hea 02 Indoor air quality f. Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions g. Wat 01 Water consumption h. Mat 01 Life cycle impacts i. Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials j. Wst 01 Construction-site waste management k. Wst 02 Recycled aggregates l. Wst 05 Adaptation to climate change m. Pol 03 Surface water run-off (Simple buildings only). Please refer to the relevant BREEAM issue within this scheme document for details of the exemplary level performance assessment criteria.

Approved innovations

2. One innovation credit can be awarded for each innovation application approved by BRE Global, where the building complies with the criteria defined within an Approved Innovation Application Form.

Checklists and tables None

380

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Inn 01 Innovation

Innovation

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Exemplary level of performance

Refer to the compliance notes within the individual assessment issues that contain exemplary performance levels.

General CN1

Methodology Exemplary level of performance in existing BREEAM issues For information on the methodology for exemplary level credits refer to the 'Methodology' section of the relevant BREEAM issues.

Approved innovations Innovation applications can be submitted to BRE Global by a licensed BREEAM Assessor using the formal Approved Innovation Application Form (available from the BREEAM Assessor Extranet).

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

As defined within existing BREEAM issues.

A copy of the Approved Innovation Application Form AND A copy of the Innovation Application Report stating the application outcome as ‘approved’ AND Relevant documentary evidence demonstrating specification of the approved innovation.

As per interim design stage AND Relevant documentary evidence confirming that the project has achieved or installed the approved innovation as described and quantified within the approved innovation application form.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

381

Innovation

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Additional information Relevant definitions Approved innovation Any new technology, design, construction, operation, maintenance or demolition method or process that can be shown to improve the sustainability performance of a building and is of demonstrable benefit to the wider industry in a manner that is not covered elsewhere in BREEAM. In addition the innovation has been approved by BRE Global in accordance with its published BREEAM Innovation credit procedures.

Other information Applying for innovation credits Refer to the BREEAM Innovation section documents available from the BREEAM Assessor Extranet for more information on BREEAM Innovation credit eligibility criteria, application process, application fees and previously approved innovations.

382

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Appendices

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

383

Appendices

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Appendix A – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Healthcare building types BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 has been tailored specifically for the assessment of the following healthcare establishments: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Teaching/specialist hospitals General acute hospitals Community and mental health hospitals GP surgeries Health centres and clinics

The table below provides a description of the typical facilities and services offered by and forming a part of one of the above healthcare buildings. Where a healthcare development does not fit one of the building type descriptions below, BREEAM New Construction can still be used to assess that building type provided it falls within the building type category descriptions outlined in the scope section of this document. Where it does not fall in to one of these categories, the project will require the development of bespoke assessment criteria. Table lxxv-1: Typical facilities and services Typical descriptions

Facility

Service

Teaching hospital Specialist acute hospital

In patient High concentration of energy- intensive engineering services and specialist equipment

Diagnostic and treatment services for physical healthcare together with specialist services Consultant-led

General acute hospital

In patient Medium concentration of energy- intensive engineering services and specialist equipment

Diagnostic and treatment services for physical healthcare Consultant-led

Community hospital Cottage hospital Mental health hospital/unit Learning disability unit

In patient Basic engineering services and equipment

Limited diagnostic and treatment services for physical healthcare Nurse- or GP-led Care services for physical healthcare Nurse- or GP-led Mental health and learning disability services Consultant- or nurse-led

GP surgery

Non in patient Use typically 50-65 hours/week Basic engineering services and equipment

Primary care consultation GP-led

Health centre/clinic

Non in patient Use typically 35-45 hours/week Basic engineering services and equipment

Primary care and mental health Nurse/dental/visiting consultant or specialist

384

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Appendix A – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Healthcare building types

Appendices

Other ‘Healthcare’ associated building types BREEAM New Construction can also be used to assess the following: 1. Ambulance trust buildings (‘Other buildings’ type) 2. Residential care homes and staff residential accommodation (Multi-residential accommodation building type) 3. Non-patient building types e.g. offices, laboratories, storage buildings (as listed in the table of building types in the scope section).

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

385

Appendices

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Appendix B – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Education buildings BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 has been tailored specifically for the assessment of the following educational establishments: 1. Pre-school, including; a. Nursery schools1 b. Children’s centres2 2. Schools, including; a. Primary schools b. Secondary schools (including those containing sixth form colleges) c. All age range schools (including education or teaching buildings at boarding schools) d. Academies e. Non-acute special educational needs (SEN) schools 3. Sixth form colleges 4. Further and higher education or vocational colleges and Institutions, including; a. Teaching facility b. Learning Resource Centre c. Laboratory/workshop/studio d. Student union e. Or a mixture of the above types.

All age range schools and academies All age range schools and academies can typically be assessed using the guidance/criteria applicable to secondary schools. In some cases, for these types of education establishments, it may be more appropriate to use the assessment criteria for further education colleges or primary schools. For example, where an all age range school or academy will contain functional or operational areas more akin to further or higher education buildings or where the needs of the accommodation and occupiers are similar to those of primary or early years pupils. Based on the information received about the proposed building, the BREEAM assessor should determine the most appropriate BREEAM criteria to apply in the assessment of the building.

Acute special educational needs (SEN) schools Acute special educational needs (SEN) refers to children with severe disabilities/learning difficulties that prevent them from interpreting their surroundings without feeling anxious or distressed. These children can become easily distracted and/or over-stimulated. This group of pupils mainly include children with a behavioural, emotional or social difficulties (BEDS) and children with communication and interaction disability (autistic spectrum disorder (ASD)). This BREEAM scheme has not been specifically tailored to assess acute SEN schools. However assessment using the methodology is still possible, except where highly specialised accommodation is provided. Acute SEN schools are therefore defined as an 'Other' building type and BREEAM assessors carrying out assessments on schools for pupils with such needs will need to consider carefully all the BREEAM issues that might be affected by the need to provide special facilities for such building users, e.g. View out, Cyclist facilities, etc. Where it is not explicit within this scheme document for this building type, the assessor will need to decide which, if any, building type assessment criteria is appropriate and apply accordingly, seeking confirmation from BRE Global Ltd. on the application of alternative building criteria where appropriate to do so. For more information on SEN please refer to Building Bulletin 102 Designing for disabled children with special educational needs, published by the Department for Children Schools and Families (available from www.education.gov.uk)

386

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Appendix B – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Education buildings

Appendices

Student residential accommodation BREEAM New Construction can be used to assess boarding school residential and halls of residence accommodation buildings. These types of building are classified as a multi-residential accommodation building type for the purpose of a BREEAM assessment. 1Nursery school/education means full-time or part-time education suitable for children who have not attained compulsory

school age (whether provided at schools or elsewhere), i.e. facilities/buildings for the teaching of children who are between the ages of two or three to five years old. 2Children’s centres are multi-agency service hubs where young children and their families can receive early education, full day childcare, parental support and child and family health services, such as access to health visitors and health screening. Children’s centres will often be allied to a local primary school, on or adjacent to the school site.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

387

Appendices

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Appendix C – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Multi-residential buildings BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 can be used to assess multi-occupancy residential buildings that are not suitable for assessment under the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH) in England, Wales and Northern Ireland, or under EcoHomes in Scotland. The UK New Construction scheme provides a whole building assessment methodology which can also be applied to buildings which contain dwellings assessed under the CSH, but also communal facilities within the same building, to allow assessment of the whole building. BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 can be used to assess the following types of multi-residential buildings: 1. Student halls of residence 2. Key worker accommodation 3. Care homes that do not contain extensive or specialist medical facilities (limited consulting rooms and medical rooms are acceptable) 4. Sheltered housing 5. Other multi-residential buildings which contain a mix of residential accommodation with communal areas such as some military accommodation.

BREEAM Multi-residential and the Code for Sustainable Homes BREEAM New Construction for non domestic buildings provides a whole building assessment methodology which can also be applied to a building containing self-contained dwellings and communal facilities. Where both a Code for Sustainable Homes and a BREEAM assessment are required, to avoid duplication of effort, evidence collected for the purpose of a CSH assessment can be used towardss demonstrating compliance with the equivalent BREEAM assessment criteria and vice versa.

388

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Appendix D – BREEAM UK New Construction and Shell and Core Project Assessments

Appendices

Appendix D – BREEAM UK New Construction and Shell and Core Project Assessments Non-fitted, speculative new buildings (often referred to as shell only or shell and core buildings) can be assessed using the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme. The BREEAM New Construction version can be applied to fully fitted, shell only and shell and core building projects. This section provides guidance to assessors and project teams on the application of BREEAM to shell only and shell and core projects. A shell only or shell and core building project is defined as one where the developer’s scope of works is the design and construction of the base building only, leaving a range of construction and fit-out works to be completed before the building is able to be occupied. This may include some or all of the following elements: the structure, building envelope, core building systems including building servicing strategy and installations (such as HVAC) or plant support for installation of such systems and where present, fit-out of common areas. Often, shell and core projects will also be fitted out to a 'Category A' standard, the scope of which varies between different developers, but often includes in addition the shell and core of the building the provision of raised floors, suspended ceilings, extension of core services above ceilings across the lettable space, finishes to the internal face of external and core walls and blinds. Upon completion, the whole building or space within the building is sold or let to be fitted out as appropriate for occupation. The new owner(s) or tenant(s) will fit-out the building’s accommodation in accordance with their corporate and operational needs, often referred to as a 'Category B' fit-out. These terms, while they are widely used in the property sector, are not used within BREEAM as the scope of works that they refer to varies significantly between developers making them not comparable. In these projects, where areas of the development are not fully-fitted, performance of the building and compliance with BREEAM is verified based on the developer’s scope of works.This is measured using two standard project type options that in turn define appropriate assessment criteria applicable to that project type. While some projects will differ to some extent from the scope of these standard options, for the purpose of BREEAM, issues not included within the chosen option will be excluded from the assessment, even where they are within the developer’s scope of works. This approach is necessary to ensure clarity, consistency and comparability within the property market. A fully filterable list of criteria/issues based on each individual projects scope would not enable comparability between BREEAM ratings, either in terms of performance benchmarking or promotional/publicity purposes.

Defining the shell and core project type For the purpose of defining the scope of assessment and BREEAM certification labelling, a new construction project that is not fully fitted out can be categorised in to one of the following types: Option 1: Shell Only Assessment and certification Option 2: Shell and Core Assessment and certification

Option 1: Shell Only Assessment This assessment and certification option is available where the developer’s scope of works covers new build works to the fabric, sub and superstructure of the building only, including: External walls, windows, doors (external), roof, core internal walls, structural floors Hard and soft landscaping areas (where present and within scope of works)

Option 2: Shell and Core Assessment This option is available where the developer's scope of works covers shell works, as described in Option 1, plus core building services. Core building services relates to the installation of central or communal transportation systems, water systems, fitout of common areas, central mechanical and electrical systems including HVAC, but without local fitting of systems within tenant areas. The systems will typically be centralised with capped off distribution to each tenanted area (for future

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

389

Appendices

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

connection as part of a tenant’s fit-out works). This does not include the full scope of a typical Category A fit-out, due to the fact that the specification of items such as ceiling finishes, raised floors and the zoning of local services above the lettable floor area and other Category A works are not typically finalised until the space undergoes final fit-out according to the tenant's specification and are liable to change. These items are, therefore, excluded from a shell and core assessment. The Shell Only (option 1) and Shell and Core (option 2) Assessment options are only available for the following non-domestic building types: Office Retail Industrial

Assessing new build shell and core projects In the main, the assessment process and application of a majority of the BREEAM assessment issues will be unaffected by the scope of new build shell only or shell and core works. This is because most of the BREEAM criteria are concerned with impacts, processes and management procedures that occur with any new build development, regardless of whether it is a shell and core or fully fitted project. However, several BREEAM issues and criterion are tailored for the assessment of fitted out buildings such as acoustic performance. Therefore, additional guidance is given within the assessment issues in the form of a compliance note. These shell and core compliance notes confirm whether the assessment issue applies to a shell only and/or shell and core project and, where it does apply, how to assess it for the options/project types defined above. Table lxxviii-1summarises the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 assessment issues and their applicability to shell only and shell and core projects.

Shell and Core Building Assessments and minimum BREEAM standards All minimum BREEAM standards remain applicable to Shell and Core Building Assessments for the developers scope of works.The only exception is minimum standards for BREEAM issues/credits/criteria which are not assessed in a shell only or shell and core project (confirmed by the shell and core Compliance Note in each relevant issue).

Applicability of the Shell and Core Assessment type to Simple Buildings Assessments Shell only and shell and core assessment criteria cannot be applied to Simple Building Assessments. For a project to be assessed as a Simple Building, it must be clear that the building can be classified as a ‘simple’. At the shell only or shell and core stage, it is not possible to determine whether a building will be ‘simple’ therefore these assessment options are not applicable to Simple Building Assessments.

BREEAM UK New Construction and the BREEAM UK Refurbishment and Fit-out scheme At the time of writing, BRE Global Ltd are developing a standalone BREEAM scheme to cover the refurbishment and fit-out stages of the life cycle for non-domestic buildings. Under this scheme, only criteria that fall within the scope of the tenant's fitout works would be assessed. The BREEAM UK New Construction and BREEAM UK Refurbishment and Fit-out schemes have been designed to work together to allow shell and core projects assessed under the BREEAM UK New Construction scheme that undergo first fit-out, to then seek fully-fitted status by seeking an assessment under the BREEAM UK Refurbishment and Fit-out scheme. The diagram below outlines the relationship between UK New Construction and Refurbishment and Fit-out schemes. When launched, certified assessments of New Construction shell only or shell and core projects can choose to assess fit–out related issues under the BREEAM UK Refurbishment and Fit-out scheme to gain a fully fitted out rating status under BREEAM UK New Construction 2014. By having a two part assessment for the shell and core projects, where the shell and core parts and the fit–out parts are assessed separately, BREEAM provides a flexible yet robust way of assessing shell and core projects. The diagram in Figure 3: UK New Construction and the UK Refurbishment and Fit-out schemes and the assessment options outlines the relationship between the UK New Construction and the UK Refurbishment and Fit-out schemes and the assessment options that should be sought to seek fully-fitted status.

390

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Appendix D – BREEAM UK New Construction and Shell and Core Project Assessments

Appendices

Figure 3: UK New Construction and the UK Refurbishment and Fit-out schemes and the assessment options The scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction - options 1 and 2 - and BREEAM UK Refurbishment and Fit-out schemes have been defined using recognised industry definitions, such as the British Council for Offices definition of Category A and B fit-out as far as possible. However, in practice, there is no fixed industry standard definition of refurbishment and fit-out works, with a large degree of variability from project to project. Due to this variety and also the need to ensure a consistent definition is used for assessment comparability purposes, the BREEAM Refurbishment and Fit-out scheme has defined a number of optional assessment 'parts'. The scope for each of these assessment parts have largely been based upon setting boundaries around the key physical parameters of the building. Under that scheme, clients are able to seek assessment certification against any combination of parts according to the scope of their refurbishment and fit-out works, therefore providing a highly flexible scheme. The scope of Part 1 of the BREEAM UK Refurbishment and Fit-out scheme aligns with option 1, the shell only option of the BREEAM UK New Construction scheme. Parts 1 and 2 combined align with option 2, the shell and core option of the BREEAM UK New Construction scheme. Parts 3 and 4 then cover the scope of work that is covered under the tenants fit-out works and would, therefore, be used to 'top up' a Shell and Core Assessment post fit-out. Assessment types BREEAM UK Refurbishment and Fit-out scheme: Part 1 - Fabric and structure: external envelope including walls, roof, windows and floor Part 2 - Core services: centralised mechanical and electrical plant including heating, cooling and ventilation Part 3 - Local services: localised services including lighting, local heating, cooling and ventilation Part 4 - Interior design: interior finishes, furniture, fittings and equipment Further information on the BREEAM UK Refurbishment and Fit-out scheme can be found at www.breeam.com. Table lxxviii-1: BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 assessment issues: shell only and shell and core project applicability

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

391

Appendices

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Issue

Applicable to shell and core option type Option 1: Shell only

Option 2: Shell and core

Management Man 01

Project brief

Man 02

Life cycle costing and service life planning

Man 03

Responsible construction practices

Man 04

Commissioning and handover

Man 05

Aftercare

Hea 01

Visual comfort

Hea 02

Indoor air quality

Hea 03

Safe containment in laboratories

Hea 04

Thermal comfort

Hea 05

Acoustic performance

Hea 06

Safety and security

Ene 01

Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions

Ene 02

Energy monitoring

Ene 03

Energy efficient external lighting

Ene 04

Low carbon design

Ene 05

Energy efficient cold storage systems

Ene 06

Energy efficient transportation systems

Ene 07

Energy efficient laboratory systems

Health and Wellbeing

Energy

392

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Appendix D – BREEAM UK New Construction and Shell and Core Project Assessments

Ref

Issue

Appendices

Applicable to shell and core option type Option 1: Shell only

Option 2: Shell and core

Ene 08

Energy efficient equipment

Ene 09

Drying space

Tra 01

Public transport accessibility

Tra 02

Proximity to amenities

Tra 03

Cyclist facilities

Tra 04

Maximum car parking capacity

Tra 05

Travel plan

Wat 01

Water consumption

Wat 02

Water monitoring

Wat 03

Water leak detection and prevention

Wat 04

Water efficient equipment (process)

Mat 01

Life cycle impacts

Mat 02

Hard landscaping and boundary protection

Mat 03

Responsible sourcing of materials

Mat 04

Insulation

Mat 05

Designing for durability and resilience

Mat 06

Material efficiency

Transport

Water

Materials

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

393

Appendices

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Issue

Applicable to shell and core option type Option 1: Shell only

Option 2: Shell and core

Waste Wst 01

Construction waste management

Wst 02

Recycled aggregates

Wst 03

Operational waste

Wst 04

Speculative floor finishes

Wst 05

Adaptation to climate change

Wst 06

Functional adaptability

LE 01

Site selection

LE 02

Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features

LE 03

Minimising impact on existing site ecology

LE 04

Enhancing site ecology

LE 05

Long term impact on biodiversity

Pol 01

Impact of refrigerants

Pol 02

NO emissions from heating source x

Pol 03

Surface water run-off

Pol 04

Reduction of night time light pollution

Pol 05

Noise attenuation

Land Use and Ecology

Pollution

Innovation

394

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue: 1.0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Appendix E – Applicability of BREEAM UK New Construction Simple Building Assessments

Appendices

Appendix E – Applicability of BREEAM UK New Construction Simple Building Assessments The BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 version can be applied to both complex and less complex building projects. This section provides guidance to assessors and project teams on the application of BREEAM to less complex i.e. Simple Building projects. A Simple Building is defined as one where the building services are predominantly of limited capacity and local in their delivery, largely independent of other systems in the building fabric and avoid complex control systems. Where the building includes complex services, systems or functions/facilities including, but not limited to those listed below, it cannot be defined or assessed as a Simple Building and a full BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 assessment should be carried out: Air-conditioning and refrigeration systems Mechanical ventilation, displacement ventilation, and complex passive ventilation Note: Buildings with small localised cooling or ventilation systems are eligible for assessment using the Simple Buildings criteria. See the Building services section for further guidance. Renewable energy sources, with the exception of on-site microgeneration technologies Renewable energy sources, with the exception of situations where connecting to an existing communal network system Laboratories and buildings that contain either fume cupboards and/or safety cabinets and/or containment areas Major water-consuming plant or functions such as swimming/hydrotherapy/research pools and/or vehicle wash/irrigation systems. Cold storage plant and enclosures, with the exception of domestic scale refrigeration Escalators and/or travelling walkways. The list above is not exhaustive, but serves to indicate the types of services and systems that describe a more complex building solution and therefore would not be present within a simple building. Examples of buildings which could fall under the BREEAM UK New Construction definition of Simple Building (depending on the remit of the works) include: offices, educational and community buildings, GP surgeries, basic industrial units, and extensions to existing buildings. The following section describes some of the additional features a Simple Building may have. These descriptions can be used to support the classification of a building for the purpose of a BREEAM Simple Building Assessment.

Building type The building can be classified within any of the building types categories listed in the Scope section of this technical manual, including mixed use developments/building types.

Building services 1. Space and/or hot water heating is provided by simple systems only, e.g. systems with total capacity of less than 100kW or point of use heaters. 2. Predominately naturally ventilated, using simple cross flow ventilation relying solely on openable windows and/or trickle vents, except in areas where mechanical extract ventilation is required by the building regulations. Note: Buildings with small local systems, such as local split cooling systems or ventilation systems (to service single rooms or areas for occasional or seasonal use), with a total system capacity of less than 12kW and a total collective refrigerant charge of less than 6kg can be assessed using the ‘simple buildings’ criteria.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

395

Appendices

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

3. Domestic scale sanitary, kitchen and laundry facilities with only basic connections for hot and cold water provision and drainage. 4. Building services commissioning required will be limited in complexity.

Typical profile of a Simple Building The cost and size of a Simple Building is likely to differ, so BREEAM uses the complexity of the building function and its services to determine whether it can be assessed using the BREEAM Simple Buildings criteria. If a particular building does not meet the profile described above, but exhibits features which suggest it could be classified as a Simple Building, it may still be possible to assess the building as such. Please contact breeam@bre.co.uk for further advice and classification. Table - 1 summarises the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 assessment issues, credits and criteria applicable to an assessment of a Simple Building. Table - 1: BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 issue applicability for Simple Building Assessments Issue ID

Criteria applicability to Simple Buildings No change

Simplified

Credits available

Exemplary credits available

N/A

Management Man 01

Man 02

Man 03

Man 04

(3 - 5) building type dependent

(2 - 3) building type dependent

N/A

Man 05 Health and Wellbeing Hea 01

Hea 02

Hea 03 Hea 04

ü ü

Hea 05 Hea 06

396

ü ü

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Appendix E – Applicability of BREEAM UK New Construction Simple Building Assessments

Issue ID

Criteria applicability to Simple Buildings No change

Simplified

Credits available

Appendices

Exemplary credits available

N/A

Energy Ene 01

Ene 02

(1 - 2) building type dependent

Ene 03

Ene 04

N/A

Ene 05 Ene 06

ü ü

Ene 07

Ene 08

Ene 09

Tra 01

(Up to 5) building type dependent

Tra 02

(1 - 2) building type dependent

Tra 03

(1 - 3) building type dependent

Transport

Tra 04

N/A

Tra 05

N/A

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

397

Appendices

Issue ID

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Criteria applicability to Simple Buildings No change

Simplified

Credits available

Exemplary credits available

N/A

Water Wat 01

Wat 02

N/A

Wat 03

Wat 04

Materials Mat 01

(Up to 6) building type dependent

Mat 02

Mat 03

TBC

Mat 04

Mat 05

Mat 06

Waste Wst 01

Wst 02

.ü

Wst 03

Wst 04

Wst 05

Wst 06

398

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Appendix E – Applicability of BREEAM UK New Construction Simple Building Assessments

Issue ID

Criteria applicability to Simple Buildings No change

Simplified

Credits available

Appendices

Exemplary credits available

N/A

Land Use and Ecology LE 01

LE 02

LE 03

N/A

(1 - 3) building type dependent

N/A

LE 04

LE 05 Pollution Pol 01 Pol 02

Pol 03 Pol 04 Pol 05

ü ü ü

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

399

Appendices

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Appendix F – Examples of BREEAM UK New Construction certificates Examples of BREEAM UK New Construction certificates for the interim Design Stage and final Post Construction Stage are provided in Figure 4 and Figure 5 respectively.

Figure 4: Example of Interim Certificate at Design Stage

400

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

Appendix F – Examples of BREEAM UK New Construction certificates

Appendices

Figure 5: Example of Final Certificate at Post Construction Stage

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

401

402

InsideBackCover

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 1.0 – Issue Date: 21/05/2014

403